Lucent Technologies FT-2000 OC-48 User & Service Manual Download Page 450 | Manualshive

Page: 450 / 1578

background image

Administration and Provisioning

8-46

Issue 8.0

July 2002

■

CONFIGURATION-Delete-Crossconnection-STS3

: This input deletes

a 1-way, 1-way-DRI, 2-way cross-connection.

— A

1-way

cross-connection is deleted by specifying the source and

destination. The source is a low-speed interface slot, a low-speed
interface slot in a slot pair (for example, slot 2A and 2B) provisioned
for the OC-3 1+1 protected mode, or an STS-3 tributary. If the
source is a low-speed interface slot, the destination must be an
STS-3 tributary. If the source is an STS-3 tributary, the destination
must be a low-speed interface slot, a low-speed interface slot in a
slot pair provisioned for the OC-3 1+1 protected mode, or the
same-numbered STS-3 tributary on the OC-48 high-speed line in
the opposite direction.

— A

1-way-DRI

cross-connection is deleted by specifying the source

and destination. The source is always a low-speed interface slot or a
low-speed interface slot in a slot pair (for example, slot 2A and 2B)
provisioned for the OC-3 1+1 protected mode, and the destination is
always an STS-3 tributary.

— A

2-way

cross-connection is deleted by first specifying the source

and destination. The source is a low-speed interface slot, a
low-speed interface slot in a slot pair (for example, slot 2A and 2B)
provisioned for the OC-3 1+1 protected mode, or STS-3 tributary. If
the source is a low-speed interface slot, the destination must be an
STS-3 tributary. If the source is an STS-3 tributary, the destination
must be a low-speed interface slot, a low-speed interface slot in a
slot pair provisioned for the OC-3 1+1 protected mode, or the
same-numbered STS-3 tributary on the OC-48 high-speed line in
the opposite direction.

After the user specifies the first 1-way source and destination, the
FT-2000 OC-48 Add/Drop-Rings Terminal automatically deletes the
corresponding 1-way source and destination in the opposite
direction. This deletes the 2-way cross-connection.

This input is never denied, even if the specified cross-connection is
not in effect.

This input does not require the node ID or TID of the source and
destination nodes to be specified.

«
...
448
449
450
451
452
...
»

Summary of Contents for FT-2000 OC-48

Page 1: ...365 575 102 Issue 8 0 July 2002 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Releases Through 7 2 User Service Manual Volume I ...

Page 2: ...ill be required to correct the interference at his own expense Security In rare instances unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network In such an event applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic Lucent Technologies Inc and its predecessors cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit f...

Page 3: ...monitored 24 hours a day For technical assistance call 1 800 225 RTAC You can also call this telephone number to provide comments on FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System or to suggest enhancements Documentation This document was developed by the Lucent Technologies Optical Networking Group Lucent Learning Services formerly Customer Training and Information Products CTIP ...

Page 4: ......

Page 5: ... one thing about this information product what would it be ________________________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 4 Please write any other comments about this information product __________________________________________________________________________________...

Page 6: ......

Page 7: ...IMPORTANT INSTALLATION SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS xlii Related Documentation Training xliii Lucent Technologies xliii Lucent Technologies Drawings xlvii Lucent Technologies Practices for Related Equipment l Training li Technical Support lii Introduction lii Technical support groups lii Contacting NARTAC lii NARTAC services lii CTS services liii A technical support platform liii How to Order Documents liv...

Page 8: ...nt to Point 2 6 End to End Interface Mixing 2 8 OC 48 Hubbing 2 10 Dual Ring Interworking DRI 2 11 DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring Transport 2 17 DDM 2000 OC 12 Ring Transport 2 18 Dual Wire Center Architecture 2 18 Broadband Service Transport STS 3c STS 12c 2 21 STS 1 STS 3 Non Preemptible Protection Access 2 24 One Way Video Distribution 2 26 Path In Line Architecture 2 27 Loop Feeder Network 2 30 Extra Traf...

Page 9: ...s 3 1 Overview 3 1 Introduction 3 1 FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal E Bay 3 2 Equipment Packages 3 2 Shelf Descriptions 3 4 FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater R Bay 3 32 Equipment Packages 3 32 Shelf Descriptions 3 35 Upgrades 3 44 FT 2000 OC 48 Dual ADR Terminal D Bay 3 45 Equipment Packages 3 45 Shelf Descriptions 3 47 4 Power 4 1 Overview 4 1 General 4 1 Power Distribution 4 2 Power Dissipation 4 6 L...

Page 10: ... 6 1 PC with FT 2000 CIT PC Software 6 2 PC with CPro 2000 Software 6 5 ASCII Based Terminal 6 7 Local Access Through the CIT DCE Port 6 8 Dial Up Access Using a Modem Through the CIT DTE Port 6 8 Remote Access Using the OC 48 Data Communications Channel DCC 6 10 Remote Access Using the OC 48 Section Orderwire 6 10 Remote Access Using the OC 3 OC 12 Data Communications Channel DCC 6 12 User Panel ...

Page 11: ...scription 7 26 OW LAA14 Circuit Pack Description 7 32 Transmission 7 35 DS3 LAA2 LAA2B Circuit Pack Description 7 35 STS1E LAA4 Circuit Pack Description 7 44 OC3 LAA10 LAA10B Circuit Pack Description 7 52 IS3 LAA5 Circuit Pack Description 7 62 OC 12 T939A Circuit Pack Description 7 71 LSSW LAA12B Circuit Pack Description 7 80 OC48 RCVR A D 839B2 839B4B 839B5 and 839E5 Circuit Pack Description 7 86...

Page 12: ...ks 8 143 Provisioning on Circuit Pack Replacement 8 143 Circuit Pack Slot and Low Speed Port Provisioning States 8 144 9 Maintenance Description 9 1 Overview 9 1 Remote Maintenance Philosophy 9 1 Maintenance Signals 9 2 Fault Detection Isolation and Reporting 9 8 Protection Switching 9 31 High Speed Protection 9 31 Electrical Low Speed Protection 9 43 Optical Low Speed Protection OC 3 9 47 Optical...

Page 13: ...87 EC 1 Section Line Parameters 9 88 DS3 Line Path 9 89 Performance Monitoring Data Storage and Reports 9 90 Performance Monitoring During Failed Conditions 9 90 Performance Monitoring Parameter Thresholds 9 91 Threshold Crossing Alert Transmission to an OS 9 91 Reports 9 92 Active Alarms and Status 9 92 Provisioning Reports 9 93 Performance Monitoring 9 94 State 9 94 Version Equipment List 9 95 S...

Page 14: ...Division Multiplexing and FT LBA Systems 10 13 Transmission Distances 10 14 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System without Optical Amplifiers 10 14 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System and the FT Lightwave Booster Amplifier 10 15 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System with Wavelength Division Multiplexing and FT LBA Systems 10 16 Capacity 10 16 Transmission Characteristics 10 17 DS3 Access 10 17 EC 1 Access 10 18 OC 3 ...

Page 15: ...tical Line Interface 10 25 Optical Connector Interfaces 10 25 Transmission Medium 10 25 Lightguide Jumpers 10 25 Optical Source 10 25 Optical Detector 10 25 Optical Safety BRH Classification 10 26 Operating Wavelength 10 26 Spectral Width 10 26 Optical Dispersion 10 26 OC 12 Line Loss Budgets 10 27 OC 3 to IS 3 Interface Interconnection 10 28 Transmission Delay 10 28 Protection Switching OC 3 OC 1...

Page 16: ...eneral 10 43 TL1 Autonomous Messaging in Release 4 1 and Earlier 10 43 Provisioning TL1 Autonomous Messages for Release 5 and Later Releases 10 44 DTE Configuration 10 44 Circuit Pack FIT Rates 10 50 11 Craft Interface Terminal Usage 11 1 Overview 11 1 CPro 2000 11 1 FT 2000 CIT PC Software Introduction 11 3 Inputs 11 3 Outputs 11 38 Examples of Reports Generated by Various Inputs Commands 11 39 C...

Page 17: ...17 2 9 Dual Wire Center Architecture Application 2 19 2 10 Broadband Service Transport Application 2 22 2 11 One Way Video Distribution Application 2 26 2 12 Path In Line Architecture 2 28 2 13 Loop Feeder Network Application 2 30 2 14 Extra Traffic Protection Line Access for Restoration and Revenue Generation Application 2 32 2 15 0 Add Drop Application 2 34 2 16 Operation with FT Lightwave Boost...

Page 18: ... System Controller 3 12 3 6 Interconnection Panel Low Speed Shelf System Controller ED6G999 32 G3 3 13 3 7 User Panel Enhanced 6G999 31 G5 3 14 3 8 User Panel 6G999 32 G3 3 15 3 9 Low Speed Shelf System Controller with Covers 3 16 3 10 High Speed Shelf Without Circuit Pack Cover 3 18 3 11 Interconnection Panel High Speed Shelf 3 20 3 12 Filter Panel High Speed Shelf and Enhanced High Speed Shelf 3...

Page 19: ...6 3 26 FT 2000 OC 48 D Bay Power Distribution and Fuse Panel 3 47 3 27 Low Speed Shelf System Controller Without Circuit Pack Cover ED6G999 31 G5 3 48 3 28 Low Speed Shelf System Controller Without Circuit Pack Cover ED6G999 32 G3 3 49 3 29 Interconnection Panel Low Speed Shelf System Controller ED6G999 31 G5 3 54 3 30 User Panel Enhanced 3 55 3 31 Low Speed Shelf System Controller with Covers 3 5...

Page 20: ...ternally Timed Synchronization 5 17 5 10 Free Running Free Running Configuration 5 21 5 11 Free Running Through Timed Configuration 5 22 5 12 Externally Timed Through Timed Configuration 5 23 5 13 Phase Locked Phase Locked Configuration 5 24 5 14 Phase Locked Phase Locked Configuration LAA18 TG3 DS1 Circuit Pack 5 25 5 15 Externally Timed Externally Timed Configuration 5 26 5 16 Example of a Ring ...

Page 21: ...lication with One Node Provisioned Externally Timed and All Other Nodes Provisioned Through Timed with Timing Drops 5 36 5 24 Example of a Ring Application with One Node Provisioned Externally Timed and All Other Nodes Provisioned Through Timed or Externally Timed with Timing Drops 5 37 5 25 Example of a Ring Application with All Nodes Provisioned Externally Timed with Timing Drops 5 39 5 26 Examp...

Page 22: ...17 7 6 LNCTL Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7 18 7 7 OHCTL TERM LAA21 and LAA22 Circuit Pack 7 21 7 8 OHCTL TERM Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7 22 7 9 TOHCTL LAA26 Circuit Pack 7 27 7 10 TOHCTL Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7 28 7 11 OW LAA14 Circuit Pack 7 32 7 12 OW Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7 33 7 13 DS3 LAA2 LAA2B Circuit Pack 7 35 7 14 DS3 Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7 36 7 15 STS1E LAA4 Circuit Pack ...

Page 23: ...2 and 739S2 Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7 100 7 31 OC48 TRMTR A D Circuit Pack 739B5 739C5 739E 1 16 739G 1 8 739H 1 16 739J5 739P5 739R5 and 739S5 Block Diagram 7 101 7 32 OC48 REGENR 39B1 39B2 39C1 39C2 39J2 39R2 and 39S2 Circuit Pack 7 108 7 33 OC48 REGENR Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7 110 7 34 TG3 DS1 LAA18 Circuit Pack 7 116 7 35 TG3 DS1 LAA18 Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7 119 8 Administration a...

Page 24: ...gs Terminal 8 34 8 13 STS 1 2 Way Cross Connections at an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal 8 36 8 14 Extra Traffic Capability 8 40 8 15 Example of 1 Way and 2 Way STS 1 Cross Connections in a 2 Fiber Bidirectional Ring 8 51 8 16 STS 1 Cross Connection Worksheet 8 55 8 17 Example of 1 Way and 2 Way Cross Connections in a 2 Fiber Bidirectional Ring 8 56 8 18 STS 3 Cross Connection Worksheet 8 6...

Page 25: ...er Bay Maintenance Signals 9 7 9 5 2 Fiber Ring Protection Switching Architecture FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal 9 33 9 6 Bidirectional Line Switched 2 Fiber Ring Normal Transmission 9 35 9 7 Bidirectional Line Switched 2 Fiber Ring Single Failure 9 36 9 8 Bidirectional Line Switched 2 Fiber Ring Multiple Failures 9 39 9 9 Single and Double Failure States 9 41 9 10 Single and Double Failure...

Page 26: ...3 DS1 Reference Protection 9 69 9 24 OC 48 Line Reference Protection FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal 9 70 9 25 Local Terminal Self Test 9 74 9 26 DSX Low Speed Cabling Self Test 9 76 9 27 Regenerator Self Test 9 77 9 28 SONET Section Line and Path 9 81 10 Technical Specifications 10 1 Optical System Interfaces 10 10 10 2 Common Coaxial Cable Interoffice Cross Connect Options for DS 3 and STS...

Page 27: ... Pack Slot Circuit Pack Code Software Compatibility 3 60 4 1 Power Dissipation and Current Drains 4 6 5 1 Sync Messages for Line Timed Mode 5 12 6 1 FT LBA Miscellaneous Discrete Mapping 6 21 7 1 Circuit Packs and Compatible Software 7 4 7 2 Overhead Bytes 7 24 7 3 Overhead Bytes 7 30 7 4 Section Overhead Bytes 7 34 8 3 FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay Input Values 8 97 8 4 FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay Ou...

Page 28: ...00 OC 48 Lightwave System and Wavelength Division Multiplexing Systems Loss Budgets 10 12 10 9 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System with Wavelength Division Multiplexing Systems and FT LBA Loss Budgets 10 13 10 10 Transmission Distances without Optical Amplifiers 10 14 10 11 Transmission Distances with the FT Lightwave Booster Amplifier 10 15 10 12 Transmission Distances with Wavelength Division Multipl...

Page 29: ...se 4 Inputs Commands Menu for FT 2000 Add Drop Rings Terminal 11 20 11 6 Release 3 Inputs Commands Menu for FT 2000 Add Drop Rings Terminal 11 23 11 7 Releases 2 4 and 6 Inputs Commands Menu for FT 2000 Repeater Bay Shelf 11 25 11 8 Input Command Definitions 11 26 11 9 List of Inputs Commands That Generate Reports 11 36 ...

Page 30: ...Tables xxx Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 31: ...ented practices TOPs supporting acceptance circuit order operation and trouble clearing tasks The FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System has a phased product release plan Document 365 575 102 Issue 8 0 dated July 2002 is the FT 2000 User Service Manual for Releases 1 through 7 2 Intended Audiences This user service manual is primarily for end users responsible for operating and maintaining the FT 2000 OC ...

Page 32: ...ed Record of Changes Besides correcting inconsistencies and or errors that occurred during the processing of previous issues significant changes in this issue are New procedure DLP 551 Power Down Power Up an Optical Network Element Updated procedures DLP 550 provides more details and illustrations TAP 113 New circuit packs LAA2B LAA10B LAA12B LAA18 LAA23C 39B2 39C2 DA d circuit packs LAA12 LAA17 3...

Page 33: ...lume I Section 3 Platform Descriptions introduces the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System platforms and provides a more detailed view of the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System physical design Volume I Section 4 Power describes the power distribution and dissipation of the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Volume I Section 5 Control Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces describes the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightw...

Page 34: ...packs The procedures in the Operation and Maintenance TOP section Volume II use a MONOSPACE font to identify text on a screen or a response displayed from the system A BOLD font identifies letter designations on panels shelves and circuit packs Safety Instructions Safety Labels This manual may contain safety labels in the form of DANGERS WARNINGS and CAUTIONS These safety labels have the following...

Page 35: ... beam expands very little over distance or is said to be very well collimated Thus conventional laser irradiance remains relatively constant over distance However lasers used in lightwave systems have a large beam divergence typically 10 to 20 degrees Here irradiance obeys the inverse square law doubling the distance reduces the irradiance by a factor of 4 and rapidly decreases over distance Laser...

Page 36: ...cheme The lightguide cables that interconnect various components of a lightwave system can disconnect or break and may expose people to lightwave emission Also certain measures and maintenance procedures may expose the technician to emission from the semiconductor laser during installation and servicing Unlike more familiar laser devices such as solid state and gas lasers the emission pattern of a...

Page 37: ... an appropriate label must appear in plain view on the front of the main frame or lightguide termination interconnection equipment The label shall read as follows NOTICE UNTERMINATED OPTICAL CONNECTORS MAY EMIT LASER RADIATION AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM DO NOT VIEW THIS BEAM WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS A warning label Figure 1 is provided on the filter panel of the Enhanced High Speed Shelf an...

Page 38: ...cautions Only authorized trained personnel should be permitted to do service maintenance and restoration Avoid exposing the eye to emissions from unterminated energized optical connectors at close distances Connectors associated with lightwave regenerators are recessed which limits the Lucent Technologies FT 2000 OC 48 ENHANCED LIGHTWAVE TERMINATING BAY Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations No...

Page 39: ...onsiderations CAUTION Industry experience has shown that all integrated circuit packs can be damaged by static electricity that builds up on work surfaces and personnel The static charges are produced by various charging effects of movement and contact with other objects Dry air allows greater static charges to accumulate Higher potentials are measured in areas with low relative humidity but poten...

Page 40: ...rotective front covers on the shelves except during an upgrade or maintenance procedure Once a circuit pack is replaced in the shelf immediately close the front cover To reduce the possibility of ESD damage shelves are equipped with grounding jacks to enable personnel to ground themselves using wrist straps Figure 3 while handling circuit packs or working on a shelf The jacks for connection of wri...

Page 41: ...ered 3 Opening or removing rear covers or sheet metal parts may present exposure to high current or electrical energy levels or to other risks Refer all servicing in those areas to qualified service personnel 4 Never push objects of any kind into this product through slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electrical shock Never sp...

Page 42: ...ed recognized circuit packs Refer to 365 575 104 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Releases 1 and 2 Installation Manual and 365 575 115 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Releases 4 5 6 and 7 Installation Manual for a list of recognized circuit packs SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Related Documentation Training Lucent Technologies The following Lucent Technologies practices provide information about the FT 2000...

Page 43: ...l and turn up the equipment Content Customer installation instructions for the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal and FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay platforms Number Comcode 109191668 Title FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Software Release Description Release 7 2 10 ADR Audience End user maintenance personnel Content Status of problems fixed and known problems for Release 7 2 ADR software Number 365 ...

Page 44: ...l Content List of provisionable TCA parameters original values and the corresponding inputs for the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal Number 365 575 124 Title FT 2000 Cross Connections Job Aid Releases 8 1 and Later Audience End user maintenance personnel Content Considerations pertaining to Cross Connect design and a blank Work Sheet for use when designing Cross Connections ...

Page 45: ... for Lucent s 2000 Product Family systems including DDM 2000 OC 3 R13 0 DDM 2000 OC 12 R7 0 FiberReach R3 0 and FT 2000 OC 48 R8 1 and later as well as Lucent s 3000 Product Family systems including WaveStar BandWidth Manager R2 0 WaveStar 2 5G R3 0 and WaveStar 10G R1 0 in Multi Vendor subnetworks Number 824 102 147 Title Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Operations Interworking Guide Comco...

Page 46: ...ent Procedures for upgrading out of service FT 2000 OC 48 1x1 End Terminals to FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals for 2 Fiber Rings Number MIP0036 MV Title Modification Implementation Procedure 0036 MV FT 2000 End Terminal to 2 Fiber Add Drop Rings Terminal In Service Upgrade Audience RTAC Installers Engineers Planners Content Procedures for transferring service off an in service FT 2000 OC 48...

Page 47: ...00 OC 48 Enhanced Lightwave Terminating Bay Software and Documentation J68974R 1 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave Repeater Bay Equipment and Circuit Packs Ordered with Equipment J68974RK 1 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave Repeater Bay Circuit Packs Miscellaneous Hardware and Spare Parts Shipped Separately from Equipment J68974RS 1 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave Repeater Bay Software and Documentation SD 5G250 01 FT 2000 O...

Page 48: ...d Lightwave Terminating Bay ED 7G001 21 FT 2000 OC 48 Coaxial Cable Assemblies for All EC 1 DS3 Applications Intraoffice Transmission Cables ED 7G001 22 FT 2000 OC 48 Interbay Cable Assemblies Intraoffice Non Transmission Cables ED 7G001 30 FT 2000 Lightwave Transmission System OC 48 Lightwave Terminating Bay Framework ED 7G001 31 FT 2000 Lightwave Transmission System OC 48 Enhanced Lightwave Term...

Page 49: ...68 10 FT 2000 Lightwave Transmission System OC 48 Repeater Bay with 1 Active Shelf on Nonseismic Framework FPD 804 911 168 11 FT 2000 Lightwave Transmission System OC 48 Repeater Bay with 2 Active Shelves on Nonseismic Framework FPD 804 911 168 12 FT 2000 Lightwave Transmission System OC 48 Repeater Bay OC 48 Repeater Bay with 3 Active Shelves on Nonseismic Framework FPD 804 911 168 13 FT 2000 Lig...

Page 50: ... Manual 363 206 200 DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 Multiplexers Applications Planning and Ordering Guide 363 206 285 DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer User Service Manual TARP Release 13 0 and later 363 206 295 DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexer User Service Manual Release 7 0 TARP 365 301 130 System III DSX 3 4 Planning Engineering Installation and Operation System Reference Guide 365 303 102 DSX 3 Cross Connect Bay De...

Page 51: ...ET terms applications for example point to point add drop rings architecture that is bays shelves circuit packs and operation administration maintenance and provisioning OAM P features Number LW2348 Title FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Equipment Engineering and Planning Audience Facility planners outside plant engineers central office equipment engineers and private network design engineers Conten...

Page 52: ...ntacting NARTAC NARTAC is the first point of contact for technical support NARTAC personnel troubleshoot field problems 24 hours a day over the phone and on site if necessary For technical assistance call 1 866 LUCENT8 1 866 582 3688 International customers please contact your account executive for your local technical support number NARTAC services NARTAC provides the following technical support ...

Page 53: ... assistance requests Supports first service applications FSAs customer lab evaluations CLEs and initial customer applications ICAs Develops software release descriptions installation manuals engineering change procedures ECPs method of procedures MOPs modification implementation procedures MIPs Provides installation and NARTAC training A technical support platform The CTS organization provides an ...

Page 54: ...mpany Documentation Coordinator use the commercial customer telephone number listed above Customer Mail Order Telephone Order Monday through Friday Within USA Lucent Technologies 1 888 LUCENT 8 Customer Information Center 7 30 a m to 6 30 p m EST Commercial Attention Order Entry Section FAX 1 317 322 6484 Customers 2855 N Franklin Road Europe Middle East P O Box 19901 and Africa Indianapolis IN 46...

Page 55: ...uction Because customer satisfaction is extremely important to Lucent Technologies every attempt is made to encourage feedback from customers about our information products Customer comment form A customer comment form is located immediately after the title page of this document Please fill out the form and fax it to the number provided on the form Address for Comments If the customer comment form...

Page 56: ...on Center 1 888 LUCENT 8 The CD ROM Product Line Order Number for the Lucent Technologies transmission product documentation is 300 100 010 For pricing information contact your Lucent Technologies Account Executive or the Lucent Technologies Customer Information Center 1 888 LUCENT 8 For technical information call Lucent Technologies Documentation Support 1 800 334 0404 Product Change Notification...

Page 57: ...Table of Contents Issue 8 0 July 2002 1 i 1 System Introduction Overview 1 1 Introduction to the Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family 1 1 What Is the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System 1 2 ...

Page 58: ...1 ii Issue 8 0 July 2002 Table of Contents ...

Page 59: ...stomers require to build an efficient and successful network These items include bidirectional line switched ring features and in service upgrade capabilities Bidirectional line switched ring features almost instantaneously restore a network if a fiber cut occurs In service upgrade capabilities allow a graceful evolution from today s asynchronous networks to the world class intelligent networks of...

Page 60: ... Information regarding the ADR Terminal will remain in this user service manual for those terminals still in use The different platforms enable the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System to offer flexible features for different applications in high capacity loop interoffice outstate and long haul environments and to provide different sets of features The FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System software enables the...

Page 61: ...V Interconnection Panel T R M T L L R E D 21 5 R R E R V E D E S R E R V E D E S FT 2000 21 5 Heat Baffle User Panel 78 5 4 Panel and Fuse Panel 2 L S S W TG3 Y S C T L Y S M E M Interconnection Panel S S High Speed Shelf Enhanced PC Tray Screen System Controller Low Speed Shelf Filter Panel 4 4 4 84 21 5 1 5 Power Distribution R E S E R V E D DS3 or STS1E DS3 STS1E and or OC12 OC3 IS3 T O H C T L...

Page 62: ... covers Releases 1 through 7 2 and will be updated to cover additional releases as they become available As a review Release 1 provides the FT 2000 OC 48 1x1 End Terminal platform and a basic OC 48 point to point system Release 2 updates the FT 2000 OC 48 1x1 End Terminal platform and provides the FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay platform Release 3 provides the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal plat...

Page 63: ... FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal platform with the following new features New Low Speed Shelf User Panel Interconnection Panel Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing DWDM OLS compatible transmitters 739E1 739E16 and 739G1 G16 and receiver 839E5 OC12 1 1 transmission with DCC STS 1 Non Preemptible Protection Access NPPA with B5 optics STS 3 Non Preemptible Protection Access NPPA with all opti...

Page 64: ...nsmission Interfaces 1 3 µm Standard Performance X X X X X X X X X X 1 3 µm High Performance X X X X X X X X X X 1 5 µm Standard Performance X X X X X X X Wavelength Division Multiplexing and Lightwave Booster Amplifier Compatible Transmitters Regenerators X X X Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing DWDM OLS compatible 739E1 739E16 X Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing DWDM OLS compatible 739H...

Page 65: ...r Incoming Low Speed Signals X X X X X X X Expanded Performance Monitoring of up to 32 Network Subnetwork Elements X X F and M Bit Adjusted DS3 Performance Monitoring X X X X X Threshold Crossing Alert Reporting X X X X X X X Enhanced TL1 Commands and Reports X X X X X X ASCII Based Terminal Interface X X X X X X Circuit Provisioning Audits X X X X X X TL1 Message Enhancements X X X X X OI via the...

Page 66: ...System Introduction 1 8 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 67: ...18 Dual Wire Center Architecture 2 18 Broadband Service Transport STS 3c STS 12c 2 21 STS 1 STS 3 Non Preemptible Protection Access 2 24 One Way Video Distribution 2 26 Path In Line Architecture 2 27 Loop Feeder Network 2 30 Extra Traffic for Restoration and Revenue Generation 2 32 0 Add Drop 2 34 FT Lightwave Booster Amplifier FT LBA for Extended Distances 2 35 Wavelength Division Multiplexing WD...

Page 68: ...2 ii Issue 8 0 July 2002 Table of Contents Synchronization Messaging 2 48 ...

Page 69: ... 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay NOTE The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal has been rated discontinued availability as of December 31 1999 Information regarding the ADR Terminal will remain in this user service manual for those ADR Terminals still in use The FT 2000 OC 48 Dual Lightwave Terminating Bay functions similarly to the ADR Terminal For more information ...

Page 70: ...ecifications The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal typically interfaces to digital multiplexers such as the DDM 2000 Multiplexers to digital access and cross connect systems such as DACS III 2000 DACS IV 2000 or Tellabs TITAN 5500 S a digital switch or other facilities Network Configurations 2 This section describes many of the network configurations in which the FT 2000 OC 48 ADR Terminals ca...

Page 71: ...idirectional ring interfaces with two OC 48 high speed lines 1W and 1E Each OC 48 high speed line consists of sixteen 155 Mb s STS 3 tributaries The STS 3 tributaries 1 through 8 are service tributaries and STS 3 tributaries 9 through 16 are protection tributaries In Figure 2 1 the Eastbound service STS 3 tributaries are identified as Service 1 and the Westbound service tributaries are identified ...

Page 72: ...nment TSA capability that allows any service STS 3 tributary of OC 48 high speed line 1E or 1W to be cross connected to any service low speed interface slot add drop cross connection or to the same numbered service STS 3 tributary of the other OC 48 high speed line through cross connection In Release 7 and later the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal and FT 2000 OC 48 Dual Lightwave Terminating...

Page 73: ...PA is available in Release 7 1 and later STS 1 NPPA is available in Release 7 2 and later Also for each slot of STS 3 NPPA traffic or STS 1 traffic on the protection fiber there will also be a corresponding non protected slot on the service fiber NOTE Cross connections to administer and provision extra traffic can be made using the craft interface terminal CIT interface In Release 4 1 and later cr...

Page 74: ...e FT 2000 OC 48 Dual Lightwave Terminating Bay may be used in folded rings In a folded ring application all FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals must be equipped with the same release of software The FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay equipped with Release 4 1 0 RPTR or 6 0 0 RPTR software is also available to increase the distance between two FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals equipped with Release...

Page 75: ...full ring later when service and fiber facilities to other nodes in the network are needed It is easier to evolve a folded ring into a full ring application if a folded ring is used in the nodes that have this short term service need Folded rings have upgrade operational and self healing advantages over other applications for this type of evolution Figure 2 3 Folded Rings Evolving to Full Ring Net...

Page 76: ...anners improve their equipment deployment based on the needs of the particular application For example the asynchronous DS3 low speed interfaces at one FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal in a network can be upgraded in service to synchronous EC 1 IS 3 OC 3 or OC 12 low speed interfaces without any changes at the other FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal terminating the circuit Figure 2 4 Tabl...

Page 77: ...end or from various nodes and one OC 3 signal at the other end Three DS3 signals at one end or from various nodes and three EC 1 signals at the other end or at various nodes Four OC 3s at one end and one OC 12 at the other end One OC 3 at one end and one IS 3 at the other end Central Office Central Office OC 48 2000 Upgrade DACS IV 2000 24 DS3s 24 DS3s FT 2000 FT 2000 DACS III 2000 DACS IV FT 2000...

Page 78: ...ocated at remote sites in the loop environment Figure 2 5 shows an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal serving as an OC 48 hub The OC 48 hub supplies OC 3 optical extensions and local DS3 and or EC 1 low speed interfaces All the traffic for the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexers passes through the OC 48 hub using the OC 3 optical extensions The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal provides single ended...

Page 79: ...ted as the primary node and one FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal is designated as the secondary node The primary and secondary nodes may be designated on an STS 3 or STS 1 tributary basis The primary node for one tributary may be the secondary node for another tributary A DRI circuit must be established using STS 3 or STS 1 cross connections so that traffic is routed from the source node in t...

Page 80: ...de in the other ring the DRI provisioned circuit will be protected against a failure of the low speed cross connected circuit However the DRI provisioned circuit may not be protected if one of the DRI provisioned nodes becomes isolated from the ring for example node power failure or open fibers on both sides ...

Page 81: ... 8 0 July 2002 2 13 Figure 2 6 Dual Ring Interworking Application Node 1 Node 5 FT 2000 Node 3 Node 1 Node 4 FT 2000 Node 4 Node 0 Node 2 Node 3 Node 5 Node 0 Node 2 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 Ring A Ring B DS3 DS3 FT 2000 ...

Page 82: ...mple a DS3 signal may enter a node in a ring be transported from the primary node to the other ring as a DS3 based EC 1 signal then emerge from a node in the other ring in the original DS3 format A line switched ring equipped with FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals may also accept VT1 5 based EC 1 signals from a path switched ring equipped with DDM 2000 Multiplexers This allows VT1 5 level cro...

Page 83: ...3 5 Primary DRI Node CO 1 with intraoffice DRI connection OC 3 DRI Node DDM 2000 OC 3 6 Secondary DRI Node FT 2000 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring or OC 12 Loop Feeder CO 2 with optically extended DRI connection Interoffice Network FT 2000 OC 48 2 Fiber Ring DS1s dropped locally DRI Node OC 48 DRI Protected Tributary FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal Release 5 and later nc ft2000 029 ...

Page 84: ...s not monitor the condition of the incoming low speed signal at the secondary node before performing a DRI protection switch In Release 6 and later releases the DRI protection switch time is less than 100 milliseconds for unprotected 0x1 OC 3 interfaces and less than 200 milliseconds for unprotected failures in 1 1 protected OC 3 interfaces For more information about DRI protection switching refer...

Page 85: ... 3 nodes and four OC 3 signals OC3 1 OC3 2 OC3 3 OC3 4 connecting them The OC 3 1 signal is transported between CO 1 and CO 2 by the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals One or more OC 48 Ring segments or rings may be used as segments of a DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring Figure 2 8 DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring Transport Application The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals at CO 1 and CO 2 are equipped with OC 3 low ...

Page 86: ...gure 2 9 A dual wire center architecture is a self healing network architecture that provides end to end survivable DS1 and DS3 business access services Figure 2 9 shows two nodes in an OC 3 path switched ring connected to two nodes in an OC 48 bidirectional line switched ring with EC 1 interfaces and DACS IV 2000 Cross Connect Systems The EC 1 signals can contain a mixture of VT1 5 channels for a...

Page 87: ...Dual Wire Center Architecture Application DDM 2000 OC 3 11 VT Drop Continue CO 1 CO 2 FT 2000 OC 48 Bidirectional Line Switched Ring EC 1 EC 1 EC 1 EC 1 EC 1 DACS IV 2000 6 DS1 DS3 EC1 ALL SERVICES ALL SERVICES DS1 DS3 EC1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Path Switched Ring FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal Release 5 and later nc ft2000 030 DDM 2000 OC 3 2 DS1 DDM 2000 OC 3 1 DS1 DS1 SLC 2000 5 FT 2000 10 DACS I...

Page 88: ...ltaneous failure in each ring is automatically healed and service is reestablished in 60 milliseconds includes detection and switching times This results in a highly reliable network Any failures on the OC 48 bidirectional line switched ring are protected by the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal using two fiber ring protection switching For more information about two fiber ring protection swit...

Page 89: ...TS 1 granularity STS 12c payloads may be transported Figure 2 10 shows a two fiber bidirectional ring equipped with FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals are connected to ATM service multiplexers and switches with OC 3 low speed interfaces The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals at CO 1 and CO 2 are optical hubs that provide OC 3 OC 12 optical extensi...

Page 90: ...2 OC 3 or IS 3 FT 2000 FT 2000 OC 12 ATM Switch OC 12 ATM Switch CPE ATM Service Mux OC 3 OC 3 CPE ATM Service Mux OC 3 or OC 12 CPE ATM Service Mux FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal Release 5 and later nc ft2000 032 FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal Release 7 1 0 or later If an STS 12c signal is to be transported then ALL nodes on the ring MUST be equipped with x5 or 4x TRMTRs ...

Page 91: ...r to Volume I Section 8 Administration and Provisioning The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal equipped with OC 3 low speed interfaces can also be provisioned to transport SONET STS 3 and STS 3c payloads or synchronous digital hierarchy SDH STM 1 AU 4 mapped payloads This allows a direct interface to SDH equipment over an STM 1 optical connection The OC3 circuit pack can automatically support t...

Page 92: ...ed by any ring loopback protection switch For a two fiber ring it is important to realize that whenever a protection tributary is selected for non preemptible protection access the corresponding STS 3 tributary of service capacity on ALL spans of the ring becomes unprotected This results in two unprotected non preemptible tributaries on all spans of the ring both the service tributary STS 3 n and ...

Page 93: ...cts one of the two received signals Path in Line applications are always administered as Permanent Other examples of these types of applications include Real Time Networks that support time sensitive control functions ATM and Bridge Router Traffic for this application customers may already provide their own rerouting in case of failure and may not need FT 2000 protection switching Video Transport ...

Page 94: ...ion and interactive multimedia television IMTV services for transport to the serving areas The OC 3c signals are fully protected within the two fiber bidirectional ring Up to eight OC 3c signals may be cross connected to OC 48 high speed line 1E and up to eight OC 3c signals may be cross connected to OC 48 high speed line 1W For more information about two fiber ring protection switching refer to V...

Page 95: ...gs Terminal supports the OC 3 section DCC and integrated single ended operations with other FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals via an OC 3 line For more information about the single ended operation capabilities refer to the Operations Interworking application in this section For more information about operations interworking between the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System and the DDM 2000 Multiplex...

Page 96: ... of VT1 5 and STS 1 channels for all types of services The capability to mix services instead of having application specific assignments for STS 1 tributaries conserves the bandwidth of OC 3 access rings FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal Release 6 and later nc ft2000 033 OC 3 Path Switched Ring OC 48 Line Switched Ring The grey shading indicates the extent of OC 3 ring OC 3 Path Switched Ring ...

Page 97: ...matically healed and service is reestablished in 60 milliseconds includes detection and switching times This results in a highly reliable network Any failures on the OC 48 bidirectional line switched ring are protected by the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal using two fiber ring protection switching For more information about two fiber ring protection switching refer to Volume I Section 9 Mai...

Page 98: ...13 Loop Feeder Network Application FT 2000 OC 48 2 Fiber Ring OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 CEV 1 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 3 SLC 2000 SLC 2000 Office Building DDM 2000 OC 12 Ring DDM 2000 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 to interoffice network via FT or DACS to local switch via DDM or DACS IV CEV 2 CO 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 Ring SLC 2000 OC 3 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 OC 3 IS 3 FT 2000 OC 3 IS ...

Page 99: ...C 3 interface or a mix of DS3 and EC 1 interfaces at another node The OC 3 signal or the available DS1 timing outputs and inputs can be used to distribute network timing from the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal to the DDM 2000 Multiplexers and SLCâ 2000 access systems In Release 5 the OC 3 interface should be used where the OC 3 section DCC and integrated single ended operations with the DDM...

Page 100: ...roller receives alarms and sends cross connect commands to the DACS III 2000 and or DACS IV 2000 Cross Connect Systems in the network to reroute traffic around the failure At the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals the idle protection STS 3 tributaries carry rerouted traffic until the failure is fixed and the regular service route is restored Figure 2 14 Extra Traffic Protection Line Access for...

Page 101: ...tion on the service STS 3 tributaries causes traffic to be automatically switched to the protection STS 3 tributaries preempting extra traffic For the FT 2000 ADR Terminal Release 7 1 0 and later software Extra traffic can be administered as either preemptible or non preemptible Non preemptible means the Extra traffic carried on a protection slot cannot be preempted dropped by a failure of one of ...

Page 102: ...w speed interface circuit packs may be added to the 0 add drop node if add drop traffic is required in the future The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal also allows access to the OC 48 DCC to perform operations administration maintenance and provisioning at remote FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals in the ring The FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay does not allow access to the OC 48 DCC Figure 2 15...

Page 103: ...rminal and FT LBA support span lengths up to 140 km using standard fiber or 160 km using dispersion shifted fiber This capability reduces the number of repeater sites on long routes This capability also allows the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal and FT LBA to be used with poor fiber or fiber that has frequent high loss splices for example in urban areas or with dispersion shifted fiber and t...

Page 104: ... FT LBA can also be used with the FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay equipped with Release 6 0 0 RPTR software to extend the distance between sites The FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay must be equipped with the OC48 Regenerator 1 5 µm Standard Performance OC48 REGENR 1 5 LBA OC48 Regenerator 1 5 µm Standard Performance OC48 REGENR 1 5 LBA W1 or the OC48 Regenerator 1 5 µm Standard Performance OC48 REGENR 1 5 LB...

Page 105: ...is a high level diagram depicting how the WDM filters multiplex and demultiplex a single mode 1 3 µm wavelength signal and a single mode 1 5 µm wavelength signal enabling the two signals to operate on the same fiber pair Thus one FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System and one FT Series G 1 7 Gb s system or two FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave Systems at the same location each equipped for lightwave transmission at...

Page 106: ...LBA Wavelength 1 OC48 TRMTR A D 1 5 LBA W1 and the OC48 Transmitter Add Drop A D 1 5µm LBA Wavelength 2 OC48 TRMTR A D 1 5 LBA W2 circuit packs in WDM applications In Release 7 and later releases the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal may be equipped with the OC48 TRMTR A D STS1 1 5 LBA W1 and the OC48 TRMTR A D STS1 1 5 LBA W2 circuit packs in WDM applications The 7A WDM Filter Assembly is rec...

Page 107: ...r Bay may be equipped with the OC48 REGENR 1 5µm Standard Performance OC48 REGENR 1 5 LBA W1 and the OC48 Regenerator 1 5 µm Standard Performance OC48 REGENR 1 5 LBA W2 circuit packs when using wavelength division multiplexing The OC48 REGENR 1 5 LBA W1 circuit pack operates at the same wavelengths as the OC48 TRMTR A D 1 5 LBA W1 and OC48 TRMTR A D STS1 1 5 LBA W1 circuit packs The OC48 REGENR 1 ...

Page 108: ... LBA Figure 2 20 Section by Section WDM 1 5 µm 1 5 µm OC 48 Legend LBA FT LBA R Repeater CO 1 LBA R FT 2000 CO 2 W D M LBA R W D M W D M R OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 48 FT 2000 FT 2000 LBA OC 48 R W D M LBA FT 2000 OC 48 RING A RING B Repeater Site FT 2000 OC 48 OC 48 ...

Page 109: ...esign For more information about loss budgets and WDM specifications refer to Volume I Section 10 Technical Specifications For more information about operation with the FT LBA refer to the FT Lightwave Booster Amplifier FT LBA for Extended Distances application in this section Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing EON Compatible 2 DWDM is a technology that meets the customer s need for transporti...

Page 110: ...rs Figure 2 21 Figure 2 21 Operations Interworking Application FT 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal Release 6 and later FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 Path Switched Ring OC 48 Line Switched Ring OC 48 Line Switched Ring OC 3 Path Switched Ring FT 2000 0 x 1 Connection 0 x 1 Connection 0 x 1 C...

Page 111: ...g domain and area fields If the routing domain and area fields of the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer are provisioned to some value other than the default 0 the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexers will not show up in the CONFIGURATION Retrieve Map Network report and no FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal can be used as a TL1 gateway network element GNE for the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexers Operations interworking...

Page 112: ...equipment at remote sites When Release 6 of the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal interworks with Release 7 2 of the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer an alarm group supports up to 24 NEs When Release 7 of the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal interworks with Release 7 2 of the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer an alarm group supports up to 32 NEs When Release 6 of the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Termina...

Page 113: ... than 16 NEs the network element serving as the TL1 GNE cannot serve as the alarm GNE The TL1 GNE and alarm GNE functions must be at separate NEs in the subnetwork The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal must be equipped with the OC3 Optical Interface 1 3µm Standard Performance OC3 1 3 STD circuit pack and the Overhead Controller Tributary TOHCTL circuit pack to access the OC 3 DCC A single TOHC...

Page 114: ...2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals in the ring network through the DCC and reports that information along with its own to the X 25 message based operations system Figure 2 22 The operations information is in the form of TL1 messages The operations system can also send TL1 commands through the GNE to any FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal in the ring network All the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings...

Page 115: ...tiplexers through the OC 3 DCC Figure 2 23 The GNE also serves as a single interface for all FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals in the same ring network and in the same subnetwork When Release 6 of the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal interworks with Release 7 2 or Release 9 of the DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer the recommended maximum subnetwork size is 24 NEs When Release 7 of the FT 2000 OC...

Page 116: ...ing The number of GNEs in a ring network is based on operational needs For example to reduce the number of X 25 links between the ring network and the operations system one FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal may operate as the GNE If redundancy is desired two or more FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals may operate as GNEs For more information about provisioning a GNE refer to Volume I Sectio...

Page 117: ...ransmitted and processed On the IS 3 OC 3 and OC 12 interfaces synchronization messages are supported in the direction to distribute timing to DDM 2000 The table below show two ring environments available interoffice customer location Table 2 3 explains ring environments and the use of synchronization Table 2 3 FT 2000 Ring Environments IF the ring environment is THEN the synchronization is locate...

Page 118: ...Applications 2 50 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 119: ...nel 3 4 Low Speed Shelf System Controller 3 4 High Speed Shelf 3 17 Enhanced High Speed Shelf 3 24 Heat Baffle 3 31 PC Tray 3 31 Screen 3 31 FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater R Bay 3 32 Equipment Packages 3 32 Shelf Descriptions 3 35 Power Distribution and Fuse Panel 3 35 Repeater Shelf System Controller 3 36 Heat Baffle 3 44 PC Tray 3 44 Screen 3 44 Upgrades 3 44 FT 2000 OC 48 Dual ADR Terminal D Bay 3 45 E...

Page 120: ...3 ii Issue 8 0 July 2002 Table of Contents Shelf Descriptions 3 47 Power Distribution and Fuse Panel 3 47 Low Speed Shelf System Controller 3 47 Condensed High Speed Shelf 3 57 Fan Assembly 3 63 ...

Page 121: ...T 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System consists of several platforms A platform is a family of equipment and software configurations designed to support a particular set of applications These platforms include the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal E Bay FT 2000 OC 48 Dual Lightwave Terminating Bay D Bay FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater R Bay These platforms enable the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System to offer flex...

Page 122: ...em Controller a personal computer PC tray and one Enhanced High Speed Shelf mounted in a single seismic network bay framework This equipment package provides OC 48 high speed lines 1W and 1E The low speed interface service capacity of an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal equipped with Release 3 0 1 ADR software is 48 DS3 signals The low speed interface capacity of an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rin...

Page 123: ... M T L L R E D 21 5 R R E R V E D E S R E R V E D E S FT 2000 21 5 Heat Baffle User Panel 78 5 4 Panel and Fuse Panel 2 L S S W TG3 Y S C T L Y S M E M Interconnection Panel S S High Speed Shelf Enhanced PC Tray Screen System Controller Low Speed Shelf Filter Panel 4 4 4 84 21 5 1 5 Power Distribution R E S E R V E D DS3 or STS1E DS3 and or STS1E and or OC3 DS3 and or STS1E and or OC3 T O H C T L ...

Page 124: ...ribution and Fuse Panel Low Speed Shelf System Controller 3 Purpose of Low Speed Shelf System Controller 3 The Low Speed Shelf System Controller provides high level system control functions and serves as an interface for up to 48 service DS3 and or EC 1 signals eight 1 1 protected OC 3 signals 16 unprotected two 1 1 protected OC 12 signals or a mix of DS3 EC 1 OC 3 and OC 12 signals In releases pr...

Page 125: ...ndard 23 inch wide seismic network bay framework Figure 3 3 Low Speed Shelf System Controller Without Circuit Pack Cover ED6G999 31 G5 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B P1 P2 IN OUT 1 2 5A 5B 6A 6B 7A User Panel 1A 1B 7B 8A 8B SYSCTL SYSMEM LS INTFC LS SW LS INTFC TG TOHCTL 1 DS3 and or 1 STS1E L S S W T O H C T L TG3 DS3 and or STS1E and or OC3 and or IS 3 and or OC 12 S Y S C T L S Y S M E M Interconnection Pan...

Page 126: ...ou use OC3 or OC12 circuit packs and want DCC capabilities Interconnection Panel Panel User SYSMEM LS INTFC SYSCTL 8B 8A 7B 7A 6B 6A 5B 5A 2 TG 1 M E M S Y S L T C S Y S TG3 LSSW is required only if you use DS3 and or STS1E circuit packs with low speed protection low speed protection is strongly recommended 1 DS3 and or 1 STS1E OC3 and or IS3 and or OC12 and or STS1E and or DS3 3B 3A 2B 2A 1B 1A W...

Page 127: ...ater software For optional 1 1 nonrevertive protection two OC3 1 3 STD circuit packs must be placed in adjacent A and B LS INTFC slots for example LS INTFC slots 2A and 2B LAA5 IS 3 Optical Interface The IS 3 circuit pack is compatible with Release 7 1 0 and later software For intraoffice applications it is a cost effective alternative to the OC 3 Optical Interface The IS 3 terminates one input si...

Page 128: ...t each other In an all 0x1 configuration the FT 2000 Release 7 1 0 has the capacity to add drop four OC 12 equivalents of traffic In an all 1 1 protected configuration the FT 2000 provides the capacity to add drop two OC 12 equivalents of traffic In a mixed 1 1 0x1 configuration the capacity is three OC 12 equivalents of traffic NOTE For Release 7 1 0 OC 12 1 1 links do not support the DCC channel...

Page 129: ...rcuit packs TOHCTL One slot is provided for the LAA26 Tributary Overhead Controller TOHCTL circuit pack The TOHCTL circuit pack is required when an LS INTFC slot is equipped with an OC3 circuit pack and single ended operation is desired through the OC 3 data communications channel DCC The TOHCTL circuit pack is compatible with Release 6 0 0 ADR or later software TG 1 and 2 Two slots are provided f...

Page 130: ...to incorrect slots For detailed circuit pack descriptions and software compatibility information refer to Volume I Section 7 Circuit Pack Descriptions Table 3 2 Low Speed Shelf System Controller Circuit Pack Slot Circuit Pack Code Software Compatibility Compatible Software Note Circuit Pack Slot Supported Circuit Pack Codes R3 01 of ADR R4 0 0 of ADR R4 1 0 of ADR R5 0 _ of ADR R6 0 _ od ADR R701 ...

Page 131: ...l telemetry interface to a remote maintenance center that uses telemetry byte oriented serial TBOS protocol For more information about this serial telemetry interface refer to Volume I Section 6 Operations Interfaces OFFICE ALMS This connector provides an interface to the local office audible and visible alarms For more information about this office alarm interface refer to Volume I Section 6 Oper...

Page 132: ...ndicators and display on the user panel For information about the user panel display and indicators refer to Section 6 Operations Interfaces PWR These connectors provide an interface to the 48 V power filters on the user panel For more information about power refer to Section 4 Power Figure 3 5 Interconnection Panel Low Speed Shelf System Controller CIT DCE PWR 48A RTN 8B 16B 48A 48B 48B RTN DISPL...

Page 133: ...the CIT and User Panel connectors have been eliminated Figure 3 6 shows the G3 Interconnect Panel Figure 3 6 Interconnection Panel Low Speed Shelf System Controller ED6G999 32 G3 MISC DSCRT 2 MISC DSCRT 1 SERTLM 2 SERTLM 1 2A 10A LS INTFC X 25 TIMING OUT 2 TIMING OUT 1 TIMING IN SECY TIMING IN PRI OFFICE ALMS 1A 9A J125A 5B 13B 5A 13A 4B 12B 4A 12A 3B 11B 3A 11A 2B 10B 1B 9B J32A J34A J23A J18A J1...

Page 134: ...he user panel refer to Section 6 Operations Interfaces Figure 3 7 User Panel Enhanced 6G999 31 G5 USE CIT Line Locator Use CIT CIT DCE STRAP GROUND W CIT Connector ACTY LINE LOCTR Near End Activity Far End Activity NE ACTY FE Abnormal MN ABN ACO LOCTR ESD WRIST Pushbutton PWR ON MJ Minor Alarm E Identification Label CR Critical Alarm Major Alarm Line Locator Line LINE Alarm Cutoff NO 1W 48 V Power...

Page 135: ...tions Issue 8 0 July 2002 3 15 Functionally the newer G3 User Panel is the same as the older G5 panel However there are minor physical differences Figure 3 8 depicts the G3 user panel Figure 3 8 User Panel 6G999 32 G3 ...

Page 136: ... interconnection panel and the other covers the circuit packs Openings are provided in the top cover that allow the user panel to show through and provide access to the CIT port The covers are hinged and can be easily removed for maintenance access Figure 3 9 Low Speed Shelf System Controller with Covers Low Speed Shelf System Controller ...

Page 137: ...ftware The 739E 1 16 circuit packs are compatible with Release 7 2 0 and later software RCVR 1W One slot is provided for the 839B2 839B4B 839B5 or 839E5 OC48 Receiver Add Drop OC48 RCVR A D circuit pack for OC 48 high speed line 1W The 839B4B and 839B5 OC48 RCVR A D circuit packs are compatible with Release 7 0 0 ADR or later software The 839E5 circuit pack is compatible with Release 7 2 0 and lat...

Page 138: ...ded for the 839B2 839B4B 839B5 or 839E5 OC48 Receiver Add Drop OC48 RCVR A D circuit pack for OC 48 high speed line 1E The 839B4B and 839B5 OC48 RCVR A D circuit packs are compatible with Release 7 0 0 ADR or later software The 839E RCVR A D circuit pack is compatible with Release 7 2 0 and later software Figure 3 10 High Speed Shelf Without Circuit Pack Cover RCVR L N C T L O H C T L R E S E R V ...

Page 139: ... 739J4 OC48 TRMTR X X X 739B5 OC48 TRMTR X X X 739C5 OC48 TRMTR X X X 739J5 OC48 TRMTR X X X 739P5 OC48 TRMTR X X X 739R5 OC48 TRMTR X X X 739S5 OC48 TRMTR X X X RCVR 1W 839B2 OC48 RCVR X X X X X X X DA 839B4B OC48 RCVR X X X 839B5 OC48 RCVR X X X 839E5 OC48 RCVR X LNCTL LAA28 LNCTL X X X X X X X X OHCTL 1W LAA22 OHCTL TERM X X X X X X X X OHCTL 1E LAA21 OHCTL TERM X X X X X X X X TRMTR 1E 739B2 O...

Page 140: ...Y These connectors provide an interface that allows access to the line growth channel Z1 and Z2 bytes of the OC 48 high speed lines These connectors are reserved for use in a future release SECTION USER CHAN LINE X and LINE Y These connectors provide an interface that allows access to the section user channel F1 byte of the service and protection OC 48 high speed lines These connectors are reserve...

Page 141: ...e for voice communications For more information about the orderwire interface refer to Section 6 Operations Interfaces NATL USE LINE X and LINE Y These connectors are not used on this shelf INTRAOFFICE LAN LINE X and LINE Y These connectors are reserved for use in a future release PWR These connectors provide an interface to the 48 V power filters on the filter panel For more information about pow...

Page 142: ...R ON LED and an electrostatic discharge jack for the High Speed Shelf For more information about the filter panel refer to Section 6 Operations Interfaces Figure 3 12 Filter Panel High Speed Shelf and Enhanced High Speed Shelf PWR ON ESD WRIST STRAP GROUND Identification Label Line LINE LINE NO 1W NO 1E 48 V Power On ...

Page 143: ...covers the interconnection panel and the other covers the circuit packs Openings are provided in the top cover that allow the filter panel to show through The covers are hinged and can be easily removed for maintenance access Figure 3 13 High Speed Shelf with Covers STRAP GROUND PWR ON High Speed Shelf ESD WRIST ...

Page 144: ... packs are compatible with Release 7 0 0 ADR or later software The 739E 1 16 circuit packs are compatible with Release 7 2 0 ADR and later software RCVR 1W One slot is provided for the 839B2 839B4B 839B5 or 839E5 OC48 Receiver Add Drop OC48 RCVR A D circuit packs for OC 48 high speed line 1W The 839B4B and 839B5 OC48 RCVR A D circuit packs are compatible with Release 7 0 0 ADR or later software Th...

Page 145: ...e 839E5 circuit pack is compatible with Release 7 2 0 and later software LNCTL One slot is provided for the LAA28 Line Controller 4 Megabyte LNCTL 4 MEG circuit pack OHCTL 1W One slot is provided for the LAA21 Overhead Controller Terminal OHCTL TERM circuit pack for OC 48 high speed line 1W OHCTL 1E One slot is provided for the LAA21 OHCTL TERM circuit pack for OC 48 high speed line 1E LOHCTL 1W a...

Page 146: ...lf Without Circuit Pack Cover Filter TRMTR RCVR L N C T L O H C T L RCVR TRMTR E S E R V E D R E S E R V E D R E S E R V E D R E S E R V E D R Panel TRMTR RCVR 1W TRMTR 1E 1E 1W OHCTL 1W OHCTL 1E LOHCTL 1W LOHCTL 1E LNCTL 1W RCVR E S E R V E D R O H C T L Interconnection Panel Cover ...

Page 147: ...X X X 739J4 OC48 TRMTR X X X 739B5 OC48 TRMTR X X X 739C5 OC48 TRMTR X X X 739J5 OC48 TRMTR X X X 739P5 OC48 TRMTR X X X 739R5 OC48 TRMTR X X X 739S5 OC48 TRMTR X X X RCVR 1W 839B2 OC48 RCVR X X X X X X X DA 839B4B OC48 RCVR X X X 839B5 OC48 RCVR X X X 839E5 OC48 RCVR X LNCTL LAA28 LNCTL X X X X X X X X OHCTL 1W LAA22 OHCTL TERM X X X X X X X X OHCTL 1E LAA21 OHCTL TERM X X X X X X X X TRMTR 1E 73...

Page 148: ...Pack Descriptions Enhanced High Speed Shelf Interfaces 3 Front access cabling is provided through the interconnection panel Figure 3 15 Figure 3 15 Interconnection Panel Enhanced High Speed Shelf LINE OW EXP OW J276A LINE X LINE Y J256A LINE Y LINE NO X 1W LINE NO Y 1E J257A J277A LINE X LINE Y INTRAOFFICE LAN SECTION USER CHAN J272A LINE X LINE Y J254A LINE X SECTION OW LOC OW J274A J252A LINE GR...

Page 149: ...e line orderwire E2 byte for voice communications express orderwire For more information about the orderwire interface refer to Volume I Section 6 Operations Interfaces INTRAOFFICE LAN LINE X and LINE Y These connectors are reserved for use in a future release PWR These connectors provide an interface to the 48 V power filters on the filter panel For more information about power refer to Volume I ...

Page 150: ...Platform Descriptions 3 30 Issue 8 0 July 2002 Figure 3 16 Enhanced High Speed Shelf with Covers Enhanced High Speed Shelf ...

Page 151: ...t baffle It provides a place to hold a portable PC for example the NCR 3170 computer weighing up to 25 pounds and measuring up to 20 inches wide and 12 inches deep It can also serve as a writing tray This fixture folds into the heat baffle when not in use A front cover is also provided to maintain a flush appearance Screen 3 The screen provides a filter panel at the bottom of the bay and an air in...

Page 152: ...pment package supports up to six OC 48 high speed lines FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Shelf The FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Shelf Figure 3 18 consists of a miscellaneously mounted shelf arrangement and Release 2 1 0 RPTR Release 4 0 0 RPTR or Release 6 0 0 RPTR software This shelf arrangement consists of one Repeater Shelf System Controller a PC tray and a user panel equipped with two 10 amp fuses Power fusin...

Page 153: ... and Fuse Panel 2 PC Tray Screen System Controller 21 5 4 4 4 84 21 5 Repeater Shelf 21 5 R E G E N R E G E N R E G E N R E G E N S Y S C T L S Y S M E User Panel System Controller Repeater Shelf O W O W R E G E N R E G E R E G E N R E G E N S Y S C T L S Y S M E User Panel System Controller Repeater Shelf N R M R R R R M R R R R M R R R 1 5 Power Distribution tpa 814210 01 O W O W O W O W ...

Page 154: ...ons 3 34 Issue 8 0 July 2002 Figure 3 18 FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Shelf Miscellaneously Mounted R E G E N R S Y S C S Y S M R E G E R E G E N R T L E M R E G E R N R N O W O W User Panel PC Tray Interconnection Panel Cover ...

Page 155: ...feeder stubs and distributes power to the shelves in the bay The power distribution and fuse panel is also equipped with six 10 amp fuses two for each shelf in the bay Three fuses are for power feeder A and three fuses are for power feeder B For more information about power distribution refer to Volume I Section 4 Power Figure 3 19 Power Distribution and Fuse Panel FUSE LIFT UP 10A 60V 48A FUSE LI...

Page 156: ...ction panel a user panel and eight circuit pack slots It measures 21 5 inches high by 21 5 inches wide by 12 inches deep and fits in a standard 23 inch wide seismic network bay framework The miscellaneously mounted version can also be mounted in certain ESS switch frameworks Figure 3 20 Repeater Shelf System Controller Without Circuit Pack Cover R E G E R E G E N N S Y S C S Y S M User Panel R T L...

Page 157: ...ection overhead bytes for orderwire The LAA14 OW circuit pack is compatible with Release 2 1 0 RPTR or later software SYSCTL One slot is provided for the LAA23 or LAA23B System Controller SYSCTL circuit pack The LAA23 SYSCTL circuit pack has been discontinued and replaced with the LAA23B SYSCTL circuit pack The LAA23 and LAA23B SYSCTL circuit packs are compatible with Release 2 1 0 RPTR or later s...

Page 158: ...s and software compatibility information refer to Volume I Section 7 Circuit Pack Descriptions Repeater Shelf System Controller Interfaces 3 Front access cabling is provided through the interconnection panel Figure 3 21 Table 3 5 Repeater Shelf System Controller Circuit Pack Slot Circuit Pack Code Software Compatibility Supported Circuit Compatible Software Note Circuit Pack Slot Pack Codes R2 1 0...

Page 159: ...Repeater Bay For more information about this user settable miscellaneous discrete interface refer to Volume I Section 6 Operations Interfaces CIT DTE This connector provides an interface to a modem that allows dial up access For more information about the CIT DTE interface refer to Volume I Section 6 Operations Interfaces CIT DCE This connector provides an interface to the CIT DCE port on the user...

Page 160: ...and LINE P These connectors are reserved for use in a future release SECTION OW LOC OW LINE 1 and LINE P These connectors provide an interface that allows an orderwire set access to the section orderwire E1 byte for voice communications For more information about the orderwire interface refer to Volume I Section 6 Operations Interfaces PWR These connectors provide an interface to the 48 V power fi...

Page 161: ... same as shown in Figure 3 22 For more information about the user panel refer to Volume I Section 6 Operations Interfaces Figure 3 22 User Panel FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Shelf for Miscellaneous Mounting Only ACTY ACTY ABN ACO LOCTR 48A 10A 60V 10A 60V 48B FUSE FUSE LIFT UP LIFT UP USE CIT Line Locator Use CIT CIT DCE STRAP GROUND W CIT Connector LINE LOCTR Near End Activity Far End Activity NE FE Ab...

Page 162: ...rough and provide access to the CIT port The covers are hinged and can be easily removed for maintenance access Figure 3 23 shows the Repeater Shelf System Controller with covers for the FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay Figure 3 24 shows the Repeater Shelf System Controller with covers for the miscellaneously mounted FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Shelf Figure 3 23 Repeater Shelf System Controller with Covers F...

Page 163: ...Platform Descriptions Issue 8 0 July 2002 3 43 Figure 3 24 Repeater Shelf System Controller with Covers FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Shelf FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Shelf ...

Page 164: ...to the heat baffle when not in use A front cover is also provided to maintain a flush appearance Screen 3 The screen provides a filter panel at the bottom of the bay and an air intake plenum for cooling purposes Upgrades 3 The FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay equipped with one Repeater Shelf System Controller can be upgraded in service with up to two additional Repeater Shelf System Controllers For more...

Page 165: ...the Condensed High Speed Shelf A new fan assembly for forced air circulation This configuration includes two Low Speed High Speed shelf pairs and supports two independent two fiber ring systems This means that the bay provides a total of 96 slots Thus whenever the D Bay is fully equipped it is functionally equivalent to two single OC 48 E Bays Figure 3 25 functionally depicts the D Bay NOTE In ter...

Page 166: ... S W TG3 Y S C T L Y S M E M S S DS3 or STS1E and or STS1E and or OC3 T O H C T L and or DS3 IS3 and or OC12 and or STS1E and or OC3 and or DS3 IS3 and or OC12 User Panel Interconnection Panel 14 25 High Speed Shelf Condensed R C V R T R M T R L N C T L 1W O H C T L 1W O H C T L 1E A B C D E Line 1W J251A Line 1E J271A Line 1W J254A Line 1E J274A Line 1W J252A Line 1E J272A Line 1W J256A Line 1E J...

Page 167: ...48 D Bay Power Distribution and Fuse Panel Low Speed Shelf System Controller 3 Purpose of Low Speed Shelf System Controller 3 There are no differences between the Low Speed Shelf s used in the E Bay and D Bay Each low speed shelf System Controller provides high level system control functions and serves as an interface for up to 48 service DS3 and or EC 1 signals eight 1 1 protected OC 3 signals 16...

Page 168: ...in a standard 23 inch wide seismic network bay framework Figure 3 27 Low Speed Shelf System Controller Without Circuit Pack Cover ED6G999 31 G5 L S S W TG3 S Y S C T L S Y S M E M 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B P1 P2 IN OUT 1 2 5A 5B 6A 6B 7A User Panel 1A 1B 7B 8A 8B SYSCTL SYSMEM LS INTFC LS SW LS INTFC TG Interconnection Panel Cover 1 DS3 and or 1 STS1E DS3 and or STS1E and or OC3 DS3 and or STS1E and or OC...

Page 169: ... you use OC3 or OC12 circuit packs and want DCC capabilities Interconnection Panel Panel User SYSMEM LS INTFC SYSCTL 8B 8A 7B 7A 6B 6A 5B 5A 2 TG 1 M E M S Y S L T C S Y S TG3 LSSW is required only if you use DS3 and or STS1E circuit packs with low speed protection low speed protection is strongly recommended 1 DS3 and or 1 STS1E OC3 and or IS3 and or OC12 and or STS1E and or DS3 3B 3A 2B 2A 1B 1A...

Page 170: ...input signal generates one output signal and supports the transport of both STS 3 and STS 3c formats It supports interconnection distances up to 2000 feet using multimode fiber NOTE For both 1 1 nonrevertive protection applications and transport of STS 3c two IS 3 circuit packs must be placed in adjacent A and B LS INTFC slots for example LS INTFC slots 2A and 2B T939A OC 12 Optical Interface 1 3µ...

Page 171: ...pacity to add drop two OC 12 equivalents of traffic In a mixed 1 1 0x1 configuration the capacity is three OC 12 equivalents of traffic LS INTFC P1 and P2 Two slots are provided for one protection LAA2 DS3 circuit pack S4 4 and or one protection LAA4 STS1E circuit pack Two DS3 or two STS1E circuit packs cannot be used The protection DS3 and STS1E circuit packs can be placed in slot P1 or P2 LSSW I...

Page 172: ...scriptions Low Speed Shelf System Controller Interfaces 3 Front access cabling is provided through the interconnection panel Figure 3 29 The interconnection panel provides the following interfaces Table 3 7 Low Speed Shelf System Controller Circuit Pack Slot Circuit Pack Code Software Compatibility Compatible Software Circuit Pack Slot Supported Circuit Pack Codes R7 0 0 of ADR R7 1 0 R7 2 0 of AD...

Page 173: ...S This connector provides an interface to the local office audible and visible alarms For more information about this office alarm interface refer to Volume I Section 6 Operations Interfaces PAR TLM This connector provides an interface to an operations center for alarm information For more information about this parallel telemetry interface refer to Volume I Section 6 Operations Interfaces MISC DS...

Page 174: ...ors provide an interface to the 48 V power filters on the user panel For more information about power refer to Volume I Section 4 Power Figure 3 29 Interconnection Panel Low Speed Shelf System Controller ED6G999 31 G5 CIT DCE PWR 48A RTN 8B 16B 48A 48B 48B RTN DISPLAY 3 3 2 1 2 1 3 3 2 1 2 1 J142A J137A 8A 16A 7B 15B J140A J135A P163A P158A CIT DTE 3 3 2 1 2 1 P166A P165A PAR TLM 3 3 2 1 2 1 3 3 2...

Page 175: ...cy RF filters on the interconnection panel using push on type connectors The user panel Figure 3 30 provides 48 V power filters a power on PWR ON LED an electrostatic discharge jack and system level information For more information about the user panel refer to Volume I Section 6 Operations Interfaces Figure 3 30 User Panel Enhanced USE CIT Line Locator Use CIT CIT DCE STRAP GROUND W CIT Connector...

Page 176: ...terconnection panel and the other covers the circuit packs Openings are provided in the top cover that allow the user panel to show through and provide access to the CIT port The covers are hinged and can be easily removed for maintenance access Figure 3 31 Low Speed Shelf System Controller with Covers Low Speed Shelf System Controller ...

Page 177: ...9J4 739B5 739C5 739J5 739P5 739R5 and 739S5 OC48 TRMTR A D circuit packs are compatible with Release 7 0 0 ADR or later software The 739E 1 16 circuit packs are compatible with Release 7 2 0 ADR and later software RCVR 1W One slot is provided for the 839B2 839B4B or 839B5 OC48 Receiver Add Drop OC48 RCVR A D circuit packs for OC 48 high speed line 1W The 839B4B and 839B5 OC48 RCVR A D circuit pack...

Page 178: ...The 839E5 circuit pack is compatible with Release 7 2 0 and later software LNCTL One slot is provided for the LAA28 Line Controller 4 Megabyte LNCTL 4 MEG circuit pack OHCTL 1W One slot is provided for the LAA21 Overhead Controller Terminal OHCTL TERM circuit pack for OC 48 high speed line 1W OHCTL 1E One slot is provided for the LAA21 OHCTL TERM circuit pack for OC 48 high speed line 1E RESERVED ...

Page 179: ...Platform Descriptions Issue 8 0 July 2002 3 59 Figure 3 32 Condensed High Speed Shelf Without Circuit Pack Cover RCVR 1W TRMTR 1E TRMTR 1W L N C T L O H C T L 1W 1E O H C T L R E S E R V E D RCVR 1E ...

Page 180: ...MTR X X DA 739S2 OC48 TRMTR X X DA 739B4 OC48 TRMTR X X X 739J4 OC48 TRMTR X X X 739B5 OC48 TRMTR X X X 739C5 OC48 TRMTR X X X 739J5 OC48 TRMTR X X X 739P5 OC48 TRMTR X X X 739R5 OC48 TRMTR X X X 739S5 OC48 TRMTR X X X RCVR 1W 839B2 OC48 RCVR X X DA 839B4B OC48 RCVR X X X 839B5 OC48 RCVR X X X 839E5 OC48 RCVR X TRMTR 1E 739B2 OC48 TRMTR X X DA 739C2 OC48 TRMTR X X DA 739E 1 16 OC48 TRMTR X 739H 1 ...

Page 181: ...er to Volume I Section 7 Circuit Pack Descriptions Table 3 8 Enhanced High Speed Shelf Circuit Pack Slot Circuit Pack Code Software Compatibility Cont d ADR Compatible Software Circuit Pack Slot Supported Circuit Pack Codes R7 0 0 R7 1 0 R7 2 0 RCVR 1E 839B2 OC48 RCVR X X X 839B4B OC48 RCVR X X X 839B5 OC48 RCVR X X X 839E5 OC48 RCVR X LNCTL LAA28 LNCTL X X X OHCTL 1W LAA21 OHCTL TERM X X X OHCTL ...

Page 182: ...d power is provided through the Interconnection and Filter Panel Figure 3 33 Figure 3 33 Interconnection and Filter Panel Condensed High Speed Shelf A B C D E Line 1W J256A Line 1E J276A Line 1W J252A Line 1E J272A Line 1W J254A Line 1E J274A Line 1W J251A Line 1E J271A Intraoffice LAN J277A F J10A adr05005 00eJF0081896r7 1 ...

Page 183: ...provide an interface that allows access to the section user channel F1 byte of the service and protection OC 48 high speed lines These connectors are reserved for use in a future release E INTRAOFFICE LAN This connector is reserved for use in a future release F This connector provides an interface to the 48 V power filters on the filter panel This is a factory wired connection Except for power all...

Page 184: ...embly contains two status LEDs These are Power On Alarm The alarm signal is brought from a connector located on the left side of the fan assembly and terminated on the miscellaneous discrete alarm inputs connector which is located on the lower low speed shelf ...

Page 185: ...Table of Contents Issue 8 0 July 2002 4 i 4 Power Overview 4 1 General 4 1 Power Distribution 4 2 Power Dissipation 4 6 LEDs 4 7 ...

Page 186: ...4 ii Issue 8 0 July 2002 Table of Contents ...

Page 187: ...ual rather than bulk power supplies Each circuit pack contains DC to DC converters that change the office battery voltages to the voltages required This leads to improved system reliability since heat is dissipated uniformly across the system avoiding hot spots The FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System is powered by 48 V DC The voltage range for all the components is 42 75 to 60 V DC as measured at the p...

Page 188: ...eeders are 4 5 foot 8 gauge power feeder stubs gutter tapped to the feeder cables going to the BDFB There are also 8 5 and 15 foot 8 gauge power feeders available for overhead high bay cable racking and raised floor applications respectively Power feeders can also be ordered to length Figure 4 1 Bay Power Distribution Screen Bottom Shelf PC Tray and Fuse Panel Fan Optional Middle Shelf Power Distr...

Page 189: ...ned to the top shelf The power feeders are cabled using 14 gauge wire from the fuses down the right side of the bay when viewed from the front to the shelves and the fan assembly if equipped Figure 4 2 shows an example of how power is distributed to a miscellaneously mounted FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Shelf The 8 gauge power feeder stubs are terminated at two 10 gauge power connectors that are connect...

Page 190: ... to the allowed limit Each power feeder also passes through an RF filter at the interconnection panel to remove any RF energy before going to the backplane From the RF filters the power feeders are connected to the backplane and distributed to the circuit packs on the shelf Each backplane power feeder connects to the circuit pack via four backplane pins One pin is longer than the other three power...

Page 191: ... 4 A filtering section follows the fused input Modular DC to DC power converters on each circuit pack convert the 48 V to the voltages required on the circuit pack Figure 4 4 Circuit Pack Power Distribution Required ORing Converter Filtering Fuse Limiter Current Diode GND DC DC RTN 48 V Voltages RTN 48 V RTN 48 V B 48 V A ...

Page 192: ...rent drain per feeder These current drains represent the peak current under worst case operating conditions Normally the current for the system is shared equally by both feeders If one feeder fails the other feeder carries the total load for both feeders feeder A feeder B current Maximum current drains occur at 42 75 V Table 4 1 Power Dissipation and Current Drains Current Drain Amps Maximum per F...

Page 193: ... OC 48 Repeater Bay the red FAULT LED will be operated via a separate power path from the System Controller SYSCTL circuit pack If the fuse or DC to DC converter fails on a transmission or synchronization circuit pack at an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal the red FAULT LED will be operated via a separate power path from the Line Controller LNCTL circuit pack If the fuse or DC to DC converter...

Page 194: ...Power 4 8 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 195: ...Line Timed Mode 5 12 Through Timed Mode 5 13 Loop Timed Mode only for Point to Point Releases of FT 2000 5 15 Externally Timed Mode 5 17 Network Synchronization 5 19 General 5 19 OC 48 Point to Point Applications 5 21 Free Running Free Running Configuration 5 21 Free Running Through Timed Configuration 5 22 Externally Timed Through Timed Configuration 5 23 Phase Locked Phase Locked Configuration 5...

Page 196: ...ations Not Used to Distribute Timing 5 28 Synchronous Applications With a Mixture of Asynchronous and Synchronous Low Speed Interfaces 5 30 Ring Applications Used to Distribute Timing 5 35 Summary of Timing Rules for Bidirectional Line Switched Rings 5 43 ...

Page 197: ...e for the FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay The system control architecture distributes the monitoring and control functions down to the lowest level where a particular function for example switching or timing is performed At the lowest level of the control hierarchy is the board controller that is located on each transmission synchronization and protection circuit pack The board controller consists of a...

Page 198: ...C 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal SYSCTL CIT DCE CIT DTE Serial Telemetry X 25 LNCTL SYSMEM User Panel LEDs Parallel Telemetry User Settable Discrete Input User Settable Discrete Output LCLAN OALAN BCLAN Board Controller OHCTL TERM System Controller Complex Office Alarms Alarm Cutoff OHCTL TERM Board Controller TOHCTL Release 6 and later ...

Page 199: ...OC 48 Repeater Bay does not require any LNCTL circuit packs The system controller complex is the highest level of the control hierarchy The system controller complex consists of the System Controller SYSCTL circuit pack and the System Memory SYSMEM circuit pack The system controller complex performs the non real time intensive functions requiring overall system knowledge The system controller comp...

Page 200: ...8 Repeater Bays The OW circuit pack provides access to the OC 48 section orderwire E1 and user channel F1 bytes The controllers within the control architecture communicate among the different hierarchical levels using internal local area networks LANs The board controllers and the LNCTL circuit pack of the same line communicate using the board controller local area network BCLAN The LNCTL circuit ...

Page 201: ...Drop Rings Terminal for 2 Fiber Rings also allows single DS3 and or EC 1 signals to be added dropped while the through traffic is passed on without requiring low speed interface circuit packs A bidirectional ring capability allows the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal for 2 Fiber Rings to be used in 2 fiber bidirectional line switched ring applications Figure 5 3 shows a transmission block dia...

Page 202: ...peed protection switching refer to Volume I Section 9 Maintenance Description Internally the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal for 2 Fiber Rings employs standard synchronous multiplexing for add drop and through traffic Refer to Appendix A A SONET Overview To add DS3 or EC 1 electrical low speed signals each electrical low speed interface circuit pack DS3 or STS1E accepts up to three low speed...

Page 203: ...Terminal In Release 5 it is still recommended that DS3 and EC 1 signal outputs be terminated properly However if DS3 and EC 1 signal outputs are not terminated properly and the unterminated DS3 and EC 1 ports in the drop direction from OC 48 line are in the NMON state false trouble conditions will not be reported by the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Termina...

Page 204: ...on 7 Circuit Pack Descriptions In Release 5 and later releases the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal for 2 Fiber Rings also provides limited support for STS 1 cross connections across an STS 3 tributary In Release 7 and later releases the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal for 2 Fiber Rings also provides support for STS 1 cross connections across an OC 48 signal The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop R...

Page 205: ...and transmits it toward high speed line 1W Internally the FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay employs standard synchronous multiplexing Refer to Appendix A A SONET Overview For example the incoming optical OC 48 signal from high speed line 1W is converted to an electrical STS 48 signal and demultiplexed to sixteen 155 Mb s signals This allows certain SONET section overhead bytes to be extracted monitored a...

Page 206: ...tion More specifically R7 1 supports messages STU ST3 and DUS on the OC 48 and these messages are sent out on the OC 3 and OC 12 K bytes on a provisionable basis FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay Through timed from an incoming OC 48 signal As network needs evolve the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System can be reprovisioned easily in service to change synchronization modes as needed If the synchronization mode...

Page 207: ...e timing from a highly stable crystal oscillator This oscillator has a long term accuracy better than 4 6 ppm The TG3 DS1 circuit packs distribute 155 52 MHz timing signals to the low speed interface circuit packs on the Low Speed Shelf System Controller and the OC48 Transmitter OC48 TRMTR circuit packs on the Enhanced High Speed Shelf or High Speed Shelf In the free running mode the DS1 reference...

Page 208: ... algorithm Simply put the sync message algorithm allows each node to reconfigure its timing source to derive timing from the best available source As a contrast to through timed whenever line timed makes a switch reconfiguration then that event is non revertive NOTE The line timed auto mode can reconfigure for a two transmission line failures b a node failure and c failure of an external timing so...

Page 209: ...rives timing for the OC 48 signal transmitted on high speed line 1E Figure 5 6 Through Timed Synchronization FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal The OC 48 line reference signals are continuously monitored If the primary OC 48 line reference signal becomes corrupted the TG3 DS1 circuit pack will select the secondary OC 48 line reference signal without causing service degradations If the primary a...

Page 210: ...East directions Thus the OC 12 is provisioned with multiple cross connections With regard to synchronization through timed mode only the OC 12 interface selects the first cross connection as its source for pass through synchronization In the FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay the OC48 Regenerator OC48 REGENR circuit packs derive timing from the incoming OC 48 signals and use it to time their outgoing OC 4...

Page 211: ...nce signal without causing service degradations If both OC 48 line reference signals are corrupted the digital phase locked loop DPLL circuit will attempt to lock on to the primary DS1 synchronization input if equipped If the primary DS1 synchronization input is not equipped or fails the DPLL circuit will attempt to lock on to the secondary DS1 synchronization input if equipped If all these refere...

Page 212: ...al office equipment The LAA17 TG3 DS1 circuit pack derives the DS1 synchronization outputs from the internal oscillator The LAA18 TG3 DS1 circuit pack derives the DS1 synchronization outputs directly from the OC 48 line reference signal If the OC 48 line reference signals fail the TG3 DS1 circuit pack transmits DS1 alarm indication signals AIS to the BITS clock to prevent any uncontrolled timing l...

Page 213: ...references are continuously monitored If the primary DS1 reference becomes corrupted the TG3 DS1 circuit pack will select the secondary DS1 reference without causing service degradations If both DS1 references are corrupted the DPLL circuit holds the on board oscillator frequency at the last good reference sample while the DS1 references are repaired holdover mode In the holdover mode the on board...

Page 214: ...ffice BITS clock or other central office equipment The DS1 reference input interface TIMING IN PRI and TIMING IN SECY and the DS1 reference output interface TIMING OUT 1 and TIMING OUT 2 are located on the interconnection panel of the Low Speed Shelf System Controller Refer to Volume I Section 3 Platform Descriptions for more information about the physical location of the DS1 reference interfaces ...

Page 215: ...ational Standard for Telecommunications Synchronization Interface Standards The following are some key recommendations from these documents For further detailed explanation consult the sources directly A network element can only receive the synchronization reference signal from another network element that contains a clock of equivalent or superior quality stratum level The facilities with the gre...

Page 216: ...timed configuration Phase locked phase locked configuration Bidirectional ring applications with asynchronous DS3 and synchronous EC 1 OC 3 and or OC 12 low speed interfaces Ring applications not used to distribute timing to BITS clocks Ring applications used to distribute timing to BITS clocks Free running free running configuration Free running through timed configuration Phase locked phase lock...

Page 217: ...nchronous equipment in a network and enables a smooth evolution to a synchronous network The free running free running configuration applies to OC 48 point to point applications with or without FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bays with asynchronous DS3 low speed interfaces only In the free running free running configuration Figure 5 10 both terminals are free running that is they require no external synchr...

Page 218: ...tted signals from its free running internal oscillator The internal oscillator at the other FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal uses the OC 48 line reference signal recovered from the incoming OC 48 signal to derive timing for its transmitted signals The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal in the through timed mode also derives two DS1 synchronization outputs The LAA18 TG3 DS1 circuit pack der...

Page 219: ...t the FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal in the through timed mode may be equipped with two DS1 external synchronization references If the OC 48 line reference signals fail the TG3 DS1 circuit pack holds the on board oscillator frequency at the last good reference sample holdover mode The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal in the through timed mode can also pro...

Page 220: ...uited to interoffice applications The network may have all DS1 references traceable to a common primary reference source for example outstate trunking or to multiple primary reference sources for example a carrier to carrier interface The use of multiple primary reference sources is referred to as plesiochronous operation Figure 5 13 The phase locked phase locked configuration applies to all OC 48...

Page 221: ...ronization outputs to the office BITS clock or other central office equipment Figure 5 14 For more information about platform timing modes refer to Platform Synchronization in this section Figure 5 14 Phase Locked Phase Locked Configuration LAA18 TG3 DS1 Circuit Pack FT 2000 Stratum 3 or better OC 48 DS3 BITS Clock Central Office Equipment Other FT 2000 Phase Locked CO CO DS3 Phase Locked ...

Page 222: ...carrier interface The use of multiple primary reference sources is referred to as plesiochronous operation If synchronous EC 1 OC 3 IS 3 or OC 12 low speed interfaces are present external sources must be traceable to a stratum 1 clock The externally timed externally timed configuration applies to all OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal applications with or without the FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay The LAA1...

Page 223: ...iming in rings However there are many good quality synchronization distribution networks in place using T1 facilities that users may not wish to convert Therefore the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System may or may not be used for distributing timing signals The user must decide if the FT 2000 ring will be used to distribute timing signals to BITS clocks This distinction is necessary to ensure that the ...

Page 224: ...ned free running all other nodes provisioned through timed This configuration Figure 5 16 is used when there are only asynchronous DS3 low speed interfaces on every node in the ring Only one node in the ring should be provisioned free running This prevents cumulative pointer processing on transmission signals passing through a node Figure 5 16 Example of a Ring Application with One Node Provisione...

Page 225: ...All Other Nodes Provisioned Line Timed Without Timing Drops NOTE If synchronous EC 1 OC 3 IS 3 and or OC 12 low speed interfaces are to be added to nodes of an asynchronous application one node should be provisioned externally timed phase locked in releases prior to Release 5 and all other nodes should be provisioned through timed line timed or externally timed FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 DS3 DS3 DS3 ...

Page 226: ...These configurations also prevent the need of having to reprovision a node when synchronous low speed interfaces are added The timing signals used to synchronize the externally timed nodes phase locked in releases prior to Release 5 should be traceable to a high quality source s If synchronous low speed interfaces are present the timing signals must be traceable to a stratum 1 source If only async...

Page 227: ...n with One Node Provisioned Externally Timed and All Other Nodes Provisioned Through Timed Without Timing Drops FT 2000 Through Timed Through Timed FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 Through Timed DS3 EC 1 OC 3 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 BITS P TIMING IN PRI to TG3 1 S TIMING IN SECY to TG3 2 P S Externally Timed ...

Page 228: ...as they are transmitted on the OC 48 line FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 Line Timed Line Timed Line Timed DS3 EC 1 OC 3 IS 3 OC 12 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 IS 3 OC 12 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 IS 3 OC 12 P TIMING IN PRI to TG3 1 S TIMING IN SECY to TG3 2 BITS P S Externally Timed Node A Node B Node C Node D Provisioning Modes Node A External with no Back up Node B Line Timed Reconfiguration enabled Node C Line Timed Re...

Page 229: ... Provisioned Externally Timed and All Other Nodes Provisioned Through Timed or Externally Timed Without Timing Drops FT 2000 Through Timed Through Timed FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 BITS S P BITS S P Externally Timed Externally Timed P TIMING IN PRI to TG3 1 S TIMING IN SECY to TG3 2 ...

Page 230: ...the event of a failure The provisioning modes which are labeled in Figure 5 21 demonstrate this concept Care should always be exercised to avoid timing loops For more information about platform timing modes refer to Platform Synchronization in this section FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 Line Timed DS3 EC 1 OC 3 P TIMING IN PRI to TG3 1 S TIMING IN SECY to TG3 2 BITS P S Externally Timed BITS P S ...

Page 231: ...tions They are as follows One node provisioned externally timed all other nodes provisioned line timed In this configuration Figure 5 22 any one or all nodes that are provisioned line timed can derive and distribute timing Figure 5 22 Example of a Ring Application with One Node Provisioned Externally Timed and All Other Nodes Provisioned Line Timed With Two Timing Drops FT 2000 FT 2000 PBX or Cloc...

Page 232: ...gnals should be provisioned through timed All other nodes should be provisioned externally timed or through timed Figure 5 23 Example of a Ring Application with One Node Provisioned Externally Timed and All Other Nodes Provisioned Through Timed with Timing Drops FT 2000 Through Timed Through Timed FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 PBX or Clock DS3 EC 1 OC 3 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 Through ...

Page 233: ...e externally timed nodes should be traceable to a high quality timing source s If synchronous low speed interfaces are present the timing signals must be traceable to a stratum 1 source If only asynchronous low speed interfaces are present the timing signals must be traceable to a stratum 3 or better source FT 2000 Through Timed Through Timed FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 BITS BITS DS3 EC 1 OC 3 DS3 EC ...

Page 234: ...put derived directly from the OC 48 high speed line This configuration supports either asynchronous or synchronous low speed interfaces or any combination The quality and source of the timing signals must be engineered appropriately The guidelines for choosing the timing source s and the BITS clock configurations are beyond the scope of this document For more information about platform timing mode...

Page 235: ...uration with one node provisioned through timed and the resulting timing loop Timing signal input output interfaces must be consistent All nodes with BITS clocks must use the primary timing interface TIMING IN PRI and TIMING OUT 1 or all nodes with BITS clock must use the secondary timing interface TIMING IN SECY and TIMING OUT 2 Figure 5 27 shows a ring application in this configuration with inco...

Page 236: ...rom Incorrect Provisioning FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 BITS DS3 EC 1 OC 3 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 BITS Independent Clock S P Externally Timed S P TIMING IN PRI to TG3 1 S TIMING IN SECY to TG3 2 1 TIMING OUT 1 from TG3 1 2 TIMING OUT 2 from TG3 2 Externally Timed Externally Timed P 1 BITS S P 1 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 Through Timed Fiber Cut ...

Page 237: ...nsistent DS1 Timing Interfaces FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 FT 2000 BITS DS3 EC 1 OC 3 DS3 EC 1 OC 3 BITS Independent Clock BITS S P Externally Timed S P Externally Timed S P TIMING IN PRI to TG3 1 S TIMING IN SECY to TG3 2 1 TIMING OUT 1 from TG3 1 2 TIMING OUT 2 from TG3 2 Externally Timed Externally Timed P 1 1 BITS 2 P S DS3 EC 1 OC 3 ...

Page 238: ...rcuit pack provides a timing signal DS1 synchronization output derived directly from the OC 48 high speed line This configuration supports either asynchronous or synchronous low speed interfaces or any combination The quality and source of the timing signals must be engineered appropriately The guidelines for choosing the timing source s and the BITS clock configurations are beyond the scope of th...

Page 239: ...ed or through timed Strategy 2 Strategy 2 is applicable for rings that are used to distribute timing and where there is a BITS clock at every node These are typically rings that connect central offices Externally timed nodes that are used to derive timing must obey the following rules to guarantee no timing loops All nodes must be provisioned externally timed At least one node must be timed from a...

Page 240: ...Control Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces 5 44 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 241: ...Modem Through the CIT DTE Port 6 8 Remote Access Using the OC 48 Data Communications Channel DCC 6 10 Remote Access Using the OC 48 Section Orderwire 6 10 Remote Access Using the OC 3 OC 12 Data Communications Channel DCC 6 12 User Panel 6 13 Filter Panel 6 17 Office Alarms Interface 6 19 Parallel Telemetry Interface 6 20 User Settable Miscellaneous Discrete Interface 6 20 Serial Telemetry Interfa...

Page 242: ...6 ii Issue 8 0 July 2002 Table of Contents ...

Page 243: ...al 6 General 6 The craft interface terminal CIT provides full access to the administrative maintenance and provisioning capabilities of the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System The FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System supports CIT local access through the CIT DCE port dial up access using a modem through the CIT DTE port and remote access using the OC 48 data communications channel DCC In Release 6 and later ...

Page 244: ...rface and Provisioning Tool Release 5 and later n An American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII based dumb terminal Release 5 and later In Release 5 and later releases the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal may be provisioned to accept a PC loaded with the CPro 2000 software or an ASCII based dumb terminal as the CIT using the SECURITY Set Security Port input or ENT CID SECU TL1 c...

Page 245: ...or lap top n Disk drive one 720 kilobytes 3 5 inches or one 1 2 megabytes 5 25 inches n Hard disk with approximately 5 megabytes of free space n 640 kilobytes RAM n MS DOS computer program Version 3 1 or later n Serial port EIA 232 D configured as COM1 COM2 COM3 or COM4 n Parallel port configured as LPT1 n 4 77 MHz clock speed or greater n Monochrome screen monitor Standard size ASCII 25 lines x 8...

Page 246: ...CIT PC software in a Windows program environment a program information file PIF must be created for the CIT The PIF file should specify that the task be exclusive for 386 enhanced mode If running in standard mode users should select directly modifies for the COM port they will be using In addition users should select some of the other options like no screen saver no task switching etc to reduce th...

Page 247: ... 2000 Graphical User Interface and Provisioning Tool communicates with FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System using the same TL1 Advanced Options Multitasking Options Background Priority 50 Foreground Priority 100 Detect Idle Time Yes Memory Options Lock Application Memory Yes Display Options Monitor Ports Emulate Text Mode Other Options Allow Fast Paste Yes Program Filename CIT EXE Window Title FT 2000 C...

Page 248: ...d disk with approximately 5 megabytes of free space n 8 megabyte RAM n MS DOS computer program Version 5 0 or later n Windows computer program Version 3 1 n Serial port EIA 232 D configured as COM1 or COM2 n Mouse n VGA color monitor The CPro 2000 Graphical User Interface and Provisioning Tool has been tested with NCR NEC and Gateway 2000 personal computers The CPro 2000 Graphical User Interface a...

Page 249: ...Add Drop Rings Terminal On line help messages and menus are not supported For detailed information about TL1 messages refer to 824 102 151 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Operations Systems Engineering Guide An ASCII based terminal must meet the following minimum requirements to be used as a CIT n ASCII based data communications terminal with an 80 column display n Scroll capability n Local echo n ...

Page 250: ...ECURITY Set Security Port input refer to Volume I Section 8 Administration and Provisioning For more information about local access using the CIT DCE refer to the Operation and Maintenance TOP section Volume II Dial Up Access Using a Modem Through the CIT DTE Port 6 The FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System supports CIT dial up access using a modem through the CIT DTE port on the interconnection panel of...

Page 251: ...ork may be used in place of the modem pair to provide remote dial up access to the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System from the CIT A compatible modem or digital data network must meet the following minimum requirements n Full duplex n Asynchronous n Byte serial data transmission of eight bit bytes n One start bit n One stop bit n Data transmission speed should be from 1200 to 9600 baud The modem must ...

Page 252: ... 6 1 shows a 2 fiber OC 48 bidirectional line switched ring with two FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals and two FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bays The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals and FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bays must be equipped with the new Dantel orderwire assembly A18 05547 01 At each node the orderwire assembly has connections to the section orderwire SECTION OW LOC OW and the CIT DTE i...

Page 253: ...Site 2 FT 2000 CIT DTE W E Modem CIT 4 Wire MODEM FT 2000 CIT DTE W E Modem FT 2000 CIT DTE W E Modem FT 2000 CIT DTE W E Modem Repeater Site 3 Node 1 W E W E W E W E 8 pin RJ45 Jack for 4 wire modem tpa 849475 01 Orderwire Shelf Orderwire Shelf Orderwire Shelf Orderwire Shelf Orderwire Section Orderwire Section Orderwire Section Orderwire Section ...

Page 254: ...2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal and one outgoing login session to a DDM 2000 Multiplexer or another FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal at a time For example a local user can gain remote access to a remote FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal or DDM 2000 Multiplexer at the same time as a remote user can gain remote access to the local terminal The CIT must be a PC equipped with FT 2000 CIT P...

Page 255: ... shows the user panel on the FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Shelf The user panel provides 48 V power filters an electrostatic discharge jack and local system level information Figure 6 2 User Panel Low Speed Shelf System Controller and Repeater Shelf System Controller Cabled Version Before 06 97 nc ft2000 041 Critical Alarm Major Alarm Minor Alarm Abnormal Near End Activity Far End Activity Line Locator U...

Page 256: ...peed Shelf System Controller and Repeater Shelf System Controller Plug In Type After 06 97 The user panel LEDs show the following local system information n The active alarm level is shown by red LEDs for critical CR and major MJ alarms and by a yellow LED for minor MN alarms ...

Page 257: ... within a subnetwork The remote activity reporting parameter must be enabled using the SECURITY Set Far End Communications CIT PC command or in Release 7 2 and later the ENT CID SECU TL1 command n The LINE LOCTR consists of two 7 segment displays and two individual LEDs The original version available in Release 1 only had one 7 segment display and lacked the individual LEDs The two 7 segment displ...

Page 258: ...60V 10A 60V 48B FUSE FUSE LIFT UP LIFT UP USE CIT Line Locator Use CIT CIT DCE STRAP GROUND W CIT Connector LINE LOCTR Near End Activity Far End Activity NE FE Abnormal MN ESD WRIST Pushbutton PWR ON MJ Minor Alarm E Identification Label CR Critical Alarm Major Alarm Line Locator Line LINE Alarm Cutoff NO 1 LINE NO P 48 V Power On ...

Page 259: ...peed Shelf Complementary High Speed Shelf Enhanced High Speed Shelf and the Condensed High Speed Shelf The filter panel has 48 V power filters an electrostatic discharge jack and a green PWR ON LED The PWR ON LED shows that the shelf is receiving 48 V power Figure 6 5 Filter Panel for the Enhanced High Speed Shelf PWR ON ESD WRIST STRAP GROUND Identification Label Line 48 V Power On ...

Page 260: ...ntinuously lighted FAULT LED means that the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System has isolated a failure to this circuit pack A flashing FAULT LED shows the following n A flashing FAULT LED on a transmission circuit pack shows that an incoming signal to that circuit pack has failed n A flashing FAULT LED on a synchronization circuit pack shows that an external timing reference input signal has failed ESD...

Page 261: ... the alarm cutoff ACO function Visible alarms are not extinguished by the ACO function To prevent intermittent failures from causing unnecessary maintenance activity a provisionable incoming signal alarm delay is provided The office alarms will not be activated unless an incoming signal condition of greater duration than the alarm delay occurs When a failure clears an alarm clear delay prevents pr...

Page 262: ...alarms are active the highest level parallel telemetry closure is activated When the highest level alarm clears the parallel telemetry output bumps down to the next highest level active alarm Since the parallel telemetry alarm closures reflect the office alarms the alarm delay and alarm clear parameters set for office alarms also apply to parallel telemetry alarm closures The parallel telemetry PA...

Page 263: ... environmental inputs are addressed by the numbers 1 through 16 and the control outputs are addressed by the numbers 1 through 4 The environmental inputs can be assigned in any order however if the bay is equipped with a fan assembly the number 16 input is reserved for the fan alarm In Release 5 and later releases the number 1 2 3 and 4 inputs are reserved for alarms from an FT Lightwave Booster A...

Page 264: ... 1 and MISC DSCRT 2 interfaces each provide eight environmental inputs and two control outputs Refer to Volume I Section 3 Platform Descriptions for more information about the physical location of the miscellaneous discrete interface Serial Telemetry Interface 6 The FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System supports serial telemetry using the TBOS protocol The serial telemetry interface transfers alarm statu...

Page 265: ...rtual circuits and X 25 logical channel numbers The interface operates over a synchronous line at 1200 to 19 200 baud In Release 5 and later releases the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal provides a security function for the X 25 TL1 interface to protect against unauthorized access to the system functions for example provisioning Logins passwords functional capabilities authorization levels an...

Page 266: ...ork size is 32 network elements When Release 7 1 0 of the FT 2000 OC 48 ADR Terminal interworks with Release 9 1 of the DDM 2000 OC 3 and or Release 5 1 of the DDM 2000 OC 12 the recommended maximum subnetwork size is 32 network elements CAUTION In subnetworks with more than 16 NEs the NE serving as the TL1 gateway NE CANNOT serve as the AGNE nor can it serve as the DS NE The AGNE TL1 gateway NE a...

Page 267: ... changes the login ID password and or user privileges of any non privileged user ENTER ASSIGNMENT DCC ENT ASGNMT DCC enters an OC 3 or OC 12 DCC assignment ENTER CHANNEL IDENTIFIER SECURITY ENT CID SECU Release 7 2 and later sets system security for the CIT PC DCC and X 25 ports ENTER CROSS CONNECTION ENT CRS rr establishes an STS 3 or STS 1 Release 7 and later cross connection ENTER FAR END COMMU...

Page 268: ...toring storage registers INITIALIZE SYSTEM INIT SYS initializes resets provisionable parameters to their original value and restarts the network element software OPERATE ALARM CUTOFF OPR ACO operates alarm cutoff to silence the audible office alarms OPERATE EXTERNAL CONTROL OPR EXT CONT operates an external miscellaneous discrete control output OPERATE LOOPBACK OPR LPBK rr operates low speed DS3 E...

Page 269: ...ts in the maintenance subnetwork RETRIEVE ALARM ENVIRONMENT RTRV ALM ENV retrieves active environmental alarm conditions RETRIEVE rr RTRV rr retrieves current provisioned state of low speed ports and slots RETRIEVE ASSIGNMENT DCC RTRV ASGNMT DCC retrieves information on the assignment of DCC channels to low speed slots or slot pairs RETRIEVE ATTRIBUTE ALARM RTRV ATTR ALM retrieves the current valu...

Page 270: ...trieves a list of all network elements in the local ring RETRIEVE NETWORK SECURITY RTRV NE SECU retrieves network element global security information RETRIEVE PATH TRACE RTRV PTHTRC retrieves the provisioned transmit and receive path traces path trace status and actual receive path trace RETRIEVE PERFORMANCE MONITORING RTRV PM retrieves performance monitoring PM data including historical PM data R...

Page 271: ... failure events SET PERFORMANCE MONITORING START TIME SET PM STIME sets the start time for the measurement of all 24 hour performance monitoring parameters SET SITE ID SET SID sets the target identifier TID of the network element SET THRESHOLD SET TH sets the threshold level for monitored parameters SWITCH TO PROTECTION SW TOPROTN performs an equipment circuit pack protection switch on DS3 and or ...

Page 272: ...nd between repeaters The FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay must be equipped with the Orderwire OW circuit pack to access the section orderwire byte The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal provide four 64 kb s orderwire interfaces for section and line orderwire The FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay provides four 64 kb s orderwire interfaces for section orderwire The line express and section local orderwire int...

Page 273: ...tract the orderwire bytes to from the synchronous optical network SONET overhead channel Standard equipment can be connected to the orderwire interface For example a DANTEL orderwire shelf may be used with the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Registered trademark of DANTEL Incorporated ...

Page 274: ...Operations Interfaces 6 32 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 275: ... 7 Detailed Description of Operation 7 7 Quick Reference Summary 7 10 SYSMEM LAA25 Circuit Pack Description 7 11 Purpose of Circuit 7 11 Faceplate LED 7 11 General Description of Operation 7 12 Detailed Description of Operation 7 12 Quick Reference Summary 7 16 LNCTL LAA28 Circuit Pack Description 7 17 Purpose of Circuit 7 17 Faceplate LED 7 17 General Description of Operation 7 18 Detailed Descri...

Page 276: ...cuit Pack Description 7 32 Purpose of Circuit 7 32 Faceplate 7 32 General Description of Operation 7 32 Detailed Description of Operation 7 33 Quick Reference Summary 7 34 Transmission 7 35 DS3 LAA2 LAA2B Circuit Pack Description 7 35 Purpose of Circuit 7 35 Faceplate LED 7 35 General Description of Operation 7 36 Detailed Description of Operation 7 36 Quick Reference Summary 7 42 STS1E LAA4 Circu...

Page 277: ... 7 71 Faceplate LED 7 71 General Description of Operation 7 72 Detailed Description of Operation 7 73 Quick Reference Summary 7 78 LSSW LAA12B Circuit Pack Description 7 80 Purpose of Circuit 7 80 Faceplate LED 7 80 General Description of Operation 7 81 Detailed Description of Operation 7 82 Quick Reference Summary 7 85 OC48 RCVR A D 839B2 839B4B 839B5 and 839E5 Circuit Pack Description 7 86 Purpo...

Page 278: ...2 39J2 39R2 and 39S2 Circuit Pack Description 7 108 Purpose of Circuit 7 108 Faceplate LED 7 108 General Description of Operation 7 109 Detailed Description of Operation 7 110 Quick Reference Summary 7 114 Synchronization 7 116 TG3 DS1 LAA18 Circuit Pack Description 7 116 Purpose of Circuit 7 116 Faceplate LED 7 116 General Description of Operation 7 117 Detailed Description of Operation 7 118 Qui...

Page 279: ...Memory 4 Megabyte SYSMEM LAA25 Line Controller 4 Megabyte LNCTL 4 MEG LAA28 Overhead Controller Terminal OHCTL TERM LAA21 Overhead Controller Terminal OHCTL TERM LAA22 Overhead Controller Tributary TOHCTL LAA26 LAA23 was previously discontinued and replaced by LAA23B LAA23B was discontinued April 30 2001 and replaced by LAA23C The LAA23C circuit pack is compatible with non TARP Release 7 2 7 and l...

Page 280: ... 1 3 µm Standard Performance OC48 TRMTR A D 1 3 STD 739B4 OC48 Transmitter Add Drop 1 3 µm Standard Performance OC48 TRMTR A D STS1 1 3 STD 739B5 OC48 Transmitter Add Drop 1 3 µm High Performance OC48 TRMTR A D 1 3 HI PERF 739C2 OC48 Transmitter Add Drop 1 3 µm High Performance OC48 TRMTR A D STS1 1 3 HI PERF 739C5 OC48 Transmitter Add Drop 1 5 µm Wavelength n 360km Dispersion Limit OC48 TRMTR A D...

Page 281: ...ength 2 OC48 TRMTR A D 1 5 LBA W2 739S2 OC48 Transmitter Add Drop 1 5 µm LBA Standard Performance OC48 TRMTR A D STS1 1 5 LBA W2 739S5 OC48 Regenerator 1 3 µm Standard Performance OC48 REGENR 1 3 STD 39B1 OC48 Regenerator 1 3 µm Standard Performance OC48 REGENR 1 3 STD 39B2 OC48 Regenerator 1 3 µm High Performance OC48 REGENR 1 3 HI PERF 39C1 OC48 Regenerator 1 3 µm High Performance OC48 REGENR 1 ...

Page 282: ...9A OC12 X X LAA12 LSSW X X X X X X X X LAA12B LSSW X X X X X X X X LAA14 OW X X X X LAA17 TG3 DS1 X X X X X X X X LAA18 TG3 DS1 X X X X X X X X LAA21 OHCTL X X X X X X X X LAA22 OHCTL X X X X X X X X LAA23 SYSCTL X X X X X X X X X X X LAA23B SYSCTL X X X X X X X X X X X LAA23C SYSCTL X LAA25 SYSMEM X X X X X X X X X X X LAA26 TOHCTL X X X X LAA28 LNCTL 4 MEG X X X X X X X X 39B1 OC 48 REGENR 1 3 S...

Page 283: ...pack The LAA17 TG3 DS1 circuit pack has been discontinued and replaced with the LAA18 TG3 DS1 circuit pack The LAA22 OHCTL circuit pack is only used in slot OHCTL 1W of the High Speed Shelf of the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal The LAA23B circuit pack was discontinued April 30 2001 and replaced by the LAA23C circuit pack The LAA23C circuit pack is compatible with non TARP Release 7 2 7 and ...

Page 284: ...te Figure 7 1 The red FAULT LED is lighted when a circuit pack failure is detected or when the circuit pack loses power If the circuit pack loses power a separate path is provided for power from the SYSMEM circuit pack to light the FAULT LED on the SYSCTL circuit pack Figure 7 1 SYSCTL LAA23C Circuit Pack LAA23 was previously discontinued and replaced by LAA23B LAA23B was discontinued April 30 200...

Page 285: ...ontains the program that allows the microprocessor to copy the executable code and data for the system from the nonvolatile memory of the SYSMEM circuit pack into the operating memory of the SYSCTL circuit pack This allows the microprocessor to start up operation during a power up or a reset condition or when initializing new software The SYSCTL circuit pack also has a unique network services acce...

Page 286: ...OC 48 Repeater Bay Overhead Access Local Area Network Interface 7 The overhead access local area network OALAN interface allows the SYSCTL circuit pack to communicate with the Overhead Controller Terminal OHCTL TERM and Overhead Controller Tributary TOHCTL Release 6 and later circuit pack Common Language is a registered trademark and CLEI CLLI CLCI and CLFI are trademarks of Telcordia Technologies...

Page 287: ...The serial telemetry interface is used to transfer alarm status and control and performance monitoring information to and from a remote maintenance system using a 2400 baud EIA 422 port FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals only X 25 interface The X 25 interface supports X 25 protocol and the transaction language 1 TL1 message language The X 25 interface is used to report alarm and status conditi...

Page 288: ...tween the SYSCTL and the LNCTL circuit packs using the line controller local area network LCLAN FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals only c Communications between the SYSCTL circuit pack and the OHCTL TERM circuit pack s using the overhead access local area network OALAN d Communications between the SYSCTL circuit pack and the TOHCTL circuit pack using the overhead access local area network OALA...

Page 289: ...try and the processor parallel input output I O circuitry Faceplate LED 7 The SYSMEM circuit pack has a red FAULT LED on its faceplate Figure 7 3 The red FAULT LED is lighted during a reset condition when a circuit pack failure is detected or when the circuit pack loses power If the circuit pack loses power a separate path is provided for power from the System Controller SYSCTL circuit pack to lig...

Page 290: ...d board controllers Flash EPROM combines the nonvolatility of EPROM with the in circuit reprogramming ability of electrically erasable programmable read only memory EEPROM Flash EPROM allows in service software upgrades to be performed locally or remotely via modem connections Nonvolatile Configuration Data Storage 7 The nonvolatile configuration storage is provided by 128 kilobytes of EEPROM This...

Page 291: ...Circuit Pack Block Diagram EEPROM EPROM System Controller Memory Interface Flash Power Circuit User Panel LEDs Office Alarms Alarm Cutoff Parallel Telemetry User Settable Discrete Input User Settable Discrete Output Controller System FAULT LED Sanity Timer 48 V A 48 V B ...

Page 292: ...tical and major relays provide the alarm closure if power fails For more information about the office alarms interface refer to Volume I Section 6 Operations Interfaces User Panel LEDs and Controls 7 The SYSMEM circuit pack provides the outputs to light the following LEDs on the user panel Critical CR alarm Major MJ alarm Minor MN alarm Abnormal ABN status Near end activity NE ACTY Far end activit...

Page 293: ...nvironmental inputs only The four control outputs will be available in a future release For more information about the miscellaneous discrete interface refer to Volume I Section 6 Operations Interfaces Power Circuitry 7 The SYSMEM circuit pack receives two sources of 48 volts that are diode OR d fused and filtered Two modular DC to DC power converters produce 5 volts and 12 volts used on the circu...

Page 294: ...unctions 7 The SYSMEM circuit pack provides the following interface functions a Office alarms b User panel LEDs and controls c Parallel telemetry to remotely report alarm information to an operations system FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals only d User settable miscellaneous discrete interface that provides environmental inputs FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals and FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater...

Page 295: ...ring applications and is compatible with Release 1 1 1 TRM or later software Faceplate LED 7 The LNCTL circuit pack has a red FAULT LED on its faceplate Figure 7 5 The red FAULT LED is lighted during a reset condition when a circuit pack failure is detected or when the circuit pack loses power If the circuit pack loses power a separate path is provided for power from the System Controller SYSCTL c...

Page 296: ...llers on each circuit pack associated with an OC 48 high speed line and the System Controller SYSCTL circuit pack Detailed Description of Operation 7 Control Circuitry 7 Processor 7 Figure 7 6 provides an overall block diagram of the LNCTL circuit pack The LNCTL circuit pack is the middle level processor in the three level control hierarchy of the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Figure 7 6 LNCTL Ci...

Page 297: ... type version information For more information about memory administration refer to Volume I Section 8 Administration and Provisioning Interface Circuitry 7 Line Controller Local Area Network Interface 7 The line controller local area network LCLAN interface allows the LNCTL circuit pack to communicate with the SYSCTL circuit pack Board Controller Local Area Network Interface 7 The board controlle...

Page 298: ... b Performs line specific computations c Controls the circuit pack faceplate FAULT LED d Isolates faults for the BCLANs Interface Functions 7 The LNCTL circuit pack provides the following interface functions a Communications between the LNCTL and SYSCTL circuit packs using the LCLAN interface b Communications between the LNCTL and the board controller on the circuit packs associated with a particu...

Page 299: ...e LAA22 West OHCTL TERM circuit pack are required for the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal equipped with the High Speed Shelf The LAA21 OHCTL TERM circuit pack is compatible with Releases 2 1 1 TRM 3 0 1 ADR and later software The LAA22 OHCTL TERM circuit pack is compatible with Release 3 0 1 ADR and later software only Faceplate LED 7 The OHCTL TERM circuit pack has a red FAULT LED on its fa...

Page 300: ... Overview for definitions of SONET sections lines and paths The OHCTL TERM circuit pack also interfaces with the SYSCTL circuit pack Detailed Description of Operation 7 Control Circuitry 7 Processor 7 Figure 7 8 provides an overall block diagram of the OHCTL TERM circuit pack The OHCTL TERM circuit pack provides protocol processing for the data communications channels and manages the overhead acce...

Page 301: ... Interface 7 The overhead access local area network OALAN interface allows the OHCTL TERM circuit pack to communicate with the SYSCTL circuit pack In Release 6 and later releases the OALAN allows the OHCTL TERM circuit pack to communicate with the Overhead Controller Tributary TOHCTL circuit pack Overhead Byte Interface 7 The overhead byte interface interacts with the overhead channel The overhead...

Page 302: ... The OHCTL TERM circuit pack receives two sources of 48 volts that are diode OR d fused and filtered A modular DC to DC power converter produces 5 volts used on the circuit pack The OHCTL TERM circuit pack monitors the two 48 volt sources to the circuit pack If the OHCTL TERM circuit pack detects a failure of the onboard fuse or power converter the red FAULT LED will light If the fuse or power con...

Page 303: ...t pack and the receive byte processor on the OC48 RCVR circuit pack via the overhead channel d Combines the section and line data communications channel section and line orderwire user bytes and growth bytes to form the transmit overhead channel e Splits the received overhead channel into the section and line data communications channel section and line orderwire user bytes and growth bytes f Send...

Page 304: ...M 2000 Multiplexer The LAA26 TOHCTL is compatible with Release 6 0 0 ADR and later software Release 7 1 supports only 0x1 OC 12 DCC Release 7 2 and later releases support 0x1 and 1 1 OC 12 DCC Faceplate LED 7 The TOHCTL circuit pack has a red FAULT LED on its faceplate Figure 7 9 The red FAULT LED is lighted during a reset condition when a circuit pack failure is detected or when the circuit pack ...

Page 305: ... Overview for definitions of SONET sections lines and paths The TOHCTL circuit pack also interfaces with the OHCTL TERM and SYSCTL circuit packs Detailed Description of Operation 7 Control Circuitry 7 Processor 7 Figure 7 10 provides an overall block diagram of the TOHCTL circuit pack The processor performs protocol processing for layer 3 network of the Open Systems Interconnection OSI 7 layer sta...

Page 306: ... July 2002 Figure 7 10 TOHCTL Circuit Pack Block Diagram FAULT LED Sanity Timer Access LAN Interface Processor Memory DCC Interface To Overhead Channel From Power Circuit Overhead OC 3 OC 12 Overhead Access LAN 48V A 48V B 8 2 8 2 OC 3 OC 12 ...

Page 307: ...try 7 DCC Interface 7 The DCC interface interacts with the OC 3 OC 12 1 3 STD circuit packs on the Low Speed Shelf System Controller Up to eight LS INTFC slots 1A through 8B equipped with OC3 OC 12 1 3 STD circuit packs may be assigned to the DCC interface The DCC interface performs protocol processing for layer 1 physical and layer 2 data link of the OSI 7 layer stack for the OC 3 OC 12 section D...

Page 308: ...2 section DCC using the CIT serial telemetry and message based operations system X 25 interfaces for single ended operations Power Circuitry 7 The TOHCTL circuit pack receives two sources of 48 volts that are diode OR d fused and filtered A modular DC to DC power converter produces 5 volts used on the circuit pack The TOHCTL circuit pack monitors the two 48 volt sources to the circuit pack If the ...

Page 309: ...section overhead channels b Provides communications with the OC 3 OC 12 1 3 STD circuit packs via the overhead channel and DCC interface c Performs low level layers 1 through 3 of the OSI 7 layer stack protocol processing for the OC 3 OC 12 section DCC d Provides communications with the OHCTL TERM and SYSCTL circuit packs using the OALAN interface e Controls the circuit pack faceplate FAULT LED ...

Page 310: ...ess at repeater sites The LAA14 OW circuit pack is compatible with Release 2 1 0 RPTR and later software Faceplate 7 Figure 7 11 shows the OW circuit pack faceplate The faceplate of the OW circuit pack does not have a red FAULT LED Figure 7 11 OW LAA14 Circuit Pack General Description of Operation 7 The OW circuit pack assembles and disassembles the embedded information for the SONET section overh...

Page 311: ... the following overhead bytes from the interconnection panel of the Repeater Shelf System Controller Section orderwire User The overhead byte interface multiplexes this information and sends it via the overhead channel to the transmit byte processor TBP on the OC48 Regenerator OC48 REGENR circuit pack for transmission over the OC 48 high speed line This information provides end to end communicatio...

Page 312: ...er converter produces 5 volts used on the circuit pack Quick Reference Summary 7 The OW circuit pack performs the following control and interface functions a Provides communications between the transmit byte processor on the OC48 REGENR circuit pack and the receive byte processor on the OC48 REGENR circuit pack via the overhead channel b Combines the section orderwire and user bytes to form the tr...

Page 313: ...rcuit pack has a red FAULT LED on its faceplate Figure 7 13 The red FAULT LED is continuously lighted when a circuit pack failure is detected or when the circuit pack loses power If the circuit pack loses power a separate path is provided for power from the Line Controller LNCTL circuit pack to light the FAULT LED on the DS3 circuit pack The board controller on the DS3 circuit pack detects hardwar...

Page 314: ...xes it to three DS3 signals The DS3 circuit pack also interfaces with the Line Controller LNCTL circuit pack for that particular OC 48 high speed line Detailed Description of Operation 7 Transmission Circuitry 7 Transmit Direction 7 Figure 7 14 provides an overall block diagram of the DS3 circuit pack Figure 7 14 DS3 Circuit Pack Block Diagram DS3 DS3 HS OUT DS3 STS 1 From DSX 3 From LSSW Input Pr...

Page 315: ... signals are then sent to the DS3 STS 1 synchronizer desynchronizer Each STS 1 signal goes through STS 1 pointer processing and the STS 1 path overhead is removed and processed After each DS3 signal is recovered from the STS 1 payload envelope the DS3 P bits may be monitored and corrected through a provisionable violation monitor and removal function with optional alarm indication signals AIS The ...

Page 316: ...signal and sends it to an 8 KHz synchronization generator that is part of the high speed interface The 8 KHz synchronization signal and 51 84 MHz clock signals are connected to each DS3 STS 1 synchronizer desynchronizer Protection Circuitry 7 Low Speed Interface Protection 7 Optional 1xM M 16 revertive DS3 circuit pack protection is provided A DS3 protection bus is implemented with on board relays...

Page 317: ... and later releases the OC48 TRMTR circuit pack may switch to select the standby 51 84 Mb s signal STS 1 tributary from the secondary node This completes the circuit from the secondary node to the termination node in the ring Synchronization Reference Protection 7 Synchronization reference switching is done by selecting the primary or secondary synchronization reference signal from the TG3 DS1 cir...

Page 318: ...parameters are measured on the 155 52 Mb s signals from the OC48 RCVR circuit pack The DS3 line errored seconds count is based only on B3ZS coding violations and bipolar violations In releases prior to 5 the DS3 path coding violations errored seconds severely errored seconds severely errored frame AIS seconds and unavailable seconds counts are based on P bit errors In Release 5 and later releases ...

Page 319: ...converter produces 5 volts used on the circuit pack The LSSW circuit packs supply power to the input and output protection relays on the DS3 circuit packs If the DS3 circuit pack detects a failure of the onboard fuse or power converter the red FAULT LED will light If the fuse or power converter fails the LNCTL circuit pack provides 5 volts to light the FAULT LED on the DS3 circuit pack ...

Page 320: ...R circuit pack b Demultiplexes the 155 52 Mb s into three STS 1 signals c Extracts the path overhead and the embedded DS3 signal from each STS 1 signal d Desynchronizes the DS3 signals e Encodes each DS3 signal into a B3ZS format f Provides three DS3 signals to a DSX 3 panel or equivalent Timing and Control Functions 7 The DS3 circuit pack performs the following timing and control functions a Sele...

Page 321: ...rom the OC48 RCVR circuit pack c Detects STS 1 path AIS in the 155 52 Mb s signal from the OC48 RCVR circuit pack d Detects RDI P signals in the 155 52 Mb s signal from the OC48 RCVR circuit pack e Inserts an RDI P signal in the 155 52 Mb s signal transmitted toward the OC48 TRMTR circuit pack f Inserts an STS 1 path trace and path signal label signals in the 155 52 Mb s signal transmitted toward ...

Page 322: ...e 7 15 The red FAULT LED is continuously lighted when a circuit pack failure is detected or when the circuit pack loses power If the circuit pack loses power a separate path is provided for power from the Line Controller LNCTL circuit pack to light the FAULT LED on the STS1E circuit pack The board controller on the STS1E circuit pack detects hardware and software faults on the circuit pack When a ...

Page 323: ... STS1E circuit pack also interfaces with the Line Controller LNCTL circuit pack for that particular OC 48 high speed line Detailed Description of Operation 7 Transmission Circuitry 7 Transmit Direction 7 Figure 7 16 provides an overall block diagram of the STS1E circuit pack Figure 7 16 STS1E Circuit Pack Block Diagram Line Line HS OUT From LSSW Input Protection Intfc Output Protection Intfc Power...

Page 324: ...VR circuit pack The high speed interface recovers the 155 52 MHz clock signal retimes the 155 52 Mb s signal and sends it to the byte processor The byte processor descrambles and demultiplexes the 155 52 Mb s signal into three 51 84 Mb s STS 1 signals The three STS 1 signals are then sent to the receive pointer processor The receive pointer processor performs pointer processing on the three STS 1 ...

Page 325: ...it pack When the STS1E circuit pack is reinserted the relays are in the protection state until the LNCTL circuit pack determines that the circuit pack is good High Speed Protection 7 If an OC 48 signal fails or is degraded the LNCTL circuit pack broadcasts a switch request to the board controllers on the STS1E circuit packs via the BCLAN In the transmit direction the STS1E circuit packs perform he...

Page 326: ...signal transmitted towards the STSX 1 panel back into the transmit receive byte processor input The loopback is implemented in response to CIT commands via the SYSCTL and LNCTL circuit packs and controlled by board controller Performance Monitoring 7 The STS1E circuit pack provides performance monitoring circuitry for the following performance monitoring parameters EC 1 section severely errored fr...

Page 327: ...nverter produces 5 volts used on the circuit pack The LSSW circuit packs supply power to the input and output protection relays on the STS1E circuit packs If the STS1E circuit pack detects a failure of the onboard fuse or power converter the red FAULT LED will light If the fuse or power converter fails the LNCTL circuit pack provides 5 volts to light the FAULT LED on the STS1E circuit pack ...

Page 328: ...rcuit pack b Demultiplexes the 155 52 Mb s into three STS 1 signals c Extracts the pointer bytes d Converts each internal STS 1 signal to an EC 1 signal e Provides three standard B3ZS encoded EC 1 signals to an STSX 1 panel or equivalent Timing and Control Functions 7 The STS1E circuit pack performs the following timing and control functions a Selects the primary or secondary 155 52 MHz timing sig...

Page 329: ...ributary of the 155 52 Mb s signal transmitted toward the OC48 TRMTR circuit pack when incoming from the cross connect panel EC 1 LOS LOF LOP or EC 1 line AIS is detected c Detects loss of pointer LOP in the 155 52 Mb s signal from the OC48 RCVR circuit pack and inserts STS 1 path AIS in the EC 1 signals transmitted toward the cross connect panel d Inserts STS 1 path AIS in each STS 1 tributary of...

Page 330: ... 1 1 protected configuration In a 1 1 configuration all adjacent LS INTFC slots for example slots 2A and 2B MUST be equipped with either LAA10 circuit packs or LAA10B circuit packs but not a mix of the two in both slots IF that slot pair is configured for 1 1 protection Faceplate LED 7 The OC3 1 3 STD circuit pack has a red FAULT LED on its faceplate Figure 7 17 The red FAULT LED is continuously l...

Page 331: ... OC3 1 3 STD circuit pack accepts one STS 3 3c signal from an OC48 Receiver OC48 RCVR circuit pack and demultiplexes it to three STS 1 signals The three STS 1 signals are synchronized to the system clock multiplexed back to one STS 3 3c signal and converted to an optical OC 3 signal for transmission The OC3 1 3 STD circuit pack also interfaces with the Line Controller LNCTL circuit pack for that p...

Page 332: ... Transmit Direction BCLAN 48V B 48V A System Clock Transmit Pointer Processor Recieve Pointer Processor Electrical to Optical Module Power Circuit Board Controller Circuit Optical to Electrical Module OC 3 OC 3 STS 3 Byte Processor OC 3 Line STS 3 Byte Processor Low Speed SONET Overhead TOH Processor HS Intfc Timing Intfc From OC48 RCVRs To OC48 TRMTRs From TG3 DS1 s To From TOHCTL ...

Page 333: ...r processing on the three received STS 1 signals This synchronizes the STS 1 signals to the 51 84 MHz system clock The 51 84 MHz clock signal is obtained by dividing the 155 52 MHz from the Timing Generator Stratum 3 DS1 TG3 DS1 circuit packs by three The divide by three circuit is part of the low speed STS 3 byte processor The three STS 1 signals are then sent to the low speed STS 3 byte processo...

Page 334: ...esired the type of connector interface and the type of lightguide jumpers single mode or multimode All factory equipped OC3 1 3 STD circuit packs come with a removable ST type 7 1 dB lightguide buildout When installing or removing lightguide buildouts do not pull the beam front tab outward Pulling the beam front tab outward could result in breaking the beam front tab Control Circuitry 7 The board ...

Page 335: ...placed in adjacent A and B low speed interface slots of the Low Speed Shelf System Controller for example LS INTFC slots 2A and 2B Both OC3 1 3 STD circuit packs transmit the same OC 3 signal toward the lightguide cross connect panel or equivalent Both OC3 1 3 STD circuit packs receive the same OC 3 signal from the lightguide cross connect panel or equivalent and transmit STS 3 3c signals to the O...

Page 336: ...n autonomously select the primary or secondary The LNCTL circuit pack can inhibit this autonomous selection and make its own selection Fault Detection Circuitry 7 Monitoring and Testing 7 The board controller circuit monitors all the activities on the circuit pack The OC3 1 3 STD circuit pack has an in service and out of service built in test capability In service testing is continuous If an error...

Page 337: ...ignal received from the OC48 RCVR circuit pack the OC3 1 3 STD circuit pack inserts STS 1 path AIS in each STS 1 tributary of the OC 3 signal transmitted toward the lightguide cross connect panel When an internal fault is detected the OC3 1 3 STD circuit pack inserts STS 1 path AIS in each STS 1 tributary of the STS 3 3c signal transmitted toward the OC48 TRMTR circuit pack and in the OC 3 signal ...

Page 338: ... 52 Mb s g Provides the STS 3 3c signal to an OC48 TRMTR circuit pack h Accepts the OC 3 SONET section DCC bytes from the TOHCTL circuit pack Release 6 and later Receive Functions 7 The OC3 1 3 STD circuit pack performs the following receive functions a Receives an STS 3 3c signal 155 52 Mb s from an OC48 RCVR circuit pack b Recovers a 155 52 MHz clock signal from STS 3 3c signal and retimes the S...

Page 339: ... Controls the circuit pack faceplate FAULT LED Maintenance Signal Functions 7 The OC3 1 3 STD circuit pack performs the following maintenance signal functions a Detects incoming from the lightguide cross connect panel OC 3 loss of signal LOS loss of frame LOF and signal degrade SD based on the B2 error rate b Inserts STS 1 path AIS in each STS 1 tributary of the STS 3 3c signal 155 52 Mb s transmi...

Page 340: ...te Figure 7 20 The red FAULT LED is continuously lighted when a circuit pack failure is detected or when the circuit pack loses power If the circuit pack loses power a separate path is provided for power from the Line Controller LNCTL circuit pack to light the FAULT LED on the IS3 1 3 STD circuit pack The board controller on the IS3 1 3 STD circuit pack detects hardware and software faults on the ...

Page 341: ...t to three STS 1 signals The three STS 1 signals are synchronized to the system clock multiplexed back to one STS 3 3c signal and converted to an optical IS 3 signal for transmission The IS3 1 3 STD circuit pack also interfaces with the Line Controller LNCTL circuit pack for that particular OC 48 high speed line Detailed Description of Operation 7 Transmission Circuitry 7 Transmit Direction 7 Figu...

Page 342: ...ultiplexes the STS 3 3c signal into three STS 1 signals 51 84 Mb s and outputs the three STS 1 signals and a common clock signal to the transmit pointer processor The transmit pointer processor performs frequency adjustment and pointer processing on the three received STS 1 signals This synchronizes the STS 1 signals to the 51 84 MHz system clock The 51 84 MHz clock signal is obtained by dividing ...

Page 343: ...sen based on the attenuation desired the type of connector interface and the type of lightguide jumpers single mode or multimode All factory equipped IS3 1 3 STD circuit packs come with a removable ST type 7 1 dB lightguide buildout When installing or removing lightguide buildouts do not pull the beam front tab outward Pulling the beam front tab outward could result in breaking the beam front tab ...

Page 344: ...st be placed in adjacent A and B low speed interface slots of the Low Speed Shelf System Controller for example LS INTFC slots 2A and 2B Both IS3 1 3 STD circuit packs transmit the same IS 3 signal toward the lightguide cross connect panel or equivalent Both IS3 1 3 STD circuit packs receive the same IS 3 signal from the lightguide cross connect panel or equivalent and transmit STS 3 3c signals to...

Page 345: ...eports the error to the LNCTL circuit pack using the board controller local area network BCLAN An out of service test is performed whenever the IS3 1 3 STD circuit pack is inserted in a slot or when a reset is performed Loopbacks 7 The IS3 1 3 STD circuit pack provides IS 3 and STS 3 3c loopbacks for fault isolation and remote testing The IS 3 loopback loops the input from the IS 3 line back to th...

Page 346: ...he OC48 RCVR circuit pack the IS3 1 3 STD circuit pack inserts STS 1 path AIS in each STS 1 tributary of the IS 3 signal transmitted toward the lightguide cross connect panel When an internal fault is detected the IS3 1 3 STD circuit pack inserts STS 1 path AIS in each STS 1 tributary of the STS 3 3c signal transmitted toward the OC48 TRMTR circuit pack and in the IS 3 signal transmitted toward th...

Page 347: ... STS 3 3c signal 155 52 Mb s g Provides the STS 3 3c signal to an OC48 TRMTR circuit pack h Accepts the IS 3 SONET section DCC bytes from the TOHCTL circuit pack Receive Functions 7 The IS3 1 3 STD circuit pack performs the following receive functions a Receives an STS 3 3c signal 155 52 Mb s from an OC48 RCVR circuit pack b Recovers a 155 52 MHz clock signal from STS 3 3c signal and retimes the S...

Page 348: ... Controls the circuit pack faceplate FAULT LED Maintenance Signal Functions 7 The IS3 1 3 STD circuit pack performs the following maintenance signal functions a Detects incoming from the lightguide cross connect panel IS 3 loss of signal LOS loss of frame LOF and signal degrade SD based on the B2 error rate b Inserts STS 1 path AIS in each STS 1 tributary of the STS 3 3c signal 155 52 Mb s transmi...

Page 349: ...LT LED is continuously lighted when a circuit pack failure is detected or when the circuit pack loses power If the circuit pack loses power a separate path is provided for power from the Line Controller LNCTL circuit pack to light the FAULT LED on the OC12 1 3 STD circuit pack The board controller on the OC12 1 3 STD circuit pack detects hardware and software faults on the circuit pack When a faul...

Page 350: ...the board controller interfaces i e the main connector slots corresponding to the circuit pack locations 1A 3A 5A and 7A are slots 1B 3B 5B and 7B respectively In the transmit direction OC 12 12C line in to the LS backplane out the OC12 circuit pack converts the OC 12 12C optical input signal into an electrical STS 12 12C signal which is demultiplexed into four STS 3 rate signals The four STS 3 ra...

Page 351: ...it pack is shown in Figure 7 23 Figure 7 23 OC12 1 3 STD Circuit Pack Block Diagram Optical Rx STS 12 4 STS 3 High Speed Switch MATRIX To From Backplane Laser Transmitter 1 4 DEMUX 4 1 MUX PP PP RBP TBP e o STS 3 4 4 4 4 4 e o STS 12 5V 5 2V 2 2V 48V A 48V B 48V RTN Board Controller BC LAN Tx Direction Rx Direction nc ft2000 003 Clock Recovery 4 ...

Page 352: ...rocessor which can be used for automatic path AIS insertion when there is a loss of frame loss of clock or a loss or received STS 3 rate data to the receive byte processor The outputs of the transmit pointer processor are connected to the HS switch matrix which distributes them to the backplane Receive Direction 7 In the receive direction four electrical inputs from each of the LS slots are connec...

Page 353: ...ck signal to be selected When the network element is in the through timed mode the OC 12 Timing Direction parameter determines the high speed line 1W or 1E from which the OC 12 derives its timing The OC 12 Timing Direction parameter is user provisionable via the CIT and its default value is 1W This parameter may be needed when the OC 12 is used to distribute timing to far end equipment When the ne...

Page 354: ...rcuit pack switches to selects the standby 155 52 Mb s signals STS 3 tributary from the secondary node This completes the circuit from the secondary node to the termination node in the ring Synchronization Reference Protection 7 Synchronization reference switching is done by selecting the primary or secondary synchronization reference signal from the TG3 DS1 circuit packs The timing interface circ...

Page 355: ...lled by the board controller Performance Monitoring 7 The OC12 1 3 STD circuit pack monitors the following performance monitoring parameters Laser bias current Optical transmit power Received optical power Loss of signal Loss of frame Bit error rate thresholds When an incoming OC 12 signal defect from the lightguide cross connect panel is detected the OC12 1 3 STD circuit pack inserts STS 1 path A...

Page 356: ... an electrical STS 12 12c signal c Recovers a 622 08 MHz clock signal from STS 12 12c signal and retimes the STS 12 12c signal with the recovered clock d Descrambles and demultiplexes the STS 12 12c signal into four STS 3 signals 155 52 Mb s e Scrambles and multiplexes the four STS 3 signals into four STS 3 3c signals each at 155 52 Mb s f Provides four STS 3 signals to an OC48 TRMTR circuit pack ...

Page 357: ...s e Stores inventory information CLEI code serial number etc f Controls the circuit pack faceplate FAULT LED Maintenance Signal Functions 7 The OC12 1 3 STD circuit pack performs the following maintenance signal functions a Detects incoming from the lightguide cross connect panel OC 12 loss of signal LOS loss of frame LOF and signal degrade SD based on the B2 error rate b Inserts STS 1 path AIS in...

Page 358: ...1 Electrical Interface STS1E circuit packs Faceplate LED 7 The LSSW circuit pack has a red FAULT LED on its faceplate Figure 7 24 The red FAULT LED is lighted when a circuit pack failure is detected or when the circuit pack loses power If the circuit pack loses power a separate path is provided for power from the Line Controller LNCTL circuit pack to light the FAULT LED on the LSSW circuit pack Th...

Page 359: ... protection STS1E circuit pack If a service DS3 or STS1E circuit pack fails the input protection switching relays on the failed circuit pack route the three low speed signals DS3 or EC 1 to the LSSW circuit pack in the IN slot The LSSW circuit pack in the IN slot switches the three low speed signals DS3 or EC 1 to the protection DS3 or STS1E circuit pack In the receive direction the LSSW circuit p...

Page 360: ...of the LSSW circuit pack Figure 7 25 LSSW Circuit Pack Block Diagram DS3 1 2 3 4 5 16 Transmit LSSW IN Service Circuit Packs Service Interface Switch Protection Circuit Pack Receive LSSW OUT Board Controller Circuit External Relay Control Circuit Power Circuit Protection Service BCLAN 48V A 48V B DS3 STS1E Interface 1 2 16 1 DS3 STS1E Circuit Packs Protection STS1E Circuit Pack ...

Page 361: ...ch performs a 1 16 selection to output the low speed signals to the output protection switching relays on the failed DS3 or STS1E circuit pack and on to the DSX 3 or STSX 1 panel or equivalent When a service DS3 or STS1E circuit pack is reinserted in a slot the protection switching relays remain in the protection state until the LNCTL circuit pack determines that the circuit pack is good Control C...

Page 362: ... 4B The LSSW circuit pack in the OUT slot powers the protection switching relays on the DS3 and STS1E circuit packs in slots 5A through 8B The LSSW circuit pack monitors the two 48 volt sources to the circuit pack and any failures are reported to the board controller If the LSSW circuit pack detects a failure of the onboard fuse or power converter the red FAULT LED will light If the fuse or power ...

Page 363: ... three DS3 or EC 1 signals from the protection DS3 or STS1E circuit pack b Switches the three DS3 or EC 1 signals to the correct service DS3 or STS1E circuit pack and to the DSX 3 or STSX 1 panel or equivalent Control Functions 7 The LSSW circuit pack performs the following control functions a Controls and powers the protection switching relays on the DS3 and STS1E circuit packs b Stores inventory...

Page 364: ...CVR A D circuit pack is a cost reduced version of the 839B2 OC48 RCVR A D circuit pack and is compatible with Release 7 0 0 ADR and later software The 839B5 OC48 RCVR A D circuit pack is an enhanced version of the 839B4B OC48 RCVR A D circuit pack with an STS 1 time slot assignment capability that allows STS 1 cross connections The 839B5 OC48 RCVR A D circuit pack is compatible with Release 7 0 0 ...

Page 365: ...hted when a circuit pack failure is detected or when the circuit pack loses power If the circuit pack loses power a separate path is provided for power from the Line Controller LNCTL circuit pack to light the FAULT LED on the OC48 RCVR A D circuit pack The board controller on the OC48 RCVR A D circuit pack detects hardware and software faults on the circuit pack When a fault occurs the board contr...

Page 366: ... signals are then passed to the low speed interface circuit packs or the OC48 TRMTR A D circuit pack in the opposite direction bidirectional ring applications Detailed Description of Operation 7 Transmission Circuitry 7 Figure 7 27 shows an overall block diagram of 839B2 and 839B4B OC48 RCVR A D circuit packs and Figure 7 28 shows an overall block diagram of the 839B5 and 839E5 OC48 RCVR A D circu...

Page 367: ...he STS 48 data signal and 2 5 GHz clock signal are then passed to the byte demultiplexer The byte demultiplexer receives the STS 48 data signal from the optical to electrical converter and demultiplexes the STS 48 data signal into sixteen 155 52 Mb s data signals The sixteen 155 52 Mb s data signals and a 155 52 MHz clock signal are sent to the receive byte processor 155 Mb s Signals SONET Overhea...

Page 368: ...parity and inserts overhead alarm indication signals AIS The status of the K1 and K2 bytes used for protection switching is also monitored A timing signal 25 92 MHz is derived from the 2 5 GHz clock signal and sent to the Timing Generator Stratum 3 DS1 TG3 DS1 circuit packs Figure 7 28 OC48 RCVR A D 839B5 and 839E5 Circuit Pack Block Diagram 155 Mb s Signals SONET Overhead BCLAN OC 48 25 92 MHz Ti...

Page 369: ...m the two devices The STS 1 inputs can be broadcast to several or all outputs but do not have to be connected to any output The 162 STS 1 signals are multiplexed back into 54 STS 3 signals after time slot assignment The connection matrix of the STS 1 TSA devices is programmed by the Board Controller The switch fabric provisioning is fully data hitless and 100 percent non blocking The STS 3 inputs ...

Page 370: ...ack is protection switched by the LNCTL circuit pack in response to an external command incoming signal failure or internal equipment fault The switch matrix on the protection OC48 RCVR A D circuit pack also allows access to the protection OC 48 high speed line OC 48 point to point applications or the protection 155 52 Mb s signals STS 3 tributaries in bidirectional 2 fiber ring applications for l...

Page 371: ...the BCLAN Performance Monitoring 7 The OC48 RCVR A D circuit pack provides performance monitoring circuitry for the following performance monitoring parameters Received optical power Loss of signal Loss of frame Bit error rate thresholds When an incoming line AIS high speed defect or internal fault is detected the OC48 RCVR A D circuit pack performs the following Generates an STS 1 path AIS if pos...

Page 372: ...rcuit pack and any failures are reported to the board controller If the OC48 RCVR A D circuit pack detects a failure of the onboard fuse or power converter the red FAULT LED will light If the fuse or 5 volt power converter fails the LNCTL circuit pack provides 5 volts to light the FAULT LED on the OC48 RCVR A D circuit pack ...

Page 373: ...e direction in bidirectional ring applications Timing and Control Functions 7 The OC48 RCVR A D circuit pack performs the following timing and control functions a Extracts a 2 5 GHz clock signal from the incoming OC 48 signal b Generates a 25 92 MHz timing reference signal and provides it to the TG3 DS1 circuit packs c Tests the incoming 155 52 Mb s signals for section B1 and line B2 parity errors...

Page 374: ...forms the following maintenance signal functions a Detects incoming OC 48 loss of signal LOS and loss of frame LOF b Detects line AIS from the incoming OC 48 signal c Detects RDI L signals from the incoming OC 48 signal d Inserts an STS 1 path AIS in each STS 1 tributary of the 155 52 Mb s signal transmitted to the low speed interface circuit pack e Signals the OC48 TRMTR circuit pack to insert an...

Page 375: ...R and later software The 739E_ 739G_ and 739H_ circuit packs are used in DWDM applications and are compatible with Release 7 2 and later software The 739B4 OC48 TRMTR A D 1 3 STD circuit pack is a cost reduced version of the 739B2 OC48 TRMTR A D 1 3 STD circuit pack and is compatible with Release 7 0 0 ADR and later software The following OC48 TRMTR circuit packs have an STS 1 time slot assignment...

Page 376: ...om the Line Controller LNCTL circuit pack to light the FAULT LED on the OC48 TRMTR A D circuit pack The board controller on the OC48 TRMTR A D circuit pack detects hardware and software faults on the circuit pack When a fault occurs the board controller is reset and the FAULT LED on the circuit pack is continuously lighted Figure 7 29 OC48 TRMTR A D 739B2 739B4 739B5 739C2 739C5 739E 1 16 739G 1 8...

Page 377: ...s out of 96 STS 1 signals for STS 1 time slot assignment The 739B5 739C5 739E_ 739H_ 739G_ 739J5 739P5 739R5 and 739S5 OC48 TRMTR A D circuit packs then multiplex the 48 STS 1 signals into sixteen 155 52 Mb s signals The sixteen 155 52 Mb s signals are frame synchronized and multiplexed into an STS 48 signal 2 488 Gb s SONET line and section overhead bytes are also inserted into the STS 48 signal ...

Page 378: ...e add drop bus provides access to the 155 52 Mb s signals from the low speed interface circuit packs The high speed protection bus provides access to the 155 52 Mb s signals from the OC48 RCVR A D circuit pack in the same direction for high speed line protection switching The through bus provides access to the 155 52 Mb s signals from the OC48 RCVR A D circuit pack that are passed through in bidir...

Page 379: ...ed from OC 48 high speed line 1E to 1W or from OC 48 high speed line 1W to 1E The switching matrix routes sixteen 155 52 Mb s signals to the timing recovery circuit The timing recovery circuit extracts a 155 52 MHz timing signal from the data stream retimes the data with respect to the output clock and passes it to the pointer processor Figure 7 31 OC48 TRMTR A D Circuit Pack 739B5 739C5 739E 1 16...

Page 380: ...interleaved OC 48 line signal The STS 1 TSA device multiplexes the 48 STS 1 signals to sixteen STS 3 155 52 Mb s signals and sends them to the transmit byte processor The transmit byte processor combines the pointer and payload information from the 155 52 Mb s signals with internally and externally generated SONET transport overhead to form a parallel scrambled format The optional Overhead Control...

Page 381: ... TRMTR A D circuit pack is protection switched by the LNCTL circuit pack in response to an external command incoming signal failure or internal equipment fault The switch matrix on the protection OC48 TRMTR A D circuit pack allows access to the protection OC 48 high speed line OC 48 point to point applications or the protection 155 52 Mb s signals STS 3 tributaries in bidirectional 2 fiber ring ap...

Page 382: ...he circuit pack The OC48 TRMTR A D circuit pack has an in service and out of service built in test capability An out of service test is performed whenever the OC48 TRMTR A D circuit pack resets or is commanded to reset by the LNCTL circuit pack through the board controller local area network BCLAN In service testing is continuous The board controller circuit reports errors when they occur to the L...

Page 383: ...volts used on the circuit pack The OC48 TRMTR A D circuit pack monitors the two 48 volt sources to the circuit pack and any failures are reported to the board controller If the OC48 TRMTR A D circuit pack detects a failure of the onboard fuse or power converter the red FAULT LED will light If the fuse or 5 volt power converter fails the LNCTL circuit pack provides 5 volts to light the FAULT LED on...

Page 384: ...er transmitter to produce a SONET standard OC 48 optical signal Timing and Control Functions 7 The OC48 TRMTR A D circuit pack performs the following timing and control functions a Selects the primary or secondary 155 52 MHz synchronization signal from the TG3 DS1 circuit packs b Provides selector circuitry for low speed protection switching c Provides selector circuitry at the primary node for du...

Page 385: ...h STS 1 tributary of the outgoing OC 48 high speed signal c Inserts a line AIS in the outgoing OC 48 high speed signal d Passes through any RDI P signals from the low speed interface circuit packs to the outgoing OC 48 high speed signal e Passes through any embedded DS3 AIS from the DS3 circuit packs to the outgoing OC 48 high speed signal f Passes through any embedded STS 1 path AIS from the low ...

Page 386: ...9J2 OC48 REGENR circuit pack is compatible with Release 4 0 0 RPTR software and later The 39R2 and 39S2 OC48 REGENR circuit packs are compatible with Release 6 0 0 RPTR software and later Faceplate LED 7 The OC48 REGENR circuit pack has a red FAULT LED on its faceplate Figure 7 32 The red FAULT LED is continuously lighted when a circuit pack failure is detected or when the circuit pack loses power...

Page 387: ...rcuit pack accepts the incoming OC 48 signal 2 5 Gb s and converts it to an electrical STS 48 signal The STS 48 signal is descrambled and demultiplexed into sixteen 155 52 Mb s signals In a future release the SONET section overhead bytes are extracted The sixteen 155 52 Mb s signals are then frame synchronized and multiplexed back into an STS 48 signal 2 488 Gb s The electrical STS 48 signal is th...

Page 388: ...ctor interface the single mode lightguide jumper is equipped with There are two types of lightguide buildouts available for 39B1 and 39C1 OC48 REGENR circuit packs ST type and FC PC type There are three types of lightguide buildouts available for 39B2 39C2 39J2 39R2 and 39S2 OC48 REGENR circuit packs ST type FC PC type and SC type All factory equipped OC48 REGENR circuit packs come with a removabl...

Page 389: ...are also extracted and sent to the optional Orderwire OW circuit pack A synchronization reference signal 155 52 MHz is also generated and sent to the phase locked loop PLL circuit The sixteen 155 52 Mb s signals are then passed to the transmit byte processor The transmit byte processor combines the pointer and payload information from the 155 52 Mb s signals to form a parallel format The 155 52 Mb...

Page 390: ...Circuitry 7 The receive byte processor of the OC48 REGENR circuit pack generates a 155 52 MHz reference signal from the 2 5 GHz clock signal and sends it to the phase locked loop PLL circuit The PLL circuit uses this 155 52 MHz reference signal or the alarm indication signal AIS clock as a timing reference The PLL circuit provides a 2 5 GHz line rate clock signal to the multiplexer circuitry If a ...

Page 391: ...igh speed signal Power Circuitry 7 The OC48 REGENR circuit pack receives two sources of 48 volts that are diode OR d fused and filtered Modular DC to DC power converters produce 1 8 5 12 15 2 and 5 2 volts used on the circuit pack The OC48 REGENR circuit pack monitors the two 48 volt sources to the circuit pack and any failures are reported to the board controller If the OC48 REGENR circuit pack d...

Page 392: ...t Functions 7 The OC48 REGENR circuit pack performs the following transmit functions a Bit interleaves the sixteen 155 52 Mb s signals to produce a SONET standard STS 48 signal b Modulates a laser transmitter to produce a SONET standard OC 48 optical signal c Inserts the SONET transport overhead bytes in the OC 48 line Timing and Control Functions 7 The OC48 REGENR circuit pack performs the follow...

Page 393: ...e OC48 REGENR circuit pack performs the following maintenance signal functions a Inserts line AIS in the outgoing OC 48 high speed signal b Passes RDI P signals embedded DS3 AIS line AIS and RDI L signals from the incoming OC 48 high speed signal to the outgoing OC 48 high speed signal ...

Page 394: ...iscontinued and replaced with the LAA18 TG3 DS1 circuit pack The LAA18 TG3 DS1 circuit pack is compatible with Releases 2 1 1 TRM and later software Faceplate LED 7 The TG3 DS1 circuit pack has a red FAULT LED on its faceplate Figure 7 34 The red FAULT LED is lighted when a circuit pack failure is detected or when the circuit pack loses power If the circuit pack loses power a separate path is prov...

Page 395: ...ode The LAA18 TG3 DS1 circuit pack will also provide an external DS1 synchronization output signal to the office building integrated timing supply BITS clock or other SONET network elements in an office This DS1 output signal is derived directly from the 25 92 MHz line reference signal Through timed mode In the through timed mode FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal only the TG3 DS1 circuit pack ...

Page 396: ...ock used by the west OC48 TRMTR As a provisioning option the user may choose which OC 48 line to derive timing from e g E W or Auto Also as a provisioning option the user may choose the backup option Backup E Backup W Auto or none The type switching is always revertive Detailed Description of Operation 7 Control Circuitry 7 Figure 7 35 shows an overall block diagram of the LAA18 TG3 DS1 circuit pa...

Page 397: ...eferences One external DS1 reference signal 1 544 MHz from a stratum 3 or better source One line reference signal 25 92 MHz from the OC48 Receiver circuit pack up to four line reference signals in a future release One cross coupled reference signal 25 92 MHz from the companion TG3 DS1 circuit pack 48V A TG3 Power Board Controller Circuit Companion BCLAN DS1 Reference Cross Coupled Reference Refere...

Page 398: ...utput signal to the office BITS clock or other SONET network elements in an office In the LAA18 TG3 DS1 circuit pack Figure 7 35 the DS1 reference interface circuit derives the DS1 output signal directly from the 25 92 MHz line reference The DS1 reference interface circuit of the LAA18 TG3 DS1 circuit pack also accepts a 51 84 MHz signal from the digital phase locked loop circuit to generate DS1 a...

Page 399: ...ecutive zeros DS1 alarm indication signal AIS for at least 125 µsec Bit error rate BER greater than 2x10 4 for a period 3 seconds Loss of frame for a period 3 seconds Excessive out of frame count Clock frequency out of specifications If one TG3 DS1 circuit pack detects an incoming DS1 reference failure it will signal the LNCTL circuit pack The LNCTL circuit pack signals the companion TG3 DS1 circu...

Page 400: ...enerates timing from an on board high stability fixed oscillator The oscillator has a long term accuracy of 4 6 ppm d Line Timed In the line timed mode the TG3 DS1 circuit pack phase locks to an OC 48 line reference signal 25 92 MHz provided by the OC48 Receiver circuit pack FT 2000 OC 48 ADR Terminal only The direction selected E W or Auto is determined via provisioning Also the method for obtain...

Page 401: ...als a A 155 52 MHz signal is distributed to the OC48 Transmitter OC48 TRMTR and low speed interface circuit packs b A 25 92 MHz cross coupled reference signal is distributed to the companion TG3 DS1 circuit pack c A 1 544 MHz DS1 signal is made available as a synchronization reference for the office BITS clock or other central office equipment Control Functions 7 The TG3 DS1 circuit pack provides ...

Page 402: ...Circuit Pack Descriptions 7 124 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 403: ...are Upgrades 8 9 Cross Connections 8 11 Cross Connect Rules 8 11 STS 3 Cross Connections 8 13 Limited STS 1 Cross Connections 8 24 STS 1 Cross Connections 8 28 Extra Traffic Capability 8 38 Rolling Cross Connections 8 40 Cross Connection Inputs 8 41 Cross Connection Examples 8 51 OC 3 Data Communications Channel Assignment Inputs 8 84 OC 3 Data Communications Channel Assignment Examples 8 86 OC 12...

Page 404: ...nal Values 8 98 General 8 98 FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal 8 99 Local Provisioning 8 109 FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal 8 109 FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay 8 137 Pre provisioning Circuit Packs 8 143 Provisioning on Circuit Pack Replacement 8 143 Circuit Pack Slot and Low Speed Port Provisioning States 8 144 ...

Page 405: ...d original values Administration 8 Memory Administration 8 The FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System memory consists of the following Executable code This is the collection of programs that controls the operation of the system Data This is a collection of system parameters and their associated values A parameter is a characteristic of the system that affects its operation A value is a number text string ...

Page 406: ...tem The third set of data is located in the volatile memory of the SYSCTL LNCTL and OHCTL TERM circuit packs plus the board controller of the other circuit packs This set contains the system parameters and their current values If the system loses power and then regains power the executable code and the data with current values are copied from the nonvolatile memory in the SYSMEM circuit pack to th...

Page 407: ... values in the SYSMEM circuit pack and initiates the reset function see Reset All cross connections loopbacks and switch states are retained However 1 1 protection switch states are not retained Automatically provisioned parameters are unaffected by this command The current values that are not replaced with their original values are those set with the following inputs CONFIGURATION Set Date SECURI...

Page 408: ...circuit pack is also provided Refer to the CONFIGURATION Retrieve Equipment input in Volume I Section 11 Craft Interface Terminal Usage Security 8 General 8 The FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System provides a security function to protect against unauthorized access to the CIT functions for example provisioning The security function limits access to the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System to legitimate users ...

Page 409: ...r is also provided for TL1 logins using the X 25 interface or the DCC Release 3 provides a nonprovisionable 20 minute inactivity timer and Release 2 provides a nonprovisionable 15 minute inactivity timer If the user does not interact with the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System within the provisioned time the user will automatically be disconnected The inactivity timer is reset by any data received at ...

Page 410: ...ith potential for massive service interruption In releases prior to Release 4 1 the privileged logins have access to all the system functional capabilities Only the privileged logins have access to the security and access functions These functions include assigning changing logins passwords for other users enabling disabling ports setting target identifier TID names and resetting the system There ...

Page 411: ...only users are allowed to access the network element When logins are allowed nonprivileged users may log in and access the network element When logins are not allowed login attempts are denied Privileged users are not affected by this security measure and are always allowed to log in Network element security is intended to disable nonprivileged logins quickly on a temporary basis This capability m...

Page 412: ...ttempt to login they will not be allowed to execute any commands until they change their password To enable password aging the password aging interval must be provisioned in the range of 7 to 999 days To disable password aging the password aging interval must be provisioned to 0 days If password aging is enabled a user may not change a password unless at least 7 days have passed since the last pas...

Page 413: ...rminal in the same ring and through DDM 2000 NEs to a remote FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal in the same subnetwork via the OC 3 DCC in Release 6 and later releases and OC 12 DCC Release 7 1 and later releases The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal must be equipped with the OC3 or OC 12 Optical Interface circuit pack and the Overhead Controller Tributary TOHCTL circuit pack to access the ...

Page 414: ...lease 6 0 0 RPTR Release 7 2 0 ADR Comcode 108042458 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Software Release Description Release 7 2 0 ADR Release 7 2 8 ADR Comcode 108361437 3 floppy Comcode 108399973 DAT tape FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Software Release Description Release 7 2 8 ADR Release 7 2 9 ADR Comcode 108614363 3 floppy Comcode 108686692 DAT tape FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Software Release...

Page 415: ... 1 1w 3 1 1a 2 1w 3 2 1a 3 1w 3 3 An OC 3c signal must be aligned on an STS 3 boundary within the OC 48 signal For example An OC 3c cross connect can be provisioned using either single CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnection STS 3 command or three CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnection STS 1 commands NOTE The FT 2000 OC 48 ADR Terminal does support the pre provisioning of cross connections However in ord...

Page 416: ... as it is aligned on an STS 3 boundary The following example should clarify this rule An OC 12c signal must be aligned on an STS 12 boundary within the OC 48 signal For example STS 3 tributaries 1 4 5 8 9 12 13 16 each form STS 12 boundaries An OC 12 low speed quad group i e slots 1A 2B can be cross connected within any STS 12 boundary The twelve constituent STS 1 tributaries of an OC 12c signal m...

Page 417: ... lines 1E and 1W There is also no fixed connection between the STS 3 tributaries of OC 48 high speed lines 1E and 1W In 2 fiber bidirectional rings STS 3 tributaries 1 through 8 are service tributaries and STS 3 tributaries 9 through 16 are protection tributaries The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal has an STS 3 time slot assignment TSA capability that supports the following cross connections...

Page 418: ...s at an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal In Release 5 and later releases add cross connections are made from any service low speed interface slot and the companion low speed interface slot for example 2A and 2B when the slot pair is provisioned for the OC 3 1 1 protected mode A single input enters an active add cross connection from the A slot to an outgoing STS 3 tributary of OC 48 high spee...

Page 419: ...interface slot For example Figure 8 1shows incoming service STS 3 tributary 5 of OC 48 high speed line 1W cross connected to service low speed interface slot 4B In Release 5 and later releases drop cross connections are made to any service low speed interface slot and the companion low speed interface slot for example 2A and 2B when the slot pair is provisioned for the OC 3 1 1 protected mode A si...

Page 420: ...speed line 1W cross connected to outgoing service STS 3 tributary 3 of OC 48 high speed line 1E When an STS 3 tributary of OC 48 high speed line 1E or 1W is cross connected to a service low speed interface slot another service low speed interface slot may be cross connected to the same numbered STS 3 tributary of the other OC 48 high speed line For example Figure 8 1 shows service low speed interf...

Page 421: ... OC 48 high speed line 1E or 1W For example Figure 8 3 shows incoming service STS 3 tributary 3 of OC 48 high speed line 1W cross connected to outgoing service STS 3 tributary 3 of OC 48 high speed line 1E Incoming service STS 3 tributary 3 of OC 48 high speed line 1W is also cross connected to service low speed interface slot 1A Figure 8 3 STS 3 Bridge Cross Connections at an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Dr...

Page 422: ...r releases cross connections can be made to from any service low speed interface slot and the companion low speed interface slot for example 2A and 2B when the slot pair is provisioned for the OC 3 1 1 protected mode For example Figure 8 3 shows incoming service STS 3 tributary 6 of OC 48 high speed line 1E cross connected to outgoing service STS 3 tributary 6 of OC 48 high speed line 1W Incoming ...

Page 423: ... cross connected to service STS 3 tributaries 1 and 2 of OC 48 high speed line 1W and service STS 3 tributary 3 of OC 48 high speed line 1E Multiple bridge cross connections can also be made to from any service low speed interface slot and the companion low speed interface slot for example 2A and 2B when the slot pair is provisioned for the OC 3 1 1 protected mode For example Figure 8 4 shows serv...

Page 424: ... 3 of OC 48 high speed line 1W cross connected to outgoing service STS 3 tributary 3 of OC 48 high speed line 1E Service low speed interface slot 6B is also cross connected to outgoing service STS 3 tributary 3 of OC 48 high speed line 1E A single input enters an active add cross connection and a standby through cross connection Figure 8 5 STS 3 1 Way DRI Cross Connections at an FT 2000 OC 48 Add ...

Page 425: ...affic during normal conditions In Release 4 1 and later releases if an incoming DS3 or EC 1 loss of signal condition is detected by the low speed interface circuit pack the through cross connection becomes active and the add cross connection becomes standby In Release 5 and later releases an unprotected incoming OC 3 loss of signal or loss of frame condition also causes the through cross connectio...

Page 426: ...W For example Figure 8 6 shows service low speed interface slot 2B cross connected to service STS 3 tributary 6 of OC 48 high speed line 1W In 2 fiber bidirectional rings STS 3 tributaries 1 through 8 are service tributaries and STS 3 tributaries 9 through 16 are protection tributaries Figure 8 6 STS 3 2 Way Cross Connections at an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1...

Page 427: ...e numbered STS 3 tributary of the other OC 48 high speed line For example Figure 8 6 shows service STS 3 tributary 3 of OC 48 high speed line 1W cross connected to service STS 3 tributary 3 of OC 48 high speed line 1E When an STS 3 tributary of OC 48 high speed line 1E or 1W is cross connected to a service low speed interface slot another service low speed interface slot may be cross connected to ...

Page 428: ...ion nodes of the through traffic due to a node failure or multiple line failures only the add drop traffic at the isolated node is squelched The through cabled STS 1 tributaries are protected using 2 fiber ring protection switching if the source and destination nodes are not isolated from each other In releases prior to Release 5 through cabled STS 1 tributaries were not protected against intermed...

Page 429: ...butary 6 of OC 48 high speed line 1E to service low speed interface slot 6B A 1 way add cross connection is made from service low speed interface slot 2A to outgoing service STS 3 tributary 6 of OC 48 high speed line 1W The individual STS 1 tributaries DS3 signals from the DS3 circuit pack in low speed interface slot 8B are looped back through cabled at the DSX 3 cross connect panel or equivalent ...

Page 430: ...tributary s is terminated looped back using external cabling or passed through using STS 3 through cross connections STS 3 Cross Connection Restrictions 8 STS 3 cross connections cannot be made from one low speed interface slot to another low speed interface slot or between two differently numbered STS 3 tributaries Limited STS 1 cross connections have the following restrictions Any STS 3 tributar...

Page 431: ...d STS 1 tributaries otherwise a protected node failure would create a path trace mismatch All through cabled connections must have the same time slot assignments on both sides of the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal for example no rearrangement of the STS 1s within the STS 3 or rearrangement of STS 3s within the STS 48 is allowed for through connections Terminating nodes VMR VM CC w AIS CC w ...

Page 432: ...ss connections across an OC 48 signal 1 way cross connections 2 way cross connections Default 1 way DRI cross connections When entering cross connections the source node is the node in the ring where the low speed signals on that STS 1 tributary originate The destination node is the last node in the same ring where the low speed signals on that STS 1 tributary terminate NOTE Concatenated signals s...

Page 433: ... any service low speed port to any outgoing STS 1 tributary of OC 48 high speed line 1E or 1W For example Figure 8 8 shows service low speed port 1 of slot 2B 2B 1 cross connected to outgoing service STS 1 tributary 1 of STS 3 tributary 6 6 1 on OC 48 high speed line 1W Figure 8 8 STS 1 1 Way Cross Connections at an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal 3 1 5 2 6 1 16 FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings ...

Page 434: ... a standby cross connection from the B slot to the same outgoing STS 3 tributary For example Figure 8 9 shows service low speed interface slots 2A and 2B cross connected to outgoing service STS 3 tributary 6 of OC 48 high speed line 1W The add cross connection from slot 2A to outgoing service STS 3 tributary 6 is active and the add cross connection from slot 2B to the same STS 3 tributary is stand...

Page 435: ...ing service STS 3 tributary 4 of OC 48 high speed line 1E cross connected to service low speed interface slots 6A and 6B Through cross connections Through cross connections are made from any incoming STS 1 tributary of OC 48 high speed line 1E or 1W to the same numbered outgoing STS 1 tributary of the other OC 48 high speed line For example Figure 8 8 shows incoming service STS 1 tributary 1 of ST...

Page 436: ...S 3 tributary 3 3 1 on OC 48 high speed line 1E Incoming service STS 1 tributary 1 of STS 3 tributary 3 3 1 on OC 48 high speed line 1W is also cross connected to service low speed port 2 of slot 1A 1A 2 Figure 8 10 STS 1 Bridge Cross Connections at an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal Cross connections can also be made to from any service low speed interface slot and the companion low speed i...

Page 437: ...onnected to service STS 1 tributary 3 of STS 3 tributary 1 1 3 and STS 1 tributary 1 of STS 3 tributary 2 2 1 on OC 48 high speed line 1W and service STS 1 tributary 1 of STS 3 tributary 3 3 1 on OC 48 high speed line 1E Multiple bridge cross connections can also be made to from any service low speed interface slot and the companion low speed interface slot for example 2A and 2B when the slot pair...

Page 438: ...S 3 tributary 3 3 2 on OC 48 high speed line 1W cross connected to outgoing service STS 1 tributary 2 of STS 3 tributary 3 3 2 on OC 48 high speed line 1E Service low speed port 2 of slot 6B 6B 2 is also cross connected to outgoing service STS 1 tributary 2 of STS 3 tributary 3 3 2 on OC 48 high speed line 1E A single input enters an active add cross connection and a standby through cross connecti...

Page 439: ...detected by the low speed interface circuit pack the through cross connection becomes active and the add cross connection becomes standby An unprotected incoming OC 3 loss of signal or loss of frame condition also causes the through cross connection to become active and the add cross connection to become standby For Release 7 0 and prior releases after the LOS LOP LOF or Line AIS condition clears ...

Page 440: ...f slot 2B 2B 2 cross connected to service STS 1 tributary 2 of STS 3 tributary 6 6 2 on OC 48 high speed line 1W Figure 8 13 STS 1 2 Way Cross Connections at an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal Add drop cross connections are made between any service low speed interface slot and the companion low speed interface slot for example slot 2A and 2B when the slot pair is provisioned for the OC 3 1 1...

Page 441: ...ine 1W cross connected to service STS 1 tributary 1 of STS 3 tributary 3 3 1 on OC 48 high speed line 1E When an STS 1 tributary of OC 48 high speed line 1E or 1W is cross connected to a service low speed port another service low speed port may be cross connected to the same numbered STS 1 tributary of the other OC 48 high speed line For example Figure 8 13 shows service low speed port 2 of slot 2...

Page 442: ... OC48 TRMTR A D STS1 1 5 STD 739J5 OC48 Transmitter Add Drop 1 5µm LBA Standard Performance OC48 TRMTR A D STS1 1 5 LBA 739P5 OC48 Transmitter Add Drop 1 5 µm LBA Standard Performance OC48 TRMTR A D STS1 1 5 LBA W1 739R5 OC48 Transmitter Add Drop 1 5 µm LBA Standard Performance OC48 TRMTR A D STS1 1 5 LBA W2 739S5 STS 1 cross connections cannot be made from one low speed port to another low speed ...

Page 443: ...8 Extra traffic is preempted if a 2 fiber ring protection switch occurs In 2 fiber ring protection switching the protection STS 3 tributaries of OC 48 high speed line 1E protect the service STS 3 tributaries of OC 48 high speed line 1W and the protection STS 3 tributaries of OC 48 high speed line 1W protect the service STS 3 tributaries of OC 48 high speed line 1E For more information about 2 fibe...

Page 444: ...y DRI cross connections The existing 1 way or 1 way DRI cross connection and the new 1 way or 1 way DRI cross connection must have a common destination The existing cross connection is deleted and a new cross connection is entered as part in a 1 step process This 1 step process takes less than 60 milliseconds Both 1 way and 1 way DRI cross connections can be rolled from an existing source to a new...

Page 445: ...pecified destination is already cross connected to a different source or the destination is already involved in a 1 way DRI cross connection An input requesting a 1 way cross connection will not be denied if the specified source is already cross connected to a different destination The bridging capability allows two or more cross connections to share the same source A 1 way DRI cross connection is...

Page 446: ... destination or if the specified destination is already cross connected to a different source This input will also be denied if the specified destination is already involved in a 1 way DRI cross connection The source node TID and the destination node TID of an STS 1 tributary are required to support squelching during a 2 fiber ring protection switch If an STS 1 tributary is specified as the source...

Page 447: ...ed if the specified destination is already cross connected to a different source or the destination is already involved in a 1 way DRI cross connection An input requesting a 1 way cross connection will not be denied if the specified source is already cross connected to a different destination The bridging capability allows two or more cross connections to share the same source A 1 way DRI cross co...

Page 448: ... to a different destination or if the specified destination is already cross connected to a different source This input will also be denied if the specified destination is already involved in a 1 way DRI cross connection The source node TID and the destination node TID of an STS 3 tributary are required to support squelching during a 2 fiber ring protection switch If an STS 3 tributary is specifie...

Page 449: ...t 2A and 2B provisioned for the OC 3 1 1 protected mode and the destination is always an STS 1 tributary A 2 way cross connection is deleted by first specifying the source and destination The source is a low speed port a low speed port in a slot pair for example slot 2A and 2B provisioned for the OC 3 1 1 protected mode or STS 1 tributary If the source is a low speed port the destination must be a...

Page 450: ...xample slot 2A and 2B provisioned for the OC 3 1 1 protected mode and the destination is always an STS 3 tributary A 2 way cross connection is deleted by first specifying the source and destination The source is a low speed interface slot a low speed interface slot in a slot pair for example slot 2A and 2B provisioned for the OC 3 1 1 protected mode or STS 3 tributary If the source is a low speed ...

Page 451: ...y or 1 way DRI cross connection CONFIGURATION Enter Roll STS3 This input performs a CONFIGURATION Delete Crossconnection STS3 input and a CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnection STS3 input in a 1 step process This capability allows traffic to be rolled from one source to another source as part of normal user operations The 1 step process rolls traffic from an existing source to a new source for 1 way ...

Page 452: ...t are looped back through cabled at the cross connect panel based on the source and destination nodes Thus if a node that has through cabled STS 1 tributaries becomes isolated from the source and destination nodes of the through traffic due to a node failure or multiple line failures only the add drop traffic at the isolated node will be squelched The through STS 1 tributaries will be protected us...

Page 453: ... the command CONFIGURATION Retrieve Crossconnection STS3 works properly provided that the command aid field is left null An example of a specified aid which will not work is STS3 1E 1 For software release 7 2 and later only the STS1 option works e g CONFIGURATION Retrieve Crossconnection STS1 CONFIGURATION Retrieve Squelch Map STS1 For Release 7 0 and earlier releases this input generates a report...

Page 454: ... state For more information about dual ring interworking protection switching refer to Volume I Section 9 Maintenance Description FAULT Switch Path STS3 This input controls the state of an existing 1 way DRI cross connection The state of the existing 1 way DRI cross connection is switched by specifying the destination STS 3 tributary and the protection switch priority reset or manual An input requ...

Page 455: ...y STS 1 cross connections at FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals The CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnection STS1 input is used to enter 1 way and 2 way cross connections Figure 8 15 Example of 1 Way and 2 Way STS 1 Cross Connections in a 2 Fiber Bidirectional Ring Node 0 1W 1E 1A 8B 16 1 OC 48 16 1 6 1 Node 1 1W 1E 1A 8B 16 1 16 1 6 1 6 1 Node 3 1E 1W 1A 8B 16 1 OC 48 16 1 Node 2 1E 1W 1A 8B 16 1 ...

Page 456: ...ss connection is entered by specifying Source tributary Source line line 1W Source STS 3 tributary tributary 6 Source STS 1 tributary tributary 1 Source node TID node 0 TID Destination STS1 port Destination low speed interface slot slot 4A Destination low speed port 1 If the specified slot is part of a slot pair that has been provisioned for the OC 3 1 1 Release 5 and later releases or OC 12 1 1 R...

Page 457: ...dd drop cross connection is entered by specifying Source STS 1 port Source low speed interface slot slot 2A Source low speed port 3 Destination line line 1E Destination STS 3 tributary tributary 5 Destination STS 1 tributary tributary 2 Destination node TID node 3 TID The same 2 way add drop cross connection may also be entered by specifying Source tributary Source line line 1E Source STS 3 tribut...

Page 458: ...ity failure However these trouble conditions should be ignored until all the cross connections for a circuit have been entered If the trouble conditions remain after all the cross connections have been entered refer to the Operation and Maintenance TOP section Volume II For more information about entering cross connections at an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal refer to the CIT Tutorial in Se...

Page 459: ... 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 5 1 2 3 6 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 8 1 2 3 9 1 2 3 10 1 2 3 11 1 2 3 12 1 2 3 13 1 2 3 14 1 2 3 15 1 2 3 16 1 2 3 W E 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 5 1 2 3 6 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 8 1 2 3 9 1 2 3 10 1 2 3 11 1 2 3 12...

Page 460: ...y cross connections at FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals The CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnection STS3 input is used to enter 1 way and 2 way cross connections Figure 8 17 Example of 1 Way and 2 Way Cross Connections in a 2 Fiber Bidirectional Ring Node 0 1W 1E 1A 2B 8B 16 1 OC 48 5A 16 1 6 Node 1 1W 1E 1A 8B 16 1 16 1 6 6 Node 3 1E 1W 1A 8B 16 1 OC 48 16 1 Node 2 1E 1W 1A 8B 16 1 16 1 6 OC 48...

Page 461: ...ecifying Source tributary Source line line 1W Source STS 3 tributary tributary 6 Source node TID node 0 TID Destination slot Destination low speed interface slot slot 4A In the specified slot is part of a slot pair that has been provisioned for the OC 3 1 1 Release 5 and later releases or OC 12 1 1 Release 7 1 and later releases protected mode specifying one slot also includes the companion slot I...

Page 462: ...urce line line 1E Source STS 3 tributary tributary 5 Source node TID node 3 TID Destination slot Destination low speed interface slot slot 2A In the specified slot is part of a slot pair that has been provisioned for the OC 3 1 1 Release 5 and later releases or OC 12 1 1 Release 7 1 and later releases protected mode specifying one slot also includes the companion slot In Release 4 1 and later rele...

Page 463: ...Operation and Maintenance TOP section Volume II For more information about entering cross connections at an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal refer to the CIT Tutorial in Section 11 Craft Interface Terminal Usage and the Operation Task Index in the Operation and Maintenance TOP section Volume II Figure 8 18 shows a worksheet that may be used to record STS 3 cross connections at FT 2000 OC 48 A...

Page 464: ... 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 5 1 2 3 6 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 8 1 2 3 9 1 2 3 10 1 2 3 11 1 2 3 12 1 2 3 13 1 2 3 14 1 2 3 15 1 2 3 16 1 2 3 W E 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 5 1 2 3 6 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 8 1 2 3 9 1 2 3 10 1 2 3 11 1 2 3 12 1 2 3 13 1 2 3 14 1 2 3 15 1 2 3 16 1 2 3 W E 1 2 3 1 2 3...

Page 465: ...ary and secondary nodes The CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnection STS1 input is used to enter 1 way and 1 way DRI cross connections Refer to Entering 1 Way and 2 Way STS 1 Cross Connections in this section for examples showing bridge and 2 way cross connections Figure 8 19 Example of STS 1 1 Way DRI Cross Connections in a 2 Fiber Bidirectional Ring Node 0 1W 1E 1A 8B 16 1 OC 48 16 1 6 1 Node 1 1W 1E...

Page 466: ...ay through cross connection is entered by specifying Source tributary Source line line 1E Source STS 3 tributary tributary 6 Source STS 1 tributary tributary 1 Source node TID node 3 TID Destination tributary Destination node TID node 0 TID If the specified slot is part of a slot pair for example slot 1A and 1B that has been provisioned for the OC 3 1 1 protected mode specifying one slot also incl...

Page 467: ...ume II Figure 8 16 shows a worksheet that may be used to record STS 1 cross connections at FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals in a 2 fiber bidirectional ring For more information about entering cross connections at an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal refer to the CIT Tutorial in Volume I Section 11 Craft Interface Terminal Usage and the Operation Task Index in the Operation and Maintenanc...

Page 468: ... at the primary and secondary nodes The CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnection STS3 input is used to enter 1 way and 1 way DRI cross connections Refer to Entering 1 Way and 2 Way Cross Connections in this section for examples showing bridge and 2 way cross connections Figure 8 20 Example of STS 3 1 Way DRI Cross Connections in a 2 Fiber Bidirectional Ring Node 0 1W 1E 1A 2B 8B 16 1 OC 48 5A 16 1 6 No...

Page 469: ... TID Destination tributary Destination node TID node 0 TID At node 0 a 1 way drop cross connection is entered by specifying Source tributary Source line line 1E Source STS 3 tributary tributary 6 Source node TID node 3 TID Destination slot Destination low speed interface slot slot 2B If the specified slot is part of a slot pair for example slot 1A and 1B that has been provisioned for the OC 3 1 1 ...

Page 470: ...by through cross connection a manual switch and then a reset must be performed using the FAULT Switch Path STS3 input This switches the through cross connection to the active state and then resets the cross connection to the original standby state For more information about circuit provisioning audits refer to Volume I Section 9 Maintenance Description Figure 8 18 shows a worksheet that may be use...

Page 471: ... 1W Nodes 1 3 and 4 also have a 1 way through cross connection Figure 8 21 Example of 1 Way and 1 Way DRI Cross Connections in Video Applications The CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnection STS3 input is used to enter 1 way and 1 way DRI cross connections at the nodes Refer to Entering 1 Way and 2 Way Cross Connections in this section for examples showing bridge and 2 way cross connections Node 0 1W 1...

Page 472: ... to node Y Z can be node X or Y some other node between X and Y or null if there are no 1 way drop cross connections between X and Y If Z is X or null use the TID of node Y as the value of the destination node TID parameter Otherwise use the TID of node Z as the value of the destination node TID parameter The following cross connections are required to establish the circuit shown in Figure 8 21 At...

Page 473: ...2 TID At node 2 a 1 way drop cross connection is entered by specifying Source tributary Source line line 1W Source STS 3 tributary tributary 6 Source node TID node 0 TID Destination slot Destination low speed interface slot slot 4A A 1 way DRI cross connection is entered by specifying Source low speed interface slot slot 4B Destination line line 1E Destination STS 3 tributary tributary 6 Destinati...

Page 474: ...node 0 TID At node 4 a 1 way drop cross connection is entered by specifying Source tributary Source line line 1W Source STS 3 tributary tributary 6 Source node TID node 0 TID Destination slot Destination low speed interface slot slot 4A A 1 way through cross connection is entered by specifying Source tributary Source line line 1E Source STS 3 tributary tributary 6 Source node TID node 0 TID Destin...

Page 475: ...by through cross connection a manual switch and then a reset must be performed using the FAULT Switch Path STS3 input This switches the through cross connection to the active state and then resets the cross connection to the original standby state For more information about circuit provisioning audits refer to Volume I Section 9 Maintenance Description Figure 8 18 shows a worksheet that may be use...

Page 476: ...ns at FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals The CONFIGURATION Roll Crossconnection STS1 input is used to roll traffic from an existing source to a new source Figure 8 22 Example of Rolling STS 1 Cross Connections in a 2 Fiber Bidirectional Ring Node 0 1W 1E 1A 8B 16 1 OC 48 16 1 6 3 Node 1 1W 1E 1A 8B 16 1 16 1 6 3 6 3 Node 3 1E 1W 1A 8B 16 1 OC 48 16 1 Node 2 1E 1W 1A 8B 16 1 16 1 6 3 OC 48 OC 4...

Page 477: ...n STS 3 tributary tributary 6 Destination STS 1 tributary tributary 3 New cross connection type 1 way New source STS 1 port New source low speed interface slot slot 4A New source low speed port 1 If the specified slot is part of a slot pair for example slot 1A and 1B that has been provisioned for the OC 3 1 1 Release 5 or later releases protection mode specifying one slot also includes the compani...

Page 478: ...ow speed interface slot 2B to low speed interface slot 4A by specifying Source slot Source low speed interface slot slot 2B Destination line line 1E Destination STS 3 tributary tributary 6 New cross connection type 1 way New source slot 4A If the specified slot is part of a slot pair for example slot 1A and 1B that has been provisioned for the OC 3 1 1 Release 5 or later releases protection mode s...

Page 479: ...urce low speed port 1 Destination line line 1E Destination STS 3 tributary tributary 6 Destination STS 1 tributary tributary 1 If the specified slot is part of a slot pair for example slot 1A and 1B that has been provisioned for the OC 3 1 1 Release 5 or later releases protection mode specifying one slot also includes the companion slot The same type of logic applies to OC 12 1 1 Release 7 1or lat...

Page 480: ...ed by specifying Source tributary Source line line 1W Source STS 3 tributary tributary 6 Source STS 1 tributary tributary 1 Destination STS 1 port Destination low speed interface slot slot 5A Destination low speed port 1 The 2 way add drop cross connection is deleted by specifying Source STS 1 port Source low speed interface slot slot 2A Source low speed port 3 Destination line line 1E Destination...

Page 481: ...e trouble conditions should be ignored until all the cross connections for a circuit have been deleted If the trouble conditions remain after all the cross connections have been deleted refer to the Operation and Maintenance TOP section Volume II For more information about deleting cross connections at an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal refer to the Operation Task Index in the Operation and ...

Page 482: ...fying Source slot Source low speed interface slot slot 2B Destination line line 1E If the specified slot is part of a slot pair for example slot 1A and 1B that has been provisioned for the OC 3 1 1 Release 5 or later releases protection mode specifying one slot also includes the companion slot The same type of logic applies to OC 12 1 1 Release 7 1or later releases protected mode Node 0 1W 1E 1A 2...

Page 483: ...urce line line 1W Source STS 3 tributary tributary 6 Destination slot Destination low speed interface slot slot 5A The 2 way add drop cross connection is deleted by specifying Source slot Source low speed interface slot slot 2A Destination line line 1E Destination STS 3 tributary tributary 5 At node 3 the 2 way add drop cross connection is deleted by specifying Source tributary Source line line 1W...

Page 484: ...e trouble conditions remain after all the cross connections have been deleted refer to the Operation and Maintenance TOP section Volume II For more information about deleting cross connections at an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal refer to the Operation Task Index in the Operation and Maintenance TOP section Volume II If the specified slot is part of a slot pair for example slot 1A and 1B th...

Page 485: ...connections using external loopback cables at a DSX 3 cross connect panel node 1 The CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnection STS3 input is used to enter 2 way cross connections For more information about entering 1 way and 2 way cross connections refer to Entering 1 Way and 2 Way Cross Connections in this section Figure 8 26 Example of Limited STS 1 Cross Connections in a 2 Fiber Bidirectional Ring No...

Page 486: ... is entered by specifying Type 2 way Line line 1E STS 3 tributary tributary 6 STS 1 tributary tributary 3 Source node TID node 3 TID At node 1 STS 1 squelch map information is entered by specifying Type 2 way Line line 1W STS 3 tributary tributary 6 STS 1 tributary tributary 3 Source node TID node 0 TID At node 1 the following is also entered Type 2 way Line line 1E STS 3 tributary tributary 6 STS...

Page 487: ...rcuit provisioning error and path integrity failure However these trouble conditions should be ignored until all the cross connections for a circuit have been entered If the trouble conditions remain after all the cross connections have been entered refer to the Operation and Maintenance TOP section Volume II For more information about entering limited STS 1 cross connections at an FT 2000 OC 48 A...

Page 488: ...ecify the orientation user or network If the user orientation is specified at one end of the OC 3 DCC link the network orientation must be specified at the other end of the OC 3 DCC link An input requesting an OC 3 DCC assignment will be denied if one of the following conditions is present The specified slot is not equipped with an OC3 1 3 STD circuit pack The TOHCTL slot is in the AUTO state The ...

Page 489: ... operating mode or a low speed interface slot in a slot pair for example slot 2A and 2B operating in the OC 3 1 1 protected mode The user must specify a single DCC channel 1 8 An input deleting an OC 3 DCC assignment will be denied if one of the following conditions is present The TOHCTL slot is in the AUTO state The TOHCTL circuit pack has been removed The TOHCTL circuit pack has failed An input ...

Page 490: ...ATION Enter Assignment DCC input is used to enter the OC 3 DCC assignments Figure 8 27 Example of OC 3 DCC Connectivity CO 4 OC 48 FT 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 Remote Terminal CO 3 FT 2000 OC 48 FT 2000 FT 2000 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 Remote Terminal OC 48 OC 48 CO 5 CO 1 CO 2 LS INTFC Slot 5B LS INTFC Slot 2A OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 OC 3 The grey shading indicates the extent of the OC 3 ri...

Page 491: ...k For more information about entering OC 3 DCC assignments in an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal refer to the CIT Tutorial in Volume I Section 11 Craft Interface Terminal Usage and the Operation Task Index in the Operation and Maintenance TOP section Volume II The DCC assignment may be specified as channel 1 8 at each FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal If the orientation is specified netw...

Page 492: ...At CO 1 an OC 3 DCC assignment is deleted by specifying Low speed interface slot slot 5B DCC channel 3 At CO 2 an OC 3 DCC assignment is deleted by specifying Low speed interface slot slot 2A DCC channel 6 For more information about deleting OC 3 DCC assignments at an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal refer to the Operation Task Index in the Operation and Maintenance TOP section Volume II ...

Page 493: ...C 12 DCC link the network orientation must be specified at the other end of the OC 12 DCC link An input requesting an OC 12 DCC assignment will be denied if one of the following conditions is present The specified slot is not equipped with an OC12 1 3 STD circuit pack The TOHCTL slot is in the AUTO state The TOHCTL circuit pack has been removed The TOHCTL circuit pack has failed An input requestin...

Page 494: ...in the AUTO state The TOHCTL circuit pack has been removed The TOHCTL circuit pack has failed An input deleting an OC 12 DCC assignment may be denied if an automatic turnup test is running During that part of the test cycle when the DCC connections between the OC 12 1 3 STD and TOHCTL circuit packs are being verified an input deleting an OC 12 DCC assignment will be denied If the DCC assignment sp...

Page 495: ...Enter Assignment DCC input is used to enter the OC 12 DCC assignments Figure 8 28 Example of OC 12 DCC Connectivity CO 4 OC 48 FT 2000 DDM 2000 OC 12 Remote Terminal CO 3 FT 2000 OC 48 FT 2000 FT 2000 DDM 2000 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 Remote Terminal OC 48 OC 48 CO 5 CO 1 CO 2 LS INTFC Slot 1B DCC Channel 3 LS INTFC Slot 3B DCC Channel 6 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 OC 12 The grey shading in...

Page 496: ... of the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal have a fixed value 0 and cannot be user provisioned For any operations interworking application to work the network elements participating in the application must have the same routing domain and area fields For more information about entering OC 12 DCC assignments in an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal refer to the CIT Tutorial in Volume I Sectio...

Page 497: ...eration Task Index in the Operation and Maintenance TOP section Volume II Access Identifiers 8 The access identifiers AIDs are used to access the functionality of the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System The FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System also uses AIDs to identify address and report on entities within the system Entities are circuit pack slots ports signals transmission lines operations interfaces data...

Page 498: ...INTFC All 1A 8B Single Service Slot LS INTFC 1A 8B Single Protection Slot LS INTFC P1 P2 Slot LNCTL All 1W Slot TG All 1 2 Slot LSSW All OUT IN Port STS 1 Available in Release 7 and later releases All 1 3 Single Port STS 1 1 3 Port DS3 All 1 3 Port EC1 All 1 3 Port TIMING IN All PRIMARY SECONDARY Port COM All DCE DTE DCC X25 Quad LS INTFC All 1B 3B 5B 7B Single Quad LS INTFC 1B 3B 5B 7B Tributary ...

Page 499: ...ctl 1w Slot OHCTL ohctl all 1e 1w Slot TOHCTL tohctl Port DS3 ls all 1a 8b all 1 3 Port EC1 ls all 1a 8b all 1 3 Port OC3 ls all 1a 8b Port IS3 ls all 1a 8b Port OC12 ls all 1b 3b 5b 7b Port STS 1 ls all 1a 8b all 1 3 Port TIMING OUT DS1 out all 1 2 Port TIMING IN DS1 in all pri secy OC48 in 1e 1w Port COM dce dte dcc x25 Quad LS INTFC ls all 1b 3b 5b 7b Operations Interface User Panel user panel ...

Page 500: ...laneous Discrete Environmental Point env all 1 16 Site Address site 1e 1w 0 31 PM Register reg all day QH tid 1 to 20 alphanumeric characters filename 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters user login 1 to 10 alphanumeric characters provisionedcontrolpt 1 to 26 alphanumeric characters provisionedenvironmentalpt 1 to 26 alphanumeric characters Available in Release 7 and later releases Available in releases...

Page 501: ...lot ROHCTL All 1EW 1WE PEW PWE All 1 P Point Environment All 1 16 Table 8 4 FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay Output Values Entity Values System system Line line all 1e 1w pe pw Slot REGENR Slot SYSCTL Slot SYSMEM Slot ROHCTL regenr all 1ew 1we pew pwe sysctl sysmem rohctl 1 p Operations Interface User Panel Operations Interface CIT user panel cit dce dte Miscellaneous Discrete Environment Point env all ...

Page 502: ...isks in the CIT to the SYSMEM circuit pack The SYSMEM circuit pack contains one copy of the provisionable parameters with their original values and another copy of the provisionable parameters with their current values The SYSCTL and LNCTL circuit packs plus the board controllers on the other circuit packs contain one copy of the provisionable parameters with their current values The original valu...

Page 503: ...s Terminal Parameter Options Original Value Method CIT PC Input TL1 Command CIT PC Report TL1 Report System Address SECURITY Set Ne twork Element ENT SYS SECURITY Retriev e Network Element RTRV SYS Target Identifier TID LT FT 2000 20 characters CIT Node Identifier NID 0 15 0 Directory Service NE Yes No X 25 Packet Size 128 256 Alarm Group 0 255 Alarm Gateway Network Element AGNE Yes No TL1 Gateway...

Page 504: ...0 9600 Automatic 19200 No Original Value Remote Access Far End Termina l Remote Activity Reporting Remote Office Alarms LTXX Other Enable Disable Enable Disable CIT SECURITY Set Fa r End Communications SECURITY Retriev e Far End Communications Network Element Security Logins Allowed Password Aging Login Aging Yes No 0 7 999 Days 0 7 999 Days CIT SECURITY Set Se curity Network Element SECURITY Retr...

Page 505: ...racters at least 1 numeric character and 1 symbolic character CIT SECURITY Set Password ED PID None User Privilege Reports Only General CIT SECURITY Set Lo gin ENT USER SECU SECURITY Retriev e Login RTRV USER SECU Visitor Login Yes No CIT SECURITY Set Lo gin ENT USER SECU SECURITY Retriev e Login RTRV USER SECU Incoming Signal Alarm Delay 0 120 Seconds 2 CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION Alarm Clear Del...

Page 506: ...Line Protection Switching Signal Degrade Threshold 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 CIT CONFIGURATION S et OC48 CONFIGURATION Re trieve OC48 Slot State Provisioning FAULT All Slots EQ AUTO Automatic None Retrieve State Low Speed Protection Switching Protection Switching Priority Low High CIT CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION Service Set Low Speed Retrieve ENT rr Low Speed RTRV rr Configuration 0xN 1xN Automatic...

Page 507: ...led Stamping on LBO OC 12 Protection Mode From OC12 0x1 1 1 CIT CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION From OC48 0x1 1 1 Set OC12 ENT rr Retrieve OC12 RTRV rr Alarm Levels DS3 Alarm Level Incoming Signal CR MJ MN NA NR CIT CONFIGURATION Set T3 ENT rr CONFIGURATION Re trieve T3 RTRV rr EC 1 Alarm Level Incoming Signal CR MJ MN NA NR CIT CONFIGURATION S et EC1 SET ATTR rr CONFIGURATION Re trieve EC1 RTRV ATTR ...

Page 508: ...Retrieve Assignm ent DCC DS3 Port State Provisioning CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION Port AUTO NMON CIT Set State T3 ENT rr Retrieve T3 RTRV rr Port AUTO IS Automatic None CONFIGURATION Retrieve T3 RTRV rr EC1 Port State Provisioning Port AUTO NMON CIT CONFIGURATION S et State EC1 ENT rr CONFIGURATION Re trieve EC1 RTRV rr Port AUTO IS Automatic None CONFIGURATION Re trieve EC1 RTRV rr OC3 Port State ...

Page 509: ...d In Release 4 1 and later releases the low speed port state can be provisioned separately in the add and drop directions Available in Release 5 and later releases In Release 4 and 4 1 the timeout parameter was provisioned using the FT 2000 CIT PC setup menu CIT provisionable in Release 4 1 only CIT provisionable in releases prior to Release 6 only Auto provisioned in Release 6 and later releases ...

Page 510: ...40 Line Line Seconds SET TH RTRV TH Line Unavailable Seconds 1 63 10 1 4095 10 STS 1 Path TCA Autonomous Report Enable Disable Enable Disable PERFORMANCE PERFORMANCE Path FEBE Coding Violations 7 8 9 10 7 8 9 10 11 12 Set PM Retrieve Path FEBE Errored Seconds 1 900 25 1 65535 250 Threshold PM Threshold Path FEBE Severely Errored Seconds 1 63 10 1 4095 40 STS1 STS1 Path FEBE Unavailable Seconds 1 6...

Page 511: ...No Original Value Autobaud None None CIT DTE 1200 2400 4800 9600 No Original Value Network Element Security SECURITY Set SECURITY Retrieve Logins Allowed Yes No CIT Security Security Network Element Network Element Port Security Type CIT DCE CIT DTE CIT DCC All CIT SECURITY Set SECURITY Retrieve Port Access Enable Disable Security Port Security Port Timeout 0 999 Minutes 15 CIT CIT PC Setup Menu N...

Page 512: ...tandard Time Zone blank 3 Letter Characters Start Daylight Savings Date MM DD 01 01 Stop Daylight Savings Date MM DD 01 01 Daylight Savings Time Zone blank 3 Letter Characters Line Identification Line Name PE PW 1E 1W Automatic None CONFIGURATION Retrieve OC48 OC 48 Termination LBO Optical 0 5 10 15 or 20 dB Lightguide None None LBO Ring Jumper Manually Installed Color or Stamping on LBO Slot Stat...

Page 513: ...l wait after a condition clears before reporting the clear event using all indicators This parameter applies to all conditions The TBOS points are not affected by Incoming Signal Alarm Delay or Alarm Clear Delay parameters CONFIGURATION Set Attribute Control TL1 SET ATTR CONT This input sets the Descriptions for the miscellaneous discrete control output points The Point parameter selects the misce...

Page 514: ...nt clock It is entered in the form YY MM DD where The Hours parameter sets the hour 0 to 23 in the network element clock A value of zero may be entered as 0 0 or 0 These entries are treated as the same value The Minutes parameter sets the minute 0 to 59 in the network element clock A value of zero may be entered as 0 0 or 0 These entries are treated as the same value The Seconds parameter sets the...

Page 515: ...s are the same daylight savings time processing is disabled The value 2 29 is not allowed The Daylight Savings Time Zone parameter is the 3 letter character string for example EST MST that is printed as part of the date and time stamp in command responses when Daylight Savings Time is in effect CONFIGURATION Set EC1 TL1 ATTR rr This input sets the Alarm Level and Signal Degrade Threshold of the EC...

Page 516: ...0 and later releases this sets provisions certain fields on the Network Services Access Point NSAP address of a network element The NSAP consists of the following fields L3IDP Level 3 Initial Domain Part value always 0x270348 which indicates that U S ANSI is the registration authority responsible for NSAP allocation and assignment L3DFI Level 3 Domain Specific Part value always 0x80 to indicate th...

Page 517: ...h quads in the quad pair must be EQ A cross connection must exist between either quad in the quad pair and an STS 12 STS 12c tributary The Protection Mode from OC48 parameter sets the protection mode of a low speed interface slot to 1 1 or 0x1 in the drop direction from OC 48 to OC 12 The 1 1 protection mode is provided by using a pair of adjacent quad low speed interfaces For a 1 1 protected OC12...

Page 518: ...When a quad pair transitions from 1 1 operation to 0x1 operation the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal automatically selects the add drop cross connections between the 1B 5B command slot and the STS 12 STS 12c tributary as active If the drop cross connection from the STS 12 STS 12c tributary to the 3B 7B command slot was previously active the OC12 1 3 STD in the 3B 7B command slot transmits pa...

Page 519: ...ot associated with the addressed slot pair is not equipped with an OC3 circuit pack or is in the AUTO state The Protection Mode from OC3 parameter sets the protection mode of a low speed interface slot to 1 1 or 0x1 in the add direction from OC 3 to OC 48 The 1 1 protection mode is provided by using a pair of adjacent A and B low speed interface slots for example slot 2A and 2B Each 1 1 protected ...

Page 520: ...l be observed When a slot pair transitions from 0x1 operation to 1 1 operation any DCC assignment to the A slot changes to a DCC assignment to the slot pair Any DCC assignment to the B slot will be deleted When a slot pair transitions from 1 1 protected operation to 0x1 unprotected operation the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal automatically selects the add drop cross connections between the ...

Page 521: ...ld The Output AU4 Mapping parameter sets the AU4 mapping bit to SONET or SDH The OC3 circuit pack can automatically support transport of STS 3 STS 3c or STM 1 signals carrying AU 4 mapped signals For STM 1 AU 4 mapped payloads the OC3 circuit pack can be provisioned to output the appropriate values in the pointer bytes so that direct interface to SDH equipment is possible over an STM 1 optical int...

Page 522: ...ronization messaging status of the OC48 TRMTR and OC48 RCVR circuit packs on the same OC 48 high speed line should both have the same setting i e either enabled or disabled to avoid potential synchronization problems For example if the OC48 TRMTR circuit pack does not have sync messaging enabled but the OC48 RCVR circuit pack does a DUS do not use for synchronization message may appear when execut...

Page 523: ...o Restore parameter is the time 0 to 12 minutes that the network element waits after a condition clears before breaking automatic high speed protection switches CONFIGURATION Set Protection Low Speed This input sets the Wait to Restore interval for low speed protection switching The Wait To Restore parameter is the time 0 to 12 minutes that the network element waits after a condition clears before...

Page 524: ...tities will be for this port The port will not make a transition to the IS in service state if a good signal appears AUTO Alarms will not be raised until after a valid signal appears on the selected direction of this port After the signal appears it is continuously monitored and the port transitions to the IS state CONFIGURATION Set State OC12 TL1 ENT rr This input sets the Primary State of OC12 p...

Page 525: ...or this port The port will not make a transition to the IS in service state if a good signal appears AUTO Alarms will not be raised until after a valid signal appears on the selected direction of this port After the signal appears it is continuously monitored and the port transitions to the IS state CONFIGURATION Set Synchronization This input sets the network element synchronization mode and sync...

Page 526: ...ion AMI or bipolar eight zero substitution B8ZS line coding The Secondary DS1 In Line Code parameter specifies whether the secondary DS1 reference signal uses alternate mark inversion AMI or bipolar eight zero substitution B8ZS line coding The Synchronization Source parameter specifies that timing is derived from the East or West high speed lines or that timing is automatically chosen depending up...

Page 527: ...dressed DS3 ports The choices are VMR DS3 P bit parity errors in the output DS3 towards the cross connect panel are monitored and removed VM DS3 P bit parity error in the output DS3 towards the cross connect panel are monitored and not removed CC w AIS The incoming DS3 signal from the OC 48 line is transmitted to the cross connect panel without DS3 format violation monitoring clear channel DS3 AIS...

Page 528: ...e monitoring algorithm to be chosen The user may select F and M bit adjusted processing or P bit processing The raw F and M framing bit error counts are adjusted to approximate the actual error count in the DS3 path payload When the command is executed all parameters in the current day and quarter hour bins for DS3 path performance monitoring data are marked corrupt with a PERFORMANCE Set PM Thres...

Page 529: ... 1 line severely errored second is recorded for each second during which there are nine or more B2 coding violations or an EC 1 line AIS defect is detected For intervals with 10 or more contiguous severely errored seconds the severely errored seconds will be recorded as unavailable seconds not as severely errored seconds This parameter is an integer from 1 to 63 inclusive for the quarter hour bin ...

Page 530: ... bin The Line Severely Errored Seconds parameter specifies the number of line severely errored seconds that will cause a threshold crossing alert for the selected performance monitoring bin and OC 48 OC 12 or OC 3 line s A line severely errored second is recorded for each second during which there are 494 or more composite B2 coding violations or a line AIS defect is detected For intervals with 10...

Page 531: ...ing alert for the selected performance monitoring bin and OC 48 OC 12 or OC 3 line s A section errored second is recorded for each second during which there are one or more B1 coding violations one or more loss of signal defects or one or more loss of frame defects This parameter is an integer from 1 to 900 inclusive for the quarter hour bin and an integer from 1 to 65 535 inclusive for the day bi...

Page 532: ... coding violations one or more STS 1 path AIS defects or one or more STS 1 loss of pointer defects A FEBE errored second is recorded for each second during which there are one or more FEBE coding violations or one or more remote defect indicator path RDI P defects This parameter is an integer from 1 to 900 inclusive for the quarter hour bin and an integer from 1 to 65 535 inclusive for the day bin...

Page 533: ...t will cause a threshold crossing alert for the selected performance monitoring bin and DS3 port s A DS3 line errored second is recorded for each second during which there are one or more B3ZS coding violations bipolar violations or a DS3 loss of signal defect in the DS3 signal input from the cross connect panel This parameter is an integer from 1 to 900 inclusive for the quarter hour bin and an i...

Page 534: ... the selected performance monitoring bin and DS3 port s A DS3 path unavailable second is recorded after 10 consecutive DS3 path severely errored seconds These 10 seconds are counted and each subsequent second is counted until there are 10 consecutive seconds without a DS3 path severely errored second The 10 consecutive seconds without a DS3 path severely errored second are not counted as unavailab...

Page 535: ...Retrieve Set Password Operate Alarm Cutoff and Test LED inputs General User will be able to execute all commands except Initialize System Set Far End Communications Set Login Set Network Element and Set Security The user privilege parameter for a privileged user can only be set to Privileged The Visitor parameter specifies whether the login will be changed to a visitor login Yes or No A visitor lo...

Page 536: ...ymbolic characters conforming to the following rules String must contain from 6 to 10 characters At least 2 of the characters must be nonalphabetic At least 1 of the characters must be symbolic the or space not allowed The difference between upper and lower case is significant The Re enter Password parameter confirms the New Password parameter Reenter the exact characters that were entered for the...

Page 537: ...ters will be translated into uppercase before they are stored in the network element Each TID in the network must be unique Whenever the value of the TID parameter is changed the user should enter the Retrieve Map Ring input or log off and log back in again to ensure that the new value of the TID parameter is included in the ring map NOTE If a user logs in to the system while a reset in progress o...

Page 538: ...rameter and the directory server parameter will cause the X 25 link to be reset and all active TL1 logins will be automatically dropped All established SVCs and PVCs on the affected X 25 link will have to be reestablished Also the operation of other network elements in the ring may be affected The Alarm Group parameter Release 6 and later specifies the alarm group to which the local network elemen...

Page 539: ...he TL1 Gateway parameter CIT provisionable in Release 4 1 only specifies Yes or No whether the NE is a TL1 gateway network element GNE There can be one or more TL1 GNEs in the ring The TL1 GNE serves as a single interface to the local X 25 message based operations system for all the NEs in the ring In Release 6 and later releases the FT 2000 OC 48 ADR Terminal can also act as a TL1 GNE for other n...

Page 540: ... off The Password Aging parameter specifies the password aging interval The password aging interval must be zero 0 or a number between 7 and 999 days If zero 0 is specified the password aging mechanism is disabled The Login Aging parameter specifies the login aging interval The login aging interval must be zero 0 or a number between 7 and 999 days If zero 0 is specified the login aging mechanism i...

Page 541: ...te with a PC running the FT 2000 CIT PC software A PC running CPro 2000 software or an ASCII based dumb terminal cannot communicate with a port provisioned as CIT If TL1 is selected TL1 protocol is used to communicate with a PC running CPro 2000 software or an ASCII based dumb terminal A PC running the FT 2000 CIT PC software cannot communicate with a port provisioned as TL1 NOTE When logging in t...

Page 542: ...visions the text string associated with the selected miscellaneous discrete environmental input point It is a character string of up to 26 characters where the characters are letters digits or spaces It is used to identify the environmental point in the Retrieve Alarm and Status and Retrieve History reports CONFIGURATION Set Date This input sets the network element clock date and time and provisio...

Page 543: ...is input edits the user ID password user privileges and status of any nonprivileged login and changes the other privileged login s login ID and password The Login parameter is the login ID of the login to be changed The Retrieve Login input will list login IDs The New Login parameter replaces the login ID for the selected login It must be a string of 6 to 10 characters in which the difference betw...

Page 544: ...ed IDs allowed per network element The New Login parameter is the login ID for the login being created It must be a string of from 1 to 10 alphanumeric characters in which the difference between upper and lower case is significant and it must be different from all other login IDs in this network element The New Password parameter is the password for the login being created A password consists of a...

Page 545: ...numeric or symbolic characters conforming to the following rules String must contain from 6 to 10 characters At least 2 of the characters must be nonalphabetic At least 1 of the characters must be symbolic the or space not allowed The difference between upper and lower case is significant The Re enter New Password parameter confirms the New Password Reenter the exact characters that were entered f...

Page 546: ...set for the CIT DTE port since Port Access may never be disabled for the CIT DCE The Port Access parameter enables or disables access Disabling it will terminate any active session on the port logging out all users including privileged users For more information about these inputs refer to Volume I Section 11 Craft Interface Terminal Usage ...

Page 547: ... failure occurs and are retrievable on demand regardless of the means used for provisioning The parameters are automatically downloaded when the affected circuit pack is installed Provisioning on Circuit Pack Replacement 8 Replacement of a failed circuit pack is simplified by the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System s automatic provisioning of the original circuit pack values The SYSCTL and SYSMEM circu...

Page 548: ... the CONFIGURATION Set State T3 input An EC 1 low speed port in the AUTO state can be provisioned to the NMON state using the CONFIGURATION Set State EC1 input An OC3 low speed port in the AUTO state can be provisioned to the NMON state using the CONFIGURATION Set State OC3 input An OC12 low speed port in the AUTO state can be provisioned to the NMON state using the CONFIGURATION Set State OC12 in...

Page 549: ...t An OC12 low speed port in the NMON state can be provisioned to the AUTO state using the CONFIGURATION Set State OC12 input The electrical low speed port state can be provisioned separately in the add from the cross connect and drop from the OC 48 line directions The primary port states of OC3 and OC12 circuit packs can be provisioned in the from OC3 and from OC12 add directions respectively The ...

Page 550: ...coming from OC 48 STS LOP EC 1 low speed ports in the drop direction must be in the IS state and the circuit pack slots must be in the EQ state for the following trouble condition to be reported incoming from OC 48 STS LOP Table 8 8 Monitoring Reporting Alarming and Performance Monitoring of Low Speed Signals Monitoring Reporting Alarming Low Speed and Performance Monitoring of Port State Directio...

Page 551: ... Example 9 35 Single and Double Failure States 9 40 Electrical Low Speed Protection 9 43 Optical Low Speed Protection OC 3 9 47 General 9 47 Optical Low Speed Protection Switching Architecture 9 49 Optical Low Speed Protection Switching Example 9 50 Optical Low Speed Protection OC 12 9 52 General 9 52 Optical Low Speed Protection Switching Architecture 9 54 Optical Low Speed Protection Switching E...

Page 552: ...ers 9 83 OC 3 OC 12 Optical Parameters 9 84 STS 48 STS 12 STS 3 Section Parameters 9 85 OC 48 OC 12 OC 3 Line Parameters 9 86 STS 1 Path Parameters 9 87 EC 1 Section Line Parameters 9 88 DS3 Line Path 9 89 Performance Monitoring Data Storage and Reports 9 90 Performance Monitoring During Failed Conditions 9 90 Performance Monitoring Parameter Thresholds 9 91 Threshold Crossing Alert Transmission t...

Page 553: ...48 ADR Terminal The FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System uses the synchronous optical network SONET OC 48 OC 3 Release 6 and later and OC 12 data communications channels DCC to provide the following Craft interface terminal CIT remote access The local network element provides a remote login capability from its CIT to a remote network element in the local network In Release 6 and later releases the FT 20...

Page 554: ...eed interface slot in the AUTO state or the absence of a valid cross connection The DS3 circuit pack is the only low speed interface circuit pack that terminates the STS 1 path overhead Thus the STS1E and OC3 1 3 STD circuit packs pass through any path unequipped signals In Release 4 1 when a DS3 circuit pack detects a path unequipped signal on a DS3 circuit a DS3 path unequipped condition is repo...

Page 555: ...Add Drop Rings Terminal for through tributaries Figure 9 4 shows the maintenance signals used by the FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay In these figures the labels on the arrows pointing into the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System show the maintenance signals and failure conditions recognized The labels on the arrows pointing out of the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System show the signals generated in response to ...

Page 556: ...ng DS3 AIS from cross connect Embedded DS3 AIS DS3 AIS DS3 LOF Unprotected DS3 Circuit Pack Failure STS Path AIS LOS or LOF Unprotected OC48 TRMTR Circuit Pack Failure Unprotected OC48 RCVR Circuit Pack Failure DS3 AIS DS3 RCVR DS3 RCVR TRMTR STS Path AIS STS Path AIS DS3 FT 2000 TRMTR RCVR RCVR DS3 AIS TRMTR DS3 FT 2000 DS3 OC 48 DS3 AIS Incoming DS3 LOS Embedded DS3 AIS DS3 AIS DS3 LOS Provision...

Page 557: ...R RCVR RCVR TRMTR FT 2000 OC 48 Line RDI STS Path AIS STS Path AIS STS Path AIS STS Path AIS STS Path AIS STS Path AIS STS Path AIS STS Path AIS Embedded STS Path AIS Incoming STS Path AIS STS Path AIS LOS LOF Line RDI STS Path AIS STS Path AIS Embedded STS Path AIS Line RDI If possible STS1E OC3 IS3 OC12 STS1E OC3 IS3 OC12 STS1E OC3 IS3 OC12 STS1E OC3 EC 1 OC 3 IS 3 OC 12 EC 1 OC 3 IS 3 OC 12 EC ...

Page 558: ... Pack Failure TRMTR OC 48 FT 2000 RCVR STS Path AIS TRMTR RCVR STS Path AIS TRMTR LOS or LOF OC 48 Incoming OC 48 LOS or LOF OC 48 FT 2000 RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR OC 48 FT 2000 RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR TRMTR Incoming DS3 LOF Incoming Embedded DS3 AIS Embedded DS3 AIS DS3 LOF Embedded DS3 AIS DS3 LOF DS3 LOF DS3 AIS OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 STS LOP or Path AIS Incoming STS LOP or Path AIS...

Page 559: ... 8 0 July 2002 9 7 Figure 9 4 FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay Maintenance Signals If possible REGENR Line AIS OC 48 OC 48 OC 48 REGENR OC 48 FT 2000 FT 2000 LOS or LOF Line AIS OC48 REGENR Circuit Pack Failure Incoming OC 48 LOS or LOF ...

Page 560: ...rations systems so that repair decisions can be made If desired operations system personnel and the local technician can use the CIT to gain more detailed information on the trouble condition All trouble conditions detected and isolated by the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System are stored and made available to be reported on demand through the CIT In addition a history of the past 125 alarm and status...

Page 561: ...rotection Switch APS Byte Failure Line RFI Yellow Loss of Frame LOF Loss of Signal LOS STS Loss of Pointer LOP from OC 12 Signal Degrade SD Signal Fail SF OC 3 Alarm Indication Signals AIS Automatic Protection Switch APS Byte Failure Line RFI Yellow Loss of Frame LOF Loss of Signal LOS Path Integrity Failure STS Loss of Pointer LOP from OC 3 Signal Degrade SD Signal Fail SF DS3 Loss of Signal LOS ...

Page 562: ...delay are Audible and visible office alarm outputs Parallel telemetry outputs Serial telemetry TBOS alarm and scan points Release 4 1 and later TL1 autonomous messages Critical CR major MJ and minor MN LEDs on the user panel Status field in the upper left hand corner of the CIT screen The indicators that are not subject to incoming signal alarm delay are FAULT LEDs on the circuit packs All CIT rep...

Page 563: ...c ref fail inc from OC48 path RFI yellow inc from OC48 sync ref fail inc from STSX line RFI yellow incoming from DSX DS3 LOS incoming from DSX DS3 SD incoming from OC 48 DS3 AIS incoming from OC 48 DS3 LOF incoming from OC 48 path AIS incoming from OC 48 STS LOP incoming from STSX EC1 LOF incoming from STSX EC1 LOP incoming from STSX EC1 LOS incoming from STSX EC1 SD incoming from STSX line AIS in...

Page 564: ... 12 interface failure incoming OC 12 interface removed incoming OC 12 auto switch at far end incoming OC 12 auto switch at near end incoming OC 12 forced switch at far end incoming OC 12 forced switch at near end incoming OC 12 inhibit at near end incoming OC 12 lockout at far end incoming OC 12 lockout at near end incoming OC 12 loopback from OC48 incoming OC 12 signal degrade SD incoming OC 12 s...

Page 565: ...2 9 13 optical parameter out of range repeater bay environment input repeater bay equipment failure The downstream FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal reports these conditions locally via the CIT interface and remotely via X 25 TL1 interface ...

Page 566: ...ning audits are not functioning circuit provisioning error Intermediate source destination node TID is incorrect or the add drop source destination node TID is incorrect clock out of range One or both of the TG3 circuit packs supplying synchronization to the TRMTR circuit pack have gone out of the recommended range CKP Serial EPROM corrupted A circuit pack in the indicated slot has corrupt data in...

Page 567: ...1 loopback is in effect EC 1 signals coming from the cross connect panel are preempted by the loopback excessive holdover The network element was either manually or automatically switched to internal synchronization and has remained in that synchronization mode for 24 hours This excessive time holdover may cause degraded performance on the transmitted and or received signals Likely causes Failure ...

Page 568: ...T OC 3 data communications channel DCC inc from OC3 path AIS A Path AIS has been detected on an incoming STS 1 tributary of an OC3 signal The OC3 port in question is provisioned as a DRI cross connect 1 Way DRI 2 Way DRI or 2 Way DRI Pri Likely causes Failure of upstream equipment which includes the STS 1 path for equipment failure of an OC 3 pack in the upstream OC3 equipment If the upstream NE i...

Page 569: ... the DS3 signals coming from the low speed cross connect panel A DS3 signal failure causes insertion of DS3 AIS at a remote FT 2000 terminal Likely cause Incoming DS3 loss of signal incoming from DSX DS3 SD A signal degrade SD condition has been detected on one or more of the DS3 signals coming from the low speed cross connect panel incoming from OC3 OC12 STS LOP An STS 1 loss of pointer LOP condi...

Page 570: ...oming DS3 signal from the OC 48 line Likely causes Failure of an upstream DS3 source equipment or DS3 circuit pack incoming from OC48 path AIS An STS 1 path alarm indication signal AIS has been detected on one or more of the STS 1 tributaries of the OC 48 line Likely cause Failure of far end DS3 or STS1E circuit pack incoming from OC48 STS LOP An STS 1 loss of pointer LOP condition has been detect...

Page 571: ...ssociated with a signal degrade SD or an automatic protection switch APS channel failure on the protection line incoming OC3 OC12 line RFI yellow The far end OC 3 OC 12 terminal is receiving a line failure from the local FT 2000 terminal The far end terminal is notifying the local FT 2000 terminal of the failure Likely causes Failure of an outgoing OC 3 OC 12 line transmit fiber Failure of local O...

Page 572: ...or slot pair is provisioned for 1 1 mode and the other slot is provisioned for 0x1 mode in the same direction OC12 mode conflict x connect The alarm condition that occurs when the addressed slot of the slot pair is provisioned for 1 1 mode and the two slots are cross connected to different tributaries Inconsistent DCC Values The OC 3 or OC 12 DCC orientation user or network is the same at both end...

Page 573: ...ed by a Reset in Progress condition at an upstream OC 48 source incoming OC48 B1 parity error A parity error has been detected in the B1 SONET overhead byte at a repeater bay site Likely cause Failure of the upstream TRMTR or REGENR circuit pack or the local RCVR or REGENR incoming OC 48 invalid F byte An invalid SONET overhead F byte has been detected at a repeater bay site Likely cause Failure o...

Page 574: ... condition has been detected on an incoming OC 48 line The line parity error rate threshold setting has been exceeded 10 5 through 10 9 with an original value of 10 6 Likely causes Failure of the upstream TRMTR or REGENR circuit pack or the local RCVR circuit pack incoming OC 48 SF A signal failure SF condition has been detected on an incoming OC 48 line Likely causes Failure of the upstream TRMTR...

Page 575: ...rced switch at far end An automatic line protection switch is active with a priority of forced switch at the far end of the OC 48 line line forced switch at near end An automatic line protection switch is active with a priority of forced switch at the near end of the OC 48 line line lockout The protection line is locked out and will not be used to protect a service line failure line lockout at far...

Page 576: ...High speed line switching is disabled at the far end of the OC 48 line line switch inhibit near end High speed line switching is disabled at the near end of the OC 48 line line TCA A threshold crossing alert TCA has been issued The alert means the signal degrade threshold has been exceeded for an incoming OC 48 line LNCTL failure Failure of LNCTL circuit pack LNCTL removed LNCTL circuit pack is mi...

Page 577: ...th all of the NEs in the alarm group If the AGNE loses power all NEs in the alarm group will report this condition however the condition may not be reported for several minutes node ID conflict This normally indicates a transient condition at the local network element non preemptible protection access The Low Speed Shelf Complementary is connected to the protection line during the switching functi...

Page 578: ...s equipped with an OC3 circuit pack and the other slot of the slot pair is equipped with a DS3 or STS1E circuit pack OC3 mode conflict slot pair One slot of a slot pair is provisioned 1 1 and the other slot of the slot pair is provisioned 0x1 OC3 mode conflict x connect The two slots of a slot pair provisioned for 1 1 operation are cross connected to two different STS 3 tributaries OC3 removed OC3...

Page 579: ...ntrol commands Likely cause The system was instructed to close the control point by a TBOS control point provisioned environmental pt A contact closure is present at an environmental input point of the network element Note The actual message that appears in the condition description report for this condition can be provisioned this is the default message See the Retrieve Attribute Control and Set ...

Page 580: ...A software download from the PC CIT to the SYSMEM is currently in progress STS1 squelch map conflict The controller circuits are unable to associate any network element s target identifier TID with the value supplied for a source or destination node of an STS 1 cross connection STS1E INTFC failure Failure of STS1E circuit pack STS1E INTFC removed STS1E circuit pack is missing from slot STS1 squelc...

Page 581: ...sync reference lockout A synchronization reference signal is locked out and FT 2000 terminal will go into holdover mode if it fails sync reference manual switch The FT 2000 terminal has switched its synchronization reference with a priority of manual switch SYSCTL failure Failure of SYSCTL circuit pack SYSMEM failure Failure of SYSMEM circuit pack SYSMEM removed SYSMEM circuit pack is missing from...

Page 582: ...e An incoming TL1 link failure has been detected TOHCTL failure Failure of TOHCTL circuit pack TOHCTL removed TOHCTL circuit pack is missing from slot traffic squelched Multiple failures in the ring network have resulted in traffic being squelched to eliminate any possibility of its being misrouted transmit parameter out of range One or more of the operating parameters of a RCVR TRMTR or REGENR ci...

Page 583: ...ing protection switching the traffic switches from the service STS 3 tributaries of an OC 48 high speed line to the protection STS 3 tributaries of the other OC 48 high speed line when a fault occurs When the fault clears the traffic switches back reverts to the service STS 3 tributaries There are eight STS 3 tributaries carrying service on OC 48 high speed line 1W and eight STS 3 tributaries carr...

Page 584: ...on STS 3 tributaries on OC 48 high speed line 1E are used to protect the service STS 3 tributaries on high speed line 1W Table 9 4 shows the mapping between the service STS 3 tributaries and their protection STS 3 tributaries 2 Fiber Ring Protection Switching Architecture 9 Figure 9 5 shows the 2 fiber ring protection switching architecture of the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal Table 9 4 2 ...

Page 585: ...R A D and LNCTL circuit packs The OC48 RCVR A D circuit packs have the following transmission buses that make 2 fiber ring protection switching possible A bus This bus allows the local traffic to be dropped B bus This bus allows the through traffic from the service STS 3 tributaries of the OC 48 high speed line to be looped back to the OC48 TRMTR A D circuit pack and bridged to the protection STS ...

Page 586: ... STS 3 tributaries C bus This bus allows through traffic to be routed from OC 48 high speed line 1E to 1W or from OC 48 high speed line 1W to 1E Line Controller 4 Megabyte LNCTL One LNCTL circuit pack is required to interface with the circuit packs on OC 48 high speed lines 1W and 1E The LNCTL circuit pack controls 2 fiber ring protection switching and performs line specific computations The LNCTL...

Page 587: ...at node 3 Protection STS 3 tributary 14 is used to carry extra traffic between low speed interface slot 2B at node 0 and low speed interface slot 4B at node 3 For more information about cross connections at FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals refer to Volume I Section 8 Administration and Provisioning Figure 9 6 Bidirectional Line Switched 2 Fiber Ring Normal Transmission Figure 9 7 shows a 2 f...

Page 588: ...also notifies the west OC48 TRMTR A D circuit pack The west OC48 TRMTR A D circuit pack transmits a switch request to the other nodes in the ring using the automatic protection switch APS channel on OC 48 high speed line 1W Nodes 2 and 3 are not actively involved in 2 fiber ring protection switching and are referred to as intermediate nodes At nodes 2 and 3 the following occurs The east OC48 RCVR ...

Page 589: ...eed interface circuit packs that add drop traffic to from the failure and the east OC48 TRMTR A D and OC48 RCVR A D circuit packs switch traffic to the protection STS 3 tributaries of OC 48 high speed line 1E An add drop cross connection is established between the affected low speed interface slot and the protection STS 3 tributaries of OC 48 high speed line 1E The add drop cross connection is est...

Page 590: ...o the protection STS 3 tributaries of OC 48 high speed line 1W The loopback is established using the B bus between the west OC48 TRMTR A D and OC48 RCVR A D circuit packs Figure 9 7 shows extra traffic is preempted and service STS 3 tributary 3 of OC 48 high speed line 1W is looped back to protection STS 3 tributary 11 Table 9 4 shows the mapping between the service STS 3 tributaries and their pro...

Page 591: ...is carried on protection capacity and hence treated as being extra traffic The secondary circuit is the combination of the continue segment of the drop and continue from the primary node to the secondary node along with the duplicate segment from the other ring from the secondary node to the primary node An exception to this occurs during isolation of the primary node of a DRIP circuit In a DRIP c...

Page 592: ...d For example if the provisionable signal degrade threshold is 10 9 the OC 48 signal s BER must fall below 10 10 to clear the defect When the defect is declared clear the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal enters the provisionable wait to restore interval This prevents any oscillating between the service and protection STS 3 tributaries During the wait to restore interval the service STS 3 trib...

Page 593: ...ble cuts and transmission electronics failures for example transmitter or receiver circuit pack failures Normal Operation State No Failures Power Restored Potential Loss Of Service State 1 Potential Loss Of Service State 2 Potential Loss Of Service State 3 Potential Loss Of Service State 4 Span Failure Span Clearance Span Clearance Span Clearance Either Complete Bay or HS Shelf Power Loss Either S...

Page 594: ... the system transitions automatically to the Protected State Potential Loss of Service State 3 If a node has a power loss and a single span failure Failures A and B in Figure 9 10 the system enters this state In this state the ring is segmented and any loss of traffic will be from paths between the two segments if any existed Any add drop traffic at the node where the power loss occurs is also los...

Page 595: ...nd STS 1 Electrical Interface circuit packs are 1xM M 16 protected and use bidirectional revertive switching Low speed protection switching takes place in response to automatically detected faults and external commands from a local remote CIT or operations system Refer to the FAULT Switch Low Speed input in Volume I Section 11 Craft Interface Terminal Usage Node 0 1W 1E 1A 2B 8B 1 OC 48 5A 14 1 6 ...

Page 596: ...k DS3 or STS1E can be assigned a high or low protection priority This allows a high priority circuit pack to preempt any previous switch to protection by a lower priority circuit pack Switch requests of equal priority will be met in the order in which they are received If two requests occur simultaneously the one with the lower slot address will take priority Figure 9 11 shows the low speed protec...

Page 597: ...uit pack broadcasts a bidirectional switch request to the board controllers on the LSSW circuit packs the service OC48 TRMTR circuit pack and the service OC48 RCVR circuit pack The board controller on the LSSW circuit packs activates the protection relays on the failed low speed interface circuit pack and the relays on the LSSW circuit pack OC 48 SYSCTL LNCTL SYSMEM LCLAN BCLAN 1 to 48 IN OUT S P ...

Page 598: ...the 155 Mb s signal from the protection low speed interface circuit pack In the receive direction the board controller on the OC48 RCVR circuit pack activates the switch circuitry to route the 155 Mb s signal to the protection low speed interface circuit pack instead of the failed service low speed interface circuit pack The board controller on the LSSW circuit packs activate the protection relays...

Page 599: ...1 nonrevertive protection switching In unidirectional 1 1 nonrevertive switching the transmitting terminal transmits the same signal on two lines The receiving terminal monitors the two lines independently and chooses one line as the active line and the other line as the standby line When a protection switch occurs the receiving terminal selects the signal from the standby line which causes the st...

Page 600: ...dministration and Provisioning One slot of the slot pair must be cross connected to a service STS 3 tributary using the CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnection STS3 input In Release 7 and later releases one port of the slot pair must be cross connected to a service STS 1 tributary using the CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnection STS1 input The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal automatically enters an...

Page 601: ...irection the board controller on the OC3 1 3 STD circuit pack sends the information to the LNCTL circuit pack via the BCLAN If appropriate the LNCTL circuit pack broadcasts a switch request to the board controller on the OC48 TRMTR circuit pack The board controller on the OC48 TRMTR circuit pack activates the selector circuitry to choose the 155 Mb s signal from the standby OC3 1 3 STD circuit pac...

Page 602: ...ormal Transmission Figure 9 14 shows two OC 3 lines only one direction of transmission is shown and two FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals when a fiber cut occurs on the active OC 3 line Automatic 1 1 OC 3 line protection switching occurs in response to a signal fail or signal degrade condition on the incoming OC 3 signal Optical low speed protection switching is only performed in the add OC 3...

Page 603: ...Maintenance Description Issue 8 0 July 2002 9 51 Figure 9 14 1 1 OC 3 Line Fiber Cut OC 3 Active Standby OC3 Office A Office B OC48 TRMTR OC3 OC3 OC48 RCVR OC3 ...

Page 604: ... 1 nonrevertive protection switching In unidirectional 1 1 nonrevertive switching the transmitting terminal transmits the same signal on two lines The receiving terminal monitors the two lines independently and chooses one line as the active line and the other line as the standby line When a protection switch occurs the receiving terminal selects the signal from the standby line which causes the s...

Page 605: ...on 8 Administration and Provisioning One slot of the slot pair must be cross connected to a service STS 3 tributary using the CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnection STS3 input In Release 7 and later releases one port of the slot pair must be cross connected to a service STS 1 tributary using the CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnection STS1 input The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal automatically ent...

Page 606: ... to the LNCTL circuit pack via the BCLAN If appropriate the LNCTL circuit pack broadcasts a switch request to the board controller on the OC48 TRMTR circuit pack The board controller on the OC48 TRMTR circuit pack activates the selector circuitry to choose the 155 Mb s signal from the standby OC12 1 3 STD circuit pack The standby OC12 1 3 STD circuit pack becomes the new active OC12 1 3 STD circui...

Page 607: ...on is shown and two FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals when a fiber cut occurs on the active OC 12 line Automatic 1 1 OC 12 line protection switching occurs in response to a signal fail or signal degrade condition on the incoming OC 12 signal Optical low speed protection switching is only performed in the add OC 12 to OC 48 direction by the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal at Office B The...

Page 608: ...Maintenance Description 9 56 Issue 8 0 July 2002 Figure 9 17 1 1 OC 12 Line Fiber Cut OC 12 Standby Active OC12 Office A Office B OC48 TRMTR OC12 OC48 RCVR OC12 OC12 nc ft2000 036 ...

Page 609: ...witch back to the service fiber Table 9 8 shows the standard protection switching priorities in descending order of priority used by the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal For Release 7 0 and earlier releases DRI protection switching is unidirectional and manually revertive Unidirectional refers to when protection switching is performed in one direction only For a given 1 way circuit DRI protec...

Page 610: ... or DDM 2000 OC 12 Multiplexers Release 3 0 The 2 way DRI circuit is routed to from the termination node node 5 in the FT 2000 line switched ring through the primary node node 4 and secondary node node 3 to the other ring The primary and secondary nodes are not required to be adjacent nodes Table 9 9 Summary of DRI Feature Capabilities Parameter Release Functionality 4 01 5 01 7 01 7 10 7 2 Unidir...

Page 611: ...cross connections must be entered in the drop direction Figure 9 18 At the termination node node 5 a 1 way add cross connection is entered When entering the 1 way add cross connection the secondary node node 3 must be specified as the destination node If an STS 3 tributary is bridged at one or more nodes in a ring the last node where the low speed signals are terminated must be specified as the de...

Page 612: ...ermination node node 5 must be specified as the destination node and node 3 must be specified as the secondary node Initially the add cross connection is in the active state and the through cross connection is in the standby state At the secondary node node 3 a 1 way add cross connection to the same STS 3 tributary is entered When entering the 1 way add cross connection the termination node node 5...

Page 613: ...uit pack via the BCLAN The LNCTL circuit pack enters an automatic DRI switch request and sends it to the board controller on the OC48 TRMTR A D circuit pack An LOS condition on one or more of the DS3 or EC 1 inputs to a low speed interface circuit pack or an unprotected OC 3 LOS LOF condition results in an automatic DRI switch request for that STS 3 tributary or STS 1 tributary Release 7 and Prima...

Page 614: ...ctive state and the add cross connection to switch to the standby state This completes the DRI circuit through the secondary node An automatic or manual DRI protection switch request will complete successfully even if there is a corresponding incoming loss of signal condition at the secondary node node 3 The primary node does not monitor the condition of the incoming low speed signal at the second...

Page 615: ...ode routes traffic on the DRI circuit around the ring through the secondary node to the other ring Traffic from the other ring is routed through the secondary node node 3 to the termination node node 5 For more information about 2 fiber ring protection switching refer to 2 Fiber Ring Protection Switching in this section Figure 9 21 shows a dual ring interworking application with a secondary node f...

Page 616: ... node 2 perform 2 fiber ring protection switching The 2 fiber ring protection switch does not affect the DRI circuit For more information about the DRI application refer to Volume I Section 3 Applications For more information about cross connections refer to Volume I Section 8 Administration and Provisioning Primary Secondary Low Speed Interface Node 4 Node 3 Other Ring Node Other Ring Node FT 200...

Page 617: ...by the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal The FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System provides protection for all the synchronization circuit packs The Timing Generator Stratum 3 DS1 TG3 DS1 circuit packs are 1x1 protected and use revertive switching The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal must be equipped with two TG3 DS1 circuit packs on the Low Speed Shelf System Controller FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop R...

Page 618: ...RMTR circuit pack on the Enhanced High Speed Shelf or high speed Shelf Secondary timing to the STS1E IS3 OC3 1 3 STD and OC12 circuit packs that terminate add drop traffic to from the OC 48 high speed line 1E and the DS3 circuit packs that terminate add drop traffic to from the OC 48 high speed line 1W Secondary timing to the west OC48 TRMTR circuit pack on the Enhanced High Speed Shelf or high sp...

Page 619: ...ack on the Enhanced High Speed Shelf or High Speed Shelf Secondary timing to the STS1E IS3 OC3 1 3 STD and OC12 1 3 STD circuit packs that terminate add drop traffic to from the OC 48 high speed line 1W and the DS3 circuit packs that terminate add drop traffic to from the OC 48 high speed line 1E Secondary timing to the east OC48 TRMTR circuit pack on the Enhanced High Speed Shelf or High Speed Sh...

Page 620: ...ck accepts the primary DS1 reference signal and the number 2 TG3 DS1 circuit pack accepts the secondary DS1 reference signal If the primary DS1 reference signal fails the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal switch to the secondary DS1 reference signal and the number 2 TG3 DS1 circuit pack If both DS1 reference signals fail the TG3 DS1 circuit pack holds the on board oscillator frequency at the l...

Page 621: ...signal for the number 1 TG3 DS1 circuit pack The east OC48 RCVR circuit pack recovers the 2 5 GHz clock signal from the incoming OC 48 signal on OC 48 high speed line 1E and generates the primary 25 92 MHz reference signal for the number 2 TG3 DS1 circuit pack If an OC 48 line reference signal or the OC 48 high speed line fails the TG3 DS1 circuit pack switches to the secondary OC 48 line referenc...

Page 622: ... Issue 8 0 July 2002 Figure 9 24 OC 48 Line Reference Protection FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal TG3 1 TG3 2 25 92 MHz Transmit Circuits Transmit Circuits Primary Secondary OC 48 1W OC 48 1E OC48 RCVR E OC48 RCVR W 25 92 MHz ...

Page 623: ...provisioned to operate in the through timed mode or externally timed mode phase locked in releases prior to Release 5 and all reference signals fail the TG3 DS1 circuit pack holds the on board oscillator frequency at the last good reference sample holdover mode until the DS1 reference signals are repaired In the holdover mode the on board oscillator frequency will not degrade below the stratum 3 l...

Page 624: ...oopback is established toward the OC 48 high speed line the input OC 3 signal from the OC 3 line is preempted but the output OC 3 signal transmitted toward the OC 3 line remains connected When a loopback is established toward the OC 3 line the OC 3 signal from the OC 48 high speed line is preempted but the OC 3 signal transmitted toward the OC 48 high speed line remains connected Low speed OC 12 l...

Page 625: ...opbacks can also be made through the message based operations system interface using X 25 protocol and Transaction Language 1 TL1 messages In Release 5 and later releases OC 3 and OC 12 loopbacks can be made through the message based operations system interface Active electronic loopbacks are noted by the abnormal ABN LED on the user panel and in the alarm and status report A remote DS3 EC 1 OC 3 ...

Page 626: ...n be aborted at any time or terminated prematurely if a condition exists that prevents the test from completing The test results are displayed on the CIT For more information about auto turnup tests refer to the Operation and Maintenance TOP section Volume II The following auto turnup tests are provided Local Terminal Self Test The FAULT Test Auto Turnup Local input verifies the internal health of...

Page 627: ... verify the continuity of each through transmission path the east OC48 RCVR circuit pack inserts one parity bit error on each STS 3 tributary toward the west OC48 TRMTR circuit pack The west OC48 RCVR circuit pack also inserts one parity bit error on each STS 3 tributary toward the east OC48 TRMTR circuit pack The OC48 TRMTR circuit packs monitor each STS 3 tributary If only one parity bit error i...

Page 628: ...that the input and output low speed interface cables are connected to the same port at the terminal and the cross connect panel or equivalent The DSX test also performs low speed switches for each electrical low speed interface circuit pack DS3 and STS1E and tests the transmission path through the LSSW circuit packs The LSSW circuit packs are in the transmission path between the protection electri...

Page 629: ...t pack in an FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay The regenerator test verifies the transmission and fault isolation capabilities of an OC48 REGENER circuit pack For the regenerator test the output of each OC48 REGENR circuit pack to be tested must be looped back to its input with a single mode fiber jumper and a lightguide buildout in the optical path simulating the outside plant loss Figure 9 27 Figure 9 ...

Page 630: ...is powered and cannot be tested with this input FAULT Test Telemetry Parallel This input tests the operation of the local parallel telemetry and miscellaneous discrete control output points Each test cycle activates the selected control output point s for 20 seconds then clears the control output point s for 20 seconds The control output points revert to normal operation after the test is complete...

Page 631: ...tion add or through is checked To check the standby cross connection the FAULT SWITCH PATH STS3 or FAULT SWITCH PATH STS1 Release 7 and later input must be used to switch the standby cross connection to the active state The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal also makes circuit provisioning information available with the following reports STS 3 Tributary Map Report In releases prior to Release 7...

Page 632: ...d later releases the STS 1 Circuit Map Report follows a circuit path and reports all cross connections that make up a circuit For more information about the STS 1 Circuit Map Report refer to the CONFIGURATION Retrieve Circuit STS1 input in Volume I Section 11 Craft Interface Terminal Usage ...

Page 633: ...r definitions of SONET sections lines and paths Table 9 13 lists the SONET performance parameters monitored These parameters are thresholded to show degraded performance When a performance monitoring threshold is crossed it is reported to the operations system where all threshold crossings associated with a particular path can be correlated and the likely source of the degradation can be identifie...

Page 634: ... 65535 OC 48 OC 12 OC 3 Line OC 3 Line B2 Coding Violations CV L 14000 1343750 OC 3 Line B2 Errored Seconds ES L 900 65535 OC 3 Line B2 Severely Errored Seconds SES L 900 4095 OC 3 Line B2 Unavailable Seconds UAV L 900 4095 OC 3 Line B2 Protection Switch Count PSC L 63 255 OC 12 Line B2 Coding Violations CV L 56000 5375000 OC 12 Line B2 Errored Seconds ES L 900 65535 OC 12 Line B2 Severely Errored...

Page 635: ... power is currently within the nominal sensitivity limits of the receiver in range or out of range The optical power receive parameter can be used with other proactive performance monitoring parameters to isolate the source of an impending high speed failure Threshold crossing alerts TCAs are generated if an OC 48 optical parameter exceeds the set thresholds The generation of TCAs can be enabled o...

Page 636: ...g of life laser bias current limit There is no lower limit Optical Transmit Power This parameter indicates whether the signal power facet power generated by the laser is within normal margins in range and out of range The upper limit is 0 8 dBm above the initial factory nominal value and the lower limit is 1 0 dBm below the initial factory nominal value Optical Power Receive This parameter indicat...

Page 637: ...h there are one or more B1 parity violations detected one or more LOS defects or one or more LOF defects Section B1 Severely Errored Seconds SES S A severely errored second SES is a second in which there are 249 or more B1 parity violations detected one or more LOS defects or one or more LOF defects Section B1 Severely Errored Frame Seconds SEFS S A section severely errored frame second SEFS is th...

Page 638: ...or a line AIS defect is detected Line B2 Unavailable Seconds UAS L An unavailable second UAS L is a second during which the OC 48 OC 12 or OC 3 line is unavailable Unavailable seconds are counted after 10 consecutive line B2 severely errored seconds SES L These 10 severely errored seconds are counted and each subsequent second is counted until there are 10 consecutive seconds without a severely er...

Page 639: ...defect indicator path RDI P defects Path B3 Path Far End FEBE Severely Errored Seconds SES P and SES F An STS 1 path B3 severely errored second SES is a second in which there are nine or more B3 parity violations one or more STS 1 path AIS defects or one or more STS 1 path LOP defects A path far end FEBE severely errored second SES is a second in which there are nine or more FEBE coding violations...

Page 640: ...or an EC 1 line AIS defect detected Line B2 Severely Errored Seconds SES L A severely errored second SES is a second in which there are 9 or more B2 parity violations or an EC 1 line AIS defect detected Line B2 Unavailable Seconds UAS L An unavailable second UAS is a second during which the EC 1 line is unavailable Unavailable seconds are counted after 10 consecutive line B2 severely errored secon...

Page 641: ...are one or more DS3 coding violations one or more DS3 path AIS defects or one or more DS3 path LOF defects detected in the DS3 signal received from the OC 48 line DS3 Path Severely Errored Seconds SES P A severely errored second SES is a second in which there are 44 or more DS3 coding violations one or more DS3 path AIS defects or one or more DS3 path LOP defects in the DS3 signal received from th...

Page 642: ...sage A single start time can be provisioned for measuring all the current day performance monitoring parameters The start time can be provisioned to start at any hour The performance monitoring parameters will reset and begin daily at the provisioned start time For more information about provisioning the performance monitoring start time refer to Volume I Section 8 Administration and Provisioning ...

Page 643: ...refer to the PERFORMANCE Set PM Threshold Optics PERFORMANCE Set PM Threshold Section PERFORMANCE Set PM Threshold Line PERFORMANCE Set PM Threshold STS1 PERFORMANCE Set PM Threshold EC1 and PERFORMANCE Set PM Threshold T3 inputs in the Local Provisioning part of Volume I Section 8 Administration and Provisioning Also refer to the PERFORMANCE Retrieve PM Threshold Optics PERFORMANCE Retrieve PM Th...

Page 644: ... report shows the following alarm levels Critical CR Major MJ Minor MN Abnormal ABN Near end activity NE ACTY The source address and description of the alarm condition for example controller failure incoming high speed signal failure etc are included in the report along with the date and time detected The report also shows if the condition affects service The option to display specified subsets of...

Page 645: ... I Section 11 Craft Interface Terminal Usage Retrieve Assignment DCC Retrieve Attribute Alarm Retrieve Attribute Control Retrieve Attribute Environment Retrieve Circuit STS1 Retrieve Crossconnection All Retrieve Crossconnection TIRKS Retrieve Date Retrieve EC1 Retrieve Equipment Retrieve Low Speed Retrieve Map Neighbor Retrieve Map Network Retrieve Map Ring Retrieve OC12 Retrieve OC3 Retrieve OC48...

Page 646: ...plays the state of each addressed slot and the external DS1 references in the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal For each slot and external DS1 reference the report includes the following Address This shows the slot or external DS1 reference address Circuit pack This shows the functional name of the circuit pack Port state This shows the state of low speed ports as AUTO NMON or IS The port stat...

Page 647: ...at lists the circuit pack version and the software release if applicable for the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal and FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay This report also lists all the circuit packs that are present For more information refer to the CONFIGURATION Retrieve Equipment input in Volume I Section 11 Craft Interface Terminal Usage Synchronization Report 9 The synchronization report is an on ...

Page 648: ...Maintenance Description 9 96 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 649: ...elength 10 3 Optical Dispersion 10 4 Optical Return Loss 10 4 Outside Plant Loss 10 5 Optical Line Loss Budgets 10 5 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System 10 5 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System and FT Lightwave Booster Amplifier 10 11 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System and Wavelength Division Multiplexing Systems 10 12 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System with Wavelength Division Multiplexing and FT LBA Systems 10 13...

Page 650: ...erfaces 10 19 Transmission Medium 10 19 Lightguide Jumpers 10 19 Optical Source 10 19 Optical Detector 10 20 Optical Safety BRH Classification 10 20 Operating Wavelength 10 20 Spectral Width 10 20 Optical Dispersion 10 20 OC 3 Line Loss Budgets 10 20 IS 3 Access 10 22 Optical Line Interface 10 22 Optical Connector Interfaces 10 22 Transmission Medium 10 22 Lightguide Jumpers 10 22 Optical Source 1...

Page 651: ... Budgets 10 27 OC 3 to IS 3 Interface Interconnection 10 28 Transmission Delay 10 28 Protection Switching OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 Lines 10 29 Electrical Line Buildout Specifications 10 30 Cable Access 10 31 Power Specifications 10 32 Bay Shelf Dimensions 10 33 Circuit Pack Dimensions 10 35 Floor Loading Specifications 10 38 Environmental Specifications 10 38 Craft Interface Terminal 10 39 Personal Comput...

Page 652: ...0 July 2002 Table of Contents TL1 Autonomous Messaging in Release 4 1 and Earlier 10 43 Provisioning TL1 Autonomous Messages for Release 5 and Later Releases 10 44 DTE Configuration 10 44 Circuit Pack FIT Rates 10 50 ...

Page 653: ...253 GR 253 CORE is the basis for this information Optical Line Interface 1 0 Optical Connector Interfaces 1 0 The OC48 Transmitter OC48 Receiver and OC48 Regenerator circuit packs use STâ lightguide connectors standard FC PC lightguide connectors or SC lightguide connectors Transmission Medium 1 0 Single Mode Fiber Optical Output 2 488 Gb s Optical Line Code Scrambled nonreturn to zero NRZ ...

Page 654: ...ed Feedback DFB Laser Optical Detector 1 0 Avalanche Photodiode APD Optical Safety CDRH Classification 1 0 OC 48 standard performance 1 310 µm Class IIIB OC 48 high performance 1 310 µm Class IIIB OC 48 standard performance 1 550 µm Class I OC 48 WDM LBA compatible 1 538 µm Class I OC 48 WDM LBA compatible 1 558 µm Class I OC 48 739E_ standard performance 1 5 µm Class I OC 48 739G_ high performanc...

Page 655: ...6 1 55737 µm 739E7 1 55898 µm 739E8 1 56061 µm 739E9 1 54851 µm 739E10 1 55012 µm 739E11 1 55172 µm 739E12 1 55333 µm 739E13 1 55494 µm 739E14 1 55655 µm 739E15 1 55817 µm 739E16 1 55979 µm 739H1 1 56061 µm 739H2 1 55898 µm 739H3 1 55736 µm 739H4 1 55575 µm 739H5 1 55252 µm 739H6 1 55092 µm 739H7 1 54932 µm 739H8 1 54772 µm 739H9 1 54294 µm 739H10 1 54135 µm 739H11 1 53977 µm 739H12 1 53819 µm 739...

Page 656: ...ccount Executive OC 48 standard performance 1 310 µm 300 ps nm OC 48 high performance 1 310 µm 300 ps nm OC 48 standard performance 1 550 µm 1800 ps nm OC 48 WDM LBA compatible 1 538 µm 2520 ps nm OC 48 WDM LBA compatible 1 558 µm 2520 ps nm OC 48 739E_ TRMTR 1 550 µm 6800 ps nm OC 48 739G_ TRMTR 1 550 µm 10900 ps nm OC 48 739H_ TRMTR 1 550 µm 1560 ps nm Maximum system optical return loss 24 0 dB ...

Page 657: ...mance Performance Maximum Transmitter Power P Tmax Transmit and receive powers are referenced to points S and R as shown in Figure 10 1 2 5 dBm 5 5 dBm 4 0 dBm Minimum Transmitter Power P Tmin These values include transmitter receiver connectors 0 7 dB each worst case and the system margins 2 0 dBm 1 0 dBm 2 0 dBm Maximum Received Power P Rmax The receiver sensitivity and maximum received power va...

Page 658: ...ase and the system margins 6 2 dBm 7 5 dBm 8 7 dBm 9 4 dBm 9 9 dBm 10 4 dBm 10 2 dBm 8 7 dBm Maximum Received Power PRmax The receiver sensitivity and maximum received power values are measured at a BER of 1x10 10 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm Receiver Sensitivity PRmin 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm Minimum System ...

Page 659: ...4 dBm Maximum Received Power PRmax The receiver sensitivity and maximum received power values are measured at a BER of 1x10 10 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm Receiver Sensitivity PRmin 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm Minimum System Gain S R 22 8 dB 20 2dB 19 0 dB 18 0 dB 17 4 dB 16 9 dB 16 7 dB 17 6 dB Optical Path Pe...

Page 660: ...Bm 3 3 dBm 3 3 dBm Maximum Received Power PRmax The receiver sensitivity and maximum received power values are measured at a BER of 1x10 10 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm Receiver Sensitivity PRmin 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm Minimum System Gain S R 23 7 dB 23 7 dB 23 7 dB 23 7 dB 23 7 dB 23 7 dB 23 7 dB 23 7 dB O...

Page 661: ...7 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm 27 0 dBm Minimum System Gain S R 23 7 dB 23 7 dB 23 7 dB 23 7 dB 23 7 dB 23 7 dB 23 7 dB 23 7 dB Optical Path Penalty P O 2 dB 2 dB 2 dB 2 dB 2 dB 2 dB 2 dB 2 dB Maximum Loss Budget 23 2 dB 23 2 dB 23 2 dB 23 2 dB 23 2 dB 23 2 dB 23 2 dB 23 2 dB Minimum Loss Budget These values assume that the maximum received power limitations are not exceeded 10 dB 10 dB 10 dB 10 dB 10 ...

Page 662: ...10 1 Optical System Interfaces Point S Transmitter Transmitter Connector Assembly Station Cable Fiber Fiber Outside Plant Cable Connections Assembly Station Cable Receiver Receiver Connector Point R OC48 TRMTR OC48 RCVR Cross Connect Panel Cross Connect Panel ...

Page 663: ...spersion of 18 psec nm km Table 10 7 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System and FT Lightwave Booster Amplifier Loss Budgets 9 dBm FT LBA 12 dBm FT LBA 16 dBm FT LBA Parameter Standard Fiber Dispersion Shifted Fiber Standard Fiber Dispersion Shifted Fiber Standard Fiber Dispersion Shifted Fiber Maximum Transmitter Power PTmax 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 15 0 dBm 15 0 dBm 17 0 dBm 17 0 dBm Nominal Transmitter Power 9...

Page 664: ... maximum received power values are measured at a BER of 1x10 10 The 1 5 µm Standard Performance optics is dispersion limited to 92 kilometers These values assume that the maximum received power limitations are not exceeded Table 10 8 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System and Wavelength Division Multiplexing Systems Loss Budgets OC48 TRMTR A D 1 5 LBA W1 and W2 Parameter OC48 TRMTR A D STS1 1 5 LBA W1 and...

Page 665: ...es are measured at a BER of 1x10 10 The 1 5 µm Standard Performance optics is dispersion limited to 92 kilometers These values assume that the maximum received power limitations are not exceeded Table 10 9 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System with Wavelength Division Multiplexing Systems and FT LBA Loss Budgets OC48 TRMTR A D 1 5 LBA W1 and W2 Parameter OC48 TRMTR A D STS1 1 5 LBA W1 and W2 Maximum Tran...

Page 666: ...t 1 5 µm 4 Only 1 5 µm transmitters will work with dispersion shifted fiber The dispersion limit applies only to the OC48 TRMTR A D 1 5 STD circuit pack using standard fiber The limit is 1800 psec nm or 100 km Table 10 10 Transmission Distances without Optical Amplifiers Circuit Pack Loss Budget Standard Fiber Note 1 Low Loss Fiber Note 2 Dispersion Shifted Fiber Note 3 Note 4 OC48 TRMTR A D 1 3 S...

Page 667: ...A transmitter is screened for dispersion Table 10 11 Transmission Distances with the FT Lightwave Booster Amplifier Maximum Distance Dispersion Limit Note 1 Standard Fiber SF Note 2 Dispersion Shifted Fiber DSF Note 3 FT LBA Loss Budget OC48 TRMTR A D 1 5 STD OC48 TRMTR A D 1 5 LBA 1 5 LBA W1 1 5 LBA W2 STS1 1 5 LBA W1 STS1 1 5 LBA W2 Note 4 OC48 TRMTR A D 1 5 STD OC48 TRMTR A D 1 5 LBA 1 5 LBA W1...

Page 668: ...ss including splice loss with a dispersion limit of 18 psec nm per kilometer 1 3 µm 0 375 dB km 1 5 µm 0 22 dB km 4 Dispersion shifted fiber assumes a 0 25 dB km loss at 1 5 µm 5 Only 1 5 µm transmitters will work with dispersion shifted fiber On dispersion shifted fiber both versions of 1 5µm transmitters support the same distances Capacity 1 0 48 DS3 Equivalent Signals 32 256 two way voice circu...

Page 669: ...omatically terminate the DS3 signal outputs 75 ohm termination plugs must be placed at the cross connect panel In releases prior to Release 7 if DS3 output ports are not terminated with 75 ohms false trouble conditions could be reported by the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal In Release 7 and later releases it is still recommended that DS3 output ports be terminated properly However if unterm...

Page 670: ...o not automatically terminate the EC 1 signal outputs 75 ohm termination plugs must be placed at the cross connect panel In releases prior to Release 7 if EC 1 output ports are not terminated with 75 olhm false trouble conditions could be reported by the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal In Release 7 and later releases it is still recommended that EC 1 output ports be terminated properly Howev...

Page 671: ...ance OC3 1 3 STD circuit pack complies with the OC 3 short reach and intermediate reach optical interface standards TR 253 The OC3 1 3 STD circuit pack also supports applications with span lengths up to 51 kilometers Optical Connector Interfaces 1 0 The OC3 1 3 STD circuit pack uses ST lightguide connectors standard FC PC lightguide connectors or SC lightguide connectors Transmission Medium 1 0 Si...

Page 672: ...n 1 0 OC 3 Line Loss Budgets 1 0 The FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System is designed to meet the OC 3 loss budget specifications shown in Table 10 13 The transmit and receive powers are referenced to points S and R in Figure 10 1 OC 3 standard performance 1 31 µm Class I OC 3 receiver 1 31 µm 0 070 or 0 050 µm OC 3 transmitter 1 31 µm 0 040 or 0 038 µm OC 3 standard performance 1 31 µm 270 ps nm ...

Page 673: ...persion reflection and jitter that occur on the optical path One connector 0 75 dB on each end is assumed to connect station cable to outside plant Unallocated margin or safety margin is usually used for fiber repairs This can be used to increase the loss budget if needed The budget is available for both station and transmission cable and splices Table 10 13 OC 3 Line Loss Budget Specifications No...

Page 674: ...common across the SONET family of products Optical Connector Interfaces 1 0 The IS3 circuit pack uses ST lightguide connectors standard FC PC lightguide connectors or SC lightguide connectors Transmission Medium 1 0 Multimode fiber Lightguide Jumpers 1 0 Multimode lightguide jumpers Optical Source 1 0 LED Optical Detector 1 0 PIN diode Optical output 155 52 Mb s Optical line code Scrambled nonretu...

Page 675: ...Issue 8 0 July 2002 10 23 Optical Safety BRH Classification 1 0 Operating Wavelength 1 0 Spectral Width 1 0 170 0 nm RMS Optical Dispersion 1 0 IS3 Optical Interface Class I IS 3 1 31 µm 0 070 or 0 040 µm IS 3 1 31 µm 270 ps nm ...

Page 676: ...rsion reflection and jitter that occur on the optical path One connector 0 75 dB on each end is assumed to connect station cable to outside plant Unallocated margin or safety margin is usually used for fiber repairs This can be used to increase the loss budget if needed The budget is available for both station and transmission cable and splices Table 10 14 IS 3 Line Loss Budget Specifications Para...

Page 677: ...cuit pack uses ST lightguide connectors standard FC PC lightguide connectors or SC lightguide connectors Transmission Medium 1 0 Single mode fiber or multimode fiber Lightguide Jumpers 1 0 Single mode or multimode lightguide jumpers Optical Source 1 0 InGaAsP Multi longitudinal mode MLM laser Optical Detector 1 0 PIN diode Optical output 622 08 Mb s Optical line code Scrambled nonreturn to zero NR...

Page 678: ... 0 Operating Wavelength 1 0 Spectral Width 1 0 2 0 nm RMS Optical Dispersion 1 0 OC 12 standard performance 1 31 µm Class I OC 12 Available in Release 7 1 but the DCC channel cannot be provisioned for 1 1 connections 1 31 µm 0 015 or 0 012 µm OC 12 standard performance 1 31 µm 270 ps nm ...

Page 679: ...ersion reflection and jitter that occur on the optical path One connector 0 75 dB on each end is assumed to connect station cable to outside plant Unallocated margin or safety margin is usually used for fiber repairs This can be used to increase the loss budget if needed The budget is available for both station and transmission cable and splices Table 10 15 OC 12 Line Loss Budget Specifications Pa...

Page 680: ... LBO values and ordering information about connecting to a DDM 2000 IS 3 interface refer to 365 206 200 DDM 2000 Multiplexer Applications Planning and Ordering Guide Transmission Delay 1 0 The FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal has the following worst case measured one way transmission delay times Table 10 16 Maximum Distances Fiber Note OC 3 to OC 3 OC 3 to IS 3 Bandwidth Connections Connectio...

Page 681: ...sue 8 0 July 2002 10 29 Protection Switching OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 Lines 1 0 Switching Bit Error Rate BER 10 5 to 10 9 user provisionable Restoral BER One tenth of the switching BER Switching Time 60 msec BER 10 3 line signal failure ...

Page 682: ...4A cable and has a silver coating on the center conductor to enhance crimping the connectors 3 Direct connection of 734D cables to FT 2000 equipment is not recommended due to space limitations in the interconnection panel 735A cables should be used for these connections 4 If cable length requirements exceed the lengths specified for 735A cable 735A 734D or 735A 734D 735A cable combinations may be ...

Page 683: ...able used in early installations same loss as 734 type 3 734A same loss as 734D must be soldered 4 Use 9824AG LBO on FT outputs when required Loss equivalent to 225 734 or 125 735 cable 3 dB 5 Lucent cables may be ordered from ED 8C900 20 6 Lucent installers use TK 604 to terminate cables 7 Refer to 365 301 130 Planning Engineering Installation Operation Guide X X 500 735A 900 734D 250 735A NE DSX...

Page 684: ...0 OC 48 Repeater Shelf Two Repeater Shelf System Controllers 350 watts 50 watts ft2 FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Shelf Three Repeater Shelf System Controllers 525 watts 75 watts ft2 Current Drains per Feeder Cable Nominal List 1 48 V DC FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal for 2 Fiber Ring 5 3 amps FT 2000 OC 48 Dual Lightwave Terminating Bay 11 9 amps FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Shelf 1 8 amps FT 2000 OC 4...

Page 685: ... is shared equally by both feeders If one feeder fails the other feeder carries the total load for both feeders feeder A feeder B current Bay Shelf Dimensions 1 0 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Bays 84 inches 213 cm high 26 inches 66 cm wide 12 inches 30 cm deep FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Bays Packaged 33 inches 84 cm high 90 inches 229 cm wide 29 inches 74 cm deep Enhanced High Speed Shelf 21...

Page 686: ...te and the framework is central office soft blue PC Tray 4 inches 10 cm high 21 5 inches 54 cm wide 10 inches 25 cm deep Heat Baffle 4 inches 10 cm high 21 5 inches 54 cm wide 10 inches 25 cm deep Fan Assembly 4 inches 10 cm high 21 5 inches 54 cm wide 10 inches 25 cm deep Bay Shelf Dimensions Contd 1 0 ...

Page 687: ...wide 7 inches 19 cm deep LAA12 LSSW 13 inches 32 cm high 0 75 inch 1 9 cm wide 7 inches 19 cm deep LAA14 OW 13 inches 32 cm high 0 75 inch 1 9 cm wide 7 inches 19 cm deep LAA18 TG3 DS1 13 inches 32 cm high 1 inch 2 5 cm wide 7 inches 19 cm deep LAA21 OHCTL TERM 13 inches 32 cm high 0 75 inch 1 9 cm wide 7 inches 19 cm deep LAA22 OHCTL TERM 13 inches 32 cm high 0 75 inch 1 9 cm wide 7 inches 19 cm ...

Page 688: ...9S2 OC48 REGENR 13 inches 32 cm high 3 25 inches 8 3 cm wide 7 inches 19 cm deep 739B2 OC48 TRMTR 13 inches 32 cm high 4 5 inches 11 4 cm wide 7 inches 19 cm deep 739B4 OC48 TRMTR 13 inches 32 cm high 4 5 inches 11 4 cm wide 7 inches 19 cm deep 739B5 OC48 TRMTR 13 inches 32 cm high 4 5 inches 11 4 cm wide 7 inches 19 cm deep 739C2 OC48 TRMTR 13 inches 32 cm high 4 5 inches 11 4 cm wide 7 inches 19...

Page 689: ...h 4 5 inches 11 4 cm wide 7 inches 19 cm deep 739R5 OC48 TRMTR 13 inches 32 cm high 4 5 inches 11 4 cm wide 7 inches 19 cm deep 739S2 OC48 TRMTR 13 inches 32 cm high 4 5 inches 11 4 cm wide 7 inches 19 cm deep 739S5 OC48 TRMTR 13 inches 32 cm high 4 5 inches 11 4 cm wide 7 inches 19 cm deep 839B2 OC48 RCVR 13 inches 32 cm high 2 25 inches 5 7 cm wide 7 inches 19 cm deep 839B4B OC48 RCVR 13 inches ...

Page 690: ...5 Subpart J for Class A equipment The FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System is UL and CSA listed 1 Shelf Bay 220 lbs 31 lbs ft2 2 Shelf Bay 375 lbs 53 lbs ft2 3 Shelf Bay 420 lbs 60 lbs ft2 4 Shelf Bay 465 lbs 67 lbs ft2 Packaged Bay 520 lbs Normal Operating Temperature 41 F to 104 F 5 C to 40 C Short Term Operating Temperature Short term refers to a period of up to 72 consecutive hours and a total of up...

Page 691: ... MS DOS computer program version 5 0 or later Serial port EIA 232 D configured as COM1 COM2 COM3 or COM4 Parallel port configured as LPT1 VGA color monitor Registered trademark of International Business Machine Corporation No memory resident programs running in the background 565 kilobytes of conventional memory is also required In Release 7 and later releases 2 megabytes of extended extended memo...

Page 692: ...nts to be loaded with the CPro 2000 software and used as a CIT 386SX IBM compatible computer desktop or lap top 25 MHz clock or greater Disk drive one 1 44 Megabyte 3 5 inch Hard disk with approximately 5 Megabytes of free space 8 Megabyte RAM MS DOS computer program version 5 0 or later Windows program version 3 1 Serial port EIA 232 D configured as COM1 or COM2 Mouse VGA color monitor Registered...

Page 693: ...sed terminal should be configured for byte serial data transmission of eight bit bytes with one start bit and one stop bit Parity should be none and the flow control should be DC1 DC3 Modem Requirements 1 0 A compatible modem or digital data network must meet the following minimum requirements Full duplex Asynchronous Byte serial data transmission of eight bit bytes One start bit One stop bit Data...

Page 694: ... a contact closure across the corresponding environmental input wiring pairs The contact closure must be capable of passing at least 10 mA of drive current The power source to enable the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System to control external customer equipment may be from a minimum of 3 V to a maximum of 72 V The FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System provides a unidirectional opto isolator connection across ...

Page 695: ...ed to issue TL1 commands to the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System and obtain responses The ability of virtual circuits to send autonomous TL1 messages varies with the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System release used TL1 Autonomous Messaging in Release 4 1 and Earlier 1 0 For releases through Release 4 1 the FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System supports two PVCs Table 10 18 Only PVC 1 can send autonomous message...

Page 696: ...type to associate with a given X 25 calling address When an SVC is set up using one of the provisioned calling addresses then the call is assigned the associated OS type If the SVC does not supply an X 25 calling address or if the X 25 calling address does not match any of the provisioned X 25 calling addresses then command response only is assumed When an OS establishes an SVC call an available S...

Page 697: ...us full duplex continuous carrier communication Data rates of 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 are supported Table 10 20 TL1 X 25 Interface X 25 Packet Layer Parameters Parameter Value Packet Size 256 bytes Window Size 2 packets D bit support No M bit support Yes Q bit support No Table 10 21 TL1 X 25 Interface LAPB Link Layer Parameters Parameter Value Maximum Frame Size 2104 bits Modulo 8 Window Siz...

Page 698: ...D Pin Connections Pin Description 1 Protective Ground Shield 2 Transmitted Data 3 Received Data 4 Request to Send RTS DTR and RTS are always on when FT 2000 is powered 5 Clear to Send CTS FT 2000 will only transmit data via X 25 when CTS is on 6 DCE Ready 7 Signal Ground 8 Received Line Signal Detector 15 Transmit Clock TC 17 Receive Clock RC 20 Data Terminal Ready DTR ...

Page 699: ...el traversing nine FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals with protected OC 3 IS 3 interfaces per OC 3 IS 3 channel 566 mile 16 node ring circumference 11 00 minutes year OC 3 channel traversing nine FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminals with unprotected OC 3 IS 3 interfaces per OC 3 IS 3 channel OC 12 Channel Unavailability hardware only FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings 0 003 minutes year Terminal f...

Page 700: ...uipped with DS3 and or STS1E interfaces FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings 21 6 months Terminal for 2 Fiber Rings equipped with protected and or unprotected OC 3 IS 3 interfaces FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings 31 5 months Terminal for 2 Fiber Rings equipped with protected and or unprotected OC 12 interfaces FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay 78 3 months One Repeater Shelf System Controller FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater B...

Page 701: ...Synchronization Inputs Source Two references must be derived from a stratum 3 or better timing source Line Coding AMI original value or B8ZS Frame Format SF original value or ESF Connector DB9 Protection Switching Between References Revertive Automatic on LOS AIS LOF OOF or BER DS1 Synchronization Outputs Source Two references derived directly from the OC 48 line Point to Point Reference 1 derived...

Page 702: ... 1442 LAA23C SYSCTL 1811 LAA25 SYSMEM 1528 LAA26 TOHCTL 1100 LAA28 LNCTL 4 MEG 1104 39B2 OC48 REGENR 1 3 STD 3630 39C2 OC48 REGENR 1 3 HI PERF 3630 39J2 OC48 REGENR 1 5 STD 3630 39R2 OC48 REGENR 1 5 LBA W1 3630 39S2 OC48 REGENR 1 5 LBA W2 3630 739B2 OC48 TRMTR A D 1 3 STD 3904 739B4 OC48 TRMTR A D 1 3 STD 4000 739B5 OC48 TRMTR A D STS1 1 3 STD 5000 739C2 OC48 TRMTR A D 1 3 HI PERF 3904 739C5 OC48 ...

Page 703: ...5000 739R2 OC48 TRMTR A D 1 5 LBA W1 3904 739R5 OC48 TRMTR A D STS1 1 5 LBA W1 5000 739S2 OC48 TRMTR A D 1 5 LBA W2 3904 739S5 OC48 TRMTR A D STS1 1 5 LBA W2 5000 839B2 OC48 RCVR A D 2912 839B4B OC48 RCVR A D 3000 839B5 OC48 RCVR A D STS1 3000 Based on Method 1 of the Telcordia Reliability Prediction Procedure for Electronic Equipment Issue 5 December 1995 Circuit Pack Failures 109 hours FIT ...

Page 704: ...Technical Specifications 10 52 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 705: ...tive User 11 38 Example 2 FAULT Retrieve Alarm 11 40 Example 3 CONFIGURATION Retrieve Assignment DCC 11 42 Example 4 CONFIGURATION Retrieve Attribute Alarm 11 43 Example 5 CONFIGURATION Retrieve Attribute Control 11 44 Example 6 CONFIGURATION Retrieve Attribute Environment 11 45 Example 7 CONFIGURATION Retrieve Circuit STS1 11 46 Example 8 CONFIGURATION Retrieve Circuit STS3 11 49 Example 9 CONFIG...

Page 706: ...le 28 PERFORMANCE Retrieve PM Mode T3 11 96 Example 29 PERFORMANCE Retrieve PM Optics 11 97 Example 30 PERFORMANCE Retrieve PM Section 11 99 Example 31 PERFORMANCE Retrieve PM Start Time 11 101 Example 32 PERFORMANCE Retrieve PM STS1 11 102 Example 33 PERFORMANCE Retrieve PM T3 11 106 Example 34 PERFORMANCE Retrieve PM TCA 11 109 Example 35 PERFORMANCE Retrieve PM Threshold EC1 11 111 Example 36 P...

Page 707: ...State 11 136 Example 48 CONFIGURATION Retrieve Synchronization 11 143 Example 49 CONFIGURATION Retrieve T3 11 145 Example 50 CONFIGURATION Retrieve Timeslot STS1 11 147 Example 51 CONFIGURATION Retrieve Timeslot STS3 11 149 CIT Tutorial Using CIT PC Software 11 151 Additional Training on an FT 2000 Add Drop Rings Terminal 11 168 ...

Page 708: ...11 iv Issue 8 0 July 2002 Table of Contents ...

Page 709: ...ld be familiar with the information in this tab before using the Operation and Maintenance Task Oriented Practices TOP procedures in this manual CPro 2000 1 1 CPro 2000 is a Microsoft Windows based application software that provides access to SONET network elements The network elements are accessed via the software through a command based ASCII User Interface AUI and or a Graphical User Interface ...

Page 710: ...0 could be used And in Appendix D Script Files are very helpful in setting up remote access to network elements in different configurations Table 11 1 CPro 2000 Cross Reference Procedures Data Element Circuit Order NTP 002 Add DS3 and or EC1 Low Speed Port s Circuit Order NTP 003 Delete DS3 and or EC1 Low Speed Port s Circuit Order NTP 010 Add OC3 Low Speed Slot s Circuit Order NTP 011 Delete OC3 ...

Page 711: ...electing and executing can be called an input or a command Table 11 2 Release 7 lists the inputs commands menu for an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal Table 11 3 Release 6 lists the inputs commands menu for an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal Table 11 4 Release 5 lists the inputs commands menu for an FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal Table 11 5 Release 4 lists the inputs commands men...

Page 712: ...alerts the user to the possible consequences of executing the selected inputs A notice frame is acknowledged and cleared by pressing A confirmation request consists of a caution message followed by inputs entered and the prompt Execute Yes No Pressing y and causes inputs to be executed Pressing n and causes the parameter value entry frame to be displayed again Inputs can be aborted by pressing fun...

Page 713: ...ive at all times An active function key is shown by its label Inactive function keys are not labeled The function of a function key may vary with time and this is indicated by changes in the labeling When labeled HELP context sensitive information is available for the highlighted menu item By pressing the F1 key this additional and specific information is displayed When labeled REMOTE in the local...

Page 714: ...d PRINT this key permits the user to send the FT 2000 network element output to a printer to a file or to both When labeled CANCEL this key permits the user to discard all user entries for the current command or cancels the dial request If F8 is pressed after executing a command an attempt to cancel the command is sent to the FT 2000 network element When labeled EXECUTE this key permits the user t...

Page 715: ...activity present Lucent Technologies fixed in program FT 2000 fixed in program Software release and platform string currently running in the SYSCTL Terminal identification target identifier TID of the network element Session context CIT connection state as follows LOCAL ONLY CIT is only connected to local network element REMOTE Flashing CIT is connected to remote network element from local network...

Page 716: ...eral Synchronization Hardware General Mode General Reference General Alarm Report Only Auto Turnup DSX Privileged Expert FAULT Test Local Privileged Expert LED Report Only Telemetry Parallel General Serial General Alarm Cutoff Report Only Control Point General Operate Loopback EC1 General OC3 General OC12 General T3 General Control Point General Loopback EC1 General Release OC3 General OC12 Genera...

Page 717: ...Only 25 Protection Line Report Only 41 Low Speed Report Only 42 STS1 Report Only STS3 Report Only Synchronization Report Only 48 T3 Report Only 49 Timeslot STS1 Report Only 50 STS3 Report Only 51 Attribute Alarm General Control General Environment General Date Privileged EC1 General Privileged Expert Set Low Speed General OC3 General Privileged Expert OC12 General Privileged Expert OC48 General Pa...

Page 718: ...eral Path Trace General Program Privileged Expert T3 General Privileged Expert Assignment DCC General Crossconnection STS1 General STS3 General Enter Protection STS1 General STS3 General Roll STS1 General STS3 General Assignment DCC General Delete Crossconnection STS1 General STS3 General Update General Initialize System Privileged Expert Table 11 2 Release 7 Inputs Commands Menu for FT 2000 Add D...

Page 719: ... Section General STS1 General T3 General Initialize PM All Day QH General SECURITY Far End Comm Report Only 15 Login Report Only 17 Retrieve Network Element Report Only 22 Security Network Element Report Only 43 Port Report Only 44 Active User Report Only 1 Far End Comm Privileged Login Change Privileged Delete Privileged Set Enter Privileged Network Element Privileged Password Report Only Securit...

Page 720: ...eneral Alarm General FAULT Auto Turnup DSX Privileged Expert Test Local Privileged Expert LED Report Only Telemetry Parallel General Serial General Alarm Cutoff Report Only Operate Loopback EC1 General OC3 General T3 General Loopback EC1 General Release OC3 General T3 General Allow Alarm General Inhibit Alarm General Reset General Assignment DCC Report Only 3 Attribute Alarm Report Only 4 Control ...

Page 721: ...xpert Low Speed General OC3 General Set Privileged Expert OC48 General Path Trace General Protection Line General Low Speed General State EC1 General T3 General Synchronization Privileged Expert T3 General Privileged Expert EC1 General Privileged Expert OC3 General Privileged Expert Copy OC48 General Path Trace General Program Privileged Expert T3 General Privileged Expert Assignment DCC General E...

Page 722: ...ort Only 32 Retrieve TCA Report Only 33 PM Mode T3 Report Only 27 EC1 Report Only 34 PERFORMANCE Line Report Only 35 PM Threshold Optics Report Only 36 Section Report Only 37 STS1 Report Only 38 T3 Report Only 39 PM Start Time General PM Mode T3 General EC1 General Set Line General PM Threshold Optics General Section General STS1 General T3 General Initialize PM All Day QH General Table 11 3 Relea...

Page 723: ...t Report Only 43 Active User Report Only 1 Far End Comm Privileged Login Change Privileged Delete Privileged Set Enter Privileged Network Element Privileged Password Report Only Security Network Element Privileged Port Privileged Table 11 3 Release 6 Inputs Commands Menu for FT 2000 Add Drop Rings Terminal Contd Management Verb First Second Security Report Category Modifier Modifier Level Example ...

Page 724: ...l Mode General Reference General Alarm General Auto Turnup DSX Privileged Expert FAULT Test Local Privileged Expert LED Report Only Telemetry Parallel General Serial General Alarm Cutoff Report Only Operate EC1 General Loopback OC3 General T3 General EC1 General Release Loopback OC3 General T3 General Allow Alarm General Inhibit Alarm General Reset General Alarm Report Only 4 Attribute Control Rep...

Page 725: ...neral OC 3 General Privileged Expert CONFIGURATION OC48 General Cont d Path Trace General Protection Line General Low Speed General State EC1 General T3 General Synchronization Privileged Expert T3 General EC1 General Privileged Expert OC3 Copy OC48 General Path Trace General Program Privileged Expert T3 General Privileged Expert Enter Crossconnection STS3 General Roll STS3 General Squelch Map STS...

Page 726: ...rt Only 39 PM Start Time General PM Mode T3 General EC1 General Set Line General PM Threshold Optics General Section General STS1 General T3 General Initialize PM All Day QH General Far End Comm Report Only 14 Login Report Only 16 Retrieve Network Element Report Only 21 Security Network Element Report Only 42 Port Report Only 43 SECURITY Active User Report Only 1 Far End Comm Privileged Login Chan...

Page 727: ...2 11 19 Password Report Only Security Network Element Privileged Port Privileged Table 11 4 Release 5 Inputs Commands Menu for FT 2000 Add Drop Rings Terminal Contd Management Verb First Second Security Report Category Modifier Modifier Level Example ...

Page 728: ...o Turnup DSX Privileged Expert Test Local Privileged Expert LED Report Only Telemetry Parallel General Serial General Alarm Cutoff Report Only Operate Loopback EC1 General T3 General Release Loopback EC1 General T3 General Allow Alarm General Inhibit Alarm General Reset General Attribute Alarm Report Only 4 Control Report Only 5 Environment Report Only 6 Crossconnection STS3 Report Only 10 Date Re...

Page 729: ... Roll STS3 General Delete Crossconnection STS3 General Update General Initialize System Privileged Expert PM EC1 Report Only 25 Line Report Only 26 Optics Report Only 28 Section Report Only 29 STS1 Report Only 31 T3 Report Only 32 Retrieve TCA Report Only 33 PM Threshold EC1 Report Only 32 PERFORMANCE Line Report Only 35 Optics Report Only 36 Section Report Only 37 STS1 Report Only 38 T3 Report On...

Page 730: ...e Login Report Only 16 Security Network Element Report Only 42 Port Report Only 43 Far End Comm Privileged Login Change Privileged Delete Privileged Set Enter Privileged Network Element Privileged Password Report Only Security Network Element Privileged Port Privileged Table 11 5 Release 4 Inputs Commands Menu for FT 2000 Add Drop Rings Terminal Contd Management Verb First Second Security Report C...

Page 731: ...Auto Turnup DSX General Test Local General LED General Telemetry Parallel General Serial General Operate Alarm Cutoff Report Only Loopback T3 General Release Loopback T3 General Allow Alarm General Inhibit Alarm General Reset General Attribute Alarm Report Only 4 Control Report Only 5 Environment Report Only 6 Crossconnection STS3 Report Only 10 Date Report Only 11 Retrieve Equipment Report Only 1...

Page 732: ...ion Report Only 29 STS1 Report Only 31 T3 Report Only 32 Initialize PM General Retrieve Far End Comm Report Only 14 Network Element Report Only 21 Login Report Only 16 Security Network Element Report Only 42 Port Report Only 43 Set Far End Comm Privileged SECURITY Login Change Privileged Delete Privileged Enter Privileged Network Element Privileged Password Report Only Security Network Element Pri...

Page 733: ... Report Only 13 CONFIGURATION OC48 Report Only 23 Set Attribute Environment General Date General Update General Initialize System Privileged Retrieve Alarm and Status Report Only 2 History Report Only 15 FAULT Test Auto Turnup General LED Report Only Reset General Retrieve Network Element Report Only 21 Login Report Only 16 Security Network Element Report Only 42 SECURITY Port Report Only 43 Set L...

Page 734: ...urce NE to another SYSMEM destination NE via the DCC CONFIGURATION Copy T3 Copies the software provisionable attributes of a DS3 port to one or more DS3 ports CONFIGURATION Delete Assignment DCC Removes a DCC channel assignment from a particular LS INTFC slot or pair of slots thereby disabling DCC communication on the supporting OC 3 as well as disabling DCC access to a particular remote network e...

Page 735: ...ommand rolls the source of a 1 way STS3 cross connection to a new source and or changes a 1 way cross connection type to from a 1 way dri cross connection type CONFIGURATION Enter Squelch Map STS1 This command provisions the Source Node TID and the Destination Node TID of an STS1 squelch map For Release 7 this command assigns Source and Destination node TIDs to STS 1 cross connections and sets STS...

Page 736: ...lease Loopback EC1 Releases a loopback on an EC1 port FAULT Release Loopback OC3 Releases a loopback on an OC3 slot FAULT Release Loopback OC12 Releases a loopback on an OC12 slot FAULT Release Loopback T3 Releases a loopback on a DS3 port FAULT Reset Restarts the FT 2000 network element software as follows 1 Current memory values are copied from the SYSCTL to the SYSMEM 2 executable code is copie...

Page 737: ...e and start and stop dates for daylight saving time CONFIGURATION Retrieve EC1 Retrieves provisioned information and attributes of an EC1 port Also information on alarm severity that is implied by failure of the EC1 port signal degrade threshold and the memory administrative state CONFIGURATION Retrieve Equipment Retrieves the equipage and version information for the FT 2000 network element SECURI...

Page 738: ...oned transmit and receive path traces PERFORMANCE Retrieve PM EC1 Generates a status report containing EC1 section and line performance monitoring data PERFORMANCE Retrieve PM Line Generates a status report containing OC 48 line performance monitoring data PERFORMANCE Retrieve PM Optics Generates a status report containing OC 48 optics performance monitoring data PERFORMANCE Retrieve PM Section Ge...

Page 739: ...trieves the line protection switching characteristics for the FT 2000 end terminal CONFIGURATION Retrieve Protection Low Speed Retrieves the low speed protection switching characteristics of the network element CONFIGURATION Retrieve Protection STS1 Retrieves the current values of the local protection access state variables SECURITY Retrieve Security Network Element Retrieves only at the privilege...

Page 740: ...FIGURATION Set Attribute Environment Provisions the character strings associated with the miscellaneous discrete environmental input points CONFIGURATION Set Date Provisions the correct time calendar date and time zone CONFIGURATION Set EC1 Provisions the characteristics of an EC1 port SECURITY Set Far End Communications Provisions the control of the far end communications access to the FT 2000 te...

Page 741: ...rovisions the performance monitoring TCA threshold values for the EC1 data PERFORMANCE Set PM Threshold Line Provisions the performance monitoring TCA threshold values for the line performance monitoring data PERFORMANCE Set PM Threshold Optics Provisions by enabling or disabling the automatic reporting of TCAs for the optical performance monitoring data PERFORMANCE Set PM Threshold Section Provis...

Page 742: ...h Low Speed Makes or breaks the protection switching of the low speed slots FAULT Switch OC3 Controls the 1 1 protection switching operation OC3 equipped slot pair according to priority reset lockout of protection inhibit forced switch and manual switch FAULT Switch OC12 operation Controls the 1 1 protection switching OC12 equipped slot pair according to priority reset lockout of protection inhibi...

Page 743: ... FT 2000 System is out of service FAULT Test LED Tests the alarm and status LEDs on the user panel and circuit packs FAULT Test Telemetry Parallel Tests the parallel telemetry and miscellaneous discrete points FAULT Test Telemetry Serial Tests the serial telemetry and miscellaneous discrete points CONFIGURATION Update Updates the FT 2000 System data base for the FT 2000 network element to reflect ...

Page 744: ...t 15 FAULT Retrieve History Maintenance History Report 16 SECURITY Retrieve Login Login Provisioning Report 17 CONFIGURATION Retrieve Low Speed Low Speed Slot Report 18 CONFIGURATION Retrieve Map Neighbor Neighbor Map Report CONFIGURATION Retrieve Map Network Network Map Report 19 CONFIGURATION Retrieve Map Ring Ring Map Report 20 FAULT Retrieve Network Alarms Network Alarms Report 21 SECURITY Ret...

Page 745: ...on Switching Provisioning Report 41 CONFIGURATION Retrieve Protection Low Speed Low Speed Protection Switching Provisioning Report 42 SECURITY Retrieve Security Network Element Access Security Global Configuration Report 43 SECURITY Retrieve Security Port Access Port Security Configuration Report 44 CONFIGURATION Retrieve Squelch Map STS1 STS 1 Squelch Map Report 45 CONFIGURATION Retrieve Squelch ...

Page 746: ... Tables 11 2 through 11 8 have a column that shows the number of the report example Each example is introduced by its heading that shows the FT 2000 CIT PC input that produces the report An example is shown for each report along with an explanation of the column headings and parameters Table 11 9 lists the FT 2000 CIT PC inputs commands that produce reports Some reports are too long to fit on a si...

Page 747: ...ntly logged in on each port Delta 1 97 06 15 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve Active User All COMPLD Active User Report Access Port Type TL1 Calling Active Port Channel OS Type Address GNE TID User dce cit dte tl1 dcc vc 0 cit luc02 dcc vc 1 memry admin luc01 dcc vc 2 cmd resp luc03 dcc vc 8 x25 pvc 1 maintenance NMA01 x25 pvc 2 other TMAS x25 svc 1 other 1234 SNC2000 x25 svc 6 Information below is for Rel...

Page 748: ...ce memry admin cmd resp or other The dcc port virtual channel 0 is the cit and virtual channels 1 through 8 are either maintenance memry admin cmd resp or other A dash means that no user is currently logged in to the port TL1 Calling Address GNE TID Shows the calling address the user entered as part of the x 25 dial string and is reported for x 25 virtual channels only or for DCC virtual channels ...

Page 749: ...LED If no LEDs are lit at the user panel no active alarms then an output status message is shown Alarm level status condition will be one or more of the following CR critical alarm MJ major alarm MN minor alarm ABN abnormal status NE ACTY near end activity status The FE ACTY LED on the user panel and the CIT only refers to activity at the far end and will not be reflected in this CIT report Lucent...

Page 750: ...ndition for example a protected power failure For Release 3 an abnormal condition is shown in the same but without the line indicator 1 or P Some conditions give an address for example sts1 1w 6 3 meaning an incoming sts1 DS3 signal on line 1w at tributary 6 on port 3 is receiving path yellow Date Time Detected Shows the month day and time in hours minutes and seconds that the alarm condition was ...

Page 751: ...ls 5 3 and 2 respectively The remaining 11 slots have no DCC Channel assignments and are indicated by dashes The fields of the report are described below Slot Shows a single service LS INTFC slot designation DCC Channel Shows the DCC channel assigned to the specified slot Eight DCC channels are available Orientation Shows either User or Network parameter Network is the default setting User setting...

Page 752: ...m Clear Delay Shows how many seconds the FT 2000 end terminal will wait after the alarm retires before reporting it to the external maintenance interfaces for example user panel operations systems Protection Access Availability The alarm level associated with the protection access unavailable condition Tributary Reporting The alarm level associated with the tributary failed condition Lucent Techno...

Page 753: ...output control points at a remote site The fields of the report are described below Address Shows number selected up to four output points for the report Description Shows the name 26 character string associated with the output points such as start pump start generator etc Lucent Technologies FT 2000 96 07 19 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve Attribute Control All COMPLD Control Point Provisioning Report Ad...

Page 754: ...d alarm level severity of the environmental input such as CR critical alarm MJ major alarm MN minor alarm NA status not alarmed NR status not alarmed and not reported to the OS Description Shows descriptive name the user specified for the alarm condition such as fire open door etc This information is also reported in the condition description of the Active Alarms and Status Report and the History ...

Page 755: ...plete circuit from Chicopee to Worcester in the West to East direction Delta 1 94 11 29 13 15 15 EST M Retrieve Circuit STS1 1 COMPLD STS 1 Circuit Map Report Status good Source Destination Ring Primary Ring Node AID AID Direction State Audit Worcester MA 1e 1 3 ls 1a 1 y Salem NH 1e 1 3 1w 1 3 East to West y Concord MA 1e 1 3 1w 1 3 East to West y Chicopee MA ls 4a 2 1w 1 3 East to West y STS 1 C...

Page 756: ... cross connected in the drop direction The following report was requested from Worcester when the topology was not available at Worcester STS 1 Circuit Map Report Status Not Cross Connected The specified slot is not cross connected in the drop direction STS 1 Circuit Map Report Status Unavailable The ring topology is incomplete ...

Page 757: ...algorithm has declared an STS1 Squelch Map Inconsistent condition for this circuit Circuit Provisioning Error The circuit audit algorithm has declared a Circuit Provisioning Error condition for this circuit audit disabled One or more of the cross connections which make up the circuit has its AUDIT parameters set to NO good No errors were detected Report parameters are Source AID The STS 1 tributar...

Page 758: ...to East direction Each report shows the complete circuit path of slot 1a and lists all cross connections that make up the circuit Delta 1 94 11 29 13 15 15 EST M Retrieve Circuit STS3 1 COMPLD STS 3 Circuit Map Report Status good Cross Ring At Node West Connect East Direction Worcester MA 1a 1e 1 Salem NH 1w 1 1e 1 Concord MA 1w 1 1e 1 Chicopee MA 1w 1 4a Information above is an East to West circu...

Page 759: ...s open Squelch Map Inconsistent The circuit audit algorithm has declared an STS3 Squelch Map Inconsistent condition for this circuit Circuit Provisioning Error The circuit audit algorithm has declared a Circuit Provisioning Error condition for this circuit good No errors were detected At Node Shows the target identifier TID of the node where the report is requested topmost entry West Shows the sel...

Page 760: ...ID Type TID TID State 1e 1 1 1w 1 1 2WAY Chicopee MA Worcester MA ls 4a 3 1e 1 2 2WAY Chicopee MA 1w 1 2 ls 2b 1 1WAY Worcester MA ls 5a 1 1w 2 1 1WAY West Ossipee NH ACT ls 5b 1 lw 2 1 1WAY West Ossipee NH STBY 1w 2 1 ls 5a 1 1WAY West Ossipee NH 1w 2 1 ls 5b 2 1WAY West Ossipee NH 1e 3 2 1w 3 2 2WAY Lenox MA Quabbin MA 1e 4 1 1w 4 1 1WAYDRI Keene NH Boscawen NH STBY ls 6a 1 lw 4 1 1WAYDRI Boscaw...

Page 761: ...ation TID The signal exit destination LOCZ Primary State The status of 1WAYDRI and 1 1 protected OC 3 interface cross connections The values are ACT active or STBY standby Invalid Flag An asterisk displays first character of the Source Destination TID if a provisioned cross connection does not exist in the ring AUDIT parameter Flag A displays last character of the Type field if a provisioned cross...

Page 762: ...ion Map Report State standby active Destination Source Cross Connection Source Destination NOTICE Please use the Retrieve Squelch Map STS1 command to check for possible additional information Worcester MA 1w 1 8a 1b 1e 1 Chicopee MA 1w 1 1b 1e 1 1w 1 1a 1e 1 1w 1 1b 1e 1 Springfield MA 1w 2 1e 2 West Ossipee NH 1w 3 1e 3 Rutland VT 1w 3 2a 1e 3 1w 3 2b 1e 3 1w 3 2a 1e 3 1w 3 2b 1e 3 West Ossipee N...

Page 763: ...tion Shows the line direction West is left East is right and tributary number where the STS3 signal is added dropped through connected in this network element Active cross connection is shown by dashes whereas a standby cross connection is shown by periods Source Dest ination Shows the target identifier TID and may be either the source node or the destination node A dash is shown when a tributary ...

Page 764: ... to 1e 4 and a standby slot 3a to tributary 4 of line 1e Examples of cross connections and additional information are provided in Volume I Section 8 Lucent Technologies FT 2000 96 07 19 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve Crossconnection STS3 COMPLD STS 3 Cross Connection Map Report Destination Source NID DRI Cross Connection DRI NID Source Destination Worcester MA 2 1w 1 1a 1b 1e 1 1 Chicopee MA 1w 1 1b 1e 1...

Page 765: ... standby cross connection Cross Connection Shows the line direction and tributary number where the STS3 signal is added dropped through connected in this network element Active dri cross connection is shown by dashes whereas the standby dri cross connection is shown by periods DRI Shows the dual ring interworking dri cross connection as A active cross connection or S standby cross connection NID S...

Page 766: ...fier and may be either the source node or the destination node 1W Trib Shows the tributary 1 through 16 originating or terminating on line 1W Slot Shows the slot number where the STS3 signal is added dropped in this network element 1E Trib Shows the tributary 1 through 16 terminating or originating on line 1E Source Destination Node ID Shows the node identifier of either the destination node or th...

Page 767: ... 1w 5 3 1e 5 3 Suncook NH 1w 6 1 1e 6 1 Pittsfield MA 1w 6 2 1e 6 2 Quabbin MA 1w 6 3 1e 6 3 Goffstown NH 1w 7 1 8b 2 4a 2 1e 7 1 Alfred ME 1w 7 1 4a 3 1e 7 1 Alfred ME 1w 7 2 1e 7 2 1w 7 3 1e 7 3 Jamaica VT 1w 8 1e 8 Suncook NH 1w 9 1e 9 1w 10 1 1e 10 1 1w 10 2 1w 2 2 1e 10 2 Newburyport MA West Ossipee NH 1w 10 2 7a 3 1e 10 2 1w 10 2 1w 2 2 1e 10 2 Newburyport MA 1w 10 3 1e 10 3 1w 11 1 1e 11 1 ...

Page 768: ...dentifier Type The type of connection Source TID The signal entry source destination LOCA Destination TID The signal exit destination LOCZ Primary State The status of 1WAYDRI and 1 1 protected OC 3 interface cross connections The values are ACT active or STBY standby Invalid Flag An asterisk displays first character of the Source Destination TID if a provisioned cross connection does not exist in ...

Page 769: ... Connection Map Report stby STS1 stby STS3 act STS1 act STS3 Invalid Flag AUDIT set to No Destination Source Cross Connection Source Destination DALLAS 1w 1 3a 1e 1 1w 1 1 1e 1 1 1w 1 2 5a 2 1e 1 2 ATLANTA 1w 1 3 5a 3 1e 1 3 ATLANTA DALLAS 1w 2 3b 7a 1e 2 ATLANTA DALLAS 1w 3 4a 7b 1e 3 ATLANTA DALLAS 1w 4 4b 1b 1e 4 ATLANTA DALLAS 1w 5 5b 1e 5 ...

Page 770: ...or example EST CST MST and PST Start Daylight Savings Time Shows the month and day that daylight savings time is to start Stop Daylight Savings Time Shows the month and day that daylight savings time is to stop Daylight Savings Time Zone Shows the daylight savings time zone for example EDT CDT MDT and PDT The Daylight Savings Time feature is disabled disabled will be shown on the report when the s...

Page 771: ...LEDs are lit then status is shown as NA not alarmed or NR not reported if provisioned as such Signal Degrade Threshold Shows the provisioned signal degrade threshold either 3 or 6 The example shows a 6 meaning the error rate 10 6 Port State Shows the memory administrative state of the port from the STS1X or from the OC 48 line such as is for in service auto for automatic and nmon for not monitored...

Page 772: ...lnctl 1 LNCTL LAA27 S1 1 SNPQAHWAAA 680009 91MV06581722 lnctl p LNCTL LAA27 S1 1 SNPQAHWAAA 680009 91MV06581063 ohctl 1 OHCTL LAA27 S2 2 SNPQAHWAAA 679492 91MV08615555 ohctl p tg 1 1 TG3 LAA17 S1 1 SNPQAHWAAA 679113 91MV08615527 Continue report page by page y n Yes Lucent Technologies FT 2000 LOCAL ONLY Slot Circuit Apparatus Series CLEI ECI Serial Address Pack Code Number Code Code Number ls 1 6a...

Page 773: ...red trademark and CLEI CLLI CLCI and CLFI are trademarks of Telcordia Technologies Inc Slot Address Shows the address of the slot for the selected line Circuit Pack Shows the functional name of the circuit pack Apparatus Code Shows the assigned code of the circuit pack Series Number Shows the series number of the circuit pack CLEI Code Shows the COMMON Language of the circuit pack ECI Code Shows t...

Page 774: ...d reported in the Retrieve Network Alarms Report Remote Office Alarms Shows that the remote office alarms are allowed to be displayed locally enabled or not disabled For example when disabled only local office alarms are reported locally Far End Terminal For Release 3 only Shows the far end terminal manufacturer Lucent Technologies or Other Lucent Technologies FT 2000 96 07 19 23 15 15 EST M Retri...

Page 775: ...enabled or disabled For example when enabled far end activity is indicated by the FE ACTY LED being lit and reported in the Retrieve Network Alarms Report Remote Office Alarms Shows that the remote office alarms are allowed to be displayed locally enabled or not disabled For example when disabled only local office alarms are reported locally Far End TBOS Shows that the far end parallel telemetry T...

Page 776: ...ribed below Date of Event Shows the month day hours minutes and seconds the event occurred System Alarm Shows the active alarm level at the time and date shown Possible alarms are CR MJ MN ABN NE ACTY and dash when no alarms exist in the system Source Address Shows the address of where the event occurred Event Description A brief description of the event Lucent Technologies FT 2000 96 07 19 23 15 ...

Page 777: ...only general and privileged Visitor Shows the login to be a visitor yes or not no Expiration Shows the date that the visitor login expires A dash is shown for nonvisitor logins Last Logged In Shows the time in hours minutes and seconds and the date by year month and day that the user last successfully logged into the FT 2000 network element A dash is shown if a user has never logged in Lucent Tech...

Page 778: ...the assigned privilege reports only general and privileged Status Shows the current status of the login such as enabled or disabled Last Logged In Shows the time in hours minutes and seconds and the date by year month and day that the user last successfully logged into the FT 2000 network element A dash is shown if a user has never logged in Lucent Technologies FT 2000 96 07 19 23 15 15 EST M Retr...

Page 779: ...e report are described below Slot Address Shows the line and slot address of the low speed interface PS Priority Shows the provisioned protection switching priority either HIGH or LOW for an electrical low speed slot Lucent Technologies FT 2000 96 07 19 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve Low Speed All COMPLD Low Speed Slot Report Slot PS Address Priority ls 1 1a HIGH ls 1 1b HIGH ls 1 2a low ls 1 2b low ls 1...

Page 780: ...T 2000 DDM OC3 DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM OC12 DDM 2000 OC 12 DACS IV DACS IV 2000 SLCâ 2000 FbrRch FiberReach and unknown foreign and all others DSNE Shows if this network element is serving as the directory service network element DSNE in the subnetwork ASNE Shows if this network element is serving as an alarm server network element ASNE in the subnetwork Alarm Group Shows a value from zero to 255 where ...

Page 781: ...ppropriate column of the report The fields of the report are described below NID For Releases 4 1 and 5 only Shows the self healing ring address node identifier 0 through 15 TID Shows the target identifier assigned to the node up to 20 characters System Identifier Shows part of the factory provisioned character string of the network services access point NSAP The NSAP resides in the SYSCTL circuit...

Page 782: ...nt GNE DCC Status Shows either good or FAIL for the data communications channel DCC between the local network element and the remote network element Ring Continuity Shows if a node is isolated or segmented from the other nodes in the ring by either a good isolated or hyphen indication All hyphens in this column indicate an incomplete open ring ...

Page 783: ...ed character string of the network services access point The NSAP resides in the SYSCTL circuit pack Comm Stat Shows either good or FAIL for the data communications channel DCC between the local network element and a remote network element Delta 1 93 01 07 08 30 45 M Retrieve Map Ring COMPLD Ring Map Report Comm NID TID NSAP Stat 0 Delta 1 39 1a3b 00 911ff4 1020 2112 3456 2181954aa677 ff good 1 De...

Page 784: ...command has been disabled The status is shown in the Remote Activity Reporting column of the Far End Communication Configuration Report If one or more nodes are unreachable because of a double ring failure The warning statement information incomplete message is appended to the report header and appears as follows for Releases 4 1 and 5 0 The warning statement for Release 3 and 4 0 does not include...

Page 785: ...Shows the highest system alarm at each node in the ring network The alarm corresponds to the topmost user panel LED that is lit at an FT 2000 network element or the alarm level reported by the FT 2000 repeater bay shelf Date Shows the date in month and day for each event when it was first reported Time Shows the time in hours minutes and seconds for each event when it was first reported TID Shows ...

Page 786: ...time in hours minutes and seconds for each event when it was first reported Source Address Shows the remote FT 2000 end terminal identification TID or the FT 2000 repeater bay shelf site address Event Description Shows an alarm condition summary for the repeater bay shelf No Event Description is provided for an FT 2000 end terminal Delta 1 93 01 19 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve Network Alarms COMPLD Net...

Page 787: ...ress of the FT 2000 network element as reported on both the East and West lines for Release 4 0 and later The site address is derived from the autoprovisioning function based on an OC 48 line section If a question mark appears as part of the value then auto provisioning has not been completed or it failed for example a removed or failed LNCTL Alarm Group Shows a value from zero to 255 where the va...

Page 788: ...command Delta 1 93 01 19 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve Network Element COMPLD FT 2000 System Provisioning Report Parameter Value TID Delta 1 NID 13 Directory Service NE yes Site Address site 1e 0 site 1w 4 Information below is a Release 4 1 example TID Delta 1 NID 13 Directory Service NE yes TL 1 Gateway yes Site Address site 1e 0 site 1w 4 Information below is a Release 3 0 example TID Delta 1 NID 13 D...

Page 789: ...as not been completed or it failed for example a removed or failed LNCTL The site address is calculated with respect to the East side of the adjacent FT 2000 ADR node Each FT 2000 ADR node will first label its East side as 1E 0 SECURITY Retrieve Network Element The next Regenerator away from 1E 0 will become 1E 1 the next 1E 2 and so on This is done on a section line basis between each pair of FT ...

Page 790: ... is automatically provisioned with a site address for each OC 48 line TID Shows the unique identification of an FT 2000 network element Site 0 Shows if an FT 2000 end terminal has been provisioned to be Site 0 either Yes or No Site Address Shows the confirmed F byte address site address of the FT 2000 network element from the auto provisioning function If questions marks appear as part of the valu...

Page 791: ...he optical wavelength of 1310 Provisioned Mode Shows the provisioned protection switching mode 1 1 or 0x1 in the from OC48 direction and the from OC3 direction Operating Mode Shows the actual operating protection switching mode 1 1 or 0x1 in the from OC48 direction and the from OC3 direction Payload Shows the signal type 3 or 3C being forwarded through the OC3 circuit pack in the from OC48 directi...

Page 792: ...310 Provisioned Mode Shows the provisioned protection switching mode 1 1 or 0x1 in the from OC48 direction and the from OC3 direction Operating Mode Shows the actual operating protection switching mode 1 1 or 0x1 in the from OC48 direction and the from OC3 direction Payload Shows the signal type 3 or 3C being forwarded through the OC3 circuit pack in the from OC48 direction and the from OC3 direct...

Page 793: ...gnal Degrade Threshold Shows the provisioned threshold value This value determines when a signal degrade condition will be declared The value is the line parity error rate for the specified line s for example 5 is error rate 10 5 Sync Messaging Shows the provisioned sync messaging state in the from OC48 direction NOTE B5 optics are required for this feature option DALLAS01 01 08 15 09 00 22 M Retr...

Page 794: ...egrade condition will be declared The value is the line parity error rate for the specified line s for example 5 is error rate 10 5 Wave Length Shows the provisioned optical line wavelength either 1310 or 1550 nanometers If a hyphen appears it means the line is unequipped for example no TRMTR circuit pack inserted PS Priority Only for Release 1 1 1 and Release 2 1 0 Shows the provisioned protectio...

Page 795: ...rator slot s selected for the report Line Code Shows the non return to zero nrz optical line code Wave Length Shows the provisioned optical line wavelength either 1310 or 1550 nanometers Lucent Technologies FT 2000 96 07 19 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve OC48 1 COMPLD OC 48 Line Provisioning Report Slot Line Wave Address Code Length regenr 1ew nrz 1310 regenr 1we nrz 1310 regenr pew nrz 1310 regenr pwe n...

Page 796: ...nprintable ASCII characters for both formats Additional information on path trace is in Volume I Sections 8 and 9 Administration and Provisioning and Maintenance Description respectively Delta 1 91 07 15 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve Path Trace All Text COMPLD Path Trace Report Address Parameter Value ls 1a 1 Status MISMATCH Label 01 equipped non specific payload ActRx Hello from secondary node slot 1a ...

Page 797: ...00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Provisioned Receive Path Trace 00 12 04 76 69 73 69 6f 6e 65 64 52 65 63 65 69 visio nedRecei 76 65 54 72 61 63 65 78 79 7a 61 62 63 64 65 66 veTracex yzabcdef 67 68 69 6a 6b 6c 6d 6e 6f 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 ghijklmn opqrstuv 77 78 79 7a 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 31 00 00 wxyz1234 567891 Provisioned Transmit Path Trace 50 72 6f 76 69 73 69 6f 6e 65 ...

Page 798: ...string for the specified port PrvTx Shows the provisioned outgoing STS 1 data string for the specified port Status Shows the ActRx actual received data string as follows good means ActRx path is the same as PrvRx path MISMATCH means ActRx path is different than PrvRx path NOT APPLICABLE means the addressed slot is in the AUTO state or is not equipped with a DS3 circuit pack UNAVAILABLE means that ...

Page 799: ...ver the threshold crossing alert TCA is reached This report is not available at the repeater site Delta 1 91 07 15 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve PM EC1 All COMPLD EC1 Performance Monitoring Status Report Bin Start Time quarter hour registers at yy mm dd hh mm ss day registers at yy mm dd hh mm ss Start Section EC1 Line B2 Address Time SEFS S CV L ES L SES L UAS L ls 1a 1 Today 5 1 0 0 34000 09 00 5 1 0 ...

Page 800: ...erely frame errored seconds reported in the bin during the specified time that will cause a TCA CV L Shows the number of EC1 line code violations reported in the bin during the specified time that will cause a TCA ES L Shows the number of EC1 line errored seconds reported in the bin during the specified time that will cause a TCA SES L Shows the number of EC1 line severely errored seconds reported...

Page 801: ...able at the repeater site Delta 1 94 06 15 13 15 15 EST M Retrieve Performance Monitoring Line OC48 1e COMPLD OC 48 Line Performance Monitoring Status Report Bin Start Time quarter hour registers at yy mm dd hh mm ss day registers at yy mm dd hh mm ss Start OC 48 Line B2 Address Time CV L ES L SES L UAS L PSC line 1e Today 133456 0 0 0 0 03 20 1 3 1 1 0 03 19 1 3 1 1 0 03 18 0 0 1 0 1 09 00 1 0 0 ...

Page 802: ... number of code violations reported in B2 during the specified time B2 ES L Shows the number of errored seconds reported in B2 during the specified time B2 SES L Shows the number of severely errored seconds reported in B2 during the specified time B2 UAS L Shows the number of unavailable seconds reported in B2 during the specified time PSC Shows the number of protection switching counts during the...

Page 803: ... B2 CV Shows the number of code violations reported in B2 during the specified time B2 ES Shows the number of errored seconds reported in B2 during the specified time B2 SES Shows the number of severely errored seconds reported in B2 during the specified time B2 UAS Shows the number of unavailable seconds reported in B2 during the specified time PSC Shows the number of protection switching counts ...

Page 804: ... B2 CV Shows the number of code violations reported in B2 during the specified time B2 ES Shows the number of errored seconds reported in B2 during the specified time B2 SES Shows the number of severely errored seconds reported in B2 during the specified time B2 UAS Shows the number of unavailable seconds reported in B2 during the specified time PSC Shows the number of protection switching counts ...

Page 805: ...ta either P bit processing or F bit and M bit adjusted processing Port Address Shows the AID of low speed port DS3 Mode Shows the provisioned algorithm used to determine and accumulate the DS3 path performance data P bit or F M bit Delta 1 94 06 15 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve PM Mode T3 All COMPLD DS 3 Performance Monitoring Mode Report Port DS3 Address Mode ls 1a 1 P bit ls 1a 2 P bit ls 1a 3 F M bit...

Page 806: ...cates that the quarter hour bin data is unavailable for the TRMTR circuit pack Laser bias Current Shows if the laser bias current is within the specifications Delta 1 93 01 15 09 15 15 EST M Retrieve Performance Monitoring Optics OC48 All COMPLD OC48 Optics Performance Monitoring Status Report Bin Start Time quarter hour registers at yy mm dd hh mm ss day registers at yy mm dd hh mm ss Address Sta...

Page 807: ...e shown Transmit Power Shows if the transmit power is within the specifications Receive Power Shows if the receive power is within the specifications Laser bias Current Shows if the laser bias current is within the specifications TERMB 92 07 15 09 15 15 EST M Retrieve Performance Monitoring Optics All COMPLD Optics Performance Monitoring Status Report Last initialized quarter hour registers at 92 ...

Page 808: ... of code violations reported in B1 during the specified time ES S Shows the number of errored seconds reported in B1 during the specified time SES S Shows the number of severely errored seconds reported in B1 during the specified time SEFS S Shows the number of severely errored frame seconds reported for the specified section during the specified time Lucent Technologies FT 2000 96 07 15 13 15 15 ...

Page 809: ... data is for yesterday B1 CV Shows the number of code violations reported in B1 during the specified time B1 ES Shows the number of errored seconds reported in B1 during the specified time B1 SES Shows the number of severely errored seconds reported in B1 during the specified time SEFS Shows the number of severely errored frame seconds reported for the specified section during the specified time L...

Page 810: ... shows the start time for measuring the day bins for the performance monitoring data Start Time Shows the provisioned hours minutes Hours may be 00 to 23 and minutes is always 00 Delta 1 94 06 15 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve PM Start Time All COMPLD Performance Monitoring Day Bin Start Time Report Parameter Value Start Time 13 00 ...

Page 811: ...rt in the NMON or AUTO state An asterisk is displayed whenever the threshold crossing alert TCA is reached This report is not available at the repeater site Delta 1 93 07 15 13 15 15 EST M Retrieve Performance Monitoring STS1 1e All COMPLD STS 1 Path Performance Monitoring Status Report Bin Start Time quarter hour registers at yy mm dd hh mm ss day registers at yy mm dd hh mm ss Start Path B3 Far ...

Page 812: ...nd day are shown the data is for yesterday CV P Shows the number of code violations reported in the bin during the specified time that will cause a TCA ES P Shows the number of errored seconds reported in the bin during the specified time that will cause a TCA SES P Shows the number of severely errored seconds reported in the bin during the specified time that will cause a TCA UAS P Shows the numb...

Page 813: ...d data or an incomplete time cycle for that parameter When a hyphen is displayed it means the data is unavailable such as any port in the NMON or AUTO state This report is not available at the repeater site TERMB 92 07 15 13 15 15 EST M Retrieve Performance Monitoring STS1 1 1 All COMPLD STS 1 Path Performance Monitoring Status Report Last initialized quarter hour registers at 92 07 15 13 15 00 da...

Page 814: ...ements that data collection started But if month and day are shown the data is for yesterday B3 CV Shows the number of code violations reported in B3 during the specified time B3 ES Shows the number of errored seconds reported in B3 during the specified time B3 SES Shows the number of severely errored seconds reported in B3 during the specified time B3 UAS Shows the number of unavailable seconds r...

Page 815: ...hreshold crossing alert TCA is reached This report is not available at the repeater site Delta 1 91 07 15 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve Performance Monitoring T3 1 1A All COMPLD DS 3 Performance Monitoring Status Report Bin Start Time quarter hour registers at yy mm dd hh mm ss day registers at yy mm dd hh mm ss Start DS3 Line DS3 Path Address Time ES L CV P ES P SES P SAS P UAS P ls 1a 1 Today 1 11 0 5...

Page 816: ...ds reported in the bin during the specified time that will cause a TCA CV P Shows the number of code violations reported in the bin during the specified time that will cause a TCA ES P Shows the number of errored seconds reported in the bin during the specified time that will cause a TCA SES P Shows the number of severely errored seconds reported in the bin during the specified time that will caus...

Page 817: ...ed it means the data is unavailable such as any port in the NMON or AUTO state This report is not available at the repeater site Address Shows the address within the FT 2000 end terminal for example low speed shelf line 1 slot 1b and port 1 The address for an FT 2000 add drop rings terminal would show the low speed shelf slot and port Start Time Shows the time in hours minutes and seconds P CV Sho...

Page 818: ... 15 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve Performance Monitoring TCA COMPLD Performance Monitoring Threshold Crossing Alarm Summary Report Retrieve PM Optics Section Line STS1 T3 EC1 line 1e 3 9 0 1 0 0 line 1w 0 3 0 1 0 0 low speed 0 3 3 0 1 9 STS1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 sts1 1e 0 0 0 0 1 sts1 1w 0 1 0 0 0 T3 1a 1b 2a 2b 3a 3b 4a 4b 5a 5b 6a 6b 7a 7b 8a 8b ls 0 5 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 EC1 1a 1b 2a 2b...

Page 819: ...d slot or path STS3 STS1 tributaries Optics Shows the total number of TCAs reported for PM optics Section Shows the total number of TCAs reported PM section Line Shows the total number of TCAs reported PM line STS1 Shows the total number of TCAs reported PM STS1 T3 Shows the total number of TCAs reported PM T3 EC1 Shows the total number of TCAs reported PM EC1 ...

Page 820: ...V L ES L SES L UAS L ls 1a 1 QH 5 9 900 25 10 50 Day 10 9 900 250 10 50 ls 1a 2 QH 5 9 900 25 10 50 Day 10 9 900 250 10 50 ls 1a 3 QH 5 9 900 25 10 50 Day 10 9 900 250 10 50 EC1 TCA Autonomous Reporting Status Report Section EC1 Line B2 TCA TCA TCA TCA TCA TCA Report Report Report Report Report Report Address Bin SEFS S BER CV L ES L SES L UAS L 1s 1a 1 QH Enable Enable Enable Disable Disable Disa...

Page 821: ...rate for example 9 is 10 9 for the QH bin and day bin CV L Shows the number of line code violations reported during the specified time that exceeded the BER setting ES L Shows the provisioned number of line errored seconds for the QH bin and the day bin that will cause a TCA SES L Shows the provisioned number of line severely errored seconds for the QH bin and the day bin that will cause a TCA UAS...

Page 822: ...cified time that exceeded the BER setting ES L Shows the provisioned number of line errored seconds for the QH bin and the day bin that will cause a TCA SES L Shows the provisioned number of line severely errored seconds for the QH bin and the day bin that will cause a TCA UAS L Shows the provisioned number of unavailable seconds for the QH bin and the day bin that will cause a TCA Delta 1 91 07 1...

Page 823: ...ES L Shows the provisioned number of line severely errored seconds for the QH bin and the Day bin that will cause a TCA UAS L Shows the provisioned number of unavailable seconds for the QH bin and the Day bin that will cause a TCA TCA Report Shows if the automatic reporting of TCAs is enabled or disabled Delta 1 93 01 15 13 15 15 EST M Retrieve PM Threshold Line OC48 All COMPLD OC 48 Line Performa...

Page 824: ...L Shows the provisioned number of line errored seconds for the QH bin and the Day bin that will cause a TCA SES L Shows the provisioned number of line severely errored seconds for the QH bin and the Day bin that will cause a TCA UAS L Shows the provisioned number of unavailable seconds for the QH bin and the Day bin that will cause a TCA Delta 1 93 01 15 13 15 15 EST M Retrieve PM Threshold Line O...

Page 825: ...laser transmitted power Rcv Pwr Shows if the automatic reporting of TCAs is enabled or disabled for laser received power LBC Shows if the automatic reporting of TCAs is enable or disabled for laser bias current Delta 1 91 07 15 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve PM Threshold Optics OC48 All COMPLD OC 48 Optics TCA Autonomous Reporting Status Report TCA Report TCA Report TCA Report Address Bin TX Pwr Rcv Pwr ...

Page 826: ...tics This report is not available at the repeater site Address Shows the specific optical line Bin Shows the quarter hour QH and day bins TCA Report Shows if the automatic reporting of TCAs is enabled or disabled Delta 1 91 07 15 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve PM Threshold Optics OC48 All COMPLD OC 48 Optics Performance Monitoring Threshold Value Report TCA Address Bin Report line 1e QH Enable Day Disabl...

Page 827: ...l COMPLD STS 48 Section Performance Monitoring Threshold Value Report STS 48 Section B1 Address Bin BER CV S ES S SES S SEFS S line 1e QH 9 1000 25 10 5 Day 9 1000 3 250 50 line 1w QH 9 1000 25 10 5 Day 9 1000 3 250 50 STS 48 TCA Autonomous Reporting Status Report TCA STS 48 Section B1 TCA Report TCA Report TCA Report TCA Report TCA Report Address Bin BER CV S ES S SES S SEFS S line 1e QH Enable D...

Page 828: ... bins that will cause a TCA CV S Shows the provisioned number of code violations for the QH and day bins that will cause a TCA ES S Shows the provisioned number of errored seconds for the QH and day bins that will cause a TCA SES S Shows the provisioned number of severely errored seconds for the QH and day bins that will cause a TCA SEFS S Shows the provisioned number of section errored frame seco...

Page 829: ...S Shows the provisioned number of errored seconds for the QH and day bins that will cause a TCA SES S Shows the provisioned number of severely errored seconds for the QH and day bins that will cause a TCA SEFS S Shows the provisioned number of section errored frame seconds for the QH and day bins that will cause a TCA Delta 1 93 01 15 13 15 15 EST M Retrieve PM Threshold Section All COMPLD STS 48 ...

Page 830: ...00 250 10 10 sts1 1e 2 2 QH 9 1000 25 10 10 Day 9 1000 250 10 10 sts1 1e 16 3 QH 9 1000 25 10 10 Day 9 1000 250 10 10 STS 1 Path TCA Autonomous Reporting Status Report TCA Report TCA Report TCA Report TCA Report TCA Report Address Bin BER CV P F ES P F SES P F UAS P F sts1 1e 1 1 QH Enable Enable Disable Disable Disable Day Enable Enable Disable Disable Disable sts1 1e 1 2 QH Enable Enable Disable...

Page 831: ...t will cause a TCA CV P F Shows the provisioned number of code violations for the QH and day bins that will cause a TCA ES P F Shows the provisioned number of errored seconds for the QH and day bins that will cause a TCA SES P F Shows the provisioned number of severely errored seconds for the QH and day bins that will cause a TCA UAS P F Shows the provisioned number of unavailable seconds for the ...

Page 832: ...s for the QH and day bins that will cause a TCA ES P F Shows the provisioned number of errored seconds for the QH and day bins that will cause a TCA SES P F Shows the provisioned number of severely errored seconds for the QH and day bins that will cause a TCA UAS P F Shows the provisioned number of unavailable seconds for the QH and day bins that will cause a TCA STS 1 Path Performance Monitoring ...

Page 833: ...500 250 10 50 3 ls 8a 3 QH 5 9 500 25 10 50 5 Day 3 9 500 250 10 50 3 TCA RptTCA Rpt TCA Rpt TCA Rpt TCA Rps TCA Rpt TCA Rpt 1s 1a 1 QH Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Day Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable 1s 1a 2 QH Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Day Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable 1s 1a 3 QH Enable Enable Enable Ena...

Page 834: ... CV P Shows the provisioned number of code violations for the QH and day bins that will cause a TCA ES P Shows the provisioned number of errored seconds for the QH and day bins that will cause a TCA SES P Shows the provisioned number of severely errored seconds for the QH and day bins that will cause a TCA SAS P Shows the provisioned number of severely errored frame AIS seconds for the QH and day ...

Page 835: ...l cause a TCA CV P Shows the provisioned number of code violations for the QH and day bins that will cause a TCA ES P Shows the provisioned number of errored seconds for the QH and day bins that will cause a TCA SES P Shows the provisioned number of severely errored seconds for the QH and day bins that will cause a TCA SAS P Shows the provisioned number of severely errored frame AIS seconds for th...

Page 836: ... protection switches A value of zero minutes will disable this parameter Provisioned Mode For 1x1 end terminal only Shows the current provisioned protection switching configuration and whether protection switching is unidirectional or bidirectional Restoration Protection Access For 1x1 end terminal only Shows the parameter value either yes or no if the FT 2000 terminal is provisioned for restorati...

Page 837: ...l configuration and whether protection switching is unidirectional or bidirectional Wait To Restore Shows the time up to 12 minutes after a trouble clears before breaking automatic high speed low speed and synchronization reference protection switches Delta 1 93 01 19 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve Protection Line COMPLD Network Element Protection Switching Provisioning Report Parameter Value Operating M...

Page 838: ...rectional Wait To Restore Shows the time in minutes to wait after a trouble clears before dropping the automatic protection switches both low speed and high speed Restoration Protection Access Shows the parameter value either yes or no if the FT 2000 terminal is provisioned for restoration protection access TERMB 92 01 19 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve Protection Line COMPLD Network Element Protection Sw...

Page 839: ...ow speed protection switching information of the FT 2000 network element Wait To Restore Shows the time up to 12 minutes after a trouble clears before breaking the automatic low speed switch A value of zero minutes will disable this parameter Delta 1 93 01 19 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve Protection Low Speed COMPLD Low Speed Protection Switching Provisioning Report Parameter Value Wait To Restore 3 min...

Page 840: ...er Shows the lifetime interval in days before the user must select a new password A zero interval will disable this parameter Login Aging For Release 5 0 and later Shows the lifetime interval in days before the user must select a new login A zero interval will disable this parameter Logins Allowed Shows if nonprivileged users are allowed to log in or not Privileged users are always allowed to log ...

Page 841: ...enabled or disabled Port Type OS Type Shows the protocol used cit or tl1 on the port and displays the autonomous message set reported on the port as maintenance memry admin cmd resp or other Baud Rate Shows the provisioned baud rate as blank auto 9600 4800 2400 or 1200 Calling Address Shows the value of the x 25 address key used to associate the port type with the user Inactive Timer Shows the ina...

Page 842: ...eport for an FT 2000 repeater bay shelf is the same except the Access Port entry cit dcc does not exist Access Port Shows the identity of the port operations interface Port Status Shows if the port will or will not accept nonprivileged user logins enabled or disabled Current Login Shows the login of the user that is currently logged on the port Delta 1 93 01 19 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve Security Por...

Page 843: ...valid entry and shows the STS 3 tributary address for a null no entry Delta 1 94 06 15 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve Squelch Map STS1 All COMPLD STS 1 Squelch Map Report Source Destination NID West East NID Destination Source Worcester MA 2 lw 1 1 1e 1 1 1 Chicopee MA Worcester MA 2 1w 1 1 1e 1 1 15 Springfield MA Worcester MA 2 1w 1 2 1e 1 2 1 Chicopee MA Worcester MA 2 1w 1 2 1e 1 2 15 Springfield MA ...

Page 844: ... NID pairs NID Shows the node ID from 0 to 15 of the squelch map A dash is shown when the tributary is not cross connected A question mark is shown when a tributary is cross connected to an incorrect source or destination TID West Shows the STS 3 tributary address line direction and tributary East Shows the STS 3 tributary address line direction and tributary Delta 1 94 06 15 23 15 15 EST M Retrie...

Page 845: ...tive protection switches inhibits lockouts or other abnormal conditions Delta 1 93 01 19 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve State All COMPLD State Report Address Circuit Port State Switch Switch Priority Pack DSX OC48 State Active Deferred DS1 in pri i active DS1 in sec i standby tg 1 TG3 active tg 2 TG3 active trmtr 1e TRMTR active trmtr 1w TRMTR active rcvr 1e RCVR active rcvr 1w RCVR active Continue repor...

Page 846: ...e state by carrying traffic or by providing timing or in a standby state by not carrying traffic or by not providing timing For OC3 circuit packs the parameter indicates the state for the transmit and receive OC3 lines Switch Priority Active switch priority shows the current protection switching priority of a circuit pack or external DS1 reference The ring suffix for a high speed switch priority m...

Page 847: ...tched The following example shows what is displayed at the remaining node s on the ring network trmtr 1e TRMTR active manual ring trmtr 1w TRMTR standby manual ne rcvr 1e RCVR active manual ring rcvr 1w RCVR standby manual ne trmtr 1e TRMTR standby manual fe trmtr 1w TRMTR active manual ring rcvr 1e RCVR standby manual fe rcvr 1w RCVR active manual ring trmtr 1e TRMTR active manual ring trmtr 1w T...

Page 848: ...nal meaning that there are no active protection switches inhibits lockouts or other abnormal conditions Delta 1 93 01 19 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve State All COMPLD State Report Address Circuit Port Switch Switch Priority Pack State State Active Deferred DS1 in pri i active DS1 in sec i standby tg 1 TG3 active tg 2 TG3 active trmtr 1e trmtr 1w rcvr 1e RCVR active rcvr 1w RCVR active Continue report p...

Page 849: ...rying traffic or by providing timing or in a standby state by not carrying traffic or by not providing timing Switch Priority Active switch priority shows the current protection switching priority of a circuit pack or external DS1 reference The ring suffix for a high speed switch priority means that the circuit pack is signaling a switch request for a switch at the other side of the node or at ano...

Page 850: ...nformation is not available for that entry for example the slot is not equipped trmtr 1e TRMTR active manual ring trmtr 1w TRMTR standby manual ne rcvr 1e RCVR active manual ring rcvr 1w RCVR standby manual ne trmtr 1e TRMTR standby manual fe trmtr 1w TRMTR active manual ring rcvr 1e RCVR standby manual fe rcvr 1w RCVR active manual ring Lucent Technologies FT 2000 96 07 19 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve...

Page 851: ... Report at the far end terminal is as follows Address Shows the address by slot function high speed line designation and physical slot location Circuit Pack Shows the functional name of the circuit pack Port State Shows the state of multiple ports 1 2 and 3 with an i for the IS state an a for the AUTO state an n for the NMON state a dash for not applicable when the slot is not equipped and a blank...

Page 852: ...are 100 but the allowable range is 110 Primary Secondary DS1 In Out Format shows the value that was provisioned either D4 super frame format SF or extended super frame ESF Primary Secondary DS1 In Line Code shows the provision value either alternate mark inversion AMI or bipolar with 8 zeros substitution B8ZS DS1 Out 1 Out 2 Equalizations shows the equalizer setting of the DS1 external reference o...

Page 853: ... was provisioned either super frame format D4 or extended super frame Primary Secondary DS1 In Line Code shows the provision value either alternate mark inversion or bipolar with 8 zeros substitution DS1 Out 1 Out 2 Equalizations shows the equalizer setting of the DS1 external reference output 1 output 2 The value is a percentage of the maximum cable length for example 100 equates to a maximum of ...

Page 854: ... AIS signal will be inserted in the DS3 signal that is going in the opposite direction of the failure Alarm Level Shows the highest severity user panel LED that is lit which is the alarm that is assigned to the incoming DS3 signal failure If no LEDs are lit then status is shown as NA not alarmed or NR not reported if provisioned as such Signal Degrade Threshold Shows the provisioned signal degrade...

Page 855: ...posite direction of the failure Alarm Level Shows the highest severity user panel LED that is lit which is the alarm that is assigned to the incoming DS3 signal failure If no LEDs are lit then status is shown as NA not alarmed or NR not reported if provisioned as such Signal Degrade Threshold Shows the provisioned signal degrade threshold either 3 or 6 The example shows a 6 meaning the error rate ...

Page 856: ...ls 1a 1 1e 1 2 Salem NH Chicopee MA 1e 1 2 ls 1b 3 Worcester MA Worcester MA 1w 1 2 Worcester MA Salem NH Worcester MA 1w 1 2 ls 7a 2 Salem NH Salem NH ls 2a 2 1e 1 2 Chicopee MA ACT Salem NH ls 2b 2 1e 1 2 Salem NH STBY Chicopee MA 1e 1 2 1w 1 2 Worcester MA Concord MA Salem NH 1w 1 2 1e 1 2 Chicopee MA Chicopee MA 1e 1 2 1w 1 2 Worcester MA Chicopee MA Salem NH 1w 1 2 ls 4a 2 Chicopee MA Chicope...

Page 857: ...e topmost node is the node where the report request was issued The remaining nodes in the ring are arranged in West to East sequence TID TID lists the target identifiers involved in the squelch map cross connection entries associated with the time slot specified in the RETRIEVE TIMESLOT command Source Destina tion AID The STS 1 Tributary or Slot Address identifiers AIDs They are derived from local...

Page 858: ...rmation are provided in Volume I Section 8 Delta 1 94 06 15 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve Timeslot STS3 1 COMPLD STS 3 Tributary Map Report At Node TID West Cross connection East TID Worcester MA Quabbin MA 1w 1 1a 1a 1e 1 Salem NH 1b 1e 1 Chicopee MA Salem NH Worcester MA 1w 1 2b 4a 1e 1 Chicopee MA 1w 1 2b 1e 1 Worcester MA 1w 1 1e 1 Chicopee MA Concord MA Salem NH 1w 1 1e 1 Chicopee MA Worcester MA 1...

Page 859: ...cross connection table is not available at that particular node West Shows the direction of the line and tributary Cross connection Shows the direction and slot number where the STS3 signal is connected for an add and or drop connection Only direction is shown for a through tributary cross connection Blank spaces are shown when a tributary is not cross connected East Shows the direction of the lin...

Page 860: ...ly be used with an FT 2000 network element that is out of service It is assumed that the craft interface terminal CIT is conditioned and connected to the FT 2000 network element If it is not refer to DLP 501 in the Detailed Level Procedures section of this manual for assistance in getting to that point Press F5 labeled EXIT if it is shown on the screen 1 Change directory to where the FT 2000 CIT P...

Page 861: ...Craft Interface Terminal Usage Issue 8 0 July 2002 11 153 3 Press space bar or any other key to display next screen 4 Press function key for SETUP menu F6 ...

Page 862: ...s the inactivity timer 6 As an exercise the baud rate will be set to 9600 even if it is already set to 9600 Use up and down arrow keys to move highlighted area to Baud Rate parameter value Communications com 1 as appropriate Baud Rate 9600 Monitor appropriate value for type of monitor Inactivity minutes value between 0 and 9999 Blinking Remote on Paging on ...

Page 863: ...Usage Issue 8 0 July 2002 11 155 7 Type a when Baud Rate is highlighted 8 Use and arrow keys to select desired value 9600 9 Press 10 Use arrow keys and set any other parameter values if necessary to values given in Step 5 ENTER ...

Page 864: ... 2002 11 NOTE The message line immediately over the display of the function keys will always show what is to be done next For example it now says Press F6 again when you are done PT 2000 is highlighted at this time Press again when parameters are set F6 ...

Page 865: ...Craft Interface Terminal Usage Issue 8 0 July 2002 11 157 12 Press ENTER ...

Page 866: ...Craft Interface Terminal Usage 11 158 Issue 8 0 July 2002 13 Enter a valid login obtained from the system administrator and press ENTER ...

Page 867: ... system administrator and press 15 Notice that after a successful login an Active Alarms and Status Report is displayed An example is shown above The top line shows the actual target identifier TID of the network element 16 Use and arrow keys to highlight CONFIGURATION but do not press at this time ENTER ENTER ...

Page 868: ...tegories FAULT CONFIGURATION PERFORMANCE and SECURITY Table 11 2 Release 7 Inputs Commands Menu for Add Drop Rings Terminal Table 11 3 Release 6 Inputs Commands Menu for Add Drop Rings Terminal Table 11 4 Release 5 Inputs Commands Menu for Add Drop Rings Terminal Table 11 5 Release 4 Inputs Commands Menu for Add Drop Rings Terminal and Table 11 6 Release 3 Inputs Commands Menu for Add Drop Rings T...

Page 869: ...arrow keys to highlight the verb Set and press The figure shows the menu for an Add Drop Rings Terminal The menu for other platforms may differ slightly 20 Use and keys to highlight Date but do not press at this time 21 NOTE When function key is labeled HELP it can be pressed to obtain information about the item highlighted on the screen Press function key labeled HELP to display the explanation o...

Page 870: ...Craft Interface Terminal Usage 11 162 Issue 8 0 July 2002 22 After reading the information press escape key then press to select Date highlighted ESC ENTER ...

Page 871: ...Craft Interface Terminal Usage Issue 8 0 July 2002 11 163 23 Use the and keys to highlight Hours but do not press at this time ENTER ...

Page 872: ... Enter 99 without the quotes for Hours but do not press the at this time 25 Use the BACK SPACE key to erase your entry 26 NOTE You will now deliberately enter an invalid value Enter 26 for the hour followed by 27 NOTE A screen appears and displays the allowable values for Hours Press the key ENTER ENTER ESC ...

Page 873: ...ue 8 0 July 2002 11 165 28 Enter a different or correct value hour than the one displayed followed by 29 Press function key to execute the input 30 Notice that a confirmation frame appears on the screen with a Caution statement ENTER F9 ...

Page 874: ... experiment with the F3 key now 33 Notice that when the CIT is in the output mode a scroll bar appears on the right side of the screen You can scroll the screen either forward or backward depending on whether the darker shaded portion of the bar is at top or bottom Use the and keys to scroll the screen 34 NOTE You just used CONFIGURATION Set Date to set the hour You will now use Retrieve Date to l...

Page 875: ... make an incorrect selection of Retrieve Attribute instead of Retrieve Date Under Retrieve highlight Attribute and press 37 To correct press to back up to the preceding screen Any time you are in the INPUT mode you can back up one screen at a time by pressing the key 38 Under Retrieve highlight Date by using and arrow keys and press ENTER ENTER ESC ESC ENTER ...

Page 876: ...rs have been changed 42 If appropriate use CONFIGURATION Set Date to set the Hours back to the original value Otherwise continue with the next step 43 At this point in the tutorial you must decide to either stop or continue with the CIT PC training If you continue the additional training pertains to an add drop rings terminal in a ring network If exiting the tutorial then continue with Step 44 If ...

Page 877: ... NMON for a DS3 circuit pack If an STS1E or OC 3 circuit pack is in slot 1A then select another slot that contains a DS3 circuit pack use this new slot reference throughout the procedure After completing this portion of the tutorial you may want to set the port state to AUTO Depress function key to return to the input mode and select CONFIGURATION Set State T3 by using the F3 and arrow keys to hig...

Page 878: ...46 Enter a 3a for slot followed by If slot 3A does not contain a DS3 circuit pack select another slot that does contain a DS3 circuit pack 47 Enter a 1 for port followed by 48 Select From DSX for the Direction Releases 4 1 and later 49 Press ENTER ENTER ENTER ...

Page 879: ...inal Usage Issue 8 0 July 2002 11 171 50 Enter nmon for the primary state followed by 51 Press function key to execute the inputs 52 Notice that a confirmation frame appears on the screen with a Caution statement ENTER F9 ...

Page 880: ...y for the yes selection and press 54 NOTE You just used CONFIGURATION Set State T3 to set the administrative state of port 1 of slot 1A to NMON You will now use CONFIGURATION Retrieve T3 to look at the value of that parameter Press to return to the INPUT mode ENTER F3 ...

Page 881: ...8 Refer to the report displayed on the CIT screen and note that the port has been set to NMON Only the first line of the report should match The remaining lines may differ slightly 59 Notice the message line at the bottom of the screen is waiting for a yes or no entry if Paging was set to on during SET UP 60 Press the key for yes Notice the report is scrolling one more page ENTER ENTER F9 ENTER ...

Page 882: ... 2002 61 Press function key to cancel the remaining portion of the report 62 Scrolling is now possible by using the and arrow keys 63 If appropriate use CONFIGURATION Set State T3 to set port 1 of slot 1A to AUTO Otherwise continue with the next step F8 ...

Page 883: ...en you will make an add cross connection and verify it And finally you will remove the cross connection and verify its removal NOTE Other types of cross connections are explained in detail in Volume I Section 8 Administration and Provisioning Depress function key to return to the input mode and select the CONFIGURATION Retrieve Crossconnection All command 65 Press the key to obtain an STS 1 Cross ...

Page 884: ... 1E or 1W and a tributary number 3 through 5 An unused slot and tributary is indicated with a dash in the Destination Source columns 67 Select the CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnection STS1 command to add slot to tributary cross connection For example CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnection STS1 2 way 3a 1w 5 is a 2 way add drop from slot 5b to tributary 5 in the West direction ...

Page 885: ...erminal Usage Issue 8 0 July 2002 11 177 68 Select the CONFIGURATION Retrieve Crossconnection All command to obtain an updated STS 1 Cross Connection Map Report and verify the add cross connection slot 5b to tributary 5 ...

Page 886: ...ect the CONFIGURATION Delete Crossconnection STS3 2 way 5b 1w 5 command 70 Select the CONFIGURATION Retrieve Crossconnection All command to obtain an updated STS 1 Cross Connection Map Report and verify the cross connection has been removed 71 Log off the CIT by pressing LOGOUT or exit FT 2000 CIT PC by pressing EXIT as appropriate 72 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THE ADD DROP RINGS TERMINAL TUTORIAL F4...

Page 887: ...w Speed Interface Protection 1xM electrical low speed interface protection refers to a system with one protection electrical low speed interface circuit pack DS3 or STS1E and up to 16 service electrical low speed interface cir cuit packs DS3 or STS1E When a low speed protection switch occurs the electrical low speed signals are routed from the service low speed interface circuit pack to the protec...

Page 888: ...ome upstream equipment if the upstream alarm has not been suppressed Alarm A contact closure to the office alarm grid Alarm Group A group of network elements that share remote alarm information through an alarm gateway net work element AGNE Also refer to AGNE The maximum size of an alarm group is 32 network ele ments AMI Alternate Mark Inversion A line code that employs a ternary signal to convey ...

Page 889: ... B B3ZS Bipolar 3 Zero Substitution A line coding method that replaces a string of three zeros with a sequence of symbols having some special characteristic B8ZS Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution A line coding method that replaces a string of eight zeros with a sequence of symbols having some special characteristic BCLAN Board Controller Local Area Network The internal local area network that provides c...

Page 890: ... an incoming loss of signal is detected no DS3 AIS is inserted CEV Controlled Environment Vault CIT Craft Interface Terminal A personal computer that meets FT 2000 minimum requirements loaded with the FT 2000 CIT PC software or CPro 2000 software Release 5 and later In Release 5 and later releases an ASCII based dumb terminal that meets FT 2000 minimum requirements can also be used as a craft inte...

Page 891: ...pport Organization Current Value The value currently assigned to a provisionable parameter CV Cting Violation A performance monitoring parameter The coding violations are monitored for the OC 48 line OC 3 line STS 48 section STS 3 section STS 1 path EC 1 line and DS3 path D DACS Digital Access and Cross Connect System DACS III 2000 One of Lucent Technologies SONET compatible Digital Access and Cro...

Page 892: ...ier access fiber in the loop or private network applications DDM 2000 FiberReach is hosted by the DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 Multiplexer or the SLC 2000 Access System with a single or dual homed ring or star topology DWDM Dense Wave Division Multiplexing Transmitting multiple OC 48 optical signals simultaneously over a single fiber The DWDM signal is interface compatible with the OLS product Demultipl...

Page 893: ...uration of two ring networks that share two common nodes DRI allows a circuit with one termination in one ring and one termination in another ring to survive a loss of signal failure of the shared node that is currently carrying service for the circuit E EC EC n Electrical Carrier The basic logical building block signal with a rate of 51 840 Mb s for an EC 1 signal and a rate of n times 51 840 Mb ...

Page 894: ...the same for all the inputs and outputs so that any output can be connected to any input The DSX 3 is an example of an equal level cross connect panel ES Errored Seconds A second in which one or more coding violations are detected Errored sec onds are monitored for the OC 48 line OC 3 line STS 48 section STS 3 section STS 1 path EC 1 line and the DS3 path line ESD Electrostatic Discharge The disch...

Page 895: ...al FIT Failures in Time Circuit pack failure rates per 10ud hours as calculated using the method described in TR TSY 000332 Issue 3 Reliability Prediction Procedure for Electronic Equipment RPP Flash EPROM A new technology that combines the nonvolatility of EPROM with the in circuit reprogrammability of EEPROM electrically erasable PROM FLS Frame Loss Seconds Folded Rings Folded collapsed rings ar...

Page 896: ...ed Headend Refers to the transmitting end where a signal originates Holdover An operating condition of a network element in which its local oscillator is not locked to any synchro nization reference but is using storage techniques to maintain its accuracy with respect to the last known frequency comparison with a synchronization reference I IMTV Interactive Multimedia Television I O Inut Output IR...

Page 897: ...terminology line refers to a transmission medium together with the associated high speed equipment required to provide the means of transporting information between two consecutive Network Elements one of which originates the line signal and the other terminates the line signal LNCTL The FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Line Controller circuit pack performs line specific computa tions LOF Loss of Fr...

Page 898: ...alth NE Network Element Refers to an FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay or FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal in a network NE ACTY Near End Activity An LED on the user panel that is lighted when an alarm or status condition exists at the local FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay or FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal NEBS Network Equipment Building System NID Node Identifier A unique number from 0 to 15 used ...

Page 899: ...ine circuit pack etc When a protection switch occurs the standby line circuit pack etc is selected causing the old standby line circuit pack etc to become the new active line circuit pack etc The original active line circuit pack etc becomes the standby line circuit pack etc This status remains in effect when the fault clears Therefore this protection scheme is nonrevertive in that there is no swi...

Page 900: ...alone optical multiplexing up to 20 Gb s per fiber system The OLS has its own telemetry fault location and performance monitoring capability Operations Interface Any interface that provides information on the system behavior or control These include the equip ment LEDs user panel CIT office alarms and all telemetry interfaces Operations Interworking The capability to access operate provision and a...

Page 901: ...petitively to verify the continuity of the STS 1 path The DS3 circuit pack is the only low speed interface circuit pack that generates or terminates the STS 1 path over head Path Unequipped Signal The path unequipped signal is provided in the STS 1 path signal label byte C2 of the path over head The path unequipped signal is transmitted to notify downstream equipment that the STS 1 path is incompl...

Page 902: ...ble Traffic Also called Extra Traffic Traffic which has a lower priority than that carried on the service fiber Low priority unprotected traffic that is carried on a protection fiber and is subject to being dropped if the service fiber should fail and a protection switch occurs Preprovisioning The capability to provision a slot before installing a circuit pack Primary Node The primary node is the ...

Page 903: ...T environment which replaces the path yellow signal If the RDI P signal is integrated for a specified period of time it becomes a remote failure indication RFI signal a defect becomes a failure Also refer to RFI RDS Ring Diversity Switch Reactive Maintenance Refers to detecting defects failures and clearing them Revertive Switching In revertive switching there is a service and protection high spee...

Page 904: ...nitored for the STS 48 section STS 3 sec tion and EC 1 section SES Severely Errored Seconds A second in which the coding violations detected reach a fixed thresh old The severely errored seconds are monitored for the OC 48 line OC 3 line STS 48 section STS 3 section STS 1 path EC 1 line and DS3 path SF Signal Fail Refers to a condition when an incoming signal s bit error rate exceeds a fixed value...

Page 905: ...ither end as the payload carrying signal Also refer to Active Status Status is a condition that does not raise an alarm STS STS n Synchronous Transport Signal The basic logical building block signal with a rate of 51 840 Mb s for an STS 1 signal and a rate of n times 51 840 Mb s for an STS n signal STS 1 This refers to the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal internal electrical signal with an EC...

Page 906: ... Oriented Serial Protocol Defines one physical interface for direct connection between the telemetry remote and the monitored equipment An EIA 422 port is used to provide the operations system with enough alarm and status information to localize a problem and deter mine the severity TBP Transmit Byte Processor A device on the OC48 TRMTR and OC48 REGENR circuit packs TCA Threshold Crossing Alert A ...

Page 907: ...forty eight 51 84 Mb s tributaries or sixteen 155 Mb s tributaries TSA Time Slot Assignment This is a capability of the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal that allows any service STS 3 tributary to be cross connected to any service low speed interface slot or to the same numbered service STS 3 tributary in the opposite direction In Release 7 and later releases the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings T...

Page 908: ...hing of sub STS 1 payloads There are currently four sizes VT1 5 1 728 Mb s VT2 2 304 Mb s VT3 3 456 Mb s and VT6 6 912 Mb s VT G Virtual Tributary Group A 9 row by 12 column structure 108 bytes that carries one or more VTs of the same size Seven VT groups 756 bytes are byte interleaved with the VT organized syn chronous payload envelope W Wander The wander of a digital signal is defined as the lon...

Page 909: ...Glossary Issue 8 0 July 2002 GL 23 ...

Page 910: ...Glossary GL 24 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 911: ...365 575 102 Issue 8 0 July 2002 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Releases 1 Through 7 2 User Service Manual TOP Volume II ...

Page 912: ...ill be required to correct the interference at his own expense Security In rare instances unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network In such an event applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic Lucent Technologies Inc and its predecessors cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit f...

Page 913: ...monitored 24 hours a day For technical assistance call 1 800 225 RTAC You can also call this telephone number to provide comments on FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System or to suggest enhancements Documentation This document was developed by the Lucent Technologies Optical Networking Group Lucent Learning Services formerly Customer Training and Information Products CTIP ...

Page 914: ......

Page 915: ...thing about this information product what would it be ________________________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 4 Please write any other comments about this information product _______________________________________________________________________________________...

Page 916: ......

Page 917: ...Refer to Volume I Section 11 Craft Interface Terminal Usage The TOP procedures are included in the following five separate tabs Acceptance Yellow tab Circuit Order Orange tab Operation Green tab Trouble Clearing Red tab Detailed Level Procedures Blue tab Reason for Reissue 0 This document has been reissued for the following reasons To make modifications to the following procedures TAP 113 DLP 550 ...

Page 918: ...procedures are to enter change delete a user s login to establish a remote login using the CIT to establish remote access to a network element by using a dial up modem etc A complete listing is in the Operation Task Index Operation IXL 001 The Trouble Clearing tab covers procedures on clearing the condition that caused the alarm and clearing trouble reports These procedures are consistent with the...

Page 919: ...AD 100 c Some DLPs are director level procedures These procedures combine the what to do with the how to do information for example replacing a fan filter in DLP 526 3 All procedures are listed in numerical order but are not used in numerical order A Numerical List of Procedures is provided as a reference only and should not be used alone in finding instructions for performing tasks 4 Perform all ...

Page 920: ...es in this manual use a MONOSPACE font to identify text on a screen or a response displayed from the network A BOLD font identifies the lettering designations on panels shelves and circuit packs Also the bold font is used throughout this manual for emphasis FT 2000 Installation 0 The 365 575 115 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Releases 3 through 8 1 Installation Manual is available for customers pl...

Page 921: ...for property damage only accidents This includes equipment damage loss of software or service interruption Lightwave Safety 0 A Lucent Technologies lightwave digital transmission system and associated optical test sets use semiconductor laser transmitters The lasers emit lightwaves at or near infrared wavelengths into lightguide cables This light is at the red end of the visible spectrum Direct ex...

Page 922: ...p and stand on a grounded static dissipating floor mat Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outermost edges Never touch the components conductors or connector pins Observe warning labels on bags and cartons Whenever possible do not remove circuit packs from antistatic packaging until ready to insert them into slots If possible open all circuit packs at a sta...

Page 923: ...perly Figure 0 1 Static Control Wrist Strap IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS READ AND UNDERSTAND ALL INSTRUCTIONS When using this telecommunication equipment basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product Slots and openings in this product and the back...

Page 924: ...h objects of any kind into this product through slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electrical shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product Refer servicing to qualified service personnel ...

Page 925: ...C 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal for 2 Fiber Ring Acceptance NTP 006 Accept FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal for Operation With an FT 2000 Lightwave Booster Amplifier FT LBA Acceptance NTP 011 Accept FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay Shelf Acceptance NTP 005 Accept FT 2000 Point to Point Network Acceptance NTP 003 Accept Protection Access Upgrade in Point to Point Network Acceptance NTP 004 Add a Node t...

Page 926: ...AP 146 Address an Unexplained Loss of Service Trouble Clearing TAP 166 Address Condition at Remote Repeater Bay Shelf Trouble Clearing TAP 147 Address Environmental Input Condition Trouble Clearing TAP 107 Address Incoming Signal Failure Trouble Clearing TAP 110 Address Missing or Incorrect Response Trouble Clearing TAP 108 Change an OC 12 Link From 0x1 to 1 1 Protection Mode Circuit Order NTP 015...

Page 927: ... TAP 117 Clear Fan Failure Trouble Clearing TAP 118 Clear FT LBA Condition Trouble Clearing TAP 157 Clear Fuse Power Failure Trouble Clearing TAP 119 Clear Inc From OC48 Sync Ref Fail Trouble Clearing TAP 152 Clear Incoming From OC 48 STS LOP Trouble Clearing TAP 174 Clear Incoming DCC Failure or Inc From OC48 DCC Failure Trouble Clearing TAP 120 Clear Incoming OC3 APS Byte Fail or Incoming OC12 A...

Page 928: ...ble Clearing TAP 125 Clear SYSMEM SYSCTL Code Mismatch Trouble Clearing TAP 126 Clear Unexpected CP Type Trouble Clearing TAP 127 Clear X Conn Provisioned But Not Est Trouble Clearing TAP 173 Clear Alarm When NE ACTY and FE ACTY LEDs Are Off Cannot Log in to a Network Element Trouble Clearing TAP 136 Clear Automatic Switch Condition Trouble Clearing TAP 115 Clear DRI Switch Trouble Clearing TAP 14...

Page 929: ...1 Cross Connections Operations NTP 004 Discontinue Restoration Protection Access From Point to Point Network Circuit Order NTP 006 Enter or Change TID String of FT 2000 Network Element Detailed Level Procedure DLP 544 Enter Delete DCC Assignment on OC 3 OC 12 Line Detailed Level Procedure DLP 542 Enter Delete Edit Limited Granularity STS 1 Cross Connections in Network Elements for 2 Fiber Ring Net...

Page 930: ...edure DLP 529 Loop Back DS3 and or EC1 Circuit s for Testing Detailed Level Procedure DLP 525 Loop Back OC 12 Line s for Testing Detailed Level Procedure DLP 549 Loop Back OC 3 Line s for Testing Detailed Level Procedure DLP 538 Maintenance Philosophy Trouble Clearing TAD 100 Make Manual Optical Loopback at FT 2000 Network Element Detailed Level Procedure DLP 500 Merge Two OC 48 Rings Operations N...

Page 931: ... NTP 011 Remove Replace Shelf Cover Detailed Level Procedure DLP 511 Replace a Defective Power Line Filter Detailed Level Procedure DLP 550 Replace Circuit Pack With Different Circuit Pack Detailed Level Procedure DLP 527 Replace Defective Fan Unit in D Bay Detailed Level Procedure DLP 546 Replace Fan Filter in E Bay Detailed Level Procedure DLP 526 Replace Fan Filter Every Six Months in D Bay Det...

Page 932: ...rial Telemetry Detailed Level Procedure DLP 509 Turnup Test Point to Point System Detailed Level Procedure DLP 507 Verify FT 2000 Network Element Is Connected Detailed Level Procedure DLP 506 Verify STS 1 Path Trace Detailed Level Procedure DLP 532 Verify That Low Speed Ports Are Not NMON Detailed Level Procedure DLP 534 FIND YOUR JOB IN THE LIST BELOW THEN GO TO ...

Page 933: ...lement NTP 011 Accept FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal for Operation With an FT 2000 Lightwave Booster Amplifier FT LBA System Turnup Circuit Order Tab IXL 001 Task Index System Turnup Circuit Order NTP 002 Add DS3 and or EC1 Low Speed Port s NTP 003 Delete DS3 and or EC1 Low Speed Port s NTP 004 Delete OC 48 Protection Line From Point to Point Network NTP 005 Add OC 48 Protection Line to Poi...

Page 934: ...s NTP 005 Copy Software From One Network Element to Another Network Element NTP 006 Identify Primary Secondary and Source Destination Nodes NTP 007 Provision 1 Way DRI Video Distribution Circuit for Entire Ring NTP 008 Provision STS 1 STS 3 Non Preemptible Protection Access NPPA NTP 009 Merge Two OC 48 Rings NTP 010 Optical Upgrade From STS 3 to STS 1 Granularity NTP 011 Connect Two FT 2000 Rings ...

Page 935: ...Incoming from OC 48 DS3 LOF Inc from STSX Line RFI Yellow Inc from OC48 Path RFI Yellow Incoming OC3 Line RFI Yellow and Incoming OC12 Line RFI Yellow TAP 123 Clear CP Unknown Type Failure TAP 124 Address Reset in Progress TAP 125 Clear SYSMEM Unrecognizable Code TAP 126 Clear SYSMEM SYSCTL Code Mismatch TAP 127 Clear Unexpected CP Type TAP 128 Clear Trouble in CIT CIT Does Not Respond to Commands...

Page 936: ...te Modem or Datakitâ Network Connection TAP 156 Clear DS3 Path Unequipped TAP 157 Clear FT LBA Condition TAP 158 Clear OC3 OC12 Mode Conflict Equipment Slot Pair X Connect TAP 159 Clear CPYPGM IP tid TAP 160 Clear Incoming OC3 APS Byte Fail or Incoming OC12 APS Byte Fail TAP 161 Clear Circuit Audit Suspended TAP 162 Clear Circuit Provisioning Error TAP 163 Clear Path Integrity Failure TAP 164 Clea...

Page 937: ...ove Replace Shelf Cover DLP 512 Install Remove Lightguide Buildout DLP 513 Test Fan Assembly ED 6G992 30 DLP 514 Remove and or Install Circuit Pack DLP 515 Replace Fuse in Power Distribution and Fuse Panel or User Panel DLP 516 Obtain State Report DLP 517 Provision Low Speed Slot and Port Parameters DLP 518 Temporarily Remove High Speed Optical Loopback s at FT 2000 Network Element DLP 519 Install...

Page 938: ...Line s for Testing DLP 539 Release Looped Back OC 3 Line s DLP 540 Provision OC3 Slot for 1 Way Drop Service DLP 541 Test DRI Cross Connections for Path Integrity in FT 2000 Ring DLP 542 Enter Delete DCC Assignment on OC 3 OC 12 Line DLP 543 STS3 or STS1 Path Trace Monitor for Non DS3 Signals DLP 544 Enter or Change TID String of FT 2000 Network Element DLP 545 Replace Fan Filter Every Six Months ...

Page 939: ...ment NTP 010 Accept Dual Ring Interworking DRI Connections To From an FT 2000 Ring NTP 009 Accept FT 2000 2 Fiber Ring Network NTP 007 Accept FT 2000 OC 48 1x1 End Terminal NTP 002 Accept FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal for 2 Fiber Ring NTP 006 Accept FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal for Operation With an FT 2000 Lightwave Booster Amplifier FT LBA NTP 011 Accept FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater B...

Page 940: ...IXL 001 Operation and Maintenance 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 FT 2000 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 941: ...ircuit packs or working on an FT 2000 end terminal to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components See Electrostatic Discharge ESD Considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE This procedure is only used if the FT 2000 end terminal was installed by someone else If the installation has not been completed including circuit pack installation notify the installation personnel or r...

Page 942: ...terface Terminal CIT to the local FT 2000 network element and condition it DLP 501 5 At the CIT select SECURITY Set Network Element and Site 0 with a Yes then execute by using F9 6 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Update and execute 7 Obtain an Active Alarm and Status Report use Retrieve Alarm and verify that it shows only the two conditions below no other conditions should be listed line 1 site pr...

Page 943: ...hould be listed line 1 site provisioning conflict line p site provisioning conflict 10 Perform automatic low speed cabling test to cross connection for all low speed ports on each line DLP 503 11 If required perform provisioning at this time DLP 505 12 If so equipped test the fan assembly for proper operation DLP 513 13 The FT 2000 end terminal has passed the acceptance tests After all FT 2000 net...

Page 944: ...NTP 002 Acceptance 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 945: ...r handling circuit packs or working on an FT 2000 network element to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components See Electrostatic Discharge ESD Considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE This procedure is only used if the FT 2000 point to point network was installed by someone else If the installation has not been completed notify the installation personnel or refer to 365...

Page 946: ...ifferentiate the network elements in a point to point network 4 At the DSX 3 cross connect panel or equivalent disconnect all DS3 inputs and outputs at the local FT 2000 end terminal 5 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Update and execute 6 Establish a remote login to the remote FT 2000 end terminal and repeat Steps 3 through 5 An assistant is required when Step 4 is performed at the remote FT 2000 e...

Page 947: ...rallel telemetry b Serial telemetry c Miscellaneous discrete telemetry DLP 508 DLP 509 DLP 530 12 If required notify personnel at the remote maintenance site OS Center that the FT 2000 point to point network is ready for any operational tests they wish to perform using the X 25 link 13 The FT 2000 point to point network including any repeaters has passed this acceptance test and is now ready to pr...

Page 948: ...NTP 003 Acceptance 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 949: ... been completed including circuit pack installation notify the installation personnel or refer to 365 575 104 to complete the installation If you completed the installation following the procedures in 365 575 104 do not perform this procedure It is assumed that installation of the FT 2000 protection access upgrade has been completed including circuit pack installation for the engineered configurat...

Page 950: ... protection access shelf 7 At the local FT 2000 network element and at the CIT select CONFIGURATION Update and execute 8 At the remote FT 2000 end terminal have someone repeat Steps 1 through 7 9 At the local FT 2000 end terminal and at the CIT select FAULT Switch Line for line P with priority set to Reset 10 At the local FT 2000 end terminal CIT select FAULT CONFIGURATION for Release 1 and perfor...

Page 951: ...DLP 511 DLP 512 DLP 510 DLP 512 DLP 507 DLP 505 13 At both FT 2000 end terminals verify the NE ACTY LED at the user panel is off 14 If required perform provisioning at this time DLP 505 15 The Protection Access Upgrade has passed the acceptance tests and is now ready for protection or traffic DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO ...

Page 952: ...NTP 004 Acceptance 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 953: ... FT 2000 repeater bay shelf to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components See Electrostatic Discharge ESD Considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE This procedure is only used if the FT 2000 repeater bay shelf was installed by someone else If the installation has not been completed including circuit pack installation notify the installation personnel or refer to 365 575 1...

Page 954: ...LEDs at the user panel are lighted 4 If required connect and condition the craft interface terminal CIT DLP 501 5 Perform a local automatic turnup test on each OC48 REGENR circuit pack that is looped back DLP 502 6 Remove the optical loopback with the line buildout from each OC48 REGENR circuit pack that is looped back and reconnect the OC 48 line s DLP 519 7 If required perform provisioning at th...

Page 955: ... invisible laser radiation Eye damage may occur if beam is viewed directly or with improper optical instruments Avoid direct exposure to beam CAUTION Use a static ground wrist strap whenever handling circuit packs or working on an FT 2000 terminal to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components See Electrostatic Discharge ESD Considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE This p...

Page 956: ...e removed At the DSX 3 STSX 1 and or LGXâ cross connect panel or equivalent remove all DS3 EC1 OC3 IS3 and or OC12 connections to the FT 2000 terminal All electrical output ports associated with slots equipped with DS3 EC1 packs must be terminated with 75 ohms Make a record of these disconnections so they can be replaced after the test 3 Loop back all high speed OC 48 lines so that the OUT jack of...

Page 957: ... Element command 7 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Set Synchronization with the Provisioned Mode set to Free Running but record the original parameter value before executing Verification can be obtained by selecting CONFIGURATION Retrieve Synchronization an example is shown in Section 11 8 At the CIT select FAULT Reset and execute reset takes about 15 minutes 9 NOTE Reset disconnects the CIT from ...

Page 958: ...line 1w site provisioning conflict NOTE This test may be denied if the terminal is exhibiting conditions or alarms other than those listed here The disallowed condition must be cleared before continuing 12 Perform local automatic turnup test for all lines DLP 502 13 Use FAULT Retrieve Alarm to obtain an Active Alarm and Status Report Make a note of any conditions other than those listed in Step 11...

Page 959: ...nections recorded and removed in Step 2 at the DSX 3 STSX 1 and or LGX cross connect panel or equivalent 18 If required perform additional provisioning at this time date time etc DLP 505 Helpful provisioning sources for the experienced technician are 365 575 122 FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal Provisioning Job Aid Releases 3 4 5 and 6 and 365 575 123 FT 2000 Threshold Crossing Alert TCA Para...

Page 960: ...NTP 006 Acceptance 365 575 102 Page 6 of 6 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 961: ...henever handling circuit packs or working on an FT 2000 terminal to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components See Electrostatic Discharge ESD Considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE This procedure is only used if the FT 2000 2 fiber ring network was installed by someone else If the installation has not been completed notify the installation personnel or refer to 365 57...

Page 962: ... The Ring Map Report lists the ring nodes from west to east starting at the local node If the nodes are incorrectly connected the order of the nodes in the report will also be incorrect Verify the Ring Map Report agrees with the engineered data particularly the NID node identification for Release 5 and lower and TID target identifier For Releases 3 and 4 0 also verify that Comm Status is good For ...

Page 963: ... the FT 2000 terminal If the network is so equipped these inputs are tested separately in Acceptance NTP 011 NOTE If you are remotely logged in you will require assistance at the distant node in order to perform this step If required check telemetry interfaces a Parallel telemetry b Serial telemetry c Miscellaneous discrete telemetry DLP 508 DLP 509 DLP 530 12 Establish a remote login to one of th...

Page 964: ... NE ACTY and the FE ACTY LEDs off at the local FT 2000 add drop rings terminal If YES then continue with Step 17 If NO then the trouble must be referred to the group that installed it 17 If required notify personnel at the remote maintenance site OS center that the FT 2000 ring network is ready for any operational tests they wish to perform using the X 25 link 18 The FT 2000 ring network has passe...

Page 965: ...se If the installation has not been completed including associated circuit pack installation notify the installation personnel or refer to the installation manual 365 575 115 to complete the installation If you completed the installation following the procedures in the installation manual do not perform this procedure It is assumed that installation of the added electrical low speed cables has bee...

Page 966: ...t and output can be tested Perform automatic low speed cabling test for all added electrical low speed cables DLP 503 4 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Alarm to obtain the Active Alarm and Status Report and verify that there are no active alarms or status conditions Section 11 shows example of report 5 The added electrical low speed cables have passed the acceptance tests and are ready fo...

Page 967: ...ion Analyzer or Tektronix CTS 710 SONET Transmission Analyzer or Tberd 310 SONET Transmission Analyzer or Cerjac 156 SONET Transmission Analyzer or equivalent WARNING Unterminated optical connectors may emit invisible laser radiation Eye damage may occur if beam is viewed directly or with improper optical instruments Avoid direct exposure to beam CAUTION Use a static ground wrist strap whenever ha...

Page 968: ...includes a loopback arrangement Figure 7 NOTE It is assumed that acceptance testing of the local FT 2000 ring has passed If at any point in this procedure the local FT 2000 ring fails to respond in the indicated way refer the trouble to installation personnel Referring to Figures 1 through 5 which figure most closely represents your configuration If Figure 1 then continue with Step 2 If Figure 2 t...

Page 969: ...ted Use the FAULT Switch Path STS3 or STS1 Reset command for the appropriate line s and tributary s 9 Verify that there are no alarm or status conditions in the ring 10 This completes testing path integrity Figure 1 11 The local FT 2000 ring has one DRI cross connection to the outside The DRI cross connections terminate on an external network and the local source destination cross connections term...

Page 970: ...work is non Lucent another vendor refer to local maintenance procedures to test path integrity in that network If the network is a DDM 2000 ring refer to the appropriate manual as follows 63 206 202 for DDM 2000 OC3 for Releases 2 through 7 2 63 206 280 for DDM 2000 OC3 for Release 8 and Higher 63 206 207 for DDM 2000 OC12 OC12 Regenerator for Releases 1 through 3 1 63 206 290 for DDM 2000 OC12 fo...

Page 971: ...rime execute a manual DRI switch for each path being tested Use the FAULT Switch Path STS3 or STS1 Manual command for the appropriate line s and tributary s 27 Repeat Steps 21 through 23 for each path being tested 28 At the FT 2000 primary node P reset the manual DRI switch for each path being tested Use the FAULT Switch Path STS3 or STS1 Reset command for the appropriate line s and tributary s 29...

Page 972: ...he inserted signal on each path being tested 36 To test path integrity for 2 way paths repeat Steps 34 and 35 from opposite ends of each path 37 At the FT 2000 primary node P execute a manual DRI switch for each path being tested Use the FAULT Switch Path STS3 or STS1 Manual command for the appropriate line s and tributary s 38 Repeat Steps 34 through 36 for each path being tested 39 DO NOT RESET ...

Page 973: ...o the appropriate manual as follows 63 206 202 for DDM 2000 OC3 for Releases 2 through 7 2 63 206 280 for DDM 2000 OC3 for Release 8 and Higher 63 206 207 for DDM 2000 OC12 OC12 Regenerator for Releases 1 through 3 1 63 206 290 for DDM 2000 OC12 for Release 5 and Higher 47 The local FT 2000 ring has two DRI cross connections to the outside Both DRI cross connections terminate to external networks ...

Page 974: ...STS3 or STS1 Manual command for the appropriate line s and tributary s 54 Repeat Steps 48 through 50 for each path being tested 55 At the FT 2000 primary node P reset the manual DRI switch for each path being tested Use the FAULT Switch Path STS3 or STS1 Reset command for the appropriate line s and tributary s 56 Repeat Steps 48 through 50 for each path being tested 57 At the FT 2000 primary node ...

Page 975: ...ork If an external network is a DDM 2000 ring refer to the appropriate manual as follows 63 206 202 for DDM 2000 OC3 for Releases 2 through 7 2 63 206 280 for DDM 2000 OC3 for Release 8 and Higher 63 206 207 for DDM 2000 OC12 OC12 Regenerator for Releases 1 through 3 1 63 206 290 for DDM 2000 OC12 for Release 5 and Higher DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Local FT 2000 Ring Test Set...

Page 976: ...ross connections terminate on an external network and the local source destination cross connections terminate directly to a test set Test Set Local FT 2000 Ring Test Set S P Note Two DRI cross connections to the outside Both DRI cross connections terminate directly to test sets P S Test Set Test Set Test Set Note Two DRI cross connections to the outside One DRI cross connection terminates in an e...

Page 977: ...d to End Test Arrangement for Slot 5B Note Two DRI cross connections to the outside One DRI cross connection terminates in an external network and the other DRI cross connection terminates directly to test sets Local FT 2000 Ring Test Set S P External Network P S Test Set T R In Out 5B 1 FT 2000 In Out 5B 1 FT 2000 Test set STS 1 T R Test set STS 1 ...

Page 978: ...NTP 009 Acceptance 365 575 102 Page 12 of 12 Issue 8 0 July 2002 Figure 7 Loopback Test Arrangement for Slot 5B Port 1 T R Test set In Out 5B FT 2000 In Out 5B FT 2000 ...

Page 979: ...age may occur if the beam is viewed directly or with improper optical instruments Avoid direct exposure to beam CAUTION Use a static ground wrist strap whenever handling circuit packs or working on an FT 2000 terminal to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components See Electrostatic Discharge ESD Considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE This procedure is only used if the n...

Page 980: ...1 2 At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve Alarm to obtain the Active Alarm and Status Report example is shown in Section 11 and verify that there are no active alarms or status conditions 3 CAUTION If the automatic low speed cabling fiber test is accidentally performed on an in service low speed fiber service will be interrupted NOTE Only 2 way fibers input and output can be tested Perform automatic lo...

Page 981: ...provisioned for these inputs at the FT 2000 terminal Additional descriptive information is in Section 6 User Settable Miscellaneous Discrete Interface Required Test Equipment Craft Interface Terminal CIT Wrist Strap WARNING Unterminated optical connectors may emit invisible laser radiation Eye damage may occur if beam is viewed directly or with improper optical instruments Avoid direct exposure to...

Page 982: ...t is further assumed that the add drop rings terminal and the FT LBA are powered and running If at any point in this procedure the FT 2000 add drop rings terminal or the FT LBA fails to respond in the indicated way refer the trouble to installation personnel It is assumed that all of the FT LBAs were in place connected in the ring during the ring acceptance procedure Acceptance NTP 007 Inspect the...

Page 983: ...al 7 From the report verify the correct condition is listed in the Description column of the report Your report may include only one condition at a time If the condition does not appear notify the installation group of the problem FT LBA fuse power failure FT LBA 1WE failure FT LBA 1EW failure FT LBA fan failure 8 Repeat Steps 5 through 7 for each of the miscellaneous discretes listed below Remove...

Page 984: ...NTP 011 Acceptance 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 985: ...1 1 to 0x1 Protection Mode NTP 017 Change an OC 3 IS 3 Link From 0x1 to 1 1 Protection Mode NTP 014 Change an OC 3 IS 3 Link From 1 1 to 0x1 Protection Mode NTP 016 Delete a Node From an In Service 2 Fiber Ring Network NTP 009 Delete DS3 and or EC1 Low Speed Port s NTP 003 Delete OC 12 Low Speed Slot s NTP 013 Delete OC 48 Protection Line From Point to Point Network NTP 004 Discontinue Restoration...

Page 986: ...IXL 001 Operation and Maintenance 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 FT 2000 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 987: ...revent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components See Electrostatic Discharge ESD Considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE Shelves are keyed to prevent circuit packs from being accidentally installed into the wrong slots NOTE This procedure may be performed after all installation wiring and testing of the Low Speed Shelf System Controller and or the Low Speed Shelf Complementary...

Page 988: ...t associated with a DS3 or EC1 port to be added A circuit pack is in the slot if the type of circuit pack is indicated in the Circuit Pack column of the report If circuit pack s is present in the slot s then continue with Step 10 If circuit pack s is not present in the slot s then continue with Step 5 5 Remove the appropriate low speed shelf cover DLP 511 6 If necessary remove the apparatus circui...

Page 989: ...pack is installed 9 Replace the shelf cover DLP 511 10 Make the appropriate external cross connections at the DSX 3 or equivalent 11 NOTE Signal degrade provisioning for the STS1E circuit pack is done for all three ports at the same time For the DS3 circuit pack it is done for one port at a time If required provision the DS3 or EC1 port parameters DLP 517 12 Verify that none of the low speed ports...

Page 990: ...NTP 002 Circuit Order 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 991: ...nsiderations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE A DS3 LAA2 LAA2B or STS1E LAA4 circuit pack has three ports Obtain the circuit order instructions to delete a DS3 or EC1 port s and note the assigned address A point to point network address requires a line slot and port s assignment A ring network address requires a slot and port s assignment 2 If required connect and condition the craft interface ter...

Page 992: ...that all three ports associated with a particular DS3 or STS1E circuit pack are to be removed or that the office records show the ports are not carrying traffic 7 Remove the shelf cover from the low speed shelf that contains the DS3 or STS1E circuit pack s DLP 511 8 Remove the circuit pack s from the shelf DLP 514 9 Replace the shelf cover DLP 511 10 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Update and exec...

Page 993: ...ath and completes this procedure when using Release 4 0 or earlier software 14 At the other end of the STS 1 path and at the CIT select CONFIGURATION Update and enter To establish and discontinue a remote login refer to DLP 524 15 The DS3 or EC1 port s has been deleted for an STS 1 path and completes this procedure when using Release 4 1 or later software DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS...

Page 994: ...NTP 003 Circuit Order 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 995: ...nd wrist strap whenever handling circuit packs or working on an FT 2000 network element to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components See Electrostatic Discharge ESD Considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 Obtain the circuit order instructions and note which OC 48 line will be deleted 2 If required connect the Craft Interface Terminal CIT to the local FT 2000 network element...

Page 996: ...select CONFIGURATION Update and execute 8 Wait until the NE ACTY goes off approximately 5 minutes 9 Remove the LNCTL circuit pack for the protection OC 48 line being deleted DLP 514 10 Replace the high speed shelf cover DLP 511 11 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Update and execute 12 Wait until the NE ACTY goes off approximately 1 minute 13 Is FT 2000 end terminal equipped for protection line acce...

Page 997: ...ds should contain dashes 19 If required repeat Steps 1 through 18 at the other FT 2000 end terminal 20 Does the network have a repeater If YES then continue with Step 21 If NO then continue with Step 26 DLP 514 21 Remove the REGENR circuit packs for the OC 48 line being deleted Refer to Figure 3 for the FT 2000 repeater bay shelf DLP 514 22 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Update and execute 23 Wai...

Page 998: ...e 4 of 6 Issue 8 0 July 2002 Figure 1 High Speed Shelf Cover Removed Panel Filter TRMTR RCVR L N C T L O H C T L R E S E R V E D L N C T L TRMTR RCVR LNCTL OHCTL LNCTL TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR 1 1 1 1 P P P P O_CTL Interconnection Panel Cover ...

Page 999: ...d High Speed Shelf Cover Removed TRMTR RCVR L N C T L L N C T L O H C T L R E S E R E V D R E S E R E V D R E S E R E V D TRMTR RCVR TRMTR RCVR 1 TRMTR P 1 P LNCTL RCVR Filter Panel 1 P OHCTL 1 OHCTL P OECTL 1 OECTL 2 LNCTL R E S E R E V D R E S E R E V D Interconnection Panel Cover ...

Page 1000: ...2002 Figure 3 FT 2000 Repeater Bay Shelf Cover Removed R E G E R E G E N N S Y S C S Y S M User Panel R T L E M R R E G E N R R E G E N R REGENR 1EW REGENR 1WE ROHCTL 1 ROHCTL P SYSCTL SYSMEM REGENR PEW REGENR PWE O W O W Interconnection Panel Cover tpa 814212 01 ...

Page 1001: ...o beam CAUTION Use a static ground wrist strap whenever handling circuit packs or working on an FT 2000 network element to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components See Electrostatic Discharge ESD Considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 Obtain the circuit order instructions and note which OC 48 protection line will be added 2 If required connect and condition the craft inte...

Page 1002: ...2 Circuit Order NTP 002 6 Repeat Steps 1 through 5 at the remote FT 2000 network element 7 Wait until the NE ACTY LED goes off at both FT 2000 end terminals approximately 5 minutes 8 If required to add DS3 port s to this OC 48 line at this time then refer to circuit order procedure Circuit Order NTP 002 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO ...

Page 1003: ...scharge ESD Considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 At the local FT 2000 end terminal obtain the cir cuit order instructions to discontinue restoration protection access Both FT 2000 end terminals must be provisioned 2 If required connect the Craft Interface Terminal CIT to the local FT 2000 network element and condition it DLP 501 3 At the local FT 2000 end terminal under the CIT FAULT categor...

Page 1004: ...2 5 At the remote FT 2000 network element repeat Step 4 This can be accomplished by establishing a remote login DLP 524 6 At both FT 2000 network elements verify the NE ACTY LED is off An assistant is required at the remote FT 2000 end terminal 7 Restoration protection access has been discontinued DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO ...

Page 1005: ...rations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 At the local FT 2000 end terminal obtain the circuit order instructions to establish restora tion protection access Both FT 2000 end ter minals must be provisioned 2 At the local FT 2000 end terminal if required connect and condition the craft interface terminal CIT DLP 501 3 To verify the provisioning obtain a report by selecting CONFIGURATION Retrieve Protecti...

Page 1006: ...2 5 At the local FT 2000 end terminal and at the CIT select FAULT Switch Line Protection and Priority set to preemptible 6 At both FT 2000 network elements verify the NE ACTY LED is off An assistant is required at the remote FT 2000 end terminal 7 Restoration protection access has been established DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO ...

Page 1007: ... East node If adding a new node to an out of service 2 fiber ring network refer to Acceptance NTP 006 or to Acceptance NTP 011 node operating with FT LBA Required Test Equipment and Personnel Craft Interface Terminal CIT Wrist Strap Appropriate Optical LBOs Technical assistance at two other nodes WARNING Unterminated optical connectors may emit invisible laser radiation Eye damage may occur if bea...

Page 1008: ...N Incorrect setting of the timing option could result in a service interruption in certain applications Be certain that the timing option for the new bay is set to be consistent with the rest of the ring and to be consistent with the intended application The bay defaults to free running mode when it is initially turned up Provisionable timing options are discussed in Section 5 of this User Service...

Page 1009: ...ing NOTE Refer to Figure 1 and notice that the node to be connected to line 1W of the new node is referred to in this procedure as the West node and that the node to be connected to line 1E of the new node is referred to in this procedure as the East node From office records determine which nodes in the ring network will be called the West node and the East node for this procedure DO ITEMS BELOW I...

Page 1010: ...ry to tributary through cross connec tions and verify that there are no unnecessary cross connections DLP 536 3 CAUTION A line forced switch will preempt extra traffic if any on the protection tributaries NOTE For this step and Step 4 refer to Figure 2 The service tributaries to be connected add drop through to the new node will now be looped back in the opposite direction at the West node and at ...

Page 1011: ...tra traffic if any on the protection tributaries Instruct the technician at the East node or travel to that location to enter the FAULT Switch Line 1W Forced com mand at the CIT for line 1W This makes a forced switch on line 1W and may cause traf fic hits 5 Refer to Figure 3 to help locate the OC 48 optical fibers that can now be removed from the West node fibers connected to East node DO ITEMS BE...

Page 1012: ...uct the technician at the East node to remove the OC 48 optical fibers line 1W connected to the West node Figure 3 Optical Fibers Removed 7 NOTE Refer to Figure 4 and notice the new optical connections can now be made to the new node NOTE A transient node ID conflict condition will be observed after the ring is reconnected DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Line 1W WEST NODE Line 1E ...

Page 1013: ... of the new node DLP 512 Figure 4 Optical Fibers Connected to New Node 8 At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve Alarm command to obtain an Active Alarms and Status Report and verify an incoming OC 48 LOS condition does not exist for either the 1E or 1W receiver that is whichever receive fiber that was connected to the RCVR circuit pack in Step 7 at the new node DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS...

Page 1014: ...t for either the 1E or 1W receiver at the new node 11 Connect the transmit fibers change the lightguide buildout as necessary to the appropriate TRMTR circuit pack For example line 1W at the new node to be connected to the West node and line 1E to be connected to the East node DLP 512 12 Instruct the technician at the West node to a Change the lightguide buildout as necessary on the 1E receive fib...

Page 1015: ...Retrieve Map Ring command to obtain a Ring Map Report and verify that the new node has been added to the ring as intended Comm Stat should indicate good CAUTION Incorrect setting of the timing option could result in a service interruption in certain applications Be certain that the timing option for the new bay is set to be consistent with the rest of the ring and to be consistent with the intende...

Page 1016: ...2000 ring 16 NOTE Refer to Figure 5 The forced switch at the West node can now be reset Instruct the technician at the West node to enter FAULT Switch Line 1E Reset to reset the forced switch on line 1E An alter native method is to remotely log in to the West node and execute the command The line switch may cause traffic hits Reference DLP 524 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO ...

Page 1017: ...t node and execute the command The line switch may cause traffic hits Reference DLP 524 Figure 5 Ring Network With New Node 18 NOTE The new node has NOW been added to the ring network Verify that the NE ACTY LED is off at the new node by 1 looking at the LED at the user panel or 2 using the CIT log in to the new nodeandselectFAULT Retrieve Network Alarms command to verify that there are NOT any ac...

Page 1018: ...user panel An alternative method is to log in to the East node and execute the FAULT Retrieve Alarms command to verify that there are NOT any active alarms 21 NOTE Incorrectly provisioned source node TID and or destination node TID can result in a service outage under certain multiple failure conditions If required enter any tributary to slot drop and or slot to tributary add cross connections at ...

Page 1019: ... action is required at two other nodes The Node To Be Deleted is located between two operational nodes called the West Node and East Node Required Test Equipment and Personnel Craft Interface Terminal CIT Wrist Strap Appropriate Optical LBOs Technical assistance at two other nodes WARNING Unterminated optical connectors may emit invisible laser radiation Eye damage may occur if beam is viewed dire...

Page 1020: ...he STS1 Cross Connection Map Report obtained in Step 2 and verify that there are no tributary to slot drop or slot to tributary add cross connections These cross connections could be carrying traffic so follow local operating procedures to reroute or terminate the traffic 4 NOTE Refer to Figure 1 and note that the node connected to line 1W of the Node To Be Deleted is referred to in this procedure...

Page 1021: ...tches will preempt extra traffic if any on the protection tributaries NOTE Refer to Figure 2 The service tributaries connected to the Node To Be Deleted will now be looped back in the opposite direction with OC 48 line forced switches at the West Node and at the East Node NOTE The next two steps will cause the ABN and NE ACTY LEDs to light but there will be no alarm even though the Node To Be Dele...

Page 1022: ...location to enter the FAULT Switch Line 1W Forced command at the CIT This makes a forced switch on line 1W and may cause traffic hits 8 NOTE Refer to Figure 3 to help locate the OC 48 optical fibers that can now be removed at the Node To Be Deleted fibers connected to the West Node Remove the OC 48 optical fibers at the Node To Be Deleted line 1W that con nected to the West Node DO ITEMS BELOW IN ...

Page 1023: ...ptical fibers at the Node To Be Deleted line 1E that connects to the East Node The node is now com pletely isolated from the ring However the adjacent nodes East and West Nodes get a sync mode auto switch condition if they are through timed Provisioned Mode DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Line 1W WEST NODE Line 1E EAST NODE Other Node s Other Node s Line 1W Line 1W Line 1E Line 1E...

Page 1024: ... technician at the West Node to change the lightguide buildout as necessary and reconfigure the fibers to connect line 1E of the West Node to line 1W of the East Node DLP 512 Figure 4 Optical Fibers Connected to East Node and West Node 11 Instruct the technician at the East Node to change the lightguide buildout as necessary and reconfigure the fibers to connect line 1W of the East Node to line 1E...

Page 1025: ... exist Depending on how many nodes are in the ring it may take from several minutes to a few hours for this condition to clear 14 NOTE Refer to Figure 5 The forced switch at the West Node can now be reset Instruct the technician at the West Node to enter FAULT Switch Line 1E Reset command at the CIT The line switch may cause traffic hits Figure 5 Forced Switched Lines at the East Node and the West...

Page 1026: ...fic hits 16 NOTE Incorrectly assigned node IDs can result in irregularities of protection switching Perform the Ring Reset procedure to allow correct node IDs to be reassigned Operation NTP 012 17 NOTE The Node To Be Deleted has been deleted from the ring network Instruct the technician at the West Node to verify that the NE ACTY LED is off at the user panel 18 Instruct the technician at the East ...

Page 1027: ...er optical instruments Avoid direct exposure to the beam CAUTION Use a static ground wrist strap whenever handling circuit packs or working on an FT 2000 terminal to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components See Electrostatic Discharge ESD Considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 NOTE Shelves are keyed to prevent circuit packs from being accidentally installed into the wrong...

Page 1028: ...d if such a transition takes place at the head end of a 1 1 protected optical line while the tail end is active on the B slot the traffic will be dropped with no alarms being raised WARNING When a pair of slots A and B slots changes from 0x1 to 1 1 operation all cross connections added from those slots will initially select the A slot This will cause a brief service hit if the original add cross c...

Page 1029: ...port if the OC 3 circuit pack is already present in the slot associated with an OC 3 circuit pack to be added A circuit pack is in the slot if OC3 is indicated in the Circuit Pack column of the report If an OC3 circuit pack s is present in the slot s then continue with Step 11 If there is no circuit pack s present in the slot s then continue with Step 6 If any circuit pack s other than OC3 is pres...

Page 1030: ...ions for the newly equipped low speed slot s to the OC48 line DLP 536 13 NOTE This step is optional One of eight DCC channels can be assigned to a slot or pair of slots that will be equipped with OC 3 IS 3 circuit packs The orientation of the OC 3 IS 3 circuit packs is provisioned network at one end and user at the other end Both ends of the OC 3 IS 3 line cannot be the same and it makes no differ...

Page 1031: ...365 575 102 Circuit Order NTP 010 Issue 8 0 July 2002 Page 5 of 6 Circuit Order NTP 010 DLP 536 TAD 100 DLP 501 DLP 517 DLP 511 DLP 533 DLP 514 DLP 542 ...

Page 1032: ...NTP 010 Circuit Order 365 575 102 Page 6 of 6 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1033: ...ground wrist strap whenever handling circuit packs or working on an FT 2000 terminal to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components See Electrostatic Discharge ESD Considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 Obtain the circuit order instructions to delete an OC 3 IS 3 slot s circuit pack s and note the assigned address The address requires a slot assignment 2 If required connect ...

Page 1034: ... or not the slot for the circuit pack to be removed appears in the West or East Cross Connect columns If a cross connection is shown then traffic is possible at this slot Does the slot for the circuit pack that is to be removed still have cross connections assigned If YES then continue with Step 5 If NO then continue with Step 6 5 Delete the cross connections for the slot of the circuit pack that ...

Page 1035: ...ecute 12 NOTE Steps 12 through 14 are optional You may delete the DCC assignment or leave it in place without causing any interference or harm to other channels At the CIT select CONFIGURA TION Retrieve Assignment DCC to obtain a DCC Assignment Report 13 From the report does the DCC assignment exist for the slot of the circuit pack being removed If YES then continue with Step 14 If NO then continu...

Page 1036: ...ATION Delete Assignment DCC command for each DCC channel to be removed DLP 542 15 After the rings are separated it is possible that a DSNE not reachable and or NE status communication failure condition s may be generated To clear this assign a DSNE TAP 137 and AGNE TAP 172 in the ring that contains the alarms The OC 3 IS 3 circuit pack s has been removed 16 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE D...

Page 1037: ...nnectors may emit invisible laser radiation Eye damage may occur if the beam is viewed directly or with improper optical instruments Avoid direct exposure to beam CAUTION Use a static ground wrist strap whenever handling circuit packs or working on an FT 2000 terminal to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components See Electrostatic Discharge ESD Considerations in Trouble Clearin...

Page 1038: ... Level parameter must be provisioned to NO whenever an unused OC 12 input is present If required provision the OC 12 slot parameter s DLP 517 Supplemental Information If an incoming OC 12 LOS condition exists prior to setting the Alarm Level to NO this condition will not disappear after the Alarm Level is set to NO Only subsequent conditions will be subdued not reported The user may clear the cond...

Page 1039: ...mmand and continue with Step 6 6 Remove the appropriate low speed shelf cover DLP 511 7 If necessary remove the apparatus circuit pack blank s from the slot s requiring new circuit pack s DLP 533 8 NOTE OC 12 circuit pack requires Release 7 1 or later software Install OC 12 circuit pack s into the speci fied slot s of the low speed shelf with the appropriate receive lightguide buildouts LBOs and t...

Page 1040: ...nels can be assigned to a slot 0x1 unprotected links only that is equipped with an OC 12 circuit pack The orientation of the OC 12 circuit packs is provisioned network at one end and user at the other end Both ends of the OC 12 line cannot be the same and it makes no difference which end is network NOTE If you are establishing DCC connectivity for the first time you may have additional alarms for ...

Page 1041: ...365 575 102 Circuit Order NTP 012 Issue 8 0 July 2002 Page 5 of 6 Circuit Order NTP 012 DLP 536 TAD 100 DLP 501 DLP 517 DLP 511 DLP 533 DLP 514 DLP 511 DLP 542 ...

Page 1042: ...NTP 012 Circuit Order 365 575 102 Page 6 of 6 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1043: ...round wrist strap whenever handling circuit packs or working on an FT 2000 terminal to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components See Electrostatic Discharge ESD Considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 Obtain the circuit order instructions to remove an OC 12 circuit pack s and note the assigned address The address requires a slot assignment 2 If required connect and conditio...

Page 1044: ...rvisor Looking at the report verify that the slot for the circuit pack to be removed does not appear in the West or East Cross Connect columns If a cross connection is shown then traffic is possible at this slot Does the slot for the circuit pack to be removed still have cross connections assigned If YES then continue with Step 5 If No then continue with Step 6 5 Delete the cross connections for t...

Page 1045: ... s 9 Remove the circuit pack s from the shelf DLP 514 10 Replace the shelf cover DLP 511 11 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Update and execute 12 NOTE Steps 12 through 14 are optional You may delete the DCC assignment or leave it in place without causing any interference or harm to other channels At the CIT select CONFIGURA TION Retrieve Assignment DCC to obtain a DCC Assignment Report 13 From the...

Page 1046: ...RATION Delete Assign ment DCC command for each DCC chan nel to be removed DLP 542 15 After the rings are separated it is possible that a DSNE not reachable and or NE status communication failure condition s may be generated To clear this assign a DSNE TAP 137 and AGNE TAP 172 in the ring that contains the alarms The OC 12 circuit pack s has been removed 16 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE DO...

Page 1047: ...ion Eye damage may occur if the beam is viewed directly or with improper optical instruments Avoid direct exposure to beam CAUTION Use a static ground wrist strap whenever handling circuit packs or working on an FT 2000 terminal to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components See Electrostatic Discharge ESD Considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 Obtain the Circuit Order work ...

Page 1048: ...n existing circuit pack If NO then go to Step 12 If YES then continue with Step 4 4 Is the slot already equipped with an optical circuit pack If NO then go to Step 8 If YES then continue with Step 5 5 Are fibers already terminated on the OC 3 IS 3 circuit pack If NO then it is available go to Step 12 If YES then continue with Step 6 6 Determine whether the slot already has cross connects defined A...

Page 1049: ...g traffic then either a different slot must be selected or the traffic must be moved STOP You cannot re start this procedure until this issue is resolved If NO then go to Step 14 8 NOTE At this point you have determined that the slot is already equipped with an electrical circuit pack either a DS3 or STS 1E You must still determine whether or not the circuit pack is supporting traffic Are coaxial ...

Page 1050: ... must be selected or the traffic must be moved STOP You cannot re start this procedure until this issue is resolved If NO then continue with Step 11 11 Delete the DS3 STS 1E Low Speed ports and remove the circuit pack Execute the Configuration Update command Circuit Order NTP 003 12 Delete all existing cross connection s for the required slot new protection link if not already performed DLP 536 13...

Page 1051: ...s 1 1 for the slot pair At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve OC3 All and execute to obtain a report that lists the actual Operating Mode of the OC 3 IS 3 circuit packs NOTE It is important to understand that the slot pair could be provisioned for 1 1 protection mode but yet the operating mode still be 0x1 NOTE Look at the report and for the slot pair identified in the work order verify that th...

Page 1052: ...NTP 014 Circuit Order 365 575 102 Page 6 of 6 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1053: ...rectly or with improper optical instruments Avoid direct exposure to beam CAUTION Use a static ground wrist strap whenever handling circuit packs or working on an FT 2000 terminal to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components See Electrostatic Discharge ESD Considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 Obtain the Circuit Order work instructions and identify the quad that is specif...

Page 1054: ...Update command If NO then go to Step 13 If YES then continue with Step 4 4 Are the protection quad s slot slots already equipped with an optical pack If NO then go to Step 9 If YES then continue with Step 5 5 Is the quad already equipped with an OC 12 circuit pack If NO then go to Step 15 If YES then continue with Step 6 6 Are fibers already terminated on the OC 12 circuit pack If NO then it is av...

Page 1055: ... must be selected or the traffic must be moved STOP You cannot re start this procedure until this issue is resolved If NO then go to Step 20 9 NOTE At this point you have determined that the protection quad slots to be used are already equipped with an electrical circuit pack either a DS3 or STS 1E You must still determine whether or not the circuit pack is supporting traffic Are coaxial cables al...

Page 1056: ...ifferent quad must be selected or the traffic must be moved STOP You cannot re start this procedure until this issue is resolved If NO then continue with Step 12 12 Delete the DS3 STS 1E Low Speed Ports and remove the circuit pack s Execute the Configuration Update command Circuit Order NTP 003 13 Delete all existing cross connection s for the new protection quad slots if not already performed DLP...

Page 1057: ...supporting traffic then either a different quad must be selected or the traffic must be moved STOP You cannot re start this procedure until this issue is resolved If NO then continue with Step 18 18 Remove OC 3 IS 3 Low Speed circuit pack s from the shelf Execute the Configuration Update command Circuit Order NTP 011 19 Add an OC 12 Low Speed Slot actually four slots Circuit Order NTP 012 20 Verif...

Page 1058: ...ction DLP 517 NOTE Changing the service quad s Protection Mode clears the OC12 Mode Conflict Alarm 23 Enter the appropriate cross connection s for the protection quad DLP 536 24 Use CONFIGURATION Retrieve OC12 command to verify that the operating mode is 1 1 for the quad pair If Operating Mode is 1 1 then STOP You Have Completed This Procedure If Operating Mode is NOT 1 1 then contact your next le...

Page 1059: ...00 or other vendor equipment The process is as follows 1 At Node A switch traffic from Protection pack to Service pack 2 At Node B switch traffic from Protection pack to Service pack 3 At Node B change Protection mode from 1 1 to 0x1 4 At Node A change Protection mode from 1 1 to 0x1 NOTE The Service slot has an _a e g 1a 2a 3a etc slot address The Protection slot has an _b e g 1b 2b 3b etc slot a...

Page 1060: ...inal CIT DLP 501 3 At the CIT use FAULT Retrieve State command to obtain a report that lists the current actual protection Switch State If Service slot _a Switch State is active rx act go to Step 7 If Service slot _a Switch State is standby rx stby then continue with Step 4 4 At the CIT perform the FAULT Switch OC3 slot priority command whereas for the slot enter the Protection slot _b that you wi...

Page 1061: ...g this procedure 7 NOTE Steps 7 through 13 assume that the far end node B NE is an FT 2000 If this is not the case then the equivalent sequence of commands which are appropriate for the particular product must be performed At CIT remotely Login to far end node B Use FAULT Retrieve State command to obtain a report that lists the actual protection Switch State of the OC 3 circuit packs If Service sl...

Page 1062: ...quest active 9 Did the command in Step 8 execute If YES then go to Step 11 If NO then continue with Step 10 10 Use the FAULT Retrieve Alarm command to check for system alarms Clear any alarms present then repeat this procedure from Step 8 You must determine why the SWITCH command in Step 8 did not execute before continuing this procedure 11 While still logged into far end node B use CONFIGURATION ...

Page 1063: ...RATION Set OC3 command to change the Protection Mode from 1 1 to 0x1 for the protection slot _b address NOTE As a result of changing the Protection Mode from 1 1 to 0x1 the cross connections associated with the protection slot are deleted DLP 517 15 While still logged into near end node A use CONFIGURATION Set OC3 command to change the Protection Mode from 1 1 to 0x1 for the service slot _b addres...

Page 1064: ...NTP 016 Circuit Order 365 575 102 Page 6 of 6 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1065: ...The process is as follows 1 At Node A switch traffic from Protection quad to Service quad 2 At Node B switch traffic from Protection quad to Service quad 3 At Node B change Protection mode from 1 1 to 0x1 4 At Node A change Protection mode from 1 1 to 0x1 NOTE The FT 2000 OC 12 Service and Protection quad pairs are 1b and 3b or 5b and 7b The Service quad has a 1b or 5b quad address The Protection ...

Page 1066: ...and to obtain a report that lists the current actual protection Switch State If Service Quad 1b or 5b Switch State is active rx act go to Step 7 If Service Quad 1b or 5b Switch State is standby rx stby then continue with Step 4 4 At the CIT perform the FAULT Switch OC12 slot priority command whereas for the slot enter the Protection slot 3b or 7b that you wish to lock out and for the priority ente...

Page 1067: ...procedure 7 NOTE Steps 7 through 13 assume that the far end node B NE is an FT 2000 If this is not the case then the equivalent sequence of commands which are appropriate for the particular product must be performed At CIT remotely Login to far end node B Use FAULT Retrieve State command to obtain a report that lists the actual protection Switch State of the OC 12 circuit packs If Service Quad 1b ...

Page 1068: ...existing inhibit request active 9 Did the command in Step 8 execute If YES then go to Step 11 If NO then continue with Step 10 10 Use the FAULT Retrieve Alarm command to check for system alarms Clear any alarms present then repeat this procedure from Step 8 You must determine why the SWITCH command in Step 8 did not execute before continuing this procedure 11 While still logged into far end node B...

Page 1069: ...ION Set OC12 command to change the Protection Mode from 1 1 to 0x1 for the protection quad 3b or 7b address NOTE As a result of changing the Protection Mode from 1 1 to 0x1 the cross connections associated with the protection quad are deleted DLP 517 15 While still logged into near end node A use CONFIGURATION Set OC12 command to change the Protection Mode from 1 1 to 0x1 for the service quad 1b o...

Page 1070: ...NTP 017 Circuit Order 365 575 102 Page 6 of 6 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1071: ... required The FT 2000 can be any release that provides an OC 3 OC 12 low speed interface However DCC connectivity requires compatible DDM 2000 and FT 2000 software releases DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 15 0 or later will provide interconnection of its main ring interface to a 1 1 OC 3 OC 12 interface without special provisioning of the FT 2000 low speed interface Required Test Equipment Craft Interface T...

Page 1072: ...eed interface for 1 1 configuration any two adjacent low speed slots for example 2A and 2B MUST be equipped with the same type OC3 1 3 STD circuit pack and not a mix of the two If OC 12 interface use the CONFIGURATION Set OC12 command to set one of the service quads 1B or 5B for 1 1 protection in the from OC12 direction and 0 x 1 protection in the from OC48 direction _ 2 NOTE Steps 2 and 3 referen...

Page 1073: ...er Assignment DCC command to assign a DCC channel if required to the service slot quad and to the corresponding protection slot quad and set the orientation of the channels _ 5 Cross connections and DCC assignments have been established between the FT 2000 OC 3 OC 12 low speed interface and the DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 ring interface _ DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAILS GO TO Node 16 FT 2000 No...

Page 1074: ...NTP 018 Circuit Order 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1075: ...I STS 3 or STS 1 Cross Connections NTP 004 Establish Dual Ring Interworking DRI STS 3 or STS 1 Cross Connections NTP 003 Identify Primary Secondary and Source Destination Nodes NTP 006 Install Software Initial Installation Upgrade Change into CIT and FT 2000 Network Element NTP 002 Merge Two OC 48 Rings NTP 009 Optical Upgrade From STS 3 to STS 1 Granularity NTP 010 Provision 1 Way DRI Video Distr...

Page 1076: ...IXL 001 Operation and Maintenance 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 FT 2000 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1077: ...ntly running in the FT 2000 network element CAUTION All network elements within a particular network must be running the same software release The CIT PC software must be the same release as the network elements or a higher release NOTE Disks available include the 5 1 2 inch 1 2M byte floppy the 3 1 2 inch 720k byte floppy or CD ROM NOTE For a general description on using a personal computer in th...

Page 1078: ...m Software Release Description Release 3 0 1 ADR Comcode 107095390 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Software Release Description Release 4 0 0 ADR Comcode 107027484 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Software Release Description Release 4 1 0 ADR Comcode 107027476 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Software Release Description Release 5 0 1 ADR Comcode 107361875 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Software Relea...

Page 1079: ...Release 7 2 1 ADR Comcode 108134743 FT 2000 OC 48 Ligthwave System Software Release Description Release 7 2 2 ADR Comcode 108216961 FT 2000 OC 48 Ligthwave System Software Release Description Release 7 2 3 ADR Comcode 108265943 FT 2000 OC 48 Ligthwave System Software Release Description Release 7 2 4 ADR Comcode 108491895 FT 2000 OC 48 Ligthwave System Software Release Description Release 7 2 5 AD...

Page 1080: ...ansmitters do not for R7 2 support the Sync Messaging feature Therefore if a node contains B2 transmitters and is being upgraded with 7 2 generic software an alarm will be raised for each B2 transmitter This Major Alarm is defined as Sync Mode Equipment Conflict Refer to TAP 102 for details on how to clear this alarm 2 Refer to and perform the appropriate software download procedure initial instal...

Page 1081: ...ervice interruptions Dual ring interworking DRI operation is only supported in Software Releases 4 1 and later For Releases 6 and earlier an electrical low speed interface circuit pack DS3 and or STS1E has three low speed ports All three ports associated with the slot will be affected by a slot to tributary or a tributary to slot cross connection For Releases 6 and earlier an optical low speed int...

Page 1082: ... a 1 way cross connection is used for half duplex transmission At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Crossconnect ion STS3 or STS1 and execute to obtain an STS3 or STS1 Cross Connection Map Report Section 11 shows examples of reports 7 Compare the report with the operation instructions and record any cross connections to be added and or deleted at the secondary node 8 CAUTION The cross connecti...

Page 1083: ... OC 3 line You may enter change a DCC assignment on an OC 3 line DLP 542 11 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Crossconnect ion STS3 or STS1 and execute to obtain an STS3 or STS1 Cross Connection Map Report Section 11 shows examples of reports 12 Verify that the cross connections in the report match those in the operation instructions 13 This step is optional If the cross connection just del...

Page 1084: ...e operation instructions and record any cross connections to be added and or deleted at the primary node 18 CAUTION The cross connections to be deleted MUST NOT be carrying traffic otherwise service interruptions will occur NOTE If the slot to tributary add cross connection of the required 1 way dri cross connection already exists do not delete it Delete any unnecessary cross connections associate...

Page 1085: ...ther end of the OC 3 line You may enter change a DCC assignment on an OC 3 line DLP 542 21 NOTE This step is optional but it is recommended The primary node has a 1 way dri cross connection An incoming low speed signal failure on the associated port or slot will be protected by a DRI protection switch so service will not be affected You may wish to change the alarm level associated with an incomin...

Page 1086: ...may delete a DCC assignment on an OC 3 line DLP 542 25 NOTE This step is optional and only applies if there are no low speed connections to an external network s Test DRI cross connections for path integ rity DLP 541 26 Discontinue the login at the primary node To discontinue a remote login refer to DLP 524 27 The necessary cross connections have been made in the primary and secondary nodes and th...

Page 1087: ...ing network CAUTION Cross connections deleted at the wrong points can cause service interruptions NOTE Dual ring interworking DRI operation is only supported in Software Releases 4 1 and later NOTE For Releases 6 and earlier an electrical low speed interface circuit pack has three low speed ports All three ports associated with the slot will be affected by a slot to tributary or a tributary to slo...

Page 1088: ... the local FT 2000 network element and condition it DLP 501 5 Establish a login to the secondary node To remotely establish a login refer to DLP 524 6 The cross connection to be deleted at the secondary node is a 1 way slot to tributary add cross connection At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Crossconnect ion STS3 or STS1 and execute to obtain an STS3 or STS1 Cross Connection Map Report Examp...

Page 1089: ... CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Crossconnect ion STS3 or STS1 and execute to obtain an STS3 or STS1 Cross Connection Map Report Section 11 shows examples of reports 11 Verify that the cross connection s in the report matches those in the operation instructions 12 Discontinue the login at the secondary node To discontinue a remote login refer to DLP 524 13 Establish a login to the primary node i...

Page 1090: ...s connection just deleted was to a slot containing an OC 3 circuit pack you may want to provision a DCC assignment to remove DCC connectivity with the network element at the other end of the OC 3 line You may delete a DCC assignment on an OC 3 line DLP 542 19 Roll any unnecessary 1 way dri cross connection s to 1 way cross connection s Use the CONFIGURATION Enter Roll STS3 or STS1 command to modif...

Page 1091: ...lish a login refer to DLP 524 22 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Crossconnect ion STS3 or STS1 and execute to obtain an STS3 or STS1 Cross Connection Map Report Section 11 shows examples of reports 23 Verify that the cross connections in the report match those in the operation instructions 24 Discontinue the login at the primary node To discontinue a remote login refer to DLP 524 25 The n...

Page 1092: ...NTP 004 Operation 365 575 102 Page 6 of 6 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1093: ...ease 5 0 or later software This procedure can be accomplished while the FT 2000 ring is in service Required Test Equipment Craft Interface Terminal CIT Wrist Strap NOTE Release 5 allows copying software over the OC 48 line Release 6 allows copying software over either the OC 3 or OC 48 lines NOTE For a general description on using a personal computer in the following procedure refer to DLP 529 If ...

Page 1094: ...the Ring Map Report for release 5 An example of these reports with a description of the output parameters is provided in Section 11 of this manual 5 NOTE The software in the network will be updated by starting with the topmost FT 2000 network element TID in the report except the DS NE and moving down the list of TIDs nodes one at a time This approach updates the network software in an East directi...

Page 1095: ...1 and later The terms source and destination are used for slots tributaries lines and nodes when making cross connections However this procedure will only use source and destination in reference to nodes that describe a 1 way circuit one direction of transmission If required connect the craft interface terminal CIT to the FT 2000 network element and condition it DLP 501 2 Establish a login to a no...

Page 1096: ...ts contain an explanation to Figure 1 Figure 1 and Exhibit 1 or Exhibit 2 use tributary 1 and slot 1a for examples and that Worcester MA is the location requesting the report 6 Discontinue the login to the node To discontinue a remote login refer to DLP 524 7 This completes the procedure to identify the primary secondary source and destinations nodes of a DRI circuit DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED...

Page 1097: ... because the add cross connection is dashed and not dotted The secondary node is given in the TID column associated with the incoming tributary of the 1 way DRI In this report the secondary node is to the right East of the 1 way DRI Chicopee MA Chicopee MA is also the standby source node because the through cross connect is dotted The destination node is given in the TID column associated with the...

Page 1098: ... the Source TID column associated with the incoming tributary of the 1 way DRI In this report the secondary node is to the right East of the 1 way DRI Chicopee MA Chicopee MA is also the standby source node because the through cross connect at Concord MA is indicated by STBY in the Primary State column The destination node is given in the Destination TID column associated with the outgoing tributa...

Page 1099: ...pter 8 Administration and Provisioning NOTE Dual ring interworking DRI operation is only supported in Software Releases 4 1 and later NOTE The terms source and destination are used for slots tributaries lines and nodes when making cross connections However this procedure will only use source and destination in reference to nodes that describe a 1 way circuit one direction of transmission If requir...

Page 1100: ...n exactly what cross connections are present To determine the destination node TID from the local node assign the following 1 X is the TID of the local node 2 Y is the TID of the next downstream node transmit direction with a 1 way DRI cross connection X and Y will never be the same node 3 Z is the TID of the last node with a 1 way drop cross connection when following the circuit from node X to no...

Page 1101: ... connection TID rule A applies to all source nodes and secondary nodes TID rule B applies to all destination nodes node0 4a 1 way drop 1w 6 to 4a source node0 4b node1 4a node2 4a 4b node3 4a node4 4a 1 way DRI 4b to 1e 6 dest node2 second node0 1 way drop 1w 6 to 4a source node0 1 way thru 1w 6 to 1e 6 dest node2 source node0 1 way drop 1w 6 to 4a source node0 1 way DRI 4b to 1e 6 dest node0 seco...

Page 1102: ...two examples At node 4 TID rule B 4 applies X node 4 Y node 1 and Z node 4 so the destinations TID of the 1 way through is set to node 0 At node 2 TID rule B 5 applies X node 2 Y node 0 and Z node 4 so the destination node TID is set to the same as the TID for node 4 TID rule B 5 also applies to node 3 node0 4b node1 4a node2 4a 4b node3 4a node4 4a 1 way DRI 4b to 1e 6 dest node2 second node0 1 w...

Page 1103: ...le B 5 implies Z node 1 be used At node 1 X node 1 Y node 2 Z node 1 where TID rule B 4 implies Y node 2 be used At node 2 X node 2 Y node 3 and Z node 3 where TID rule B 5 implies Z node 3 be used At node 3 X node 3 Y node 0 and Z node 0 where TID rule B 5 implies Z node 0 be used At node 4 X node 4 Y node 0 and Z node 0 where TID rule B 5 implies Z node 0 be used node0 4a 1 way drop 1w 6 to 4a s...

Page 1104: ...NTP 007 Operation 365 575 102 Page 6 of 6 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1105: ...node where that assignment was first made CAUTION When a protection tributary is selected for non preemptible protection access the corresponding STS 3 tributary of service capacity at every node of the ring becomes unprotected NOTE Although Release 7 1 0 only provides NPPA at the STS 3 level it still requires STS 1 capable B 5 optics circuit packs Release 7 2 provides NPPA at both STS 3 and STS 1...

Page 1106: ...y where service traffic is temporarily made unprotected and the non preemptible protection capacity is used for DACS based network restoration purposes 4 At the CIT select the CONFIGURATION Enter Protection STS3 or STS1 command and execute to add delete change the state variable for the desired tributary 5 Verify that the state variable for the specified tributary has actually been changed per the...

Page 1107: ...ted and installed Required Test Equipment CIT Wrist Strap Required Personnel Have installation maintenance personnel at all four nodes two nodes of ring 1 and two nodes of ring 2 where fibers are to be physically moved originals disconnected new connected 2 If required connect the CIT to the local FT 2000 network element and condition it DLP 501 3 NOTE The CIT user s must have a privileged securit...

Page 1108: ...th ring 1 and ring 2 has a unique TID At the CIT connected to any NE within ring 1 select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Map Network command R6 0 0 and later to obtain the Network Map Report or select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Map Ring command to obtain the Ring Map Report for release 5 and earlier An example of these reports with a description of the output parameters is provided in Section 11 of this manua...

Page 1109: ...th rings At the CIT connected to ring 1 select the CONFIGURATION Retrieve Crossconnect STS command to obtain the cross connect map report Refer to Figure 2 10 From the ring 1 cross connect map report identify all traffic that must have a through cross connection defined for one or more NEs of ring 2 At the CIT connected to ring 2 select the CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnection STS command at each N...

Page 1110: ...fore prior to merging ring 1 with ring 2 it will be necessary to change one of the existing DS NE YES nodes to NO Failure to do this could result in a service interruption From the CIT access the NE to be changed and select the SECURITY Set Network_Element command and change DS NE YES to DS NE NO Refer to the example provided in Figure 3 NOTE At the node where the DS NE is changed the OHCTL and th...

Page 1111: ...1E line forced switch at near end Node C ABN line 1W line forced switch at near end Node 2 ABN line 1W line forced switch at near end Node 3 ABN line 1E line forced switch at near end There may be other alarms at the various nodes during this procedure Prepare to Disconnect Existing Fibers 15 Instruct the installation maintenance personnel at node A to disconnect the East transmit fiber point AET ...

Page 1112: ... 3 to disconnect the East receive fiber point 3ER 21 Instruct the installation maintenance personnel at node 3 to disconnect the East transmit fiber point 3ET and also verify that the West receiver point 2WR has an incoming OC 48 LOS alarm and its FAULT LED is flashing Refer to the example in Figure 5 22 Instruct the installation maintenance personnel at node 2 to disconnect the West receive fiber...

Page 1113: ... optical LBO then connect the fiber to the receiver Verify that the incoming OC 48 alarm and flashing FAULT LED clear after about 1 minute 29 Instruct the installation maintenance personnel at node C to connect the new West transmit fiber point CWT Refer to the example in Figure 6 30 Instruct the installation maintenance personnel at node 3 to measure the received optical power level at the new Ea...

Page 1114: ...e FAULT Switch Line 1W 1E Reset command to reset each node Figure 7 is an example of what the ring should look like after the Protection Switch has been removed NOTE Switching hits will occur on service traffic carried through the fibers to be reset 33 This completes the Merge Two OC 48 Rings procedure Additional new services can now be added between all nodes on this new ring DO ITEMS BELOW IN OR...

Page 1115: ...gs Before Beginning of Merge NID 14 TID R1B DS NE NO B NID 15 TID R1A DS NE NO A NID 13 TID R1C DS NE YES C T R T R E W Ring 1 T R T R E W T R T R E W NID 10 TID R21 DS NE YES 1 NID 12 TID R22 DS NE NO 2 NID 11 TID R23 DS NE NO 3 T R T R E W Ring 2 T R T R W E T R T R W E nc ft2000 005 New Fibers ...

Page 1116: ...TID R1B DS NE NO B NID 15 TID R1A DS NE NO A NID 13 TID R1C DS NE YES C T R T R E W Ring 1 T R T R E W T R T R E W NID 10 TID R21 DS NE YES 1 NID 12 TID R22 DS NE NO 2 NID 11 TID R23 DS NE NO 3 T R T R E W Ring 2 T R T R W E T R T R W E nc ft2000 006 New Fibers Establish Through Cross Connections Establish Through Cross Connections ...

Page 1117: ...E Changed From YES to NO NID 14 TID R1B DS NE NO B NID 15 TID R1A DS NE NO A NID 13 TID R1C DS NE NO C T R T R E W Ring 1 T R T R E W T R T R E W NID 10 TID R21 DS NE YES 1 NID 12 TID R22 DS NE NO 2 NID 11 TID R23 DS NE NO 3 T R T R E W Ring 2 T R T R W E T R T R W E nc ft2000 007 New Fibers ...

Page 1118: ... NID 15 TID R1A DS NE NO A NID 13 TID R1C DS NE NO C T R T R E W Ring 1 T R T R E W T R T R E W NID 10 TID R21 DS NE YES 1 NID 12 TID R22 DS NE NO 2 NID 11 TID R23 DS NE NO 3 T R T R E W Ring 2 T R T R W E T R T R W E nc ft2000 008 New Fibers FAULT Switch Line 1E FAULT Switch Line 1W FAULT Switch Line 1W FAULT Switch Line 1E AER AET CWT CWR 2WT 2WR 3ER 3ET ...

Page 1119: ... NID 15 TID R1A DS NE NO A NID 13 TID R1C DS NE NO C T R T R E W Ring 1 T R T R E W T R T R E W NID 10 TID R21 DS NE YES 1 NID 12 TID R22 DS NE NO 2 NID 11 TID R23 DS NE NO 3 T R T R E W Ring 2 T R T R W E T R T R W E nc ft2000 009 New Fibers FAULT Switch Line 1E FAULT Switch Line 1W FAULT Switch Line 1W FAULT Switch Line 1E AER AET CWT CWR 2WT 2WR 3ER 3ET ...

Page 1120: ...D R1B DS NE NO B NID 15 TID R1A DS NE NO A NID 13 TID R1C DS NE NO C T R T R E W Ring 1 T R T R E W T R T R E W NID 10 TID R21 DS NE YES 1 NID 12 TID R22 DS NE NO 2 NID 11 TID R23 DS NE NO 3 T R T R E W Ring 2 T R T R W E T R T R W E nc ft2000 010 New Fibers FAULT Switch Line 1W FAULT Switch Line 1E AER AET CWT CWR 2WT 2WR 3ER 3ET ...

Page 1121: ...n Switch Removed NID 14 TID R1B DS NE NO B NID 15 TID R1A DS NE NO A NID 13 TID R1C DS NE NO C T R T R E W New Ring T R T R E W T R T R E W NID 10 TID R21 DS NE YES 1 NID 12 TID R22 DS NE NO 2 NID 11 TID R23 DS NE NO 3 T R T R E W T R T R W E T R T R W E nc ft2000 011 New Fibers AER AET CWT CWR 2WT 2WR 3ER 3ET ...

Page 1122: ...NTP 009 Operation 365 575 102 Page 16 of 16 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1123: ...e packs contain one of the following designations ___B5 ___C5 or ___J5 Generally it will be desirable to only replace a B2 with a B5 a C2 with a C5 etc NOTE In order to protect all service only two nodes in the ring can have their optical circuit packs upgraded at any one time NOTE The two nodes being upgraded must have their common span Protection Switched This will cause a hit on services being ...

Page 1124: ...software upgrade is completed and the ring is running R7 x or later software verify that there are no active alarms or status conditions by selecting the FAULT Retrieve Alarms and Status All or by pressing function key F9 Review the Active Alarms and Status Report and clear any conditions before continuing with this procedure TAP 102 7 Identify the two nodes to be upgraded and assign personnel to ...

Page 1125: ...personnel at node _ e g B to replace the 1W transmitter and 1W receiver with the new 5 type optical packs Instruct the personnel at the two subject nodes to install any optical attenuators that may be required As necessary clean and then reconnect the fibers 12 At the two subject nodes and from the CIT enter the command CONFIGURATION Update 13 Verify that the FAIL LEDs on the receivers at the two ...

Page 1126: ...e TAP 102 17 Are there additional nodes to be upgraded If NO then go to Step 19 If YES then continue As necessary assign personnel to the next two nodes to be upgraded e g B and C 18 Repeat steps 7 through 17 replacing site A with B and B with C etc Repeat these steps until all pairs of nodes around the ring have been completed 19 Now STS 1 granular add and drop cross connections can be establishe...

Page 1127: ...stalled Should this assumption be incorrect then refer to Circuit Order NTP 010 and Circuit Order NTP 012 Engineering Considerations a It is not necessary that the two separate FT rings be running the same release of software b However in order for DCC communication to functions between the two FT rings both rings must be running compatible OSI stack releases Specifically both rings must be runnin...

Page 1128: ...ons by selecting the FAULT Retrieve Alarms and Status All or by pressing function key F9 Review the Active Alarms and Status Report and clear any conditions before continuing with this procedure TAP 102 5 For ring 2 verify that there are no active alarms or status conditions by selecting the FAULT Retrieve Alarms and Status All or by pressing function key F9 Review the Active Alarms and Status Rep...

Page 1129: ...power level at the new receive fiber Select and install the correct optical LBO on the receiver then connect the fiber to the LBO Verify that the incoming OC 3 IS 3 OC 12 alarm and flashing FAULT LED clear after about 1 minute NOTE This completes the physical connections Figure 4 depicts what the network should now look like 10 Repeat Steps 2 through 9 for any additional low speed links that are t...

Page 1130: ...g cit expert 15 From the work order identify what cross connections are required for that particular node If so then enter the cross connections DLP 536 16 From the work order determine whether a DCC assignment is required for that particular node If so then enter the assignment DLP 542 17 This completes the procedure to connect two FT rings via OC 3 links DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED FOR DETAIL...

Page 1131: ...ge 5 of 8 Figure 1 Example of Two FT Rings That are to be Connected via a Low Speed Optical Link Ring 1 T R C A B R T T R R T T T R New Fibers R Ring 2 1 2 3 3 R T R T R T R T W E R T R T OC 48 FT 2000 FT 2000 OC 48 OC 3 IS 3 or OC 12 OC 3 IS 3 or OC 12 ...

Page 1132: ...ssue 8 0 July 2002 Figure 2 Example of Connecting First Fiber for LBO Measurement Ring 1 T R C A B R T T R R T T T R New Fibers R Ring 2 1 2 3 R T R T R T R T W E R T R T OC 48 FT 2000 FT 2000 T T R R OC 48 OC 3 IS 3 or OC 12 OC 3 IS 3 or OC 12 ...

Page 1133: ...y 2002 Page 7 of 8 Figure 3 Example of Connecting Second Fiber for LBO Measurement Ring 1 T R C A B R T T R R T T T R New Fibers R Ring 2 1 2 3 R T R T R T R T W E R T R T OC 48 FT 2000 FT 2000 T T R R OC 48 OC 3 IS 3 or OC 12 OC 3 IS 3 or OC 12 ...

Page 1134: ...ly 2002 Figure 4 Example Depicting Two FT Rings Fully Connected via a Low Speed Optical Link Ring 1 T R C A B R T T R R T T T R New Fibers R Ring 2 1 2 3 R T R T R T R T W E R T R T OC 48 FT 2000 FT 2000 T T R R OC 48 OC 3 IS 3 or OC 12 OC 3 IS 3 or OC 12 ...

Page 1135: ...will aid you when you lose visibility during the reset NOTE Because a node reset essentially mines for hardware failures human intervention may be required at the site of a failure NOTE For Release 7 2 and earlier this procedure is recommended to be performed at the DSNE subsequently referred to as the Local Node For TARP software releases any node can be used as the local node NOTE It is recommen...

Page 1136: ...nection All CONFIGURATION Retrieve Equipment All CONFIGURATION Retrieve Map Ring CONFIGURATION Retrieve Synchronization CONFIGURATION Retrieve OC3 CONFIGURATION Retrieve OC12 SECURITY Retrieve Network Element SECURITY Retrieve Security Port All 2 Retire all existing alarms in the ring 3 At the CIT perform the CONFIGURATION Retrieve Map Ring command Print or write down the TIDs in the order in whic...

Page 1137: ...set is completed log in and execute the CONFIGURA TION Retrieve Map Ring command to verify that the current ring map looks identical to the map recorded at the beginning of this procedure Also verify that the data saved in Step 1 is still complete Squelch Map Inconsistent and Circuit Provisioning Error alarms can be cleared by comparing the Current cross connections with the Before cross connectio...

Page 1138: ...Operations NTP 012 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1139: ...ow Incoming OC3 Line RFI Yellow and Incoming OC12 Line RFI Yellow TAP 122 Address Reset in Progress TAP 124 Address TG Warming Up TAP 154 Address TID Address Map Full TAP 170 Address TL 1 Link Failure TAP 106 Address Traffic Squelched TAP 146 Address an Unexplained Loss of Service TAP 166 Address Condition at Remote Repeater Bay Shelf TAP 147 Address Environmental Input Condition TAP 107 Address I...

Page 1140: ...re TAP 119 Clear Inc From OC48 Sync Ref Fail TAP 152 Clear Incoming From OC 48 STS LOP TAP 174 Clear Incoming DCC Failure or Inc From OC48 DCC Failure TAP 120 Clear Incoming OC3 APS Byte Fail or Incoming OC12 APS Byte Fail TAP 160 Clear Incoming OC 48 APS Byte Fail TAP 132 Clear Incoming OC48 APS Default Byte TAP 168 Clear Incoming OC 48 Invalid F Byte TAP 145 Clear LCLAN Failure TAP 175 Clear Mul...

Page 1141: ...ioned But Not Est TAP 173 Clear Alarm When NE ACTY and FE ACTY LEDs Are Off Cannot Log in to a Network Element TAP 136 Clear Automatic Switch Condition TAP 115 Clear DRI Switch TAP 149 Clear Local Trouble When USE CIT LED is Lighted TAP 102 Clear Local Trouble When USE CIT LED is Off TAP 101 Clear NE ACTY and or FE ACTY Regardless of Alarm Level TAP 103 Clear Potential Loss of Service Due to Doubl...

Page 1142: ...IXL 001 Operation and Maintenance 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 FT 2000 MULTIPLEXER ...

Page 1143: ...hnician to obtain help This means that the trouble is of a nature that requires local maintenance engineering or a higher level technical assistance RTAC Assistance The technician must make the decision regarding trouble analysis corrective action and obtaining assistance The technician and the local technical support staff may choose to continue trouble analysis based on their knowledge or experi...

Page 1144: ...lds up within a work area particularly in areas with low relative humidity This static buildup on work surfaces and on personnel and their clothing is produced by the various charging effects of even simple movements and by contact between various objects As a rule the greatest potential for electrostatic damage occurs in areas with the lowest relative humidity But because such damage can occur an...

Page 1145: ...elding is not required unless specified 8 When removing a circuit pack from the shelf immediately put it into a static safe package 9 Try to keep relative humidity above 20 percent 10 FT 2000 network elements are equipped with grounding jacks for connecting the static ground wrist strap The jacks are located on the user panel and on the filter panel 11 Keep the electromagnetic interference EMI ESD...

Page 1146: ...TAD 100 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1147: ...to silence any audible alarms 3 Does the LINE LOCTR display in the user panel show a line 1 or P or a shelf H or L If LINE 1 or P then continue with Step 4 If SHELF H or L then continue with Step 5 4 Depress and hold the ACO LOCTR pushbutton The LINE LOCTR display will indicate the shelf with the failed circuit pack The shelf is associated with an OC 48 line and its direction is visually indicated...

Page 1148: ...g an LNCTL circuit pack starts a mini reset that can take up to 10 minutes to complete During this time LEDs on other circuit packs will be lighted due to software provisioning When a TG3 circuit pack is first inserted it will be switched out of service until it warms up This can take as long as 5 minutes 10 Is the FAULT LED off on the circuit pack just replaced If YES then continue with Step 11 I...

Page 1149: ...ULT Retrieve Alarm and Status All to obtain an Active Alarms and Status Report NOTE The report shown below is an example that shows several entries There may be only one entry in the actual report 3 Record the information in the Source Address and the Description col umns for the topmost entry in the Active Alarms and Status Report Lucent Technologies FT 2000 96 11 19 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve Alarm...

Page 1150: ...it audit suspended TAP 161 circuit provisioning error TAP 162 clock out of range TAP 134 CP reset in progress TAP 151 CP unknown type failure TAP 123 CP unknown type removed TAP 148 CPYPGM IP tid TAP 159 DCC startup in progress TAP 129 DRI auto switch TAP 149 DRI manual switch TAP 149 DS3 INTFC failure TAP 111 DS3 INTFC removed TAP 112 DS3 loopback TAP 114 DS3 path unequipped TAP 156 DS NE not rea...

Page 1151: ... OC48 DCC failure TAP 120 inc from OC48 path RFI yellow TAP 122 inc from OC48 sync ref fail TAP 152 inc from STSX line RFI yellow TAP 122 incoming DCC failure TAP 120 incoming from DSX DS3 LOS TAP 110 incoming from DSX DS3 SD TAP 110 incoming from OC3 STS LOP TAP 110 incoming from OC12 STS LOP TAP 110 incoming OC3 AIS TAP 110 incoming OC12 AIS TAP 110 incoming OC3 APS byte fail TAP 160 incoming OC...

Page 1152: ...m STSX1 EC1 SD TAP 110 incoming from STSX1 line AIS TAP 110 incoming OC 48 AIS TAP 110 incoming OC 48 APS byte fail TAP 132 incoming OC 48 APS default byte TAP 168 incoming OC48 B1 parity error TAP 147 incoming OC 48 invalid F byte TAP 145 incoming OC 48 line RFI yellow TAP 121 incoming OC 48 LOF TAP 110 incoming OC 48 LOS TAP 110 incoming OC 48 LOS LOF TAP 147 incoming OC 48 SD TAP 110 incoming O...

Page 1153: ...4 line manual switch TAP 114 line manual switch at far end TAP 114 line manual switch at near end TAP 114 line switch inhibit TAP 114 line switch inhibit far end TAP 114 line switch inhibit near end TAP 114 line TCA TAP 144 LNCTL failure TAP 111 LNCTL removed TAP 112 logins inhibited TAP 114 LS auto switch TAP 115 LS forced switch TAP 114 LS lockout TAP 114 LS loopback TAP 114 LS manual switch TAP...

Page 1154: ...out at near end TAP 114 OC3 loopback from OC3 TAP 114 OC3 loopback from OC48 TAP 114 OC3 mode conflict equipment TAP 158 OC3 mode conflict slot pair TAP 158 OC3 mode conflict x connect TAP 158 OC12 auto switch at far end TAP 115 OC12 auto switch at near end TAP 115 OC12 forced switch at far end TAP 114 OC12 forced switch at near end TAP 114 OC12 INTFC failure TAP 111 OC12 INTFC removed TAP 112 OC1...

Page 1155: ...nment input TAP 147 repeater bay equipment failure TAP 147 reset in progress TAP 124 ring incomplete open TAP 141 ring startup in progress TAP 142 section TCA TAP 144 site provisioning conflict TAP 130 software download in progress TAP 131 STS1E INTFC failure TAP 111 STS1E INTFC removed TAP 112 STS1 squelch map conflict TAP 164 STS3 squelch map conflict TAP 153 STS1 squelch map inconsistent TAP 16...

Page 1156: ...L code mismatch TAP 126 SYSMEM unrecognizable code TAP 125 test alarm in progress TAP 114 test auto turnup in progress TAP 114 test telemetry in progress TAP 114 TG auto switch TAP 115 TG manual switch TAP 114 TG warming up TAP 154 TG3 failure TAP 111 TG3 removed TAP 112 TID address map full TAP 170 TL 1 link failure TAP 106 TOHCTL failure TAP 111 TOHCTL removed TAP 112 traffic squelched TAP 146 t...

Page 1157: ...e local FT 2000 NE If YES then continue with Step 4 If NO then complete DLP 501 and return to this procedure 4 At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve Network Alarms to obtain a Network Alarms Report Figure 1 shows an example for Release 6 and later other examples for earlier releases are shown in Chapter 11 of this manual NOTE The Network Alarms Report will look like the example in Figure 1 if the local...

Page 1158: ...e Address The Trouble Report should include the text from the Event Description field 8 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE NOTE The Target ID TID of the local NE appears at the top of the CIT screen between the NE name and LOCAL ONLY or LOCAL NOTE Depending on the software release running in the local FT 2000 NE the column in the Network Alarms Report indicating the TID associated with a parti...

Page 1159: ...rocedures refer to the local CIT that it is really logged in to a remote NE and that any corrective action will apply to the remote NE 10 Press the CIT function key F2 labeled REMOTE 11 Referring to the topmost entry in the Network Alarms Report obtained in Step 4 and using the TID log in to the remote NE Reference DLP 524 12 Were you able to log in to the remote NE If YES then continue with Step ...

Page 1160: ...rm level obtained from the report in Step 4 Nice to Know The IXL lists tasks according to alarm level as follows 18 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 19 Issue a Trouble Report to the remote FT 2000 or DDM 2000 NE 20 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 21 Is the NE ACTY LED lighted on the user panel If YES then continue with Step 22 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE NOTE The...

Page 1161: ...3 Is a local CIT available for use If YES then continue with Step 4 If NO then continue with Step 14 NOTE With Release 6 0 or later software an outgoing OC3 DCC failure can be caused by a DCC assignment to an LS INTFC slot that does not contain a good OC3 circuit pack 4 Is Release 6 0 or later software being used If YES then continue with Step 5 If NO then continue with Step 10 5 At the CIT select...

Page 1162: ...8 12 Obtain an Active Alarms and Status Report as follows At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve Alarm then ALL for alarm levels 13 Are any alarm or status conditions indicated on the report If YES then go to TAP 102 If NO then continue with Step 14 14 Make a visual inspection of the outgoing cable s and connection s and cor rect any problem s found Reference DLP 528 15 Was any problem s found with the ...

Page 1163: ...he only possibilities are Incoming protection line failure such as incoming OC 48 AIS incoming OC 48 LOF incoming OC 48 LOS incoming OC 48 SF incoming OC 48 SD RCVR failure or RCVR removed TRMTR failure or TRMTR removed Controller failure or controller removed such as OHCTL failure OHCTL removed LNCTL failure LNCTL removed 2 Did you find only one more than one or none of the associated failures li...

Page 1164: ...tive Alarm and Status Report identified in Step 1 find this failure in Table A of TAP 102 and go to the refer enced TAP 4 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 5 Find the identified failure from Step 1 then locate this condition in Table A of TAP 102 and go to the referenced TAP 6 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1165: ...rms and Status Report show a controller failure LNCTL OHCTL or SYSCTL circuit pack If YES then go to TAP 102 If NO then continue with Step 2 2 Initiate a Trouble Report to the responsible Operations System stating an incoming TL1 link failure has been detected on this network 3 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1166: ...TAP 106 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1167: ...ntation to clear the trouble condition If NO then continue with Step 2 2 Consult and follow the local maintenance procedures to clear the indicated environmental condition This condition may be cleared by something as sim ple as closing a door and completing a contact closure or the resetting of a relay switch thus clearing the condition The environmental condition is exter nal to the FT 2000 netw...

Page 1168: ...TAP 107 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1169: ...ormal condition 4 Did the LED s of interest operate as indicated above If YES then continue with Step 5 If NO then continue with Step 13 NOTE The LED operation appears to be normal NOTE If you are using Release 6 or 7 software and if an Active Alarms and Status Report use FAULT Retrieve Alarms shows OHCTL failure for both 1E and 1W and if neither LED is lighted at the OHCTL circuit packs 1E and 1W...

Page 1170: ...tenance support organization for further technical assistance 12 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 13 Replace the circuit pack user panel or filter panel containing the LED s that did not operate as indicated in Step 4 Reference For Circuit Packs DLP 514 For Panels Drawing ED 6G994 30 E Bay For Panels Drawing ED 7G001 33 D Bay 14 Return to the procedure that sent you here If the same unexpect...

Page 1171: ...ication Signal AIS condition 2 If required by local maintenance procedures initiate a Trouble Report to the remote FT 2000 network element stating that an incoming from OC 48 DS3 AIS condition has been detected on an incoming OC 48 optical line The ref erenced DLP will help you locate or identify the source of the incoming from OC 48 DS3 AIS condition Reference DLP 535 3 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED TH...

Page 1172: ...TAP 109 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1173: ...grade Incoming OC3 AIS alarm indication signal Incoming OC12 AIS alarm indication signal Incoming OC3 LOF loss of frame Incoming OC12 LOF loss of frame Incoming OC3 LOS loss of signal Incoming OC12 LOS loss of signal Incoming OC3 SD signal degrade Incoming OC12 SD signal degrade Incoming OC3 SF signal failure Incoming OC12 SF signal failure Incoming OC12 APS byte fail Incoming from OC12 DCC failur...

Page 1174: ...e FAULT System Reset command after clearing any other alarms first to clear this invalid alarm Refer to the Active Alarms and Status Report FAULT Retrieve Alarm and determine the type of incoming signal failure Is the incoming signal failure an incoming from OC3 STS LOP or incoming from OC12 STS LOP If NO then go to Step 3 If YES then initiate a Trouble Report to the source of the failed incoming ...

Page 1175: ...4 Make a visual inspection of the incoming signal cable s and connection s and correct any problems found Reference DLP 528 If a visual inspection does not reveal any problems you may consider making an optical or electrical measurement per local operating instruc tions Suggestion 1 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 optical lines can be tested by using an optical line meter and or an optical time domain reflectome...

Page 1176: ...is point it appears that the local terminal is operating correctly The trouble is in the line or in the far end terminal Initiate a Trouble Report to the source of the failed incoming signal indicating the type of failure If the source of the failed incoming signal returns a Trouble Report indicating no trouble found then follow the prescribed operating pro cedures to fault isolate the cable fiber...

Page 1177: ... be avoided for DS3 STS1E OC3 IS3 OC12 TRMTR RCVR or TG3 circuit packs by following this instruction After a replacement circuit pack has been inserted the FAULT LED should go out within 35 seconds If the FAULT LED remains lighted after the 35 seconds immediately remove the replacement circuit pack before 110 seconds elapses 1 From a failure condition above identify the appropriate shelf using Tab...

Page 1178: ...C command and obtain a State Report on the circuit pack being replaced 6 From the report is the low speed slot circuit pack to be removed in a standby state If YES then continue with Step 8 If NO then continue with Step 7 7 At the CIT select FAULT Switch Low Speed Slot command for the circuit pack being removed and execute Use the FAULT Retrieve State LS INTFC command to verify if desired 8 Verify...

Page 1179: ... circuit pack requires multimode fiber for proper performance monitoring operation 13 Obtain a replacement circuit pack with the same or a higher series number and install it in place of the circuit pack with the lighted FAULT LED As required make the appropriate optical connections on the OC3 IS3 OC12 RCVR TRMTR or REGENR circuit pack s Reference DLP 514 14 Wait for the time indicated in Table B ...

Page 1180: ...ynchronization and obtain a Synchronization Report 19 From the report is the associated TG3 1 TG3 2 Clock Range Status at or near 110 percent or 110 percent If YES then issue a trouble report stating an out of range external timing reference If NO then go to TAP 116 20 Replace the shelf cover Reference DLP 511 21 Is the NE ACTY LED lighted at the user panel If YES then go to Trouble Clearing IXL 0...

Page 1181: ...removed LSSW removed TG3 removed OC3 INTFC removed TOHCTL removed OC12 INTFC removed OHCTL removed TRMTR removed RCVR removed 1 Identify the appropriate shelf associated with the removed circuit pack using Table A 2 Remove the appropriate shelf cover Reference DLP 511 Table A Shelf and Associated Circuit Packs Removed Circuit Pack Shelf DS3 LSSW Low Speed Shelf Complementary OC3 or STS1E Low Speed...

Page 1182: ...ections on the OC3 RCVR TRMTR or REGENR circuit pack s Reference DLP 514 9 Wait for the time indicated in Table B Inserting an LNCTL circuit pack starts a mini reset that can take up to 10 minutes to complete During this time LEDs on other circuit packs will be lighted When a TG3 circuit pack is first inserted it will be switched out of service until it warms up This can take as long as 5 minutes ...

Page 1183: ...ring TAP 112 Issue 8 0 July 2002 Page 3 of 4 11 Replace shelf cover Reference DLP 511 12 Is the NE ACTY LED lighted at the user panel If YES then go to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1184: ...TAP 112 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1185: ...NCTL circuit pack 2 NOTE Begin with the replacement of the SYSMEM circuit pack even though the SYSCTL circuit pack FAULT LED may be lighted Remove the SYSMEM circuit pack and install a replacement circuit pack that has the same software release and the same or a higher series number For example an LAA25 with series number S1 2 is the same series number as S1 4 The 2 and 4 refer to minor changes wi...

Page 1186: ...n an Active Alarm and Status Report 11 Does the SYSCTL failure or SYSMEM failure appear under the Description column of the report If YES then continue with Step 12 If NO then go to Step 17 12 Reinstall the SYSMEM circuit pack that was removed in Step 2 NOTE For circuit pack and software compatibility refer to Table 7 1 in Section 7 Circuit Pack Description 13 Remove the SYSCTL circuit pack and in...

Page 1187: ...d the corrupted cross connect data will overwrite the actual cross connections in the High Speed Optical circuit packs 1 Remove all circuit packs from the out of service spare bay 2 Remove the good SYSMEM circuit pack from the in service bay and insert it into the spare bay 3 Remove the good SYSCTL circuit pack from the in service bay and insert it into the spare bay 4 Insert a LNCTL in the spare ...

Page 1188: ...TAP 113 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1189: ...ode equipment conflict line manual switch at far end sync mode forced switch line manual switch at near end sync reference forced switch line switch inhibit sync reference lockout line switch inhibit far end sync reference manual switch line switch inhibit near end TG manual switch logins inhibited test alarm in progress LS forced switch test auto turnup in progress LS lockout test telemetry in pr...

Page 1190: ...ice alarms FAULT Allow Alarm All inhibit alarms parallel telem inhibit alarms X 25 line forced switch FAULT Switch Line All Reset line forced switch at far end line forced switch at near end line lockout line lockout at far end line lockout at near end line manual switch line manual switch at far end line manual switch at near end line switch inhibit line switch inhibit far end line switch inhibit...

Page 1191: ...oopback from OC3 OC12 loopback from OC48 OC3 loopback from OC48 sync mode equipment conflict CONFIGURATION Set OC48 Sync Messages Disabled sync mode forced switch FAULT Switch Synchronization type of switch Reset sync reference forced switch sync reference lockout sync reference manual switch TG manual switch test alarm in progress Wait for the test to complete test auto turnup in progress test te...

Page 1192: ...TAP 114 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1193: ...reference auto switch then continue with Step 14 If line auto switch then continue with Step 17 If OC3 auto switch at near end then continue with Step 29 If OC3 auto switch at far end then continue with Step 29 If OC12 auto switch at near end then continue with Step 29 If OC12 auto switch at far end then continue with Step 29 TG Auto Switch Condition 2 Is there one or more other conditions with th...

Page 1194: ...hown in the Description column of the Active Alarms and Status Report If YES then continue with Step 9 If NO then continue with Step 11 9 Identify the topmost other condition in the report with the same TG Source Address Find this condition in Table A of TAP 102 and go to the referenced TAP 10 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 11 Wait for the provisioned Wait To Restore interval to expire or ...

Page 1195: ...of TAP 102 and go to the referenced TAP 16 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE Line Auto Switch Condition NOTE The failure to be cleared is a line auto switch condition 17 Is there one or more other conditions with the same line Source Address in the report NOTE Conditions are shown in the Description column of the Active Alarms and Status Report If YES then continue with Step 18 If NO then con...

Page 1196: ... 2000 End Terminal in a point to point network 20 From office records determine which network element is at the other end of the switched line NOTE You may not be able to login to the other network element If you cannot login to that network element you will need assistance there to continue with this procedure 21 At the network element identified in Step 20 use a CIT to obtain an Active Alarms an...

Page 1197: ... PROCEDURE NOTE A line switch will remain in effect for a provisioned interval the Wait To Restore interval after the cause of the switch is cleared You can use the CONFIGURATION Retrieve Protection Line command to determine the provisioned value of the Wait To Restore interval 26 Wait for the provisioned Wait To Restore interval to expire or until the NE ACTY LED goes off whichever comes first 27...

Page 1198: ...e asked whether there are any alarm or status conditions listed and the only condition shown in the report is OC3 OC12 auto switch at near end and or OC3 OC12 auto switch at far end the answer is NO NOTE After clearing the other condition identified in Step 29 continue the trouble clearing procedure using TAP 102 at the network element that initially reported the OC3 OC12 auto switch at near end a...

Page 1199: ...erved at this network element If so you MUST ignore the OC3 OC12 auto switch at near end and or OC3 OC12 auto switch at far end condition in the Active Alarms and Status Report 37 Referring to the report obtained in Step 36 are there any conditions other than OC3 OC12 auto switch at near end and or OC3 OC12 auto switch at far end listed If YES then continue with Step 38 If NO then continue with St...

Page 1200: ...rocedure 40 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE NOTE An OC3 OC12 auto switch will remain in effect for a provisioned interval the Wait To Restore interval after the cause of the switch is cleared You can use the CONFIGURATION Retrieve Protection Low Speed command to determine the provisioned value of the Wait To Restore interval 41 Wait for the provisioned Wait To Restore interval to expire or ...

Page 1201: ...ck that caused the crash and wait for the bay to recover Then install a different version of the replacement circuit pack and then reseat the LNCTL circuit pack Do not reinstall the pack that caused the crash into an in service system Return it for repair NOTE A series number S1 2 is the same series number as S1 4 The 2 and 4 refer to minor changes within series 1 NOTE In this procedure the circui...

Page 1202: ...al replacement circuit pack If YES then go TAP 108 If NO then continue with Step 14 6 Find the original circuit pack in the first column of Table A Table A Circuit Pack Replacements Original Alternative Replacement Circuit Pack Order Circuit Pack 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DS3 LNCTL SYSCTL SYSMEM TRMTR RCVR DS3 LAA14 OW LAA14 OW LNCTL SYSCTL SYSMEM TRMTR RCVR TG3 DS3 STS1E LSSW LSSW LNCTL SYSCTL SYSMEM TRMTR R...

Page 1203: ... Steps 6 through 11 for each remaining alternative replacement circuit pack type until either 1 the FAULT LED on the original replacement circuit pack is off or 2 all the alternative replacement circuit pack types have been tried Then continue with Step 13 13 Is the FAULT LED lighted on the original replacement circuit pack If YES then go to TAP 108 If NO then continue with Step 14 NOTE The remain...

Page 1204: ...TAP 116 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1205: ...he FT 2000 to operate in a synchronization holdover mode for an excessive amount of time 1 Refer to the Description column of an Active Alarms and Status Report and find another condition not excessive holdover affecting synchronization in the FT 2000 2 Find this second condition identified in Step 1 in Table A of TAP 102 and go to the referenced TAP 3 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1206: ...TAP 117 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1207: ...p after repeated attempts to reset then continue with Step 9 3 Reset the tripped circuit breaker s 4 Is the POWER ON LED lighted on the fan assembly If YES then continue with Step 5 If NO then continue with Step 9 5 Is the ALM LED lighted on the fan assembly If YES then continue with Step 9 If NO then continue with Step 6 6 Press and hold in the ALM TST pushbutton switch for 20 seconds checks the ...

Page 1208: ... 1 and 2 Installation Manual or 365 575 115 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave Sys tem Releases 3 4 5 6 and 7 Installation Manual For D Bay refer to DLP 546 Replace Defective Fan Unit in D Bay 10 Test the new fan assembly Reference DLP 513 11 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1209: ...t to be replaced see the Related Documentation Training part in the About This Document section For example the E Bay user panel ED 6G994 30 G1 is found on drawing ED 6G999 30 Another helpful source is 365 575 115 FT 2000 OC 48 Light wave System Releases 3 4 5 6 and 7 Installation Manual and 365 575 104 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Releases 1 and 2 Installa tion Manual Shelf Trouble Clearing Sug...

Page 1210: ...TAP 119 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1211: ...ier 1 At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve Alarms and Status to obtain the Active Alarms and Status Report 2 Referring to the report obtained in Step 1 are there any conditions other than inc from OC48 DCC failure or incoming DCC failure listed If YES then continue with Step 3 If NO then continue with Step 6 3 Referring to the report obtained in Step 1 identify the topmost condition other than the inc...

Page 1212: ...ction 7 At the source of the failed DCC input use the CIT to obtain an Active Alarms and Status Report NOTE You may not be able to log in to the network element sending the failed DCC input If you cannot log in to that network element you will need assistance there to continue with this procedure 8 Referring to the report obtained in Step 7 are there any conditions other than inc from OC48 DCC fai...

Page 1213: ...or the line associated with the failed DCC output Reference DLP 514 NOTE The inc from OC48 DCC failure or the incoming DCC failure is possibly due to a silent failure of the OHCTL circuit pack at the network element sending the failed DCC input or at the network element detecting it 13 Wait 5 minutes for the OHCTL circuit pack to reboot 14 Is the inc from OC48 DCC failure or the incoming DCC failu...

Page 1214: ...TAP 120 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 19 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1215: ... incoming OC 48 line RFI yellow incoming DCC failure extra traffic preempted and or line auto switch listed NOTE An incoming DCC failure line auto switch and or extra traffic preempted condition s may also accompany the line FERF or incoming OC 48 line RFI yellow condition If YES then continue with Step 3 If NO then continue with Step 5 3 Referring to the report obtained in Step 1 identify the top...

Page 1216: ... is the line FERF or incoming OC 48 line RFI yellow condition still listed If YES then initiate a Trouble Report to the remote FT 2000 network ele ment the source of the line FERF condition indicating the line FERF condition If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 8 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1217: ...e is not in the local FT 2000 network element path AIS path yellow incoming from OC3 STS LOP incoming from OC12 STS LOP incoming from OC 48 DS3 LOF inc from STSX line RFI yellow inc from OC48 path RFI yellow incoming OC3 line RFI yellow incoming OC12 line RFI yellow incoming OC12 LOF incoming OC12 SF incoming OC12 SD incoming OC12 AIS incoming OC12 APS byte fail 2 Obtain an Active Alarms and Statu...

Page 1218: ...TAP 122 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1219: ...E The circuit pack in the indicated slot has failed but its type is unknown to the software The type or code appears on the circuit pack faceplate 2 Consult office records to determine the type of circuit pack to be installed in the slot NOTE Section 3 Platform Descriptions lists the circuit pack codes that are supported by the slot for a particular shelf Also listed is the compatible software for...

Page 1220: ...e 8 0 July 2002 5 Did the FAULT LED on the replacement circuit pack go off If YES then continue with Step 6 If NO then go to TAP 116 6 Is the NE ACTY LED lighted If YES then go to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1221: ...before proceeding with Step 2 If NO then continue with Step 5 2 At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve Alarm to obtain an updated Active Alarm and Status Report 3 Is reset in progress still reported If YES then continue with Step 4 If NO then continue with Step 7 4 Wait 10 minutes or until the MJ LED is off at the user panel 5 At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve Alarm to obtain updated Active Alarm and Sta...

Page 1222: ...TAP 124 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1223: ...s software release is now running in the SYSCTL circuit pack 3 Do you want to download new software or replace the SYSMEM circuit pack To download new software go to OPERATION NTP 002 To replace the SYSMEM circuit pack continue with Step 4 4 Remove the shelf cover from the Low Speed Shelf System Controller or from the FT 2000 repeater bay shelf 5 Is the FAULT LED flashing at the SYSMEM circuit pac...

Page 1224: ...e identified in Step 2 Reference DLP 514 12 Is the FAULT LED flashing on the SYSMEM circuit pack If YES then go to TAP 102 If NO then continue with Step 15 13 Reinstall the original SYSMEM circuit pack Reference DLP 514 14 Install new software same release as currently running in the SYSCTL circuit pack Reference Operation NTP 002 15 Replace the shelf cover Reference DLP 511 16 Is the NE ACTY LED ...

Page 1225: ...URATION Retrieve Equipment and sysctl to obtain an Equipage and Version Report 2 Refer to the report and record the software release information from the line immediately under the sysctl entry for example FT 2000 RELEASE 2 1 0 This software release is now running in the SYSCTL circuit pack 3 Refer to the report and record the software release information from the line immediately under the sysmem...

Page 1226: ... SYSMEM circuit pack that is running in the FT 2000 network element 8 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 9 At the CIT select FAULT Reset and execute During the reset time the mis cellaneous discrete control points will be deactivated 10 Wait 10 minutes or until the MJ LED is off at the user panel 11 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1227: ...0 or higher soft ware If Release 2 1 or lower software then continue with Step 2 If Release 3 0 or higher software then continue with Step 10 2 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Equipment All to obtain an Equipage and Version Report 3 Determine exactly what type of circuit pack is supposed to be in that slot and its address slot shelf and line 4 Obtain a replacement circuit pack based on th...

Page 1228: ...GURATION Retrieve Equipment All to obtain the Equipment Report 11 Determine from office records the correct circuit pack type for the slot in ques tion 12 Compare the Equipment Report with the office records and determine which indicates the correct circuit pack type 13 Is the correct circuit pack type actually plugged into the slot If YES then continue with Step 14 If NO then continue with Step 1...

Page 1229: ... Some keys on the keyboard may be locked up inoperative 3 Wait 1 minute or until the PC prompt typically C is displayed 4 Are the keys on the keyboard operative If YES then continue with Step 7 If NO then continue with Step 5 5 Perform a hard boot on the PC by pressing the RESET switch or by turning the power switch off and then back on 6 Did the PC reboot C is displayed If YES then continue with ...

Page 1230: ...e low speed and attempting to login A null modem which is described in co ntp002 is required between this port and the CIT PC b Have someone remote login to the bay and verify the CIT port settings with the command SECURITY Retrieve Security Port For front access using the CIT DCE port the port must be enabled and the port type must be CIT c From the CIT program connected to the CIT DCE port use t...

Page 1231: ...s interaction between the FT 2000 network elements takes from 5 to 7 minutes 1 Wait 7 minutes or until the NE ACTY LED goes off 2 Did the DCC startup in progress condition clear If YES then continue with Step 3 If NO then go to TAP 108 3 Is the NE ACTY LED lighted If YES then go to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1232: ...TAP 129 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1233: ...lement and execute to change the Site 0 parameter to the correct value 5 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 6 Check the OC 48 optical connections to the adjacent nodes in both directions to verify that the East West TRMTR here is connected to the West East RCVR there and that the East West RCVR here is connected to the West East TRMTR there Rearrange any incorrect connections NOTE A likely cau...

Page 1234: ...TAP 130 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1235: ...download can take as long as 2 hours at 9600 baud less time at the higher baud rate of 19 200 or 38 400 1 Wait for the download to be completed 2 Did the software download in progress condition clear If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then refer the trouble to the people doing the software download ...

Page 1236: ...TAP 131 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1237: ...S channel failure on the protection line 1 At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve Alarm to obtain an Active Alarms and Sta tus Report 2 Is the incoming OC 48 SD condition shown on the report for the protection line If YES then go to TAP 110 If NO then continue with Step 3 3 Is the APS channel failure condition shown on the report for the protection line If YES then go to TAP 105 If NO then go to TAP 108...

Page 1238: ...TAP 132 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1239: ...t values will be lost Current values were provisioned with the Set command 1 Obtain a replacement SYSMEM circuit pack having the same or a higher series number 2 Install the replacement SYSMEM circuit pack Reference DLP 514 3 Wait 10 minutes or until the MJ LED goes off 4 Is the NE ACTY LED off If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then go to TAP 103 ...

Page 1240: ...TAP 133 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1241: ...n the report If YES then find this second associated condition identified below in Table A of TAP 102 and go to the referenced TAP If NO then continue with Step 3 3 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Synchronization to obtain a report 4 From the Synchronization Report Step 3 record the values of the TG1 Clock Range Status and TG2 Clock Range Status parameters 5 Refer to local operating proce...

Page 1242: ...TAP 134 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1243: ...P 102 and go to the referenced TAP If NO then continue with Step 3 NOTE This condition by itself does not indicate a failure with the FT 2000 network element NOTE At an FT 2000 end terminal and at the CIT select PERFORMANCE Retrieve PM Optics to obtain a report that shows the transmit power receive power and the laser bias current with respect to time NOTE OC 48 optical lines can be tested by usin...

Page 1244: ...TAP 135 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1245: ...then continue with Step 3 If NO then complete DLP 501 and return to this procedure NOTE It is unlikely that the CIT will be able to communicate with the network element under these conditions 3 At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve Alarm to try to obtain an Active Alarms and Status Report 4 Are you able to communicate with the network element obtained an Active Alarms and Status Report If YES then cont...

Page 1246: ...onditions exist a The NE ACTY and or FE ACTY LED are lighted b The office alarm s is off If YES then continue with Step 19 If NO then continue with Step 12 12 Reinstall the original SYSMEM circuit pack removed in Step 9 Reference DLP 514 13 Remove the SYSCTL circuit pack and install a replacement circuit pack having the same or a higher series number For example a series number S1 2 is the same se...

Page 1247: ...SMEM shown under the sysmem entry in the report and the software version running in the network element shown under the sysctl entry in the report with office records If office records are not available log in remotely to another network element and obtain a report to determine what software version is running in the network 22 Is the correct software version stored in the SYSMEM and running in th...

Page 1248: ...proceed to Step 28 If the cross connections are corrupt they must be corrected Reference DLP 536 28 Insert the LNCTL circuit pack This will cause a reset of the OHCTL packs the TOHCTL pack and all transmission packs 29 If there is a stuck Circuit Audit Suspended alarm reset the bay by executing FAULT Reset 30 Is the NE ACTY LED off If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then go t...

Page 1249: ...hich node is designated the Directory Server DS NE in the ring network 5 NOTE When the ring network is in this state you will probably not be able to establish remote login to one or more of the other nodes If a remote login is possible and if you need additional help refer to DLP 524 Otherwise local CIT assistance will be required at those nodes Ask for assistance at the DS NE location or travel ...

Page 1250: ... select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Map Ring If you are using Release 3 or 4 0 software you must log in to each node in the ring network to verify the yes or no DS NE parameter value at the CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Network Element 7 Log off from the network element 8 Wait 5 minutes for the ring diagnostics to stabilize After this time the DS NE not reachable condition should be cleared 9 STOP ...

Page 1251: ... the ring network 1 Determine from office records the correct NID or TID for the network elements showing the duplicate values 2 Log in to the network element that is in error If a remote login is required and you need additional help refer to DLP 524 3 At the CIT select SECURITY Set Network Element and enter the correct NID release 5 and earlier or TID for that network element 4 Log off from the ...

Page 1252: ...TAP 138 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1253: ...ECURITY Set Network Element and provision the Directory Server parameter to No NOTE When the network is in this state you will probably not be able to establish remote login to one or more of the other nodes If a remote login is possible and if you need additional help refer to DLP 524 Otherwise local CIT assistance will be required at those nodes 3 Ask for assistance at the next node on the repor...

Page 1254: ...DS NE Nice to Know If you are using Release 6 or later software you can verify that only one node is provisioned as the DS NE by obtaining a Network Map Report at the CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Map Network If you are using Release 4 1 or 5 software you can verify that only one node is provisioned as the DS NE by obtaining a Ring Map Report at the CIT select CONFIGURA TION Retrieve Map Ring ...

Page 1255: ...en STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then continue with Step 4 NOTE The node ID conflict alarm may have occured during node addition deletion if the procedure in this manual was not followed properly or it may have occured after an isolated node was restored 4 Try removing and reconnecting the OC 48 fibers associated with the line direction shown in the CIT Active Alarms and Status Repo...

Page 1256: ...TAP 140 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1257: ...ion exists 3 Consult office records to determine the Target Identifiers TIDs of the other nodes in the ring 4 Establish a remote login to any one of the other network elements identified in Step 3 If you need help with the remote login refer to DLP 524 5 At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve Alarms to obtain an Active Alarms and Status Report for that network element 6 Does a controller circuit pack SY...

Page 1258: ...AP 141 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 9 Consult the appropriate maintenance support organization for further techni cal assistance 10 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1259: ...ransient condition 1 Wait 5 minutes or until the NE ACTY LED on the user panel goes off 2 At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve Alarms to obtain an Active Alarms and Status Report 3 Has the ring startup in progress condition cleared If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then go to TAP 108 to clear the unexpected response ...

Page 1260: ...TAP 142 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1261: ...g to the report obtained in Step 1 are there any conditions other than extra traffic preempted listed If YES then continue with Step 3 If NO then initiate a Trouble Report to the remote FT 2000 network element or source of failure stating the extra traffic preempted condi tion 3 Is the line auto switch condition reported If YES then go to TAP 115 to clear this condition that was caused by an autom...

Page 1262: ...TAP 143 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1263: ...rms and Status Report 2 Referring to the report obtained in Step 1 are there any conditions other than path TCA section TCA or line TCA listed If YES then continue with Step 3 If NO then consult and follow local operating procedures for further guid ance in addressing this condition 3 Referring to the report obtained in Step 1 identify the topmost condition other than the path TCA section TCA or l...

Page 1264: ...TAP 144 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1265: ...dition is normal during this automatic slot provisioning This condition is normally cleared by correcting the associated condition s that caused the incoming OC 48 invalid F byte condition 4 Wait 5 minutes for the condition to clear 5 At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve Alarms and Status to obtain the Active Alarms and Status Report 6 Referring to the report obtained in Step 5 are there any condition...

Page 1266: ...in a Network Alarms Report 12 Establish a remote login to the network element appearing at the topmost posi tion in the Network Alarms Report If a remote login is required and you need additional help refer to DLP 524 13 At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve Alarms to obtain an Active Alarms and Status Report for that network element 14 Repeat Steps 5 through 10 and 12 and 13 for each of the remaining ...

Page 1267: ...lched condition 1 At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve Alarms and Status to obtain the Active Alarms and Status Report 2 Referring to the report obtained in Step 1 are there any conditions other than traffic squelched listed If YES then continue with Step 3 If NO then initiate a Trouble Report to the remote FT 2000 network ele ment or source of failure stating the traffic squelched condition 3 Referri...

Page 1268: ...TAP 146 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1269: ...environment input Incoming OC48 LOS LOFrepeater bay equipment failure NOTE The condition to be cleared is at a remote FT 2000 Repeater Bay Shelf 1 Referring to the Active Alarms and Status Report on the CIT screen note and record the Source Address for the condition that sent you to this procedure the topmost condition in the report 2 Issue a Trouble Report to the FT 2000 Repeater Bay Shelf locati...

Page 1270: ...TAP 147 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1271: ...cated slot empty If YES then continue with Step 4 If NO then go to TAP 108 4 Do office records show that the slot should contain a circuit pack If YES then continue with Step 8 If NO then continue with Step 5 5 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Update records the current hardware arrangement in SYSMEM circuit pack Table A Source Addresses and Associated Shelves Source Associated Address Shelf ls Low...

Page 1272: ...er circuit packs will be lighted When a TG3 circuit pack is first inserted it will be switched out of service until it warms up This can take as long as 5 minutes You can confirm that it is in the standby state by using the FAULT Retrieve State command for the TG slot 10 Is the FAULT LED lighted on the replacement circuit pack If YES then replace shelf cover and go to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 If N...

Page 1273: ...with the same STS3 or STS1 tributary Source Address Find this condition in Table A of TAP 102 and go to the referenced TAP 4 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE NOTE If the system is running R7 0 x or earlier software the automatic DRI switch was caused by an incoming loss of signal condition on the associated low speed input The loss of signal condition is no longer active The nonrevertive aut...

Page 1274: ...itch still exist If YES then continue with Step 9 If NO then continue with Step 10 9 Referring to the Active Alarms and Status Report on the CIT screen are any conditions indicated other than the DRI manual switch If YES then go to TAP 102 to clear the remaining condition s ignoring the DRI manual switch condition If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 10 At the CIT select the FAULT Swi...

Page 1275: ...ection Switching Provisioning Report and note the entries in the report for Configuration and Directional 3 Do the values of Configuration and Directional recorded in Step 2 match those from the office records If YES then continue with Step 7 If NO then continue with Step 4 4 At the CIT select the CONFIGURATION Set Protection Line command to provision the correct values for Configuration and or Di...

Page 1276: ...2002 7 Issue a Trouble Report to the network element at the other end of the line indi cating the APS provisioning conflict condition and the provisioned Configu ration and Directional values recorded at this end of the line 8 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1277: ...d is used to change the value of the DS NE parameter 1 Find the circuit pack with the CP reset in progress condition in Table A and wait for the indicated time 2 At the CIT select the FAULT Retrieve Alarm and execute to obtain another Active Alarms and Status Report 3 Is the CP reset in progress condition still indicated for the same circuit pack If YES then go to TAP 108 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE ...

Page 1278: ...TAP 151 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1279: ...uit pack from receiving a good synchronization reference signal from the associated RCVR circuit pack 1 Does an incoming OC 48 LOS RCVR failure or RVCR removed condi tion also appear in the Active Alarms and Status Report on the CIT screen If YES then find that condition in Table A of TAP 102 and go to the indi cated Trouble Clearing procedure If NO then go to TAP 108 2 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THI...

Page 1280: ...TAP 152 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1281: ...ndition could have been caused when the network was being upgraded from Release 3 or 4 to Release 4 1 or later The pre upgrade cross connections had nonexistent NIDs with their Source Destination A possible cause is the user entered a nonexistent TID while executing the CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnect STS3 or STS1 or the CONFIGURATION Enter Roll STS3 or STS1 command A node was deleted from the ri...

Page 1282: ...some cross connection from a node that has been deleted If YES then continue with Step 9 If NO then continue with Step 13 9 Consult office records and verify that the cross connection is no longer needed 10 Identify the nodes with the incorrect cross connections and log in to the nodes one at a time 11 At the CIT select the CONFIGURATION Delete Crossconnection STS3 or STS1 command and execute to d...

Page 1283: ...before it is switched into service This warming up process takes as long as 5 minutes 1 Wait 5 minutes or until the NE ACTY LED on the local FT 2000 user panel goes off whichever comes first 2 At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve Alarm and execute to obtain another Active Alarms and Status Report 3 Is the TG warming up condition still active for the same circuit pack If YES then go to TAP 108 If NO th...

Page 1284: ...TAP 154 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1285: ... then complete DLP 501 and DLP 521 and return to this procedure NOTE Throughout this procedure the FT 2000 network element to which you are now connected will be called the local network element 2 At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve Network Alarms to obtain a Network Alarms Report Figure 1 shows an example for Release 6 other examples for earlier releases are shown in Chapter 11 of this manual 3 Are ...

Page 1286: ... topmost entry in the Network Alarms Report obtained in Step 2 issue a Trouble Report about the FT 2000 Repeater Bay Shelf location with the indicated Source Address The Trouble Report should include the text from the Event Description field 8 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE NOTE The Target ID TID of the local FT 2000 network element appears at the top of the CIT screen between the software...

Page 1287: ...e circuit packs and you can not do these things either At some point in this procedure you will likely require assistance at the FT 2000 network element in question NOTE When the procedure asks if the NE ACTY LED is lighted you can use the CIT to select FAULT Retrieve Alarm and Status to obtain an Active Alarms and Status Report If there are one or more entries in the report you can assume that NE...

Page 1288: ...Software Refer to Chapter 11 for Examples of Earlier Software Releases CRITICAL Lucent Technologies FT 2000 3 0 0 ADR Delta 1 LOCAL Delta 1 93 01 19 23 15 15 EST M Retrieve Network Alarms COMPLD Network Alarms Report System Date Time TID Product Local Alarm Type Ring MN 01 19 21 18 47 Delta 2 FT 2000 Yes MN 01 19 21 18 27 Delta 3 FT 2000 Yes MN 01 19 21 20 57 Echo 1 DDM 2000 No ...

Page 1289: ... DS3 port is cross connected 4 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Map Ring to obtain a Ring Map Report 5 Referring to the Ring Map Report note and record the TID of the next network element in the affected path The network element terminating line 1E is the second entry in the report The network element terminating line 1W is the bottom entry in the report NOTE If you are already remotely co...

Page 1290: ...LS INTFC slot identified in Step 10 If a DS3 CP then continue with Step 12 If an STS1E or OC3 CP then continue with Step 14 If no CP then continue with Step 16 NOTE There is no apparent reason for the DS3 path unequipped condition 12 Go to TAP 108 to clear the incorrect response 13 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE NOTE The DS3 path does not originate within the FT 2000 ring network 14 Issue ...

Page 1291: ... to one or more missing cross connections including one at this network element The condition can be cleared by entering the missing cross connection s or by deleting all of the cross connections associated with the path at all of the associated nodes 18 Referring to office records enter the missing cross connection s or delete all of the cross connections associated with the path at all of the as...

Page 1292: ...TAP 156 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1293: ...ure FT LBA 1EW failure FT LBA 1WE failure 1 Are you responsible for maintaining the FT LBA If YES then continue with Step 2 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 2 Clear the FT LBA trouble condition s by using the FT LBA user documentation 365 565 500 3 To verify that the trouble condition has been cleared select FAULT Retrieve Alarm at the CIT to obtain an Active Alarms and Status Rep...

Page 1294: ...TAP 157 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1295: ...LS INTFC slot to have an Operating Mode of 1 1 both the A slot and the B slot of the slot pair must be equipped with OC3 OC12 circuit packs 2 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Equipment LS INTFC to obtain an Equipage and Version Report 3 Use the first and second columns in the report to locate the slot with no circuit pack installed or the wrong type of circuit pack DS3 or STS 1E installed ...

Page 1296: ...RE 10 For an LS INTFC slot to have an Operating Mode of 1 1 the two slots A and B cannot be cross connected to different tributaries in the applicable direction of transmission Depending upon the release you are using at the CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Crossconnection All to obtain a Cross Connection Map Report 11 Use the Cross Connection column in the report to locate the invalid cross conn...

Page 1297: ...s can occur simultaneously See the Software Release Description Known Problems section for limitations on simultaneous downloads with some software releases The first known limitation was with Release 7 The limit is 8 simultaneous copies NOTE You cannot cancel the background download once it is initiated 1 If desired you may perform other CIT PC activities during this time for exam ple checking th...

Page 1298: ...TAP 159 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1299: ...d to obtain an Active Alarms and Status Report NOTE The specific condition is found in the Description column of the report 2 Is there one or more other conditions in the report If YES then continue with Step 3 If NO then issue a Trouble Report to the opposite end of the OC 3 line stating that you are receiving an incoming OC3 APS byte fail or incoming OC12 APS byte fail condition 3 Identify the t...

Page 1300: ...TAP 160 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1301: ...then continue with Step 2 2 Are you performing an auto turnup test toward the DSX STSX1 or LGX If YES then reset the network element use the FAULT Reset com mand STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then continue with Step 3 3 At the CIT select the CONFIGURATION Retrieve Map Ring command to obtain a Ring Map Report NOTE It may take up to 5 minutes from the time that the cause of circuit au...

Page 1302: ...DCC failure condition appear in the Description col umn of the report If YES then go to TAP 120 referenced from TAP 102 If NO then go to TAP 102 to clear any other condition s in the report except for the circuit audit suspended condition 9 If all previous steps have failed to clear the circuit audit suspended condition at the CIT select FAULT Reset and execute During the reset time the miscellane...

Page 1303: ...he CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Timeslot STS3 or STS1 command for the tributary identified in Step 2 and execute to obtain an STS 3 or STS 1 Tributary Map Report An example of this report with a description of the output parameters is provided in Section 11 of this manual 4 From the report obtained in Step 3 identify the actual source and destination nodes in the report Hint 1 For a 1 way cro...

Page 1304: ...l help refer to DLP 524 9 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnection STS3 or STS1 command to correct the problem invalid source destination provision ing 10 If remotely logged in to the node network element log out 11 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 12 Log in to the node with the missing cross connection If a remote login is required and you need additional help refer to DLP 524 ...

Page 1305: ...obtain an STS 3 or STS 1 Circuit Map Report An example of this report with a description of the output parameters is provided in Section 11 of this manual 3 Compare this report with office records to locate the node with the missing cross connection s A missing cross connection is indicated in the report by a question mark in the Cross Connect column 4 Log in to the node with the missing cross con...

Page 1306: ...TAP 163 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1307: ... TroubleClearing Issue 8 0 July 2002 Page 1 of 2 TAP 164 Clear STS1 Squelch Map Conflict NOTE The TAP 164 steps were removed from this document because TAP 153 includes steps to clear an STS1 squelch map conflict ...

Page 1308: ...TAP 164 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1309: ... execute to obtain an STS 3 or STS 1 Circuit Map Report The report lists all the cross connections that make up this cir cuit An example of this report with a description of the output parameters is provided in Section 11 of this manual 3 From the report obtained in Step 2 identify the tributary of the circuit 4 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Timeslot STS3 or STS1 command for the tributa...

Page 1310: ...ion TID listed in the TID column on the right side 7 Compare the actual TID obtained in Step 4 with the provisioned TID obtained in Step 6 and identify any inconsistencies between the actual and provisioned node TIDs 8 Log in to the node with the TID inconsistency If a remote login is required and you need additional help refer to DLP 524 9 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnection STS...

Page 1311: ... with the work order which is normally done at time of installation acceptance NOTE For Release 5 and later an incorrect provisioned source and or destination node TID is automatically indicated by a site provisioning conflict condition and is documented in TAP 130 1 At the CIT select the CONFIGURATION Retrieve Map Ring command to obtain a Ring Map Report 2 Compare the actual node TIDs listed on t...

Page 1312: ...TAP 166 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1313: ...2 If NO then continue with Step 6 2 Was there a loss of 48 V power to either the high speed shelf or to the entire bay followed by a line failure on one of the spans terminated by this network element If YES then continue with Step 8 If NO then continue with Step 3 3 Was there a line failure on one of the spans terminated by this network ele ment followed by a loss of 48 V power to either the high...

Page 1314: ...nvolving east facing tributaries by using the CONFIGURATION Delete Crossconnection STS3 or STS1 command Use the CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnec tion STS3 or STS1 command to reenter the cross connections 9 At each of the nodes adjacent to the affected node lock out high speed pro tection switching by using the FAULT Switch Line All Lockout com mand This prevents a line switch to protection anywhere...

Page 1315: ... Retrieve Alarms and Status All com mand and execute to obtain an Active Alarms and Status Report An example of this report with a description of the output parameters is provided in Section 11 of this manual 3 Has the incoming OC48 APS default byte condition cleared If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then continue with Step 4 4 Issue a Trouble Report to the source of the inc...

Page 1316: ...TAP 168 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1317: ...aused by a hardware failure at the source of the incoming OC 3 OC 12 signal NOTE This condition will most likely prevent a remote login to the source of the incoming OC 3 OC 12 signal 1 Issue a Trouble Report to the source of the incoming OC 3 OC 12 signal stat ing that you are receiving an inc from OC3 DCC failure or inc from OC12 DCC failure condition and that they are to assume there is no trou...

Page 1318: ...TAP 169 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1319: ...C connections at either the OC 3 lines or the OC 12 lines 3 Determine from office records if any DCC connections are engineered for the local network element 4 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Assignment DCC com mand and execute to obtain a DCC Assignment Report 5 Does the DCC information from the office records and the DCC Assignment Report agree If NO then continue with Step 4 If YES the...

Page 1320: ...LETED THIS PROCEDURE If YES then continue with Step 7 NOTE This step is performed only if there is no extra DCC connection s 9 Notify the network administrator of the continued TID address map full condition after all extra DCC connections have been removed Nothing else can be done locally to clear the trouble 10 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1321: ... pack starts a mini reset that can take up to 10 minutes to complete During this time LEDs on other circuit packs will be lighted When a TG3 circuit pack is first inserted it will be switched out of service until it warms up This can take as long as 5 minutes You can confirm that it is in the standby state by using the FAULT Retrieve State command for the TG slot 13 If the low speed and or the hig...

Page 1322: ...eset the network element 16 Wait for the time indicated in Table A NOTE If the low speed and or the high speed shelf cover is removed you will see one or more FAULT LEDs lighted 17 At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve Alarm and status All com mand and execute to obtain an Active Alarms and Status Report 18 Are any conditions listed in the Descriptive column of the report If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPL...

Page 1323: ...er trouble conditions therefore these other conditions must be cleared first If you have previously obtained any reports one or all may currently be inaccurate not up to date At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve Alarms command and execute to obtain an Active Alarms and Status Report 2 Is the NE status comm failure condition still shown If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If YES then cont...

Page 1324: ...ntinue with Step 9 If YES then clear this condition first refer to TAP 120 and return to this procedure 8 Wait 5 minutes after clearing the condition 9 Obtain another Active Alarms and Status Report Is the NE status comm failure condition still shown If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If YES then continue with Step 10 10 Is a trouble condition listed in the Descriptive column of the...

Page 1325: ...mand and execute to obtain an Active Alarms and Status Report 2 From the report determine the slot and or tributary address of the cross con nection 3 If necessary remove the low speed shelf cover 4 Verify that the circuit pack is inserted into the shelf per office records 5 Obtain another Active Alarms and Status Report 6 Is the x conn provisioned but not est condition still shown in the report I...

Page 1326: ...TAP 173 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1327: ...n made prior to now this should be done before clearing the LOP condition 1 Does a circuit pack failure condition appear in the Active Alarms and Status Report also indicated by a lighted FAULT LED If NO then continue with Step 2 If YES then go to TAP 111 NOTE Pointer processor devices which detect STS 3 LOP are located on the local low speed interface circuit packs and on the local high speed TRM...

Page 1328: ...curring between the East and West TRMTR circuit packs For example Figure 1 a repeating pattern is occurring between line 1e with TRMTR failure and TRMTR failure cleared and line 1w with TRMTR failure and TRMTR failure cleared If NO then continue with Step 6 If YES then continue with Step 10 Figure 1 Example Showing Repeating TRMTR Failure Cleared Pattern Maintenance History Report Date Time System...

Page 1329: ...MTR circuit pack at the local node as indicated by the Source Address from Step 3 Figure 2 For example if Node 2 is reporting an incoming from OC 48 STS LOP condition on sts 1w 6 then replace the 1e transmitter at Node 2 local node Reference DLP 514 Figure 2 Four Node Ring Network Example 7 After the new TRMTR boots obtain another Active Alarm and Status Report use FAULT Retrieve Alarms command or...

Page 1330: ...select FAULT Switch Line Forced command and exe cute for the line identified in Step 3 protection line now active 11 At the local node and using the source address and line recorded in Step 3 replace the RCVR circuit pack that s receiving the incoming LOP failure Reference DLP 514 12 Obtain another Active Alarm and Status Report use FAULT Retrieve Alarms command or F9 key 13 Does the incoming from...

Page 1331: ...4 NOTE Assistance is required at the adjacent upstream node to replace a circuit pack in the high speed shelf 19 Notify personnel to replace the appropriate TRMTR circuit pack at the upstream node Figure 2 For example if Node 2 is reporting an incoming from OC 48 STS LOP condition on sts 1W 6 then the 1E transmitter at Node 1 may be the cause of the failure condition Reference DLP 514 20 After the...

Page 1332: ...ion ciruit pack is not available slot 3B or slot 7B NOTE Low speed interface protection switching will be required in the next few steps 26 From the list of low speed interface circuit packs Step 25 disengage one of the circuit packs just enough to cause a low speed protection switch 27 Obtain another Active Alarm and Status Report use FAULT Retrieve Alarms command or F9 key 28 Does the incoming f...

Page 1333: ...LOP condition still appear in the Active Alarm and Status Report If YES then go to Step 30 If NO then continue with Step 35 34 At the local node select FAULT Switch Line Reset command and exe cute to normalize the line identified in Step 3 original line now active 35 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1334: ...TAP 174 Trouble Clearing 365 575 102 Page 8 of 8 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1335: ...re appear under the Description column of the report If YES then go to TAP 102 If NO then continue with Step 3 NOTE It is necessary to clear any all additional alarms before continuing with this procedure 38 Remove the SYSCTL circuit pack and install a replacement circuit pack having the same or a higher series number For example an LAA23C with series number S1 2 is the same series number as S1 4 ...

Page 1336: ... 41 Does a LCLAN failure appear under the Description column of the report If YES then go to TAP 116 If NO then continue with Step 7 42 Is the NE ACTY LED off at the user panel If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then go to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 ...

Page 1337: ...or 2 Fiber Ring Network DLP 536 Establish Modem or Datakitâ Network Access DLP 521 Establish or Disconnect Remote Login Using CIT DLP 524 Identify Source of Incoming Signal DLP 535 Inspect Repair Optical and or Electrical Cable s DLP 528 Install and or Remove Optical Loopback at OC48 REGENR Circuit Pack DLP 519 Install Remove Apparatus Circuit Pack Blank DLP 533 Install Remove Lightguide Buildout ...

Page 1338: ...e Power Line Filter DLP 550 Replace Circuit Pack With Different Circuit Pack DLP 527 Replace Defective Fan Unit in D Bay DLP 546 Replace Fan Filter in E Bay DLP 526 Replace Fan Filter Every Six Months in D Bay DLP 545 Replace Fuse in Power Distribution and Fuse Panel or User Panel DLP 515 STS3 or STS1 Path Trace Monitor for Non DS3 Signals DLP 543 Temporarily Remove High Speed Optical Loopback s a...

Page 1339: ...erence DLP 511 2 For each OC 48 line to be looped back obtain a lightguide jumper package label FS1E E 02 and a 20 dB loss lightguide buildout or equivalents It is possible to connect another LBO to an existing LBO to obtain a total of 20 dB provided the LBOs do not physically interfere with the shelf cover when closed Table A shows additional buildouts that are available Table B shows the buildou...

Page 1340: ...ble over the end of the fiber 4 Remove the optical OC 48 line connection to the IN connector of the RCVR circuit pack and slide the protector cap if available over the end of the fiber 5 Remove the lightguide buildout from the IN connector of the RCVR circuit pack if equipped Reference DLP 512 Table A Lightguide Buildout Values dB Loss Letter Code 5 1 B 10 1 D 15 2 F 20 2 H Table B Lightguide Buil...

Page 1341: ...rs with canned air or a non toxic gas Reference DLP 510 8 Install the 20 dB loss buildout into the IN connector of the RCVR circuit pack Reference DLP 512 9 Connect the lightguide jumper between the buildout on RCVR and the OUT connector on the TRMTR circuit pack for the same line 10 Repeat Steps 3 through 9 for the adjacent high speed line in the same shelf to be looped back 11 STOP YOU HAVE COMP...

Page 1342: ...DLP 500 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1343: ...115 FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Releases 3 4 5 6 and 7 Installation Manual To summarize check the following The appropriate 9 pin or 25 pin cable or equivalent interface cable is con nected between the CIT DCE female connector on the user panel and a serial male connector on the PC If required a printer with the appropriate printer cable is connected to the CIT per the instructions provided wit...

Page 1344: ...lement If you encounter difficulty in logging in or the connection attempt fails the wrong COM port may have been specified in the SET UP menu A CIT tutorial is available in Section 11 Craft Interface Terminal Usage Nice to Know Memory resident programs also called TSRs run in the background and may compete for the same random access memory RAM as the CIT PC program If this is the situation disabl...

Page 1345: ...up use CONFIGURATION in Release 1 1 1 with Mode Local and All for the lines This test can take up to 10 minutes Response Execution in progress one dot appears about every 2 seconds NOTE The Fault Test Auto Turnup Local test occasionally indicts circuit packs in random slots Repeat the test with the indicted circuit pack in a different slot Unless the circuit pack fails in the other slot it is high...

Page 1346: ...hat installed the equipment 6 At the CIT select FAULT Test Auto Turnup Local If Auto Turnup does not appear as a menu item log out of the CIT by pressing F5 key and answer yes to the confirmation message You must log into the CIT in the expert mode by entering cit expert at the DOS prompt This test can take up to 10 minutes Response Execution in progress one dot appears about every 7 NOTE A g is f...

Page 1347: ...LS INTFC 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 P P A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B 1 2 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g Lucent Technologies FT 2000 96 11 07 08 30 45 EST M Test Auto All COMPLD Test Auto Turnup Report Local Test Line 1 TG LSSW Line P TG LSSW TRMTR RCVR 1 2 IN OUT OHCTL LNCTL g g g g g g g LS INTFC 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 P P A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B 1 2 g g g g g g g g g ...

Page 1348: ... M Test Auto All COMPLD Test Auto Turnup Report Local Test Slot Test Address Results regenr 1ew good regenr 1we good regenr pew FAIL regenr pwe good Lucent Technologies FT 2000 96 11 07 08 30 45 EST M Test Auto All COMPLD Test Auto Turnup Report Local Test TRMTR RCVR TG LSSW OHCTL 1W 1E 1W 1E 1 2 IN OUT 1W 1E LNCTL g g g g g g g g g g g LS INTFC 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 P P A B A B A B A B ...

Page 1349: ...nd tested up front in both directions This would be in lieu of the steps defined within this DLP CAUTION Do not remove any circuit packs during testing because erroneous indications can result NOTE The circuit being tested may be used for 1 way drop or 1 way add services in which case there may be an output cable and not an input cable or an input cable and not an output cable 1 Is the circuit to ...

Page 1350: ...n tinue with Step 21 If acceptance of new and added optical low speed fibers then continue with Step 28 Initial Acceptance 4 Temporarily remove any high speed optical loopbacks on all lines Reference DLP 518 CAUTION FT 2000 low speed outputs toward the cross connect panel or other transmission equipment must be properly terminated If unterminated false indications of failures may result 5 At the l...

Page 1351: ... a service line only in a point to point network See Figure 2 for a service line and a protection line in a point to point network See Figure 3 for a shared service protection line in a ring network If YES then continue with Step 10 If NO then refer problem to the group that installed the equipment FT 2000 Point to Point Network FT 2000 Ring Network Source Description Source Description Address Ad...

Page 1352: ...nal failures error conditions etc from the previous loopbacks 13 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE Figure 1 Example of Test Auto Turnup Report Cross Connect Wir ing Test Service Line Only in a Point to Point Network Lucent Technologies FT 2000 96 11 07 08 30 45 EST M Test Auto All COMPLD Test Auto Turnup Report Cross Connect Wiring Test Line 1 LS INTFC 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 port A B...

Page 1353: ...ring Test Line 1 LS INTFC 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 port A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B 1 g g g g F g g F g g g g g g 2 g g g g F g g g g g g g g g 3 g g g g F g g g g g g g g g Line P LS INTFC 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 port A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B 1 g g g g g g F g F g g g g g 2 g g g g g g F g g g g g g g 3 g g g g g g F g g g g g g g Lucent Technologies FT 2000 96 11 07 08 ...

Page 1354: ...nt 15 Is the NE ACTY LED lighted If YES then refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 If NO then continue with Step 16 16 At the CIT select FAULT Test Auto Turnup use CONFIGURATION in Release 1 1 1 with Mode DSX and P for the line This test can take up to 5 minutes Response The ABN and NE ACTY LEDs are lighted NOTE A g is for good or successful test A is for not tested An F is for failed or unsuccessful ...

Page 1355: ...s connect bay that is DSX 3 STSX 1 DACS III 2000 etc loop back only the low speed signals being tested Do not use the FAULT Operate Loopback command at the FT 2000 network element 22 Is the NE ACTY LED lighted If YES then refer to Trouble Clearing IXL 001 If NO then continue with Step 23 Lucent Technologies FT 2000 96 11 07 08 30 45 EST M Test Auto P COMPLD Test Auto Turnup Report Cross Connect Wi...

Page 1356: ...work See Figure 2 for a service line and a protection line in a point to point network See Figure 3 for a shared service protection line in a ring network If YES then continue with Step 25 If NO then refer problem to the group that installed the equipment 25 Remove cross connect loopback s established in Step 21 26 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Update and execute This update is needed because of...

Page 1357: ...ll appear for a slot with an OC3 IS3 circuit pack See report Figure 5 for OC3 IS3 circuit packs in slots 1A 2B example NOTE Only one entry will appear for a slot with an OC12 circuit pack Does report indicate g for good or for not tested for each OC3 slot fiber tested If YES then continue with Step 33 If NO then refer problem to the group that installed the equipment 33 Remove cross connect loopba...

Page 1358: ...ipped with OC3 Circuit Packs and Remaining Slots Equipped with DS3 STS1E Circuit Packs NODE 0 97 11 17 08 30 45 EST M Test Auto Turnup DSX ALL COMPLD Test Auto Turnup Report Cross Connect Wiring Test Line 1 LS INTFC 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 port A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B 1 g g g g g F g g F g g g g g g g 2 g F g g g g g g g g g 3 g F g g g g g g g g g ...

Page 1359: ...ly lighted for 4 seconds and then remain off per the sequence chart below Also the office audible alarms should be activated during this test 3 Did the office alarms operate as described If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then refer problem to the group that installed the equipment Step Alarm LEDs at User Panel CR MJ MN 1 off off off 2 on off off 3 off on off 4 off off on 5 o...

Page 1360: ...DLP 504 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1361: ...CA Parameters Provisioning Job Aid Release 4 and Later 365 575 124 FT 2000 Cross Connections Job Aid Releases 3 4 5 6 and 7 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION PERFORMANCE FAULT or SECURITY category and the appropriate inputs verb and modifier s NOTE Table 11 9 lists the reports and how to obtain them For example the System Alarm Attributes Report is obtained by using CONFIGURATION Retrieve Attribute ...

Page 1362: ...DLP 505 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1363: ...add drop rings terminal then continue with Step 2 If at FT 2000 repeater bay shelf then continue with Step 25 FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal Figure 1 2 Remove the front cover from the high speed shelf Reference DLP 511 3 Is there a lightguide jumper equipped with an optical buildout 20 dB for loop back testing or equivalent connected between the OUT connector of the TRMTR circuit pack and t...

Page 1364: ...ptical fiber and the 0 dB buildout with canned air or non toxic gas and install the buildout in the OUT connector of the TRMTR circuit pack Reference DLP 510 DLP 512 and DLP 519 11 Connect the transmit fiber to the 0 dB buildout installed in the OUT connector on the TRMTR circuit pack 12 Has the received dB value of the lightguide buildout already been determined If YES then continue with Step 15 ...

Page 1365: ...toxic gas buildout is installed at the IN connector on the RCVR circuit pack Reference DLP 510 20 Connect the receive fiber to the buildout inserted at the IN connector on the RCVR circuit pack 21 Repeat Steps 3 through 20 for line 1E NOTE At this point the TRMTR and RCVR circuit packs should be connected to their respective lines Table A Optical Line Buildout Values Notes 1 and 2 Measured Receive...

Page 1366: ...any remaining network elements in the FT 2000 network FT 2000 Repeater Bay Shelf Figure 2 25 Perform Steps 2 through 24 for each repeater in the FT 2000 network but sub stitute the REGENR circuit pack in place of the TRMTR and RCVR circuit packs The REGENR OUT connector represents the TRMTR and the IN con nector represents the RCVR Also the OC 48 optical lines use 1 for service and P for protectio...

Page 1367: ...sue 8 0 July 2002 Page 5 of 6 Figure 1 Four Node Ring Network Figure 2 Regenerator T R 1E 1E R T 1W 1W 1W T 1W R 1E T 1E R Node 1 T R 1E 1E 1W 1W R T 1W T 1W R 1E T 1E R Node 3 Node 4 Node 2 Sections tpa 844515 01 IN IN OUT OUT tpa 844514 01 1WE 1WE ...

Page 1368: ...DLP 506 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 6 of 6 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1369: ...ntinue with Step 4 2 At the local CIT select FAULT Test Auto Turnup for All lines in the System mode 3 NOTE g is for good or successful test is for not tested F is for failed or unsuccessful test Test takes 1 minute Did the report indicate g or for each entry See Figure 1 for an example If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then refer the problem failed system test to the group ...

Page 1370: ...th Mode System Response The ABN and NE ACTY LEDs are lighted Did the report indicate g or for each entry See Figure 2 for an example If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then refer to the Installation Manual or contact the group that did the upgrade installation Figure 2 Example of Test Auto Turnup Report System Test Protection Line Only Lucent Technologies FT 2000 96 11 17 08 ...

Page 1371: ...e operations center and request their assistance in monitoring the parallel telemetry points during this test 2 At the remote operations center disable the alarm threshold level for the telemetry points being tested 3 At the local CIT select FAULT Test Telemetry Parallel and Mode All with Repeat 1 Response All parallel telemetry points are simultaneously turned on for 20 seconds then off for 20 se...

Page 1372: ...DLP 508 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1373: ...s Interfaces 1 Contact the remote operations center and request their assistance in monitoring the serial telemetry points during this test 2 At the remote operations center disable the alarm threshold level for the telemetry points being tested 3 At the local CIT select FAULT TEST TELEMETRY SERIAL SERIAL TELEMETRY LINK 1 DISPLAY 1 POINT even odd or all and Repeat 1 through 10 Response Up to 64 se...

Page 1374: ...rect response during the test If YES then continue with Step 5 If NO then refer to the Installation Manual to correct the problem or con tact the group who did the installation 5 Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for the remaining displays on the link 6 Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for the other link 7 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1375: ...ecessary lightguide connector from buildout 3 Remove if necessary lightguide buildout from buildout block by unlocking tab and pushing in and turning in counterclockwise direction Reference DLP 512 Clean 4 Clean the end and the sides of the connectors buildouts and blocks with a lint free optical quality tissue dampened with isopropyl alcohol 5 Carefully wipe the connector buildouts and blocks aga...

Page 1376: ...rting the buildout into the block by aligning the buildout with the slot in the block Push in the buildout and rotate it clockwise until locked into position Slide the connector onto the buildout and rotate it clockwise until locked into position Reference DLP 512 10 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1377: ... replaced If Removed then continue with Step 3 If Replaced then continue with Step 11 Remove Cover 3 At the top of each cover locate the two turn fasteners 4 Use the appropriate size slotted screwdriver or a dime to rotate the turn fasteners counterclockwise 90 degrees so slots are positioned vertically unlocked position 5 Which cover is being removed If Circuit Pack Shelf Cover then continue with...

Page 1378: ...aced If Circuit Pack Shelf Cover then continue with Step 12 If Interconnection Panel Cover then continue with Step 13 12 Position the pivot pins located at the bottom of the cover under the flange on the shelf framing then continue with Step 14 13 Place bottom of cover over side pivot pins 14 Close the cover and rotate the two 1 4 turn fasteners 90 degrees clockwise using the screwdriver or dime u...

Page 1379: ...lication The information contained within Table A should help in this selection Table A Some Optical Link Configurations and Span Component Requirements Type of Circuit Pack Circuit Pack Transmitter Device Type LBO Span Fiber Jumper Type RCVR Circuit Pack RCVR Device OC 48 Laser SM SM SM SM OC 48 Diode MM OC 12 T939A T939A circuit packs are shipped from the factory with 0dB LBOs on both the IN and...

Page 1380: ...oved then continue with Step 35 High Speed Fiber Installation via an LGX 2 While considering the application Table A and as appropriate select the cor rect jumper from Table B NOTE When connecting to an LGX you will need one jumper for the transmit fiber and an identical jumper for the receive fiber 3 Install connect the selected jumpers at the LGX Table B Single mode Lightwave Jumpers for Low Spe...

Page 1381: ...fibers in protective tubing and lace the tubing to the protective channel 7 Fibers enter the Enhanced High Speed Shelf near the bottom front of the shelf and should be routed up to the optical packs through the notches along the bottom edge of the shelf Do not crimp the fiber and maintain bend radius greater than the minimum 8 Optical fibers should be left with enough slack next to the TRMTR and R...

Page 1382: ...upports span lengths up to 2000 feet when using MM fiber The LAA10 supports span lengths from 0 to 51 km when using SM fiber Also the T939A supports span lengths from 0 to 51 km when using SM fiber Low speed fibers connect either directly or through an intermediate LGX to circuit packs within the Low Speed Shelf Connectors are located on the faceplate of the LAA5 LAA10 or T939A circuit packs Conne...

Page 1383: ...ut the signal shape may not be adequate The length of fiber that is allowed must be determined by the type and manufacturer of the multi mode fiber Table E shows the approximate maximum distances allowable for different fiber bandwidth specifications NOTE For more detailed information about maximum span lengths for particular fibers refer to the manufacturers specifications While considering the a...

Page 1384: ...essing the fiber Fibers should never be directly laced in place or cable tied If secure dressing is not achieved with the steps above then place the fibers in protective tubing and lace the tubing to the protective channel 21 Fibers enter the Low Speed Shelf near the middle front of the shelf and should be routed up to the optical packs through the notches along the bottom edge of the shelf Do not...

Page 1385: ...NOTE For interconnection between an IS 3 LAA5 or 21D 21D U 22D U and an OC 3 or circuit pack multi mode fiber must be used on the IS 3 transmit and multi mode or single mode can be used on the OC 3 transmit as follows 29 The IS 3 circuit pack uses multi mode fiber only with a 2000 foot maximum distance Zero dB multi mode attenuators should always be used when con necting IS 3 circuit packs Table F...

Page 1386: ... locked into position Refer to the appropriate Figures 3 4 or 5 for the specific buildout type 34 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 35 Remove Buildout CAUTION Locking beam must only be pushed along a line perpendicular to buildout body in direction towards the buildout in order to avoid damage to the locking beam Depress the locking beam on the buildout rotate counterclockwise and sepa rate f...

Page 1387: ...575 102 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 512 Issue 8 0 July 2002 Page 9 of 14 36 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE Figure 1 ST Block and Buildouts SC Buildout nc ft2000 015 FC Buildout ST Buildout ST Block ...

Page 1388: ...e 8 0 July 2002 Figure 2 FT 2000 OC 48 ADR High Speed Fiber Routing Line 1W TRMTR RCVR Line 1E TRMTR RCVR Enhanced High Speed Shelf Interconnection Panel Fiber Protection Tubing or Panduit Top of FT 2000 Bay Frame Fiber Protection Trough To Lightguide Cross Connect ...

Page 1389: ... Procedure DLP 512 Issue 8 0 July 2002 Page 11 of 14 Figure 3 ST Block and ST Buildout Figure 4 ST Block and FC Buildout Install Depress Beam to Remove Buildout nc ft2000 013 Install Depress Beam to Remove Buildout nc ft2000 014 ...

Page 1390: ...DLP 512 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 12 of 14 Issue 8 0 July 2002 Figure 5 ST Block and SC Buildout Install Depress Beam to Remove Buildout nc ft2000 012 ...

Page 1391: ... SYSMEM SYSCTL 8B 8A 7B 7A 6B 6A 5B 5A 2 1 OUT IN 4B 4A 3B 3A 2B 2A 1B 1A P1 P2 TG LSSW LS INTFC LS INTFC S Y S M E M S Y S C T L LS INTFC DS3 STS1 OC3 TG3 L S S W LS INTFC DS3 STS1 OC3 T O H C T L LOW SPEED SHELF SYSTEM CONTROLLER INTERCONNECTION PANEL IS3 and or IS3 and or OC12 TOHCTL OUT OUT OUT OUT IN IN IN IN LAA10 OC3 LAA10 OC3 LAA10 OC3 LAA10 OC3 Fiber Protection Tubing or Panduit LINE NO 1...

Page 1392: ...DLP 512 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 14 of 14 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1393: ...s should be lighted while ALM TEST pushbutton is depressed 3 Release ALM TEST pushbutton Response POWER ON LED should be lighted and ALM LED should be off 4 At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve History to obtain a Maintenance History Report 5 Are fan failure and fan failure cleared conditions listed for the time the fan assembly was tested If YES then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE If NO then ...

Page 1394: ...DLP 513 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1395: ...ment to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components CAUTION Do not remove the SYSCTL circuit pack unless instructed to by the procedure that sent you here If the SYSCTL circuit pack is removed provisioning data could be lost 1 Are you to remove or install a circuit pack If to remove then continue with Step 2 If to install then continue with Step 17 2 Is the circuit pack an OC 3 ...

Page 1396: ... a State Report on the circuit pack being replaced 8 From the report is the low speed slot circuit pack to be removed in a standby state If YES then continue with Step 14 If NO then continue with Step 9 9 At the CIT select FAULT Switch Low Speed Slot command for the circuit pack being removed and execute Use the FAULT Retrieve State LS INTFC command to verify if desired 10 Is the circuit pack a TG...

Page 1397: ... NO then continue with Step 16 16 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Update command to update the hardware configuration STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 17 If required remove the apparatus circuit pack blank from the slot Reference DLP 533 18 Obtain a known good replacement circuit pack with the same or higher series number 19 Install the circuit pack as follows 1 If necessary close both latch...

Page 1398: ...n service condition on all packs with the fibers connected If the state of a connected input is not IS clear the problem before placing the circuits in service 25 Place the optical fiber s in the shelf guide to prevent damaging it when replacing the shelf cover 26 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 27 Is the circuit pack just installed a TG3 If YES then continue with Step 28 If NO then STOP YO...

Page 1399: ... in and down at the top of the red lens cap Release slowly because the lens cap fuse should spring forward 4 Remove the lens cap fuse from the fuse socket 5 Remove the blown 10A fuse from the lens cap fuse and replace with the replacement 10A fuse 6 Install the lens cap fuse into the fuse socket by pushing in and up at the bot tom of the lens cap 7 Lower the latch from top to bottom around the red...

Page 1400: ...DLP 515 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1401: ... 3 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE Table A Parameter If Slot and Port Parameter Selections Were Select These Inputs Commands to Obtain Report CONFIGURATION Set Low Speed CONFIGURATION Retrieve Low Speed All CONFIGURATION Set T3 CONFIGURATION Retrieve T3 All CONFIGURATION Set State T3 CONFIGURATION Retrieve T3 All CONFIGURATION Set EC1 CONFIGURATION Retrieve EC1 All CONFIGURATION Set State E...

Page 1402: ...DLP 516 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1403: ... command s to provision the desired parameter s Table A Slot Parameters Slot for Parameter Input Command DS 3 and or EC 1 Protection Switching Priority CONFIGURATION Set Low Speed OC 3 Protection Mode From OC3 CONFIGURATION Set OC3 Protection Mode From OC48 Alarm Level Signal Degrade Threshold Output AU4 Mapping DCC Assignment CONFIGURATION Enter Assignment DCC OC 12 Protection Mode From OC12 CONF...

Page 1404: ...e Report Reference DLP 516 4 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE Table B DS 3 and EC 1 Port Parameters Parameter DS 3 Input Command EC 1 Input Command Violation Monitor Removal Mode CONFIGURATION Set T3 None Alarm Attribute CONFIGURATION Set T3 CONFIGURATION Set EC1 Signal Degrade Threshold CONFIGURATION Set T3 CONFIGURATION Set EC1 Primary State CONFIGURATION Set State T3 CONFIGURATION Set Sta...

Page 1405: ...ly or with improper optical instruments Avoid direct exposure to beam CAUTION Use a static ground wrist strap whenever handling circuit packs or working on an FT 2000 network element to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components Remove the lightguide jumper from the OUT connector of the TRMTR circuit pack and the IN connector of the RCVR circuit pack Slide a protector cap if av...

Page 1406: ...DLP 518 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1407: ...cuit packs or working on an FT 2000 repeater bay shelf to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components WARNING Unterminated optical connectors may emit invisible laser radiation Eye damage may occur if beam is viewed directly or with improper optical instruments Avoid direct exposure to beam Remove the shelf cover from the FT 2000 repeater bay shelf Reference DLP 511 2 Is the OC ...

Page 1408: ...ightguide buildout or equivalents It is possible to connect another LBO to an existing LBO to obtain a total of 20 dB provided the LBOs do not physically interfere with the shelf cover when closed Table A shows additional buildouts that are available Table B shows the buildout types that are compatible with different codes of the REGENR circuit pack OUT IN LBO REGENR 1EW REGENR 1WE REGENR PEW REGE...

Page 1409: ...iber 5 Remove the OC 48 line optical connection to the IN connector of the OC48 REGENR circuit pack and slide the protector cap if available over the end of the fiber 6 If equipped remove the lightguide buildout from the IN connector of the OC48 REGENR circuit pack Reference DLP 512 Table A Lightguide Buildout Values Table B Lightguide Buildouts and Circuit Pack Compatibility dBLoss Letter Code Bu...

Page 1410: ...ove Loopback 13 WARNING Unterminated optical connectors may emit invisible laser radiation Eye damage may occur if beam is viewed directly or with improper optical instruments Avoid direct exposure to beam NOTE Remember that the OC48 REGENR circuit packs are used in the service and protection lines and in both the east and west directions Remove the lightguide jumper connected between the OUT and ...

Page 1411: ...ve the protector cap if equipped and store the cap 20 Clean the connector on the receive fiber and the buildout if equipped or the IN connector of the OC48 REGENR circuit pack using canned air or nontoxic gas Reference DLP 510 21 Connect the receive fiber to the line engineered buildout if equipped or the IN connector of the OC48 REGENR circuit pack 22 Repeat Steps 13 through 21 for the next OC48 ...

Page 1412: ...DLP 519 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 6 of 6 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1413: ...ross connect panel or connected directly to other transmission equipment If to cross connect panel then continue with Step 2 If to other transmission equipment then continue with Step 5 2 Does the DSX 3 STSX 1 cross connect panel provide internal terminations for nonconnected circuits cross connect panels meet this requirement If YES then continue with Step 4 If NO then continue with Step 3 3 At t...

Page 1414: ...DLP 520 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1415: ...ith Step 2 If Datakit network then continue with Step 25 Quick Check for Compatible Modems Both Locations 2 NOTE Modems at the CIT and FT 2000 NE locations must be compatible Quick check setup of the modem parameters and connections are given in this procedure for the FT 2000 NE location first then for the CIT location NOTE The manufacturer s manuals may be referred to for specific instructions on...

Page 1416: ...ration External Modem Public Switched Network DTE Port CIT PC Modem Figure 2 Internal Modem Configuration Public Switched Network DTE Port Internal Modem CIT PC DTE Port Datakit Network Node Datakit Network Node Figure 3 Network Configuration Datakit CIT PC DTE Port Datakit Network Node Internal Modem Modem Public Switched Network Modem Figure 4 Hybrid Network Configuration ...

Page 1417: ...c discharge damage to sensitive components See Electrostatic Discharge Considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 Set the modem to answer incoming calls For example if you are using an AT T 2224 CEO modem do the following to program the modem NOTE It is assumed the PC and modem AT command compatible are powered and the PC is loaded with communications software a Set all front panel switches to DOW...

Page 1418: ...inue with Step 8 7 Verify the telephone line is plugged into the modem Continue by going to Step 11 8 Verify the modem is connected to the CIT using the appropriate modem cable Tables B and C list the pins for the DB 25 connector and DB 9 connector respectively 9 Verify the modem is powered 10 This completes the quick check setup for the modem at the CIT location Continue with the next step CIT op...

Page 1419: ... desired communication port baud rate to match the modem and monitor and press F6 17 Press the F3 key labeled DIAL 18 This step is optional and is only used if you wish to change the previous modem parameter settings You may change the parameters by pressing the F6 key labeled SETUP then select the desired PORT and BAUD rate and press the key twice to SAVE and EXIT 19 For an external modem press t...

Page 1420: ...he connection to be made independently of the provisioned state of the Datakit port Press the key and momentarily wait for the response DESTINATION 26 Did you get the DESTINATION prompt If YES then continue with Step 34 If NO then continue with Step 27 27 NOTE The Datakit port to which the PC is connected is NOT supporting the Datakit command mode Perform the following steps to allow the connectio...

Page 1421: ...nd prompt type SET ATTN NONE and press the key 32 Type CONT and press the key The Destination prompt should appear on the screen 33 This completes the provisioning state of the Datakit port Continue with the next step Using Datakit Network 34 Type the desired Datakit network number and press the key 35 Press the F4 key labeled CHECK to verify connectivity between the CIT and the network element A ...

Page 1422: ...otective Ground Protective frame ground Pin 2 Transmit Data Transmits data to the modem Pin 3 Receive Data Receives data from the modem Pin 4 Request to Send FT 2000 network element notifies the modem that it is ready to send data Pin 5 Clear to Send Modem notifies the FT 2000 network element that it is clear to send its data Pin 6 Data Set Ready Modem notifies the FT 2000 network element that the...

Page 1423: ...te modem Pin 20 Data Terminal Ready CIT notifies the modem that it is connected Note All remaining pins are not connected Table C Pin Connections for Modem Using DB 9 Cable PC DB 9 Connector CIT Pin 1 Carrier Detect This modem detects carrier from the remote modem Pin 2 Receive Data Receives data from modem Pin 3 Transmit Data Transmits data to the modem Pin 4 Data Terminal Ready CIT notifies the ...

Page 1424: ...e 365 575 102 Page 10 of 10 Issue 8 0 July 2002 Figure 5 Null Modem Internal Wiring Connections XMT 2 RCV 3 RTS 4 CTS 5 DSR 6 GRD 7 CDA 8 DTR 20 2 XMT 3 RCV 4 RTS 5 CTS 6 DSR 7 GRD 8 CDA 20 DTR Pin Pin To PC To CIT DTE tpa 832295 01 ...

Page 1425: ...01 2 What do you want to do to a user s login If to change a user s login continue with Step 3 If to delete a user s login continue with Step 7 If to enter a new user s login continue with Step 10 If to enable disable login aging continue with Step 16 If to enable disable password aging continue with Step 16 Change Login 3 At the CIT select SECURITY Set Login Change for the specified user s login ...

Page 1426: ...haracter except the and 11 When prompted reenter the initial password to verify your intended password Passwords are not displayed 12 Assign either security level Reports Only or General to the user s login and press function key F9 to execute the assignment 13 At the CIT select SECURITY Retrieve Login to obtain the Login Provisioning Report and verify that the user s login has been entered 14 The...

Page 1427: ... 522 Issue 8 0 July 2002 Page 3 of 4 18 At the CIT select SECURITY Retrieve Security Network Element to obtain the Access Security Global Configuration Report and verify the correct parameter value s 19 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1428: ...DLP 522 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1429: ...tain the operation instructions to release the looped back DS3 or EC1 port s and note the assigned address 2 If required connect and condition the craft interface terminal CIT Reference DLP 501 3 At the CIT select FAULT Release Loopback T3 for DS3 circuits or FAULT Release Loopback EC1 for EC1 circuits for the first of the specified port s 4 Repeat Step 3 for any remaining port s 5 The port s is r...

Page 1430: ...DLP 523 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1431: ... 3 NOTE The CIT connection state is indicated in the upper right hand corner of the FT 2000 screen only as LOCAL ONLY REMOTE or LOCAL LOCAL ONLY CIT is only connected to local network element REMOTE CIT is connected to remote network element from local network element LOCAL CIT is connected to remote network element but it is toggled back to local network element Press the F2 function key labeled ...

Page 1432: ...etwork element check your login and password with the office records and or supervisor 6 NOTE If remotely logged in to an FT 2000 REMOTE is now displayed in the upper right hand corner NOTE The remote FT 2000 or DDM 2000 NE will now respond to any inputs from the CIT just as if you were physically connected to it NOTE If you have remotely logged in to an FT 2000 then F2 is now labeled LOCAL and ac...

Page 1433: ...onnected to the remote FT 2000 the remote connection is dropped but the CIT continues to operate with the local FT 2000 NE If LOGOUT is selected at the local FT 2000 NE both the remote and local connections are dropped Are you now remotely logged in to an FT 2000 NE or a DDM 2000 NE If FT 2000 then continue with Step 11 If DDM 2000 then continue with Step 13 11 Press F4 function key labeled LOGOUT...

Page 1434: ...DLP 524 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1435: ...an address of a slot containing an STS1E circuit pack the logical loopback will be COMPLD but no physical loopback will occur NOTE A DS3 or STS1E circuit pack has three ports 1 Obtain the operation instructions to loop back the DS3 or EC1 circuit s for testing and note the assigned address 2 If required connect and condition the craft interface terminal CIT Reference DLP 501 3 NOTE A single port m...

Page 1436: ...of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 6 The port s is looped back toward the OC 48 line s If you wish to verify select Retrieve Alarm for an updated Active Alarms and Status Report Section 11 contains an example of this report 7 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1437: ... the cover is secured with slotted pan head screws these must be removed completely by using a slotted screwdriver straight shaft or offset 3 Locate the two FAN power connectors plugs labeled FAN 48A and FAN 48B at the upper left of the connectorized panel CAUTION Do not pull on the power cables to remove the plugs from the connectors 4 Remove the two FAN power plugs from the connectors squeeze on...

Page 1438: ...ment has been completed close the screen and rotate the 1 4 turn fasteners 90 degrees clockwise until each screw slot is horizontal 13 Insert the two FAN power plugs into their respective connectors A plug has red black wires and B plug has slate with black strip slate wires The two FAN power plugs are keyed and when connected properly the A plug has a red wire on the left and the B plug has a sla...

Page 1439: ...n Panel T R M T L L R E D 21 5 R R E R V E D E S R E R V E D E S FT 2000 21 5 Heat Baffle User Panel 78 5 4 Panel and Fuse Panel 2 L S S W TG3 Y S C T L Y S M E M Interconnection Panel S S High Speed Shelf Enhanced PC Tray Screen System Controller Low Speed Shelf Filter Panel 4 4 4 84 21 5 1 5 Power Distribution R E S E R V E D DS3 or STS1E DS3 and or STS1E and or OC3 DS3 and or STS1E and or OC3 T...

Page 1440: ...DLP 526 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 4 of 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1441: ...exposure to beam CAUTION Use a static ground wrist strap whenever handling circuit packs or working on an FT 2000 network element to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components CAUTION Do not remove the SYSCTL circuit pack unless instructed to by a procedure that sent you here If the SYSCTL circuit pack is removed provisioning data could be lost 1 Identify the appropriate shelf ...

Page 1442: ... low speed switch will automatically occur when the circuit pack is removed from the shelf and will retire when the Update command is executed NOTE To replace a circuit pack with a different code you must verify that the software running in the bay is compatible with the new circuit pack codes Refer to Table 7 1 in Section 7 Circuit Pack descriptions DS3 STS1E 4 At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve St...

Page 1443: ...te connect any low speed cables or optical fibers and provision the slot as required for the application Low Speed Optical 10 Is the current circuit pack that is to be replaced a low speed optical interface If NO then go to Step 21 If YES then continue with Step 11 11 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve OC3 12 All command to determine the operating mode of the slot 12 Is the slot operating in...

Page 1444: ... 3 Link From 1 1 to 0x1 Protection Mode Reference Circuit Order NTP 017 Change an OC 12 Link From 1 1 to 0x1 Protection Mode Reference DLP 517 Provision Low Speed Slot and Port Parameter 16 Disconnect the optical fibers from the existing optical circuit pack and subse quently remove the circuit pack from the slot 17 Execute the CONFIGURATION Update command 18 Install the replacement low speed circ...

Page 1445: ... the 1W side at a time Removing fibers on both sides will isolate the node and will result in lost service for all adds and drops at the local node 26 Install the new TRMTR and or the RCVR Clean and reconnect the OC48 opti cal fibers 27 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Update and execute 28 Wait for the OC48 automatic protection switch to retire At the CIT select FAULT Retrieve Alarms command to ve...

Page 1446: ...arts a mini reset that can take up to 10 minutes to complete During this time LEDs on other circuit packs will be lighted When a TG3 circuit pack is first inserted it will be switched out of service until it warms up This can take as long as 5 minutes You can confirm that it is in the standby state by using the FAULT Retrieve State command for the TG slot 36 Is the NE ACTY LED lighted at the user ...

Page 1447: ...ove one of the front covers or open one of the sliding doors care should be exercised to limit this time and quickly close the opening CAUTION 1 Remove the appropriate cover as follows High speed shelf cover for OC 48 cables Interconnection panel cover for low speed DS3 or EC1 sync reference cables or OS cables Low speed shelf cover for OC 3 cables Low speed shelf cover for IS 3 cables Low speed s...

Page 1448: ...DLP 528 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1449: ...the central processing unit CPU disk drive s and memory among other things All main units have some common features which include ON OFF Switch This switch is used to switch the PC ON or OFF Newer PCs have the switch located on the front In older models the switch is located on the back of the PC near where the AC power cord plugs in to the PC Serial Port A port which the PC uses to communicate wi...

Page 1450: ... generic program indicate using drive A Monitor The monitor sometimes called a display screen may be either monochrome or color The higher the resolution the better the monitor Keyboard The keyboard is used to enter commands This section reviews some of the features of the keyboard and points out some of the special keys The keyboard is divided into three different sections Typewriter section This...

Page 1451: ...f day clock is not indicating the current time and date set the time of day clock Diskettes Care and Handling Diskettes are sometimes called floppy disks or floppies for short Diskettes are similar to cassette tapes magnetically encoded information is stored on the diskette for later retrieval By adhering to the following guidelines you will increase the useful life of your diskettes DO Keep the d...

Page 1452: ...eft if provided CAUTION Do not attempt to force the diskette into the drive 3 Slide the diskette in as far as it will go but do not force it You may hear a click when the diskette is all the way in If resistance is felt or it does not slide in easily remove the diskette and insert it again 4 Close latch the disk drive door When you are instructed to insert a diskette into a drive it is implied tha...

Page 1453: ...mental input NOTE When an external device connected to the FT 2000 network element causes a contact closure to appear as an environmental input to the network element a corresponding environmental point is activated at the remote operations center 4 Was the corresponding environmental point activated at the remote operations center If YES then continue with Step 5 If NO then report the trouble to ...

Page 1454: ...nt operated correctly For example was it turned on If YES then continue with Step 10 If NO then report the trouble to the installation personnel 10 Ask the personnel at the remote operations center to deactivate the first control point being tested 11 Was the corresponding external device connected to the network element operated correctly For example was it shut off If YES then continue with Step...

Page 1455: ...r string for each STS 1 path to be provisioned path is between the source and destination network elements 4 Establish a login to the source network element for the first 1 way STS 1 path to be provisioned To establish a remote login refer to DLP 524 5 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Set Path Trace command to set the transmit path trace Xmit Path Trace for all STS 1 paths to be provisioned that or...

Page 1456: ...acters long Additional information is in Section 8 Administration and Provisioning or by pressing help 10 Repeat Step 9 for any additional STS 1 paths to be provisioned 11 Discontinue the login at the destination network element To discontinue a remote login refer to DLP 524 12 Verify the provisioning just done by using the CONFIGURATION Retrieve Path Trace command Reference DLP 532 13 This step i...

Page 1457: ...om office records determine which FT 2000 network elements are the source network element and the destination network element for the STS 1 path s to be verified 4 From office records determine the path trace character string to be observed for each 1 way STS 1 path to be verified Path is between the source and destination network elements 5 Establish a login to the source network element for the ...

Page 1458: ...ifferences To continue with the same example as in DLP 531 the PrvRx and the PrvTx strings should match with transmitting from node 3 at Boston NOTE A path trace mismatch will not cause an alarm or status condition A mismatch could be caused by missing cross connections 14 If required to correct any discrepancies use the CONFIGURATION Set Path Trace command Reference DLP 531 15 Repeat Steps 12 thr...

Page 1459: ... the CONFIGURATION Retrieve Path Trace command NOT APPLICABLE means that the addressed slot is not provisioned for DS3 operation UNAVAILABLE means that an incoming signal failure a hardware failure or a missing cross connection is preventing the observation of the actual receive path trace If YES then continue with Step 25 If NO then continue with Step 22 22 Make a note of the value in the Status ...

Page 1460: ...n continue with Step 29 27 At the source of the DS3 path provision the correct provisioned transmit path trace using the CONFIGURATION Set Path Trace command or be sure cross connections are correct in the network Reference DLP 531 28 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 29 What software release is running at the source of the DS3 path If Release 4 0 or earlier then continue with Step 30 If Rele...

Page 1461: ...eset a low speed protection switch of the DS3 circuit pack that terminates the DS3 path 35 Is the path trace mismatch still observed at the original network element If YES then continue with Step 36 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 36 Consult the appropriate maintenance support organization for further technical assistance 37 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1462: ...DLP 532 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 6 of 6 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1463: ...notch over the bottom shelf cross support channel 4 Carefully bend the apparatus blank so that it is slightly bowed towards you in the middle insert its top protrusion into the top of the circuit pack slot and snap its spring clip notch over the top shelf cross support channel 5 Push the center of the apparatus blank inwards to fully seat it and to eliminate any residual bowing 6 STOP YOU HAVE COM...

Page 1464: ...e 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 12 Use a flat bladed screwdriver against the bottom shelf cross support channel to pry the apparatus blank bottom edge upward and forward 13 Lift the apparatus blank from the slot 14 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1465: ...ports in the NMON state as indicated by the letter n If YES then continue with Step 3 If NO then continue with Step 5 3 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Set State T3 for DS3 ports or CONFIGURATION Set State EC1 for EC1 ports or CONFIGURATION Set State OC3 or CONFIGURATION Set State OC12 with a Primary State of AUTO for the ports identified in Step 2 4 You can use the FAULT Retrieve State command ag...

Page 1466: ...DLP 534 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1467: ...inc from OC 48 sync ref fail Step 2 inc from STSX line RFI yellow Step 12 incoming from DSX DS3 LOS Step 12 incoming from DSX DS3 SD Step 12 incoming from OC 3 STS LOP Step 16 incoming from OC 12 STS LOP Step 16 incoming from OC 48 DS3 AIS Step 12 incoming from OC 48 DS3 LOF Step 10 incoming from OC 48 path AIS Step 14 incoming from OC 48 STS LOP Step 10 incoming from STSX EC1 LOF Step 12 incoming...

Page 1468: ...p 6 incoming OC 12 line RFI yellow Step 6 incoming OC 48 line RFI yellow Step 6 incoming OC 3 LOF Step 6 incoming OC 12 LOF Step 6 incoming OC 48 LOF Step 6 incoming OC 3 LOS Step 6 incoming OC 12 LOS Step 6 incoming OC 48 LOS Step 6 incoming OC 48 LOS LOF Step 6 incoming OC 3 SD Step 6 incoming OC 12 SD Step 6 incoming OC 48 SD Step 6 incoming OC 3 SF Step 6 incoming OC 12 SF Step 6 incoming OC 4...

Page 1469: ...OCEDURE 4 From office records determine the location of the synchronization reference source and send a Trouble Report to the personnel responsible for maintaining that site NOTE The source of the incoming signal condition is the external synchronization reference source 5 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1470: ...r the SDH network and send a Trouble Report to the personnel responsible for maintaining that site NOTE The source of the incoming signal condition is the location where the DS3 signal enters the Synchronous Digital Hierarchical SDH network This is either a DS3 circuit pack CP in an FT 2000 network element NE or a non FT 2000 NE external to the FT 2000 network NOTE Another possible cause of the in...

Page 1471: ...6 From office records determine the location where the OC 3 signal enters the SDH network and send a Trouble Report to the personnel responsible for maintaining that site NOTE The source of the incoming signal condition is the location where the OC 3 signal enters the SDH network For an OC 3 signal this is either an OC 3 CP in an FT 2000 NE or non FT 2000 external equipment to the FT 2000 network ...

Page 1472: ...DLP 535 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 6 of 6 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1473: ...ng STS 3 cross connections for the same slot NOTE A DS3 LAA2 or STS1E LAA4 circuit pack has three ports For STS 3 cross connections all three ports associated with the slot will be affected by a slot to tributary or a tributary to slot cross connection This is also true for an OC3 LAA10B circuit pack which has three STS1s An OC12 T939A circuit pack has 12 ports which are arranged as four groups of...

Page 1474: ...n multiple failure conditions NOTE To edit a cross connection simply means to change the Source Node TID and or Destination Node TID associated with an existing cross connection This is done by re entering the same cross connection right on top of the existing one but with the new TID s The source node TID is the TID of the node where the signal is added whereas the destination node TID is the TID...

Page 1475: ...ce node TID and or destination node TID can result in a service outage under certain multiple failure conditions NOTE Assistance in selecting the appropriate parameters for the CONFIGURATION Enter Crossconnection STS3 or STS1 command is provided by the F1 help key function NOTE If a tributary to slot drop cross connection is made for a DS3 circuit pack a DS3 path unequipped condition may exist unt...

Page 1476: ...t the source and destination node TID provisioning has been done correctly Wait 2 minutes and verify that a site provisioning conflict IS NOT reported at either of the two end NEs or any of the intermediate NE s It will be necessary to individually check each NE that is involved in the crossconnection At the CIT use the FAULT Retrieve Alarms command NOTE Every possible combination of DRI manual sw...

Page 1477: ... ring network Reference DLP 524 19 Repeat Steps 3 through 22 for the appropriate cross connections Do not for get that the remote node has now become the local node 20 Discontinue the remote login Reference DLP 524 21 Repeat Steps 18 through 20 for each of the remaining network elements in the ring network that requires cross connections per the instructions 22 All cross connections have been made...

Page 1478: ... 1E 3 Node B Slot 3A 2 way Slot 3A 1W 3 Node F Cross Connection Type Source Source Slot Destination Line Destination Tributary Destination Node TID 2 way Tributary 1E 3 Node B Tributary Node F Cross Connection Type Source Source Line Source Tributary Source Node TID Destination Destination Slot Cross Connection Type Source Source Line Source Tributary Source Node TID Destination Destination Node T...

Page 1479: ...365 575 102 Detailed Level Procedure DLP 536 Issue 8 0 July 2002 Page 7 of 8 Example 2 Cross Connections DRI Ring Node A BOSTON Dri cross conn ...

Page 1480: ...2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 5 1 2 3 6 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 8 1 2 3 9 1 2 3 10 1 2 3 11 1 2 3 12 1 2 3 13 1 2 3 14 1 2 3 15 1 2 3 16 1 2 3 W E 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 5 1 2 3 6 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 8 1 2 3 9 1 2 3 10 1 2 3 11 1 2 3 12 1 2 3 13 1 2 3 14 1 2 3 15 1 2 3 16 1 2 3 W E 1 2 ...

Page 1481: ...ade to the wrong points can cause service interruptions CAUTION STS 3 or STS 1 for Release 7 and higher cross connections are covered in DLP 536 Refer to DLP 536 to add drop edit STS 3 or STS 1 cross connections 1 Obtain the instructions work order that contain the STS 1 cross connect information NOTE This procedure requires that a LNCTL circuit pack be installed and operating not removed or faile...

Page 1482: ...t CONFIGURATION Set T3 and enter to provision the VMR mode parameter for DS3s being added dropped and through cabled 6 At the low speed electrical cross connect panel DSX 3 and or STSX 1 and using the appropriate cables plug in a cable for each STS 1 port DS3 or EC1 NOTE Use Figure 1 as a guide to understand the STS 1 cross connections using external loopback cables Port 1 must correspond to port ...

Page 1483: ... Step 10 see Figure 1 12 Do you have instructions pertaining to STS 1 cross connections at other network elements If YES then continue with Step 13 If NO then continue with Step 17 13 Establish a remote login to one of the other network elements in the FT 2000 ring network Reference DLP 524 14 Repeat Steps 3 through 11 for the appropriate STS 1 cross connections Assistance will be required at the ...

Page 1484: ...8 0 July 2002 Figure 1 Example of STS 1 Cross Connections Using External Cables 1 2 3 2B 1 2 3 4A STS 1 Granularity Shows 2 Way Time Slot Assignments External Cables 1 W 1 E tpa 832887 01 DSX 3 and or STSX 1 Cross Connect Panel FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal ...

Page 1485: ...The OC3 slot must be cross connected to a tributary for a valid loopback 2 If required connect and condition the craft interface terminal CIT Reference DLP 501 3 At the CIT select FAULT Operate Loopback OC3 for the first specified slot s and the direction either From OC48 or From OC3 NOTE A loopback will remain in effect until deactivated by the Release Loopback OC3 command 4 Repeat Step 3 for any...

Page 1486: ...DLP 538 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1487: ...the demultiplex direction towards the lightguide cross connect panel Simultaneous loopbacks in both directions were not possible 2 If required connect and condition the craft interface terminal CIT Reference DLP 501 3 At the CIT select FAULT Release Loopback OC3 for the first specified slot and the direction either From OC48 or From OC3 4 Repeat Step 3 for any remaining slot s 5 The slot s is rele...

Page 1488: ...DLP 539 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1489: ... Step 4 If NO then STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 4 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Set OC3 command and provision the Alarm Level to NO to prevent the reporting or alarming of any future condition 5 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve OC3 command and verify the Alarm Level is provisioned correctly Supplemental Information If an incoming OC3 LOS condition exists prior to setting the Al...

Page 1490: ...DLP 540 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1491: ...th improper optical instruments Avoid direct exposure to beam CAUTION Use a static ground wrist strap whenever handling circuit packs or working on an FT 2000 add drop rings terminal to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to sensitive components See Electrostatic Discharge ESD Considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 Referring to Figure 1 and Figure 2 which figure most closely represents your...

Page 1492: ...ode S 8 At the FT 2000 primary node P reset the manual DRI switch for each path being tested Use the FAULT Switch Path STS3 Reset command for the appropriate line s and tributary s 9 Verify that there are no alarm or status conditions in the ring 10 This completes testing path integrity 11 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE 12 Verify that there are no alarm or status conditions in the ring Fig...

Page 1493: ...ach path being tested 22 At the FT 2000 primary node P reset the manual DRI switch for each path being tested Use the FAULT Switch Path STS3 Reset command for the appropriate line s and tributary s 23 Verify that there are no alarm or status conditions in the ring 24 This completes testing path integrity Figure 2 Figure 1 Testing Local FT 2000 Ring Three Nodes Figure 2 Testing Local FT 2000 Ring F...

Page 1494: ... 4 Issue 8 0 July 2002 Figure 3 End to End Test Arrangement for Slot 5B Figure 4 Loopback Test Arrangement for Slot 5B T R In Out 5B 1 FT 2000 In Out 5B 1 FT 2000 Test set STS 1 T R Test set STS 1 T R Test set In Out 5B 1 FT 2000 In Out 5B 1 FT 2000 STS 1 ...

Page 1495: ...d the orientation network user NOTE If you are using Release 6 0 or later software a DCC assignment should not be made to an LS INTFC slot that does not already contain a good OC3 circuit pack 3 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve Equipment command to verify the slot contains an OC3 OC 12 circuit pack NOTE The orientation of the OC 3 OC 12 circuit pack is provisioned network at one end and us...

Page 1496: ...RE Change DCC Assignment Orientation 11 Determine from office records the required orientation network user of the existing DCC assignment NOTE The orientation of the OC 3 OC 12 circuit pack is provisioned network at one end and user at the other end Both ends of the OC 3 OC 12 line cannot be the same and it makes no difference which end is network NOTE If you are establishing DCC connectivity for...

Page 1497: ...f required condition the craft interface terminal CIT and connect it to the local FT 2000 network element Reference DLP 501 3 From office records or work instructions determine the path s to be monitored 4 Establish a login to the network element if required for the first path to be verified To establish a remote login refer to DLP 524 NOTE A tag or path trace may be verified at one or at all of t...

Page 1498: ...an provision the PrvRx field using the CONFIGURATION Set Path Trace command to match what was provisioned at its source If the PrvRx field matches the ActRx field then the report shows the path trace status as good at the DS3 circuit pack 8 Verify the expected or embedded path trace byte or tag of the SONET signal for this path NOTE The STS1E and the OC3 circuit packs do not create new signals the...

Page 1499: ...string up to 20 characters 4 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Set Network Element command and enter or change the TID string but DO NOT press the ENTER key at this time NOTE Changing the value of the local TID will result in all incoming remote TL1 sessions being disconnected This means the local network element will terminate all login sessions that were requested from a TL1 gateway network elemen...

Page 1500: ...DLP 544 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1501: ...ic discharge damage to sensitive components See Electrostatic Discharge ESD Considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 1 The filter is accessable from the front of the bay without opening any doors or removing any covers It is located approximately 5 inches up from the floor There are two plastic loops one on the right side and one on the left side available to pull the filter out of the bay 2 Pla...

Page 1502: ...DLP 545 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1503: ...onents See Electrostatic Discharge ESD Considerations in Trouble Clearing TAD 100 CAUTION Due to the amount of heat generated within the D Bay it is necessary to minimize the time interval wherein air is not being circulated 1 Unpack the new fan unit and place near the D Bay for easy and quick access 2 At the D Bay locate and disconnect the fan unit alarm leads This is the squeeze type connector o...

Page 1504: ...is not lit NOTE Once the new fan unit is installed the Red alarm LED should not be lit Generally this alone will be sufficient indication that the problem has been corrected However if this is an unstaffed site it is recommended that a check be made via the CIT to determine for certain that the remote alarm has been cleared 11 If you wish to verify that the remote alarm has been cleared at the CIT...

Page 1505: ...ision the Alarm Level to NO to prevent the reporting or alarming of any future condition 5 At the CIT select CONFIGURATION Retrieve OC12 command and verify the Alarm Level is provisioned correctly Supplemental Information If an incoming OC12 LOS condition ex ists prior to setting the Alarm Level to NO this condition will not disap pear after the Alarm Level is set to NO Only subsequent conditions ...

Page 1506: ...DLP 547 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1507: ...ctions were not possible 1 Obtain the operation instructions to release the looped back OC12 slot s and note the assigned address 2 If required connect and condition the craft interface terminal CIT Reference DLP 501 3 At the CIT select FAULT Release Loopback OC12 for the first specified slot and the direction either From OC48 or From OC12 4 Repeat Step 3 for any remaining slot s 5 The slot s is r...

Page 1508: ...DLP 548 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1509: ...The OC12 slot must be cross connected to a tributary for a valid loopback 2 If required connect and condition the craft interface terminal CIT Reference DLP 501 3 At the CIT select FAULT Operate Loopback OC12 for the first specified slot s and the direction either From OC48 or From OC12 NOTE A loopback will remain in effect until deactivated by the Release Loopback OC12 command 4 Repeat Step 3 for...

Page 1510: ...DLP 549 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 2 of 2 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1511: ...tribution and Fuse Panel or User Panel to replace the fuse to the affected shelf and feeder and the alarm does not clear in approximately five minutes You can use this procedure to replace power line filters on FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System A Bays D Bays E Bays and R Bays These filters include Power line filter assembly For each feeder there is one circuitry unit with two separate capacitors Figu...

Page 1512: ...ectors shown above NOTE A Bays E Bays and R Bays almost always have power line filter assemblies Figure 1 and D Bays almost always have power line filter modules Figure 2 Equipment required Correct replacement power line filter for the affected shelf Static ground wrist strap Phillips head or flat blade screw driver depending on the type of screws on the User Panel Pliers or other appropriate tool...

Page 1513: ...n 1 Replace the Capacitors of a Power Filter Assembly on page 4 If it is a D Bay then go to Option 3 Replace a Power Line Filter Mod ule on page 12 Figure 3 Example of Fuse Panel with Bay Type Label NOTE The Fuse Panels of other bay types look very similar except for the wording on the bay type label FUSE LIFT UP 10A 60V 48A FUSE LIFT UP 10A 60V BOTTOM SHELF FAN FUSE LIFT UP 10A 60V 48A FUSE LIFT ...

Page 1514: ...OTE In the alarm message ls indicates low speed shelf and hs indicates high speed shelf For example if the alarm is hs fuse power failure A then the filter assembly for the A feeder for the high speed shelf needs to be replaced 2 Remove the fuse for the affected shelf and feeder Reference DLP 515 Replace Fuse in Power Distribution and Fuse Panel or User Panel steps 2 through 4 3 Locate the Interco...

Page 1515: ...gure 7 CAUTION DO NOT ALLOW the screws to fall into the bay Remove the four corner screws from the User Panel 8 Set the User Panel aside being careful not to short out any of the electrical connections on the back of the panel USE CIT CIT DCE W LINE LOCTR NE ACTY FE ACTY MN ABN ACO LOCTR ESD WRIST STRAP GROUND PWR ON MJ E CR nc ft2000 028 ESD WRIST STRAP GROUND PWR ON LINE NO 1W LINE NO 1E LINE NO...

Page 1516: ... the 48 and 48 RTN capacitors are defective Therefore it is recommended to replace one at a time Steps 12 25 If replacing the first one doesn t clear the alarm then remove the fuse and repeat Steps 12 25 for the other capacitor 12 Remove the leads to the affected feeder capacitors CIT DCE PWR 48A RTN 8B 16B 48A 48B 48B RTN DISPLAY 3 3 2 1 2 1 3 3 2 1 2 1 J142A J137A 8A 16A 7B 15B J140A J135A P163A...

Page 1517: ... tie in order to give yourself enough slack CAUTION To remove a lead grip it by the neck of the lead s short plastic sleeve and not by the lead itself 17 Remove the remaining leads from the capacitors You may want to grip the sleeves with pliers 18 Attach the leads to the new capacitors if possible If not attach them after mounting the capacitors to the backplane 19 Place the capacitors back into ...

Page 1518: ...the fuse Reference DLP 515 Replace Fuse in Power Distribution and Fuse Panel or User Panel Steps 6 and 7 25 Did the alarm clear in approximately five minutes If NO go to Option 2 Replace the Circuitry Unit of a Power Line Filter Assembly on page 9 If YES STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1519: ... assembly for the A feeder for the high speed shelf needs to be replaced 2 Remove the fuse for the affected shelf and feeder Reference DLP 515 Replace Fuse in Power Distribution and Fuse Panel or User Panel steps 2 through 4 3 CAUTION DO NOT replace the power line filters for Feeder A and Feeder B at the same time or the shelf will lose service Use the color coding of the power leads to locate the...

Page 1520: ...the two holes in the circuit board Insert the circuitry unit back into place and guide the two holes onto the two standoffs 11 Screw the unit in place If the screw has tilted you may have to extract the unit and screw the cover onto the circuit board again 12 Plug each lead back into the new circuitry unit Note that the E10 E9 pair is bundled with the thin black lead that goes to P2 Plug the thin ...

Page 1521: ...dled with the thin black lead that goes to P2 Figure 5 Power Connections for Power Line Filter Assembly Red Lead to E6 Black Lead to E9 Black Lead to E7 Set Screw Blue and White Lead to P1 Black Lead To P2 Red Lead to E10 nc ft2000 021 Feeder A Connections Grey Lead to E6 Grey With Black Stripe Lead to E9 Grey With Black Stripe Lead to E7 Set Screw Blue And White Lead to P1 Black Lead To P2 Grey L...

Page 1522: ...the alarm message ls indicates low speed shelf and hs indicates high speed shelf For example if the alarm is hs fuse power failure A then the filter assembly for the A feeder for the high speed shelf needs to be replaced 2 Remove the fuse for the affected shelf and feeder Reference DLP 515 Replace Fuse in Power Distribution and Fuse Panel or User Panel steps 2 through 4 3 Locate the Interconnectio...

Page 1523: ...User Panel aside being careful not to short out any of the electrical connections on the back of the panel 9 CAUTION To avoid service interruption it is essential to identify which module is defective Use the color coding of the power leads to locate the defective power line filter module for the shelf and feeder Reference Figure 6 on page 15 10 USE CIT CIT DCE W LINE LOCTR NE ACTY FE ACTY MN ABN ...

Page 1524: ... filter assembly and slide it out 13 Orient and plug in the new power line filter module 14 Tighten the large set screw that is to the right of the modular unit while holding the filter in place 15 Plug each lead back into the appropriate connector Reference Figure 6 on page 15 16 CAUTION DO NOT ALLOW the screws to fall into the bay Put the User Panel back on and screw in the User Panel screws 17 ...

Page 1525: ...16 Figure 6 Power Connections for Power Line Filter Module Set Screw Thick Black Lead to 48vr nc ft2000 023 Feeder A Connections Thin Black Lead to Fl Red Lead to 48v Set Screw Grey With Black Stripe 48vr nc ft2000 024 Feeder B Connections Thin Black Lead to Fl Grey Lead to 48v ...

Page 1526: ...DLP 550 Detailed Level Procedure 365 575 102 Page 16 of 16 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1527: ...ure is written at a high level See the specific product documentation if you need more details for any step NOTE The personnel performing this procedure should have knowledge of the specific product being powered down and or powered up and should have access to specific product documentation so that they can determine whether the NE is behaving properly and address any problems that may occur NOTE...

Page 1528: ...ve components 1 Reroute traffic around the NE 2 Power down each shelf in one of the following ways Shut off both A and B circuit breakers by inserting an object such as a thin flathead screwdriver into the slot on the off side of each circuit breaker Remove both A and B fuses by lifting the cover then pressing in and down then releasing to allow the fuse to spring outward 3 Shut off power at the B...

Page 1529: ... fuse A and press inward and upward NOTE If the green power on the LED is not lit check for a reversal on the power feeder and verify that there is voltage at the connector B Turn off circuit breaker A or remove fuse A C Turn on circuit breaker B or insert fuse B and press inward and upward NOTE If the green power on the LED is not lit check for a reversal on the power feeder and verify that there...

Page 1530: ...e appropriate document will be an Alarm Message and Trouble Clearing Guide or a User Service Manual 10 If this NE allows cross connection verify that the cross connections are correct Refer to the appropriate product documentation usually a User Operations Guide or a User Service Manual 11 Reroute traffic back onto this NE 12 STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE ...

Page 1531: ...n Overhead A 6 Line Overhead A 7 Path Overhead A 8 STS 1 Path Overhead A 8 VT Path Overhead A 9 SONET Multiplexing Procedure A 10 SONET Demultiplexing Procedure A 12 SONET Digital Multiplexing Schemes A 14 Asynchronous Multiplexing A 14 Synchronous Multiplexing A 15 Virtual Tributary Signals A 15 Concatenated Mode A 16 SONET Interface A 17 SONET Payloads A 18 Higher Rate Transport A 19 Conclusion ...

Page 1532: ...A ii Issue 8 0 July 2002 Table of Contents ...

Page 1533: ...em standardization to T1X1 The proposal suggested a hierarchical family of signals whose rates would be integer multiples of a basic modular signal The proposal further suggested a synchronous multiplexing technique leading to the coining of the term Synchronous Optical NETwork SONET The International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee CCITT first showed interest in 1986 Conferences he...

Page 1534: ...Electrical parameters ANSI T1 102 1993 Draft Multiplexing schemes to map existing digital signals for example DS1 DS2 and DS3 into SONET payload signals ANSI T1 105 1991 Criteria for optical line automatic protection switch APS ANSI T1 105 1991 Overhead channels to support standard operation administration maintenance and provisioning OAM P functions ANSI T1 105 1991 Technical Overview 0 SONET Sig...

Page 1535: ...SECTION and LINE overhead bytes Collectively these 27 bytes are referred to as transport overhead The remainder of the frame columns 4 through 90 is reserved for payload signals for example DS1 DS3 and path overhead and is referred to as the STS 1 synchronous payload envelope STS 1 SPE The optical counterpart of the STS 1 is the optical carrier level 1 signal OC 1 which is the result of a direct o...

Page 1536: ...nt the transmission span between terminating equipment STS 1 cross connections that provides line performance monitoring If there are no intervening repeaters the line terminating equipment also functions as section terminating equipment STS 1 and VT Path and Path Terminating Equipment the transmission span for an end to end tributary DS1 or DS3 signal that provides functions including signal labe...

Page 1537: ...nals are demultiplexed VTN N 1 5 2 3 or 6 path overhead remains with the VTN until its asynchronous signal is extracted Figure A 3 SONET Frame Format Data Com D9 Data Com D6 H3 APS K2 D3 F3 Multiframe H4 User F2 Channel Signal Label C2 Data Com Path Status G1 J0 Data Com Orderwire E2 K3 Data Com Data Com D12 Data Com Pointer Orderwire User F1 Data Com N1 BIP 8 B3 Action STS 1 STS 1 ID D11 APS Fram...

Page 1538: ... section Section Bit Interleaved Parity BIP 8 B1 Provides SECTION performance monitoring and is calculated over all bits of the previous STS N frame Defined only for STS 1 1 of an STS N signal Section Order Wire E1 Provides a local order wire for voice communication channel between section terminating network elements such as repeaters Defined only for STS 1 1 of an STS N signal Section User Chann...

Page 1539: ...ing APS K1 K2 Two bytes used for APS signaling between line level entities In addition bits 6 7 and 8 of K2 are used for line alarm indication signal AIS and line far end receive failure FERF Defined only for STS 1 1 of an STS N signal Line Data Communications Channel D4 D12 Is a 576 kb s message based channel Synch Status S1 In STS 1 1 the S1 byte is for synchronization status messages and only b...

Page 1540: ...s byte is calculated over all bits of the previous STS 1 SPE before scrambling STS 1 Path Signal Labels C2 Indicates the construction of the STS 1 SPE A value of 00000000 indicates an unequipped STS 1 SPE Values for various payload mappings are defined in TR NWT 000253 Issue 2 STS 1 Path Status G1 Conveys the STS 1 path terminating status far end block errors FEBE and yellow alarm signal condition...

Page 1541: ...he VT path overhead are specified in the following list and are illustrated in Figure A 4 Bits 1 and 2 are used for error performance monitoring BIP 2 Bit 3 is a VT path far end block error FEBE indication that is sent back toward an originating VT PTE when errors are detected by the BIP 2 Bit 4 and Bit 8 are used for remote defect indication RDI Bits 5 through 7 provide a VT signal label Figure A...

Page 1542: ...ar channel input since no framing is needed Each VT1 5 carries a single DS1 payload Four VT1 5s are bundled into a VT group VT G Seven VT Gs are byte interleaved into an STS 1 frame The VT G to STS 1 multiplex is a simple byte interleaving process so individual VT signals are easily observable within the STS 1 Thus cross connections and add drop can be accomplished without the back to back multipl...

Page 1543: ...xer 1 2 3 4 1 VT1 5 to VTG Byte Interleaver DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 7 DS3 to STS 1 Multiplexer Maps 1 DS3 into STS 1 SPE Adds STS 1 Path OH Nine Time Slots Builds STS 1 Frame Multiplexer into STS 1 SPE Adds STS 1 Path OH Nine Time Slots Builds STS 1 Frame VTG to STS 1 Maps 7 VTGs DS3 to STS 1 Multiplexer Maps 1 DS3 into STS 1 SPE Adds STS 1 Path OH Nine Time Slots Builds STS 1 Frame STS 1 3 STS 1 to OC 3 ...

Page 1544: ... the VT pointer accurately locate the DS1 SPE Finally desynchronization of the DS1 SPE provides a standard DS1 signal to the asynchronous network Figure A 6 SONET Demultiplexing Procedure VTG to VT1 5 Disinterleaver VTG to DS1 Demultiplexer 3 Time Slots Process VT Path OH DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS3 1 Nine Time Slots Nine Time Slots 7 VTG VTG VTG to DS1 Demultiplexer STS 1 3 STS 1 1 STS 1 2 Maps STS 1 SPE...

Page 1545: ...A 7 the synchronous payload envelope can float within the frame using byte stuffing This is to permit compensation for small variations in frequency between the clocks of the two systems that may occur if the systems are independently timed plesiochronous timing The SPE can also drift across the 125 µs frame boundary SONET STS pointers are used to locate the SPE relative to the transport overhead ...

Page 1546: ...nous Payload Envelope in Interior of STS 1 Frame 9 Rows 9 Rows 3 Columns 87 Columns STS 1 SPE at any byte boundary SPE can start STS 1 Frame Format Start of STS 1 SPE info Pointer STS 1 POH 90 Columns Transport Overhead info Pointer s 125 STS 1 Synchronous Payload Envelope s 125 ...

Page 1547: ...gnals into a DS3 The DS3 rate is not a direct multiple of the DS1 or the DS2 rates due to the bit stuffing synchronization technique used in asynchronous multiplexing Identification of DS0s contained in any DS N signal except DS1 is complex and DS0s cannot be directly extracted Thus an asynchronous DS3 signal must be demultiplexed down to the DS1 level to access and cross connect DS0 and DS1 signa...

Page 1548: ...signals DS1 DS1C DS2 and E1 are byte interleaved into a digital signal called a virtual tributary VT The VT is a structure designed for the transport and switching of sub DS3 payloads Like the STS 1 signal the VT signal has a floating pointer that allows each VT SPE to move within the VT structure There are four sizes of virtual tributaries VT1 5 VT2 VT3 VT6 Higher rate payloads are transported as...

Page 1549: ...how that the STS 1s of the STS Nc signal are linked together is contained in the STS 1 payload pointer of all but the first STS 1 The line and section overhead is sent on the first STS 1 and the payload pointer for the first STS 1 is applied to all STS 1 signals in the concatenated signal Figure A 10 shows an example of an STS 3c SPE It consists of 3 x 87 columns and 9 rows of bytes The order of t...

Page 1550: ...ware and software that processes one or more layers of the SONET signal Figure A 11 SONET Interface Tributaries Digital Element Network SONET and maintenance functions Overhead channels defined for interoffice operations Synchronous Transport Signal STS 1 Family of standard rates at N X 51 84 Mb s Standard optical interconnect at SONET interface SONET Interface Tributaries Digital Element Network ...

Page 1551: ...gher are also important Other payloads may be defined for specific applications Table A 1 SONET Payloads Input Tributary Equivalent Channels Rate SONET Signal Rate DS1 24 DS0s 1 544 Mb s VT1 5 1 728 Mb s E1 CEPT 32 DS0s 2 048 Mb s VT2 2 304 Mb s DS1C 48 DS0s 3 152 Mb s VT3 3 456 Mb s DS2 96 DS0s 6 312 Mb s VT6 6 912 Mb s DS3 672 DS0s 44 736 Mb s STS 1 51 840 Mb s DS4NA 2016 DS0s 139 624 Mb s STS 3...

Page 1552: ... Conclusion 1 The intent of this section is to present a short overview of SONET More detailed expositions can be found in various literature An excellent description of SONET can be found in Reference 3 Table A 2 SONET Transport Rates OC Level Line Rate Mb s Capacity OC 1 51 84 28 DS1s or 1 DS3 OC 3 155 52 84 DS1s or 3 DS3s OC 9 466 56 252 DS1s or 9 DS3s OC 12 622 08 336 DS1s or 12 DS3s OC 18 933...

Page 1553: ...5 1991 American National Standard for Telecommunications Digital Hierarchy Optical Rates and Formats Specification 2 CCITT Recommendations G 707 G 708 G 709 3 R Ballert and Y C Ching SONET Now It s the Standard Optical Network IEEE Communications Magazine Vol 27 No 3 March 1989 8 15 4 ANSI T1 102 1993 Draft American National Standard for Telecommunications Digital Hierarchy Electrical Interface Sp...

Page 1554: ...363 206 200 A SONET Overview A 22 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Page 1555: ...Low Speed Interface Protection 1xM electrical low speed interface protection refers to a system with one protection electrical low speed interface circuit pack DS3 or STS1E and up to 16 service electrical low speed interface circuit packs DS3 or STS1E When a low speed protection switch occurs the electrical low speed signals are routed from the service low speed interface circuit pack to the prote...

Page 1556: ...me upstream equipment if the upstream alarm has not been suppressed Alarm A contact closure to the office alarm grid Alarm Group A group of network elements that share remote alarm information through an alarm gateway network element AGNE Also refer to AGNE The maximum size of an alarm group is 32 network elements AMI Alternate Mark Inversion A line code that employs a ternary signal to convey bin...

Page 1557: ...he CIT B B3ZS Bipolar 3 Zero Substitution A line coding method that replaces a string of three zeros with a sequence of symbols having some special characteristic B8ZS Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution A line coding method that replaces a string of eight zeros with a sequence of symbols having some special characteristic BCLAN Board Controller Local Area Network The internal local area network that prov...

Page 1558: ...ng If an incoming loss of signal is detected no DS3 AIS is inserted CEV Controlled Environment Vault CIT Craft Interface Terminal A personal computer that meets FT 2000 minimum requirements loaded with the FT 2000 CIT PC software or SNC 2000 CPro software Release 5 and later In Release 5 and later releases an ASCII based dumb terminal that meets FT 2000 minimum requirements can also be used as a c...

Page 1559: ...pport Organization Current Value The value currently assigned to a provisionable parameter CV Cting Violation A performance monitoring parameter The coding violations are monitored for the OC 48 line OC 3 line STS 48 section STS 3 section STS 1 path EC 1 line and DS3 path D DACS Digital Access and Cross Connect System DACS III 2000 One of Lucent Technologies SONET compatible Digital Access and Cro...

Page 1560: ...ier access fiber in the loop or private network applications DDM 2000 FiberReach is hosted by the DDM 2000 OC 3 or OC 12 Multiplexer or the SLC 2000 Access System with a single or dual homed ring or star topology DWDM Dense Wave Division Multiplexing Transmitting multiple OC 48 optical signals simultaneously over a single fiber The DWDM signal is interface compatible with the OLS product Demultipl...

Page 1561: ...ration of two ring networks that share two common nodes DRI allows a circuit with one termination in one ring and one termination in another ring to survive a loss of signal failure of the shared node that is currently carrying service for the circuit E EC EC n Electrical Carrier The basic logical building block signal with a rate of 51 840 Mb s for an EC 1 signal and a rate of n times 51 840 Mb s...

Page 1562: ...the same for all the inputs and outputs so that any output can be connected to any input The DSX 3 is an example of an equal level cross connect panel ES Errored Seconds A second in which one or more coding violations are detected Errored seconds are monitored for the OC 48 line OC 3 line STS 48 section STS 3 section STS 1 path EC 1 line and the DS3 path line ESD Electrostatic Discharge The discha...

Page 1563: ...e defect indicator RDI L signal FIT Failures in Time Circuit pack failure rates per 10ud hours as calculated using the method described in TR TSY 000332 Issue 3 Reliability Prediction Procedure for Electronic Equipment RPP Flash EPROM A new technology that combines the nonvolatility of EPROM with the in circuit reprogrammability of EEPROM electrically erasable PROM FLS Frame Loss Seconds Folded Ri...

Page 1564: ...dditional cables may be required Headend Refers to the transmitting end where a signal originates Holdover An operating condition of a network element in which its local oscillator is not locked to any synchronization reference but is using storage techniques to maintain its accuracy with respect to the last known frequency comparison with a synchronization reference I IMTV Interactive Multimedia ...

Page 1565: ... terminology line refers to a transmission medium together with the associated high speed equipment required to provide the means of transporting information between two consecutive Network Elements one of which originates the line signal and the other terminates the line signal LNCTL The FT 2000 OC 48 Lightwave System Line Controller circuit pack performs line specific computations LOF Loss of Fr...

Page 1566: ...alth NE Network Element Refers to an FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay or FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal in a network NE ACTY Near End Activity An LED on the user panel that is lighted when an alarm or status condition exists at the local FT 2000 OC 48 Repeater Bay or FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal NEBS Network Equipment Building System NID Node Identifier A unique number from 0 to 15 used ...

Page 1567: ...line circuit pack etc When a protection switch occurs the standby line circuit pack etc is selected causing the old standby line circuit pack etc to become the new active line circuit pack etc The original active line circuit pack etc becomes the standby line circuit pack etc This status remains in effect when the fault clears Therefore this protection scheme is nonrevertive in that there is no sw...

Page 1568: ...alone optical multiplexing up to 20 Gb s per fiber system The OLS has its own telemetry fault location and performance monitoring capability Operations Interface Any interface that provides information on the system behavior or control These include the equipment LEDs user panel CIT office alarms and all telemetry interfaces Operations Interworking The capability to access operate provision and ad...

Page 1569: ...epetitively to verify the continuity of the STS 1 path The DS3 circuit pack is the only low speed interface circuit pack that generates or terminates the STS 1 path overhead Path Unequipped Signal The path unequipped signal is provided in the STS 1 path signal label byte C2 of the path overhead The path unequipped signal is transmitted to notify downstream equipment that the STS 1 path is incomple...

Page 1570: ...le Traffic Also called Extra Traffic Traffic which has a lower priority than that carried on the service fiber Low priority unprotected traffic that is carried on a protection fiber and is subject to being dropped if the service fiber should fail and a protection switch occurs Preprovisioning The capability to provision a slot before installing a circuit pack Primary Node The primary node is the i...

Page 1571: ... environment which replaces the path yellow signal If the RDI P signal is integrated for a specified period of time it becomes a remote failure indication RFI signal a defect becomes a failure Also refer to RFI RDS Ring Diversity Switch Reactive Maintenance Refers to detecting defects failures and clearing them Revertive Switching In revertive switching there is a service and protection high speed...

Page 1572: ...monitored for the STS 48 section STS 3 section and EC 1 section SES Severely Errored Seconds A second in which the coding violations detected reach a fixed threshold The severely errored seconds are monitored for the OC 48 line OC 3 line STS 48 section STS 3 section STS 1 path EC 1 line and DS3 path SF Signal Fail Refers to a condition when an incoming signal s bit error rate exceeds a fixed value...

Page 1573: ...ither end as the payload carrying signal Also refer to Active Status Status is a condition that does not raise an alarm STS STS n Synchronous Transport Signal The basic logical building block signal with a rate of 51 840 Mb s for an STS 1 signal and a rate of n times 51 840 Mb s for an STS n signal STS 1 This refers to the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal internal electrical signal with an EC...

Page 1574: ...e Oriented Serial Protocol Defines one physical interface for direct connection between the telemetry remote and the monitored equipment An EIA 422 port is used to provide the operations system with enough alarm and status information to localize a problem and determine the severity TBP Transmit Byte Processor A device on the OC48 TRMTR and OC48 REGENR circuit packs TCA Threshold Crossing Alert A ...

Page 1575: ...forty eight 51 84 Mb s tributaries or sixteen 155 Mb s tributaries TSA Time Slot Assignment This is a capability of the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings Terminal that allows any service STS 3 tributary to be cross connected to any service low speed interface slot or to the same numbered service STS 3 tributary in the opposite direction In Release 7 and later releases the FT 2000 OC 48 Add Drop Rings T...

Page 1576: ...hing of sub STS 1 payloads There are currently four sizes VT1 5 1 728 Mb s VT2 2 304 Mb s VT3 3 456 Mb s and VT6 6 912 Mb s VT G Virtual Tributary Group A 9 row by 12 column structure 108 bytes that carries one or more VTs of the same size Seven VT groups 756 bytes are byte interleaved with the VT organized synchronous payload envelope W Wander The wander of a digital signal is defined as the long...

Page 1577: ...Glossary Issue 8 0 July 2002 GL 23 ...

Page 1578: ...Glossary GL 24 Issue 8 0 July 2002 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for FT-2000 OC-48

Brand: D-Link Pages: 13

Wireless Router

Brand: Watchguard Pages: 11

Brand: D-Link Pages: 32

Brand: D-Link Pages: 28

Brand: D-Link Pages: 48

Brand: D-Link Pages: 83

Brand: D-Link Pages: 155

Brand: Teagle Pages: 40

Brand: Idis Pages: 86

Brand: Paradyne Pages: 20

Brand: Paradyne Pages: 2

Armor 101 Series

Brand: Lochinvar Pages: 28

Armor 101 Series

Brand: Lochinvar Pages: 44

Brand: Baldor Pages: 34

Brand: BSD Networks Pages: 7

IPAM-1600s Series

Brand: C-Com Pages: 148

JetNet 3508-LVDC

Brand: Korenix Pages: 16

Brand: Cypress Semiconductor Pages: 33

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands